In this user manual we have tried to describe the matters

concerning the operation of GSK980TDi CNC system to the greatest

extent. However, it is impossible to give particular descriptions for all

unnecessary or unallowable operations due to length limitation and

products application conditions；Therefore, the items not presented

herein should be regarded as “impossible” or “unallowable”.

Copyright is reserved to GSK CNC Equipment Co., Ltd. It is

illegal for any organization or individual to publish or reprint this manual.

GSK CNC Equipment Co., Ltd. reserves the right to ascertain their

legal liability.
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

PREFACE

Your Excellency：

We are honored by your purchase of GSK980TDi turning machine

CNC system manufactured by GSK CNC Equipment Co., Ltd.！

The user manual introduces the programming, the operation, the

installation and the connection of GSK980TTC turning machine CNC

system in details.

To ensure safe and effective running, please read this manual

carefully before installation and operation.

WARNING

Accident may occur by improper connection and operation！This

system can only be operated by authorized and qualified personnel.

Special caution:

The power supply fixed on/in the cabinet is exclusively used for the

CNC system made by GSK.

It can't be applied to other purposes, or else it may cause serious

danger!

II
 Cautions

CAUTIONS

■ Delivery and storage

● Packing box over 6 layers in pile is unallowed.
● Never climb the packing box, stand on it or place heavy objects on it.
● Do not move or drag the products by the cables connected to it.
● Forbid collision or scratch to the panel and display screen.
● Avoid dampness, insolation and drenching.

■ Open-package inspection
● Confirm that the products are the required ones.
● Check whether the products are damaged in transit.
● Confirm that the parts in packing box are in accordance with the packing list.
● Contact us in time if any inconsistence, shortage or damage is found.

■ Connection
● Only qualified personnel can connect the system or check the connection.
● The system must be earthed, and the earth resistance must be less than 0.1Ω.
The earth wire cannot be replaced by zero wire.
● The connection must be correct and firm to avoid any fault or unexpected
consequence.
● Connect with surge diode in the specified direction to avoid damage to the
system.
● Switch off power supply before plugging out or opening electric cabinet.

■ Troubleshooting
● Switch off power supply before troubleshooting or changing components.
● Check the fault when short circuit or overload occurs. Restart can only be done
after troubleshooting.
● Frequent switching on/off of the power is forbidden, and the interval time should
be at least 1 min.

III
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

Announcement
 This manual describes various possibilities as much as possible. However,
operations allowable or unallowable cannot be explained one by one due to so
many possibilities that may involve with, so the contents that are not specially
stated in this manual shall be considered as unallowable.

Warning！
 Before installing, connecting, programming and operating, please carefully read
the product user manual and the manual from the machine tool manufacturer and
strictly operate accordance with the regulations in the manual; otherwise, the
product or the machine tool may be damaged, the workpiece may get rejected,
even the personal injury may occur.

Caution！
 Functions, technical indexes (such as precision and speed) described in this user
manual are only for this system. Actual function deployment and technical
performance of the machine tool are designed by the machine tool manufacturer,
so function configuration and technical indexes are subject to the user manual
from the machine tool manufacturer.
 The system is with the standard machine operation panel, but the function of each
button on the machine panel is defined by the PLC program (ladder diagram).
Please pay attention to that the function of the buttons in the manual is described
based on the standard PLC programs!
 Refer to the user manual from the machine tool manufacturer for function and
meaning of each button on the machine panel.

IV
 Cautions

All specifications and designs herein are subject to change without notice.

Section Ⅰ Programming

Introduce the technical specification, the product

introduction, the command code and the program format.

Section Ⅱ Operation
Introduce the operation of CNC system of GSK980TDi
turning machine.

Section Ⅲ Installation and Connection

Introduce the installation, connection and setting
method of CNC system of GSK980TDi turning machine.

Appendix
Introduce the overall installation dimensions of CNC
system of GSK980TDi turning machine and those of its
accessories and the alarm information list, etc.

V
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

SAFETY RESPONSIBILITY

Manufacturer’s Responsibility
——Be responsible for the danger which should be eliminated and/or controlled on
design and configuration of the provided CNC systems and accessories.
——Be responsible for the safety of the provided CNC systems and accessories.
——Be responsible for the provided message and advice for the users.

User’s Responsibility
——Be responsible for being familiar with and mastering the safety operation
procedures through training with the safety operation of the CNC system.
——Be responsible for the dangers caused by adding, changing or altering the original
CNC systems and the accessories.
——Be responsible for the dangers caused by failing to observe the provisions in the
manual for operation, adjustment, maintenance, installation and storage.

This manual is kept by the end user.

Thank you for supporting us in the use of GSK’s products!

VI
 Contents

CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1 PROGRAMMING .........................................................................................................3
1.1 GSK980TDi Introduction..........................................................................................................3
1.1.1 Product Introduction ..........................................................................................................3
1.1.2 Technical Specification ......................................................................................................4
1.1.3 Environment & Conditions ................................................................................................7
1.1.4 Power Supply ....................................................................................................................7
1.1.5 Guard ................................................................................................................................7
1.2 CNC System of Machine Tools & CNC Machine Tools ............................................................7
1.3 Programming Fundamentals ...................................................................................................9
1.3.1 Coordinates Definition .......................................................................................................9
1.3.2 Machine Coordinate System, Machine Zero & Machine Reference Point.......................10
1.3.3 Workpiece Coordinate System & Program Zero .............................................................10
1.3.4 Interpolation Function ..................................................................................................... 11
1.3.5 Absolute Programming & Incremental Programming ......................................................12
1.3.6 Diameter Programming & Radius Programming .............................................................13
1.4 Structure of an NC Program ..................................................................................................13
1.4.1 General Structure of Program .........................................................................................14
1.4.2 Main Program & Subprogram .........................................................................................17
1.5 Program Run .........................................................................................................................18
1.5.1 Sequence of Program Run .............................................................................................18
1.5.2 Execution Sequence of Word..........................................................................................19
1.6 Basic Axis Incremental System..............................................................................................19
1.6.1 Incremental system speed of basic axis .........................................................................20
1.6.2 Incremental System Unit of Basic Axis ............................................................................20
1.6.3 Incremental System Data Range of Basic Axis ...............................................................20
1.6.4 Incremental System Data Range & Unit of Basic Axis ....................................................21
1.6.5 Program Address Value Unit & Range of Incremental System of Basic Axis ..................23
1.7 Additional Axis Incremental System.......................................................................................23
1.7.1 Additional Axis of Current Incremental System ...............................................................24
1.7.2 Additional Axis of IS-A Incremental System ....................................................................24
CHAPTER 2 MSTF COMMAND .....................................................................................................25
2.1 M (Miscellaneous Function) ...................................................................................................25
2.1.1 End of Program M02 ....................................................................................................25
2.1.2 End of Program run M30 ..............................................................................................25
2.1.3 Subprogram Call M98 ..................................................................................................26
2.1.4 Return From Subprogram M99.....................................................................................26
2.1.5 Macro Program Call M9000～M9999 ...........................................................................27
2.1.6 M commands Defined by Standard PLC Ladder Diagram ..............................................27
2.1.7 Program Stop M00 .......................................................................................................28
2.1.8 Program Optional Stop M01 ............................................................................................29
2.1.9 Spindle CW, CCW & Stop Control M03, M04, M05 .........................................................29
2.1.10 Cooling Control M08, M09 ..........................................................................................29
2.1.11 Tailstock Control M10, M11 .........................................................................................29
2.1.12 Chuck Control M12, M13 ............................................................................................29
2.1.13 Spindle Position/Speed Control Switch M14, M15 ........................................................30
2.1.14 Spindle Clamped/Released M20, M21 ..........................................................................30
2.1.15 The 2nd Spindle Position/Speed Switch M24, M25 ........................................................30
2.1.16 Lubricating Control M32, M33 .......................................................................................30
2.1.17 Spindle Automatic Gear Change M41, M42, M43, M44 ................................................30
2.1.18 Spindle 8-point Orientation M50～M58 .........................................................................31
2.1.19 The 2nd Spindle Rotation CCW/CW, Stop M63, M64, M65 ............................................31
2.2 Spindle Function ....................................................................................................................31
2.2.1 Spindle Speed Switching Value Control ..........................................................................31
2.2.2 Spindle Speed Analog Voltage Control ............................................................................32
2.2.3 Spindle Speed Series Control .........................................................................................32
VII
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

2.2.4 Constant Surface Speed Control G96, Constant Rotational Speed Control G97 ............ 33
2.2.5 Spindle Override ............................................................................................................. 35
2.2.6 Multiple Spindle Control Function ................................................................................... 35
2.2.7 Cs Contour Control Funciton .......................................................................................... 37
2.2.8 Spindle Positioning Function ........................................................................................... 37
2.3 Tool Function ......................................................................................................................... 37
2.3.1 Tool Control..................................................................................................................... 37
2.3.2 Tool Life Management .................................................................................................... 41
CHAPTER 3 G COMMANDS .......................................................................................................... 51
3.1 Commands ............................................................................................................................ 51
3.1.1 Modal, One-Shot & Initial Mode ...................................................................................... 53
3.1.2 Omitting Words ............................................................................................................... 53
3.1.3 Related Definitions.......................................................................................................... 55
3.2 Rapid Traverse Movement G00 .......................................................................................... 55
3.3 Linear Interpolation G01 ..................................................................................................... 56
3.4 Circular Interpolation G02, G03 .......................................................................................... 57
3.5 Three-point Circular Interpolation G05, G05.1 .................................................................... 60
3.6 Ellipse Interpolation G6.2, G6.3............................................................................................. 62
3.7 Parabola Interpolation G7.2, G7.3 ...................................................................................... 66
3.8 Plane Selection G17～G19 ................................................................................................... 70
3.9 Polar Coordinate Interpolation G12.1, G13.1 ........................................................................ 71
3.10 Cylindrical Interpolation G7.1 .............................................................................................. 74
3.11 Chamfering Function ........................................................................................................... 79
3.11.1 Linear Chamfering ........................................................................................................ 79
3.11.2 Circular Chamfering ...................................................................................................... 81
3.11.3 Special Cases ............................................................................................................... 83
3.12 Exact Stop Function Between Blocks .................................................................................. 84
3.13 Function of Directly Inputting Graphic Dimension................................................................ 86
3.14 Dwell G04 ......................................................................................................................... 89
3.15 Machine Zero Function ........................................................................................................ 90
3.15.1 Machine 1st Reference Point G28 ............................................................................... 90
3.15.2 Machine 2nd, 3rd, 4th Reference Point G30.................................................................. 91
3.16 Skip Interpolation G31 ...................................................................................................... 92
3.16.1 Following Block Execution After Skip ............................................................................ 93
3.16.2 Signals Relevant to G31 ............................................................................................... 94
3.16.3 Parameters Relevant to G31: Refer to Ⅲ INSTALLATION & CONNECTION, Section
3.2.15. ........................................................................................................................................ 94
3.17 Automatic Tool Offset G36, G37 ....................................................................................... 94
3.17.1 Signals Relevant to G36, G37 Automatic Tool Offset: ................................................... 94
3.17.2 Parameters Relevant to G36, G37: Refer to INSTALLATION, Section 3.2.16. ............. 95
3.17.3 G36, G37 Automatic Tool Offset Command Use ........................................................... 95
3.18 Workpiece Coordinate System G50 .................................................................................. 96
3.19 Local Coordinate System .................................................................................................... 97
3.20 Workpiece Coordinate System G54～G59 .......................................................................... 99
3.21 Fixed Cycle Command ...................................................................................................... 101
3.21.1 Axial Cutting Cycle G90 ........................................................................................... 101
3.21.2 Radial Cutting Cycle G94 ......................................................................................... 104
3.21.3 Caution of Fixed Cycle Commands ............................................................................ 106
3.22 Multiple Cycle Commands ................................................................................................. 106
3.22.1 Axial Roughing Cycle G71 .......................................................................................... 107
3.22.2 Radial Roughing Cycle G72........................................................................................ 114
3.22.3 Closed Cutting Cycle G73 ........................................................................................ 118
3.22.4 Finishing Cycle G70 .................................................................................................... 123
3.22.5 Axial Grooving Multiple Cycle G74 ........................................................................... 124
3.22.6 Radial Grooving Multiple Cycle G75 ........................................................................... 127
3.22.7 Drilling Cycle G83 or G87 ........................................................................................... 130
3.23 Thread Cutting Commands ............................................................................................... 133
3.23.1 Thread Cutting with Constant Lead G32 ..................................................................... 133

VIII
 Contents

3.23.2 Rigid Thread Cutting G32.1 ........................................................................................136

3.23.3 Arc Threading Cutting Code G32.2 or G32.3 ..............................................................138
3.23.4 Thread Cutting with Variable Lead G34 ....................................................................139
3.23.5 Z Thread Cutting G33 ...............................................................................................141
3.23.6 Rigid Tapping G84, G88 ..............................................................................................142
3.23.7 Thread Cutting Cycle G92 ..........................................................................................145
3.23.8 Rigid Thread Cutting Cycle G92.1 ..............................................................................148
3.23.9 Thread Reparation Function G92 P1 or G92.1 P1 ......................................................152
3.23.10 Multiple Thread Cutting Cycle G76 ...........................................................................154
3.23.11 Enhancement Thread Cutting Cycle G78 ..................................................................157
3.24 Constant Surface Speed Control G96, Constant Rotational Speed Control G97..........163
3.25 Feedrate per Minute G98, Feedrate per Rev G99 .............................................................163
3.26. Additional Axis Function ...................................................................................................165
3.26.1 Additional Axis Start ....................................................................................................165
3.26.2 Motion of Additional Axis .............................................................................................165
3.26.3 Additional Axis Coordinates Display............................................................................166
3.27 Macro Commands .............................................................................................................166
3.27.1 MACRO Variables .......................................................................................................166
3.27.2 Operation & Jump Command G65 ...........................................................................170
3.27.3 Program Example with Macro Command ...................................................................174
3.28 Statement Macro Command ..............................................................................................176
3.28.1 Arithmetic & Logic Operation ......................................................................................176
3.28.2 Transfer & Cycle .........................................................................................................177
3.29 Metric/Inch Switch .............................................................................................................179
3.30 Stored Stroke Limit 2 Detection G22 or G23......................................................................180
3.31 G Code Macro Program Call .............................................................................................181
3.32 Editable Parameter Read/Write G10 L52 ........................................................................182
CHAPTER 4 TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION (G41, G42) .............................................187
4.1 Application ...........................................................................................................................187
4.1.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................187
4.1.2 Imaginary Tool Nose Direction ......................................................................................187
4.1.3 Compensation Value Setting .........................................................................................191
4.1.4 Command Format .........................................................................................................192
4.1.5 Compensation Direction ................................................................................................192
4.1.6 Notes ............................................................................................................................194
4.1.7 Application ....................................................................................................................195
4.2 Tool Nose Radius Compensation Offset Path .....................................................................196
4.2.1 Inner & Outer Side ........................................................................................................196
4.2.2 Tool Traversing when Starting Tool ...............................................................................196
4.2.3 Tool Traversing in Offset Mode .....................................................................................198
4.2.4 Tool Traversing in Offset Canceling Mode ....................................................................202
4.2.5 Tool Interference Check ................................................................................................204
4.2.6 Commands for Canceling Compensation Vector Temporarily .......................................205
CHAPTER 1 OPERATION MODE AND DISPLAY INTERFACE ...................................................173
1.1 Panel Division ......................................................................................................................173
1.1.1 State Indication .............................................................................................................174
1.1.2 Edit Keypad...................................................................................................................174
1.1.3 Menu Display ................................................................................................................175
1.1.4 Machine Panel ..............................................................................................................176
1.2 Summary of Operation Mode ..............................................................................................179
1.3 Display Interface ..................................................................................................................180
1.3.1 POS Interface ...............................................................................................................180
1.3.2 PRG Interface ...............................................................................................................182
1.3.3 TOOL OFFSET Interface ..............................................................................................184
1.3.4 ALARM Interface...........................................................................................................186
1.3.5 Setting Interface ............................................................................................................187
1.3.6 Parameter Interfaces ....................................................................................................189
1.3.7 Diagnosis Interface .......................................................................................................191
1.3.8 Graph Interface .............................................................................................................192

IX
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

1.3.9 Ladder Interface............................................................................................................ 193

CHAPTER 2 POWER ON/OFF AND PROTECTION .................................................................... 196
2.1 System Power-on ................................................................................................................ 196
2.2 System Power-off ................................................................................................................ 196
2.3 Overtravel Protection........................................................................................................... 197
2.3.1 Hardware Overtravel Protection.................................................................................... 197
2.4 Emergency Operation ......................................................................................................... 198
2.4.1 Reset ............................................................................................................................ 198
2.4.2 ESP .............................................................................................................................. 199
2.4.3 Feed Hold ..................................................................................................................... 199
2.4.4 Power-Off...................................................................................................................... 199
CHAPTER 3 MANUAL OPERATION ............................................................................................ 201
3.1 Coordinate Axis Move ......................................................................................................... 201
3.1.1 Manual Feed ................................................................................................................. 201
3.1.2 Manual Rapid Traverse ................................................................................................. 202
3.1.3 Speed Regulation ......................................................................................................... 202
3.2 Other Manual Operations .................................................................................................... 203
3.2.1 Spindle CCW, CW, Stop Control ................................................................................... 203
3.2.2 Spindle JOG ................................................................................................................. 203
3.2.3 Cooling Control ............................................................................................................. 204
3.2.4 Lubricating Control ........................................................................................................ 204
3.2.5 Chuck Control ............................................................................................................... 204
3.2.6 Tailstock Control ........................................................................................................... 205
3.2.7 Hydraulic Control .......................................................................................................... 205
3.2.8 Manual Tool Change ..................................................................................................... 205
3.2.9 Spindle Override ........................................................................................................... 205
CHAPTER 4 MPG/STEP OPERATION ........................................................................................ 207
4.1 Step Feed ............................................................................................................................ 207
4.1.1 Increment Selection ...................................................................................................... 207
4.1.2 Moving Direction Selection ........................................................................................... 208
4.2 MPG Feed ........................................................................................................................... 208
4.2.1 Increment Selection ...................................................................................................... 209
4.2.2 Moving Axis & Direction Selection ................................................................................ 209
4.2.3 MPG Feedrate .............................................................................................................. 210
4.2.4 Other Operations .......................................................................................................... 210
4.2.5 Explanation Items ......................................................................................................... 211
CHAPTER 5 MDI OPERATION .................................................................................................... 213
5.1 Block Input .......................................................................................................................... 213
5.2 Block Execution ................................................................................................................... 214
5.3 Parameter Setting ............................................................................................................... 214
5.4 Data Alteration ..................................................................................................................... 214
5.5 Other Operations ................................................................................................................. 215
CHAPTER 6 PROGRAM EDIT & MANAGEMENT ....................................................................... 217
6.1 Program Creation ................................................................................................................ 217
6.1.1 Creating a Block Number .............................................................................................. 217
6.1.2 Inputting a Program ...................................................................................................... 217
6.1.3 Searching a Character .................................................................................................. 219
6.1.4 Inserting a Character .................................................................................................... 222
6.1.5 Deleting a Character ..................................................................................................... 223
6.1.6 Altering a Character ...................................................................................................... 223
6.1.7 Deleting a Single Block ................................................................................................. 224
6.1.8 Copying & Pasting a Block ........................................................................................... 225
6.1.9 Canceling & Recovering a Program .............................................................................. 225
6.1.10 Circle Command Aided Programming ......................................................................... 226
6.1.11 Program Save ............................................................................................................. 230
6.1.12 Macro Program Edit .................................................................................................... 230
6.1.13 Creating & Modifying a Program Annotation ............................................................... 231
6.2 Deleting Programs............................................................................................................... 232
6.2.1 Deleting a Program ....................................................................................................... 232

X
 Contents

6.2.2 Deleting All Programs ...................................................................................................234

6.3 Selecting a Program ............................................................................................................234
6.3.1 Searching ......................................................................................................................234
6.3.2 Scanning .......................................................................................................................235
6.3.3 Direct Confirmation .......................................................................................................236
6.4 Executing a Program ...........................................................................................................236
6.5 Renaming a Program ..........................................................................................................236
6.6 Copying a Program..............................................................................................................237
6.7 Program Management .........................................................................................................238
6.8 Counter Function .................................................................................................................239
6.9 Font Scaling ........................................................................................................................240
6.10 Program Preview Function ................................................................................................241
6.10.1 Interface Display of Path Preview ...............................................................................241
6.10.2 Operation of Path Preview ..........................................................................................241
6.10.3 Command Display of Path Preview.............................................................................243
6.10.4 Precautions .................................................................................................................245
6.11 Teaching function .................................................................................................................245
6.12 Other Operations Available in Edit Mode ...........................................................................246
CHAPTER 7 TOOL OFFSET AND SETTING ...............................................................................249
7.1 Tool Positioning Setting .......................................................................................................249
7.2 Trial Tool-setting ..................................................................................................................250
7.3 Tool-Setting by Machine Zero Return ..................................................................................251
7.4 Coordinates Record.............................................................................................................254
7.5 Setting & Altering an Offset Value........................................................................................255
7.5.1 Offset Setting ................................................................................................................255
7.5.2 Offset Alteration ............................................................................................................255
7.5.3 Offset Alteration in Communication Mode .....................................................................256
7.5.4 Offset Values Clearing ..................................................................................................256
7.5.5 Setting & Altering a Tool Wear ......................................................................................257
7.5.6 Locking & Unlocking an Offset Value ............................................................................257
7.5.7 No.0 Tool Offset Moving Workpiece Coordinate System...............................................257
7.6 High Efficiency Tool-Change ..............................................................................................258
7.6.1 Breif ..............................................................................................................................258
7.6.2 Tool-Change Safety Area Setting ..................................................................................259
7.6.3 Setting Clear in Tool-Change Safety Area .....................................................................261
7.6.4 High-Efficiency Too-Change Programming Format .......................................................261
7.6.5 High-Efficiency Tool-Change Procedure Explanation ....................................................262
7.6.6 Precaution of High-Efficiency Tool-Change ...................................................................262
CHAPTER 8 COORDINATE SYSTEM..........................................................................................265
8.1 Coordinate System Setting ..................................................................................................265
8.1.1 Directly Input .................................................................................................................265
8.1.2 Measure Input ...............................................................................................................266
8.1.3 Machine Tool Coordinate Record ..................................................................................266
8.2 Coordinate System Modification ..........................................................................................266
8.3 Coordinate System Clearing ................................................................................................267
CHAPTER 9 AUTO OPERATION .................................................................................................269
9.1 Automatic Run .....................................................................................................................269
9.1.1 Selection of a Program Running ...................................................................................269
9.1.2 Start of Automatic Run ..................................................................................................269
9.1.3 Stop of Automatic Run ..................................................................................................269
9.1.4 Automatic Run From an Arbitrary Block ........................................................................270
9.1.5 Adjustment of Feedrate & Rapid Rate ..........................................................................271
9.1.6 Spindle Speed Adjustment ............................................................................................271
9.2 Running State ......................................................................................................................271
9.2.1 Single Block Execution .................................................................................................271
9.2.2 Dry Run .........................................................................................................................272
9.2.3 Machine Lock ................................................................................................................272
9.2.4 MST Lock ......................................................................................................................273
9.2.5 Block Skip .....................................................................................................................273

XI
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

9.3 MPG Trial-Cut ..................................................................................................................... 273

9.3.1 Switching MPG Trial-cut Mode...................................................................................... 273
9.3.2 Command Speed in MPG Trial-Cut Mode ..................................................................... 274
9.3.3 Notes in MPG Trial-Cut Mode ....................................................................................... 274
9.3.4 Temporarily Invalid in MPG Trial-cut Mode ................................................................... 275
9.4 MPG Interrupted Function ................................................................................................... 275
9.4.1 MPG Interrupted Operation .......................................................................................... 275
9.4.2 Affection of Coordinate System from MPG Interruption ................................................ 276
9.4.3 MPG Interruption Value Cancel .................................................................................... 277
9.4.4 MPG Interruption Display Page .................................................................................... 278
9.4.5 Precaution of MPG Interruption .................................................................................... 279
9.5 Other Operations ................................................................................................................. 279
CHAPTER 10 ZERO RETURN OPERATION ............................................................................... 281
10.1 Program Zero Return ........................................................................................................ 281
10.1.1 Program Zero.............................................................................................................. 281
10.1.2 Program Zero Return Steps ........................................................................................ 281
10.2 Machine Zero Return......................................................................................................... 282
10.2.1 Machine Zero .............................................................................................................. 282
10.2.2 Machine Zero Return Steps ........................................................................................ 282
10.3 Other Operations in Zero Return ....................................................................................... 283
CHAPTER 11 DATA SETTING ...................................................................................................... 285
11.1 Data Setting ....................................................................................................................... 285
11.1.1 Switch Setting ............................................................................................................. 285
11.1.2 Level Setting ............................................................................................................... 286
11.1.3 Parameter Operation................................................................................................... 288
11.2 Clock Setting ..................................................................................................................... 289
11.3 Graphic Display ................................................................................................................. 289
11.4 Parameter Setting .............................................................................................................. 292
11.4.1 State Parameter .......................................................................................................... 293
11.4.2 Data Parameter, Pitch Compensation ......................................................................... 295
11.4.3 Classification Parameter ............................................................................................. 296
11.4.4 Often Used Parameters .............................................................................................. 297
11.5 Macro Variable Note .......................................................................................................... 298
11.5.1 Macro Variable Note Page .......................................................................................... 298
11.5.2 Note List ...................................................................................................................... 298
11.5.3 Macro Variable Note File ............................................................................................. 299
CHAPTER 12 U OPERATION FUNCTION ................................................................................... 301
12.1 File Management Function Introduction ............................................................................ 301
12.2 Often Used File Operation Function Introduction .............................................................. 301
12.2.1 File Extension & Return .............................................................................................. 301
12.2.2 File Selection & Cancellation of File Selection ............................................................ 302
12.2.3 File Copy .................................................................................................................... 303
12.3 Data Copy & Resume ........................................................................................................ 303
12.3.1 Entering Backup/Resume Page .................................................................................. 303
12.3.2 Backup/Resume Operation ......................................................................................... 304
12.3.3 Operation Path Selection ............................................................................................ 304
12.3.4 Format of Data Backup/Resume File .......................................................................... 305
12.3.5 Level Explanation of Data Backup/Resume Operation ............................................... 306
12.4 System Update .................................................................................................................. 306
12.5 Notes ................................................................................................................................. 307
CHAPTER 13 COMMUNICATION ................................................................................................ 309
13.1 GSK980TDi Communication Software GSKComm ........................................................... 309
13.1.1 GSKComm’s System (PC) Requirements ................................................................... 309
13.1.2 Software Interface ....................................................................................................... 309
13.1.3 Receiving Files (CNC→PC) ........................................................................................ 310
13.1.4 Sending Files (CNC→PC) .......................................................................................... 311
13.1.5 Part Program Management......................................................................................... 313
13.2 Preparatory Before Communication .................................................................................. 314
13.2.1 Communication Cable Connection ............................................................................. 314

XII
 Contents

13.2.2 Communication Setting Baud Rate .............................................................................314

CHAPTER 14 MACHINING EXAMPLES ......................................................................................317
14.1 Programming .....................................................................................................................318
14.2 Program Input ....................................................................................................................319
14.2.1 View a Saved Program ...............................................................................................319
14.2.2 Creating a New Program ............................................................................................320
14.3 Checkout a Program..........................................................................................................320
14.3.1 Graphic Setting ...........................................................................................................320
14.3.2 Program Check ...........................................................................................................321
14.4 Tool-setting & Running ......................................................................................................321
CHAPTER 1 INSTALLATION LAYOUT .........................................................................................307
1.1 GK980TDi System Connection ............................................................................................307
1.1.1 GK980TDi Rear Cover Interface Layout .......................................................................307
1.1.2 Interface Explanation ....................................................................................................307
1.2 GSK980TDi Installation .......................................................................................................308
1.2.1 GSK980TDi External Dimensions .................................................................................308
1.2.2 Preconditions of Cabinet Installation .............................................................................308
1.2.3 Measures Against Interference .....................................................................................308
CHAPTER 2 DEFINITION & CONNECTION OF INTERFACE SIGNALS ..................................... 311
2.1 GSKLink Bus Interface ........................................................................................................ 311
2.2 Being Connected with Spindle Encoder............................................................................... 311
2.2.1 Spindle Encoder Interface Definition ............................................................................. 311
2.2.2 Signal Explanation ........................................................................................................ 311
2.2.3 Spindle Encoder Interface Connection ..........................................................................312
2.3 MPG Connection .................................................................................................................313
2.3.1 MPG Interface Definition ...............................................................................................313
2.3.2 Signal Explanation ........................................................................................................313
2.4 Analog Spindle Interface......................................................................................................315
2.4.1 Analog Spindle Interface Definition ...............................................................................315
2.4.2 Inverter Connection.......................................................................................................315
9-cord in type D）............................................................................................................................315
2.5 GSK980TDi／GSK980TDi-V being Connected with PC ......................................................316
2.5.1 Communication Interface Definition ..............................................................................316
2.5.2 Communication Interface Connection ...........................................................................316
2.6 Network Interface ................................................................................................................317
2.7 Power Interface Connection ................................................................................................317
2.8 I/O Interface Definition .........................................................................................................318
2.8.1 Input Signal ...................................................................................................................322
2.8.2 Output Signal ................................................................................................................323
2.9 I/O Function & Connection ..................................................................................................324
2.9.1 Stroke Limit & ESP........................................................................................................324
2.9.2 Tool Change Control .....................................................................................................326
2.9.3 Machine Zero Return ....................................................................................................334
2.9.4 Spindle Control .............................................................................................................342
2.9.5 Spindle Wwitching Volume Control ...............................................................................345
2.9.6 Spindle Automatic Gearing Control ...............................................................................345
2.9.7 Spindle 8-point Orientation Function .............................................................................347
2.9.8 Spindle Cs Axis Control Function ..................................................................................348
2.9.8 Multiple Spindle Function ..............................................................................................350
2.9.9 Rigid Tapping Function .................................................................................................352
2.9.10 Spindle Clamped Function ..........................................................................................352
2.9.11 Spindle Positioning Function .......................................................................................353
2.9.12 External Cycle Start & Feed Hold................................................................................354
2.9.13 Cooling Control ...........................................................................................................355
2.9.14 Lubricating Control ......................................................................................................356
2.9.15 Chuck Control .............................................................................................................358
2.9.16 Tailstock Control..........................................................................................................360
2.9.17 Low Pressure Detection ..............................................................................................362

XIII
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

2.9.18 Hydraulic Control ........................................................................................................ 362

2.9.19 Safety Door Detection ................................................................................................. 363
2.9.20 CNC Macro Variables ................................................................................................. 364
2.9.21 External Override ........................................................................................................ 365
2.9.22 External MPG ............................................................................................................. 365
2.9.23 Tri-color Lamp ............................................................................................................. 366
2.9.24 Extended M Function .................................................................................................. 367
2.9.25 HOLD Control ............................................................................................................. 367
2.9.26 Handle Interrupt .......................................................................................................... 368
2.9.27 Chip-Removal Control ................................................................................................ 368
2.9.28 Working Indicator ........................................................................................................ 369
2.9.29 Gear/tool Number Display .......................................................................................... 369
2.10 Commonly Use Sign of Electricity Drawing ....................................................................... 369
CHAPTER 3 PARAMETERS ........................................................................................................... 371
3.1 Parameter Description (by Sequence) ................................................................................ 371
3.1.1 Bit Parameter ................................................................................................................ 371
3.1.2 Data Parameter ............................................................................................................ 381
3.1.3 PLC Parameters（Standard PLC Definition） .............................................................. 399
3.2 Parameter Description (by Function Sequence) .................................................................. 404
3.2.1 X, Z, Y, 4th,5th Axis Control Logic ................................................................................... 404
3.2.2 Acceleration & Deceleration Control ............................................................................. 404
3.2.3 Precision Compensation ............................................................................................... 406
3.2.4 Machine Protection ....................................................................................................... 408
3.2.5 Machine Zero Return .................................................................................................... 410
3.2.6 Thread Function............................................................................................................ 413
3.2.7 Spindle Control ............................................................................................................. 414
3.2.8 Tool Compensation ....................................................................................................... 418
3.2.9 Tool Life Management Function .................................................................................... 418
3.2.10 Tool Wear Parameter .................................................................................................. 419
3.2.11 Edit & Display.............................................................................................................. 419
3.2.12 Communication Setting ............................................................................................... 420
3.2.13 MPG Parameters ........................................................................................................ 420
3.2.14 PLC Axis Control Function .......................................................................................... 421
3.2.15 Skip Function .............................................................................................................. 421
3.2.16 Automatic Tool Setting Function ................................................................................. 421
3.2.17 Input & Output Function in Metric/Inch System ........................................................... 422
3.2.18 Parameters Related to Arc Turning ............................................................................. 422
3.2.19 Parameters Related to Addition .................................................................................. 423
3.2.20 GSKLink Bus Related to Absolute Encoder ................................................................ 424
CHAPTER 4 MACHINE DEBUGGING METHODS AND MODES ................................................ 425
4.1 ESP & Limit ......................................................................................................................... 425
4.1.1 ESP & Limit Series-Connection .................................................................................... 425
4.1.2 Separately Connect of ESP & Limit .............................................................................. 425
4.2 Drive Unit Configuration ...................................................................................................... 426
4.3 Gear Ratio Adjustment ........................................................................................................ 427
4.4 ACC&DEC Characteristic Adjustment ................................................................................. 428
4.5 Mechanical (Machine) Zero Adjustment .............................................................................. 428
4.6 Spindle Adjustment .............................................................................................................. 430
4.6.1 Spindle Encoder............................................................................................................ 430
4.6.2 Spindle Brake................................................................................................................ 430
4.6.3 Switch Volume Control of Spindle Speed ...................................................................... 430
4.6.4 Analog Voltage Control of Spindle Speed ..................................................................... 430
4.6.5 Spindle Speed Series Control ....................................................................................... 431
4.7 Backlash Offset ................................................................................................................... 431
4.8 Tool Post Debugging ........................................................................................................... 432
4.9 Step/MPG Adjustment ......................................................................................................... 433
CHAPTER 5 DIAGNOSIS MESSAGE .......................................................................................... 435
5.1 CNC Diagnosis .................................................................................................................... 435
5.1.1 I/O Status & Data Diagnosis Message .......................................................................... 435
XIV
 Contents

5.1.2 CNC Motion State & Data Diagnosis Message .............................................................435

5.1.3 Diagnosis Keys .............................................................................................................437
5.2 PLC State ............................................................................................................................437
5.2.1 X Address (Machine→PLC , Defined by Standard PLC Ladders) .................................438
5.2.2 Y Address (PLC→Machine, Defined by Standard PLC Ladders) ..................................439
5.2.3 Machine Panel ..............................................................................................................441
5.2.4 F Address(CNC→PLC) .................................................................................................442
5.2.5 G Address (PLC→CNC) ...............................................................................................449
5.2.6 Address A (Message Display Requiery Signal, Defined by Standard PLC Ladders) .....456
CHAPTER 6 MEMORIZING PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION ..................................................459
6.1 Function Description ............................................................................................................459
6.2 Specification ........................................................................................................................459
6.3 Parameter Setting ...............................................................................................................459
6.3.1 Pitch Compensation ......................................................................................................459
6.3.2 Pitch Error Compensation Number ...............................................................................459
6.3.3 Pitch error compensation interval..................................................................................460
6.3.4 Offset Value ..................................................................................................................460
6.4 Notes of Offset Setting ........................................................................................................460
6.5 Setting Examples of Offset Parameters...............................................................................460
6.5.1 Rotation Axis Pitch Error Compensation .......................................................................463

XV
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

XVI
 Ⅰ Programming
I Programming

1
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual
Ⅰ Programming

2
 Chapter 1 Programming

CHAPTER 1 PROGRAMMING

1.1 GSK980TDi Introduction

1.1.1 Product Introduction

Ⅰ Programming
Being upgraded product of GSK980TDi, GSK980TDi CNC turning is the better choice.
The updated development GSK980TDi Turning Machine CNC System made by GSK CNC
EQUIPMENT CO., LTD. is the new product based upon the GSK980TDi updated software/hardware,
which owns the vertical and horizontal structures. GSK980TDi uses the GSKLINK bus technology,
matches with the 17bit absolute encoder, carries out the automatic recovery of the system power-on,
no-block mechanical zero return, servo parameter on-line modification or servo state on-line
diagnosis, etc.

.
GSK980TDi GSK980TDi-V
 5 feed axes，2 analogy spindle
 control precision 0.1μm，Max. speed 120m/min
 GSK980TDi standard configuration with GS2000T-LA1 series strong overloading servo unit, it
is used the GSKLINK bus technology, matched with 17Bit absolute encoder
 The spindle orientation can be carried out by adapting the servo spindle, Rigid tapping,
Cylindrical Interpolation or Polar Coordinate Interpolation.
 Used the GSKLINK bus technology ， carried out the functions such as the power-on
automatically recover of the coordinate system, Non-block mechanical zero return, Servo
parameter on-line modification and servo state on-line diagnosis, etc.
 Built-in multi PLC programs，PLC ladder on-line display and real time monitor, as well the
series I/O unit.
 It owns the MPG trial cutting, Teachine, MPG interruption functions.
 It owns the functions, such as the on-line machine tool debugging guide, miscellaneous
programming, diagram dimension directly input and polygon turning, etc.
 MDI multi-block performance
 64M program store space, 10000 components program, and support the U disk program

3
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

machining.
 6-level operation Authorization Management，Multi-level Timed stop
 8.4 inch true-color LCD supports multi-language display, such as Chinese, English and
Russian, etc.

1.1.2 Technical Specification

Ⅰ Programming

 Controllable axes
 Controllable axes: 5（X, Z, Y , 4th,5th）
 Link axes：3
 PLC controllable axes：5（X, Z, Y, 4th,5th）
 Feed axis function
 Least input increment: 0.001mm（0.0001inch）and 0.0001mm（0.00001inch）
 Least command increment：0.001mm（0.0001inch）and 0.0001mm（0.00001inch）
 Position command range: ±99999999× least command unit
 Rapid traverse speed：120m/min
 Rapid override: F0, 25%, 50%, 100%
 Feedrate override: 0～150% 16 grades to tune
 Interpolation mode: linear interpolation, arc interpolation(three-point arc interpolation),
thread interpolation, ellipse interpolation, parabola interpolation,Cylindrical
Interpolation、Polar Coordinate Interpolation and rigid tapping
 Automatic chamfer function
 Thread function
 General thread(following spindle)/rigid thread
 Single/multi metric, inch straight thread, taper thread, end face thread, constant pitch
thread and variable pitch thread
 Thread run-out length, angle, speed characteristics can be set
 Thread pitch: 0.01mm～500mm or 0.06 tooth/inch～2540 tooth/inch
 Acceleration/deceleration function
 Cutting feed: linear
 Rapid traverse: linear, S
 Thread cutting: linear, exponential
 Initial speed, termination speed, time of acceleration/deceleration can be set by
parameters
 Spindle function
 The Max. spindle controllable number is 3, the top series spindle number is 3, the
upmost analog spindle number is 2; support the multi-spindle control.
 2-channel spindle encoder feedback, spindle encoder line can be set（100p/r～5000p/r）
 Transmission ratio between encoder and spindle:（1～255）:（1～255）
 Spindle speed: it is set by S or PLC, and speed range: 0r/min～9999r/min
 Spindle override: 50%～120% 8 grades tune
 Spindle constant surface speed control
 Rigid tapping

4
 Chapter 1 Programming

 Tool function
 Tool length compensation
 Tool nose radius compensation（C）
 Tool wear compensation
 Tool life management
 Toolsetting mode: fixed-point toolsetting, trial-cut toolsetting, reference point return

Ⅰ Programming
toolsetting, automatic toolsetting
 Tool offset execution mode: modifying coordinate mode, tool traverse mode
 Precision compensation
 Backlash compensation
 Memory pitch error compensation
 PLC function
 Two-level PLC program，up to 5000 steps，the 1st program refresh period 8ms
 PLC program communication download
 PLC warning and PLC alarm
 Many PLC programs（up to 16PCS）, the PLC program currently running can be
selected
 Basic I/O：48 input signals /38 output signals
 Man-machine interface
 8.4″ wide screen LCD，resolution: 800×600
 Chinese, English display
 Planar tool path display
 Real-time clock
 Programming miscellaneous
 Aided programming
 Grammar check
 Two-dimensional tool path
 Path preview
 Operation management
 Operation mode: edit, auto, MDI, machine zero return, MPG/single, manual, program
zero return
 Multi-level operation privilege management
 Alarm record
 Program edit
 Program capacity: 64MB ， 10000 programs （ including subprograms and macro
programs）
 Edit function: program/block word search, modification, deletion
 Program format: ISO command, statement macro command programming, relative
coordinate, absolute coordinate and compound coordinate programming
 Program call: macro program call with parameter, 4-level program built-in
 Communication function
 RS232：two-way transmitting part programs and parameters, PLC program, system
software serial upgrade
 RJ45 access: File dual-direction transportation, such as the Component program,

5
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

parameters, PLC program, etc.

 USB：U file operation, U file directly machining, PLC program, system software U
upgrade

 Safety function
 Emergency stop
Ⅰ Programming

 Hardware travel limit

 Software travel check
 Data backup and recovery

 G command table
Command Function Command Function Command Function
Rapid traverse Macro program modal
G00 G28 Reference point return G66
(positioning) call
2nd, 3rd, 4th reference point Macro program modal
G01 Linear interpolation G30 G67
return call cancel
Axial roughing cycle
G02 CW arc interpolation G31 Skip function G71
(flute cycle)
G03 CCW arc interpolation G32 Constant pitch thread cutting G72 Radial roughing cycle

G04 Dwell, exact stop G32.1 Rigid thread cutting G73 Closed cutting cycle
Three-point arc
G05 G33 Z tapping cycle G70 Finishing cycle
interpolation
Ellipse interpolation Thread cutting with variable
G6.2 G34 G74 Axial grooving cycle
(CW) lead
Ellipse interpolation
G6.3 G36 Automatic tool compensation X G75 Radial grooving cycle
(CCW)
Parabola interpolation Multiple thread cutting
G7.2 G37 Automatic tool compensation Z G76
(CW) cycle
Parabola interpolation Tool nose radius compensation Rigid tapping state
G7.3 G40 G80
(CCW) cancel cancel
Polar coordinate Tool nose radius compensation
G12.1 G41 G83 Axial drilling cycle
interpolation left
Tool nose radius compensation
G7.1 Cylinder interpolation G42 G84 Axial rigid tapping
right
Polar coordinate Workpiece coordinate system
G15 G50 G87 Radial drilling cycle
command cancel setting
Polar coordinate Local workpiece coordinate
G16 G52 G88 Radial rigid tapping
command system
Plane selection
G17 G54 Workpiece coordinate system 1 G90 Axial cutting cycle
command
Plane selection
G18 G55 Workpiece coordinate system 2 G92 Thread cutting cycle
command
Plane selection Rigid thread cutting
G19 G56 Workpiece coordinate system 3 G92.1
command cycle
G10 Data input ON G57 Workpiece coordinate system 4 G94 Radial cutting cycle
Constant surface speed
G11 Data input OFF G58 Workpiece coordinate system 5 G96
control
Constant surface speed
G20 Input in inch G59 Workpiece coordinate system 6 G97
control cancel

6
 Chapter 1 Programming

Exact stop begins between

G21 Input in metric G61 G98 Feed per minute
blocks
Stored travel check Cancle the exact stop between
G22 G64 G99 Feed per revolution
ON blocks
Stored travel check Macro command non-modal
G23 G65
OFF call

Ⅰ Programming
1.1.3 Environment & Conditions
GSK980TDi storage delivery, working environment as follows:

Item Working conditions Storage delivery conditions

Ambient temperature 0℃～45℃ -40℃～+70℃
Ambient humidity ≤90%(no freezing) ≤95%(40℃)
Atmosphere pressure 86 kPa～106 kPa 86 kPa～106 kPa
Altitude ≤1000m ≤1000m

1.1.4 Power Supply

GSK980TDi can normally run in the following AC input power supply.
Voltage: within(0.85～1.1)×200V (rated AC input voltage);
Frequency: 49Hz～51Hz continuously changing

1.1.5 Guard
GSK980TDi guard level is not less than IP20.

1.2 CNC System of Machine Tools & CNC Machine Tools

CNC machine tool is an electro-mechanical integrated product, composed of Numerical Control
Systems of Machine Tools, machines, electric control components, hydraulic components, pneumatic
components, lubricant, cooling and other subsystems (components), and CNC systems of machine
tools are control cores of CNC machine tools. CNC systems of machine tools are made up of
computerized numerical control (CNC), servo (stepper) motor drive devices, servo (or stepper) motor
etc.
Operational principles of CNC machine tools: according to requirements of machining
technology, edit user programs and input them to CNC, then CNC outputs motion control commands
to the servo (stepper) motor drive devices, and last the servo (or stepper) motor completes the cutting
feed of machine tool by mechanical driving device; logic control commands in user programs to
control spindle start/stop, tool selections, cooling ON/OFF, lubricant ON/OFF are output to electric
control systems of machine tools from CNC, and then the electric control systems control output
components including buttons, switches, indicators, relays, contactors and so on. Presently, the
electric control systems are employed with Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) with characteristics
of compact, convenience and high reliance. Thereof, the motion control systems and logic control

7
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

systems are the main of CNC machine tools.

GSK980TDi Turning Machine CNC system has simultaneously motion control and logic control
function to control two axes of CNC machine tool to move, and has nested PLC function. Edit PLC
programs (ladder diagram) according to requirements of input and output control of machine tool and
then download them to GSK980TDi Turning Machine CNC system, which realizes the required
electric control requirements of machine tool, is convenient to electric design of machine tool and
Ⅰ Programming

reduces cost of CNC machine tool.

Software used to control GSK980TDi Turning Machine CNC system is divided into system
software (NC for short) and PLC software (PLC for short). NC system is used to control the display,
communication, edit, decoding, interpolation and acceleration/deceleration, and PLC system for
controlling explanations, executions, inputs and outputs of ladder diagrams.
Standard PLC programs are loaded (except for the special order) when GSK980TDi Turning
Machine CNC System is delivered, concerned PLC control functions in following functions and
operations are described according to control logics of standard PLC programs, marking with
“Standard PLC functions” in GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual. Refer to Operation
Manual of machine manufacturer about functions and operations of PLC control because the
machine manufacturer may modify or edit PLC programs again.

Fig. 1-1

Programming is a course of workpiece contours, machining technologies, technology

parameters and tool parameters being edit into part programs according to special CNC
programming G codes. CNC machining is a course of CNC controlling a machine tool to complete
machining of workpiece according requirements of part programs.
Technical flow of CNC machining is as following Fig. 1-2.

8
 Chapter 1 Programming

Analyse workpiece drawings and confirm

Φ5.67

Φ3.76
machining processing

1.28 O0001；
3.92
G00 X3.76 Z0；
Edit part programs and record into CNC G01 Z-1.28

Ⅰ Programming
F50；
…
M30；
％
Test part programs and execute trial run

Execute toolsetting and set tool offsets and

coordinates

Run part programs and machine

Check part dimension and modify part

programs and compensations

The machining ends and the workpiece is

formed

Fig. 1-2

1.3 Programming Fundamentals

1.3.1 Coordinates Definition
Sketch map of CNC turning machine is as follows:

Fig. 1-3

9
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

GSK980TDi uses a rectangular coordinate system composed of X, Z axis. X axis is

perpendicular with axes of spindle and Z axis is parallel with axes of spindle; negative directions of
them approach to the workpiece and positive ones are away from it.
There is a front tool post and a rear tool post of NC turning machine according to their relative
position between the tool post and the spindle, Fig. 1-4 is a coordinate system of the front tool post
and Fig. 1-5 is a rear tool post one. It shows exactly the opposite of X axes, but the same of Z axes
from figures. In the manual, it will introduce programming application with the front tool post
Ⅰ Programming

coordinate system in the following figures and examples.

Z
Z

Fig.1-4 Front tool post coordinate system Fig.1-5 Rear tool post coordinate system

1.3.2 Machine Coordinate System, Machine Zero & Machine Reference

Point
Machine tool coordinate system is a benchmark one used for CNC counting coordinates and a
fixed one on the machine tool. Machine tool zero is a fixed point which position is specified by zero
switch or zero return switch on the machine tool. Usually, the zero return switch is installed on max.
stroke in X, Z positive direction. Machine reference point is located at the position at which the
machine zero value adding the data parameter No.114/No.115 value. When No.114/No.115 value is 0,
the machine reference point coincides with the machine zero. The coordinates of machine reference
point is the No.120/No.121 value. Machine zero return/G28 zero return is to execute the machine
reference point return. After the machine zero return/machine reference point return is completed,
GSK980TDi machine coordinate system which takes No.120 value as the reference point, which is
referred to I Programming, Section 3.13.
Note: Do not execute the machine reference point return without the reference point switch installed on the
machine tool; otherwise, the motion exceeds the travel limit and the machine to be damaged.

1.3.3 Workpiece Coordinate System & Program Zero

The workpiece coordinate system is a rectangular coordinate system based on the part drawing,
also called floating coordinate system. After the workpiece is installed on the machine, the absolute
coordinates of tool’s current position is set by G50 according to the workpiece’s measure, and so the
workpiece coordinate system is established in CNC. Generally, Z axis of the workpiece coordinate
system coincides with the spindle axis. The established workpiece is valid till it is replaced by a new
one. The system can set 6 workpiece coordinate systems G54~G59 in advance. Refer to I
Programming, Section 3.18 about the details of workpiece coordinate system.
A sub workpiece coordinate system is created in a workpiece coordinate system, which is called
as a local coordinate system. Refer to I Programming, Section 3.17 about the details of the local

10
 Chapter 1 Programming

coordinate system.
The current position of workpiece coordinate system set by G50 is the program zero.
Note: Do not execute the machine reference point return without using G50 to set the workpiece coordinate
system after power on, otherwise, the alarm occurs.

Workpiece Rod

Ⅰ Programming
O2 O1 Z1 (Z2)

x1/2 (x2/2)
z1
z2
(x,z)
(x1,z1) X/2
X2 X1 (x2,z2)

Z
(0,0)
Z
X
Fig. 1-6
In the above figure, XOZ is the coordinate system of machine tool, X1O1Z1 is the workpiece
coordinate system of X axis located at the heading of workpiece, X2O2Z2 is the one of X axis located
at the ending of workpiece, O point is the machine reference point, A point is the tool nose and
coordinates of A point in the above-mentioned coordinate systems is as follows:
A point in the machine tool coordinate system: (x, z);
A point in X1O1Z1 coordinate system: (x1, z1);
A point in X2O2Z2 coordinate system: (x2, z2).

1.3.4 Interpolation Function

Interpolation is defined as a planar or three dimensional contour formed by path of 2 or multiple
axes moving at the same time, also called Contour control. The controlled moving axis is called link
axis when the interpolation is executed. The moving distance, direction and speed of it are controlled
synchronously in the course of running to form the required Composite motion path. Positioning
control is defined that motion end point of one axis or multiple axes instead of the motion path in the
course of running is controlled.
GSK980TDi X and Z axis are link axes and 2 axes link CNC system. The system possesses
linear, circular and thread interpolation function.
Linear interpolation: Composite motion path of X, Z axis is a straight line from starting point to
end point.
Circular interpolation: Composite motion path of X, Z axis is arc radius defined by R or the circle
center (I, K) from starting point to end point.
Thread interpolation: Moving distance of X or Z axis or X and Z axis is defined by rotation angle
of spindle to form spiral cutting path on the workpiece surface to realize the

11
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

thread cutting. For thread interpolation, the feed axis rotates along with the
spindle, the long axis moves one pitch when the spindle rotates one rev,
and the short axis and the long axis directly interpolate.
Example:
Ⅰ Programming

Fig. 1-7

…
G32 W-27 F3; (B→C; thread interpolation)
G1 X50 Z-30 F100;
G1 X80 Z-50; (D→E; linear interpolation)
G3 X100 W-10 R10; (E→F; circular interpolation)
…
M30;

1.3.5 Absolute Programming & Incremental Programming

Specify coordinate values of path’s end point or target position in programming and there are 3
kinds of programming method according to coordinate values in programming: absolute programming,
incremental programming and compound programming.
Programming with X/Z axis absolute coordinate value to program (present with X, Z) is defined to
be the absolute programming;
Programming with X/Z axis incremental movement (present with U, W) is defined to be the
incremental programming;
In the system, X, Z axis separately uses the absolute programming and incremental program,
which is called the compound programming.
Example: A→B linear interpolation

12
 Chapter 1 Programming

Ⅰ Programming
Fig.1-8

Absolute programming: G01 X200 Z50;

Incremental programming: G01 U100 W-50;
Compound programming: G01 X200 W-50; or G01 U100 Z50
Note: When there are command address X/ U or Z/ W at the same time, X/Z command value is valid.
Example: G50 X10 Z20;
G01 X20 W30 U20 Z30; 【End point of the block (X20, Z30)】

1.3.6 Diameter Programming & Radius Programming

Programming methods of X coordinate values are divided into: diameter programming and
radius programming.
Diameter programming: when NO.001 Bit2 is 0, X input command value is in diameter and X
coordinate is in diameter at the moment;
Radius programming: when NO.001 Bit2 is 1, X input command value is in radius and X
coordinate is in radius at the moment.
Addresses relevant to diameter or radius programming

Diameter Radius
Address Explanation
programming programming
X coordinate
X In diameter In radius
G50 setting X coordinate
X increment In diameter In radius
U
X finishing allowance in G71, G72, G73 In diameter In radius
Moving distance of tool retraction when
R In diameter In radius
cutting to the end point in G74
Except for addresses and data in Table 1-1, others (arc radius, taper in G90) are unrelated to
diameter or radius programming, and their input values in X direction are defined by the radius.
Note: The diameter programming is used except for the special description in the following explanation.

1.4 Structure of an NC Program

User needs to compile part programs (called program) according to command formats of CNC
system. CNC system executes programs to control the machine tool movement, the spindle
starting/stopping, the cooling and the lubricant ON/OFF to complete the machine of workpiece.
Program example:

13
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual
Ⅰ Programming

Fig. 1-9
O0001 ; (Program name)
N0005 G0 X100 Z50; (Rapidly positioning to A point)
N0010 M12; (Clamping workpiece)
N0015 T0101; (Changing No.1 tool and executing its offset)
N0020 M3 S600; (Starting the spindle with 600 r/min)
N0025 M8 (Cooling ON)
N0030 G1 X50 Z0 F600; (Approaching B point with 600mm/min)
N0040 W-30 F200; (Cutting from B point to C point)
N0050 X80 W-20 F150; (Cutting from C point to D point)
N0060 G0 X100 Z50; (Rapidly retracting to A point)
N0070 T0100; (Canceling the tool offset)
N0080 M5 S0; (Stopping the spindle)
N0090 M9; (Cooling OFF)
N0100 M13; (Releasing workpiece)
N0110 M30; (End of program, spindle stopping and Cooling OFF)
The tool leaves the path of A→B→C→D→A after the above-mentioned programs are executed.

1.4.1 General Structure of Program

A program consists of blocks. A block begins with a block number (it can be omitted) and several
words ending with “;”.
Program name
There are most 10000 programs stored in GSK980TDi. To identify it, each program has only one
program name (there is no the same program name) beginning with command address O and the
following 4 digits.
○ □□□□
Program number (0000～9999, the leading zero can be omitted)
Address O
Word
A word is the basic command unit to command CNC system to complete the control function,
composed of an English letter (called command address) and the following number (operation
command with/without sign). The command address describes the meaning of its following operation

14
 Chapter 1 Programming

command and there may be different meaning in the same command address when the different
words are combined together. All words of GSK980TDi are in Table 1-2.

Ⅰ Programming
Table 1-2 Word table

Address Command value range Function meaning Unit

O 0～9999 Program name
N 0～9999 Block number
G 00～99 Preparatory function
-99999999～99999999 X coordinate Relevant to IS-B, IS-C
X
0～99999.999(s) Pause time
Z -99999999～99999999 Z coordinate Relevant to IS-B, IS-C
Y -99999999～99999999 Y coordinate Relevant to IS-B, IS-C
-99999999～99999999 X increment Relevant to IS-B, IS-C
0～99999.999(s) Pause time
X finishing allowance in G71,G72,
U -99999～99999 Relevant to IS-B, IS-C
G73
1～99999 Cutting depth in G71 Relevant to IS-B, IS-C
-99999999～99999999 X tool retraction clearance in G73 Relevant to IS-B, IS-C
-99999999～99999999 Z increment Relevant to IS-B, IS-C
1～99999 Cutting depth in G72 Relevant to IS-B, IS-C
W -99999～99999 Z finishing allowance in G71,G72,
Relevant to IS-B, IS-C
G73
-99999999～99999999 Z tool retraction in G73 Relevant to IS-B, IS-C
V -99999999～99999999 Y increment Relevant to IS-B, IS-C
-99999999～99999999 Arc radius Relevant to IS-B, IS-C
1～99999 Tool retraction in G71, G72 Relevant to IS-B, IS-C
1～9999 (times) Roughing cycle times in G73
1～99999 Tool retraction clearance in G74,
Relevant to IS-B, IS-C
R G75
1～99999 Tool retraction clearance from end
Relevant to IS-B, IS-C
point in G74, G75
1～99999999 Finishing allowance in G76 Relevant to IS-B, IS-C
-99999999～99999999 Taper in G90, G92, G94, G96 Relevant to IS-B, IS-C
-99999999～99999999 X vector between arc center and
Relevant to IS-B, IS-C
I starting point
0.06～25400（tooth/inch） Metric thread teeth
-99999999～99999999 Z vector between arc center and
K Relevant to IS-B, IS-C
starting point

15
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

Address Command value range Function meaning Unit

0～8000（mm/min） Feedrate per minute
F 0.0001～500(mm/r) Feedrate per rev
0.001～500（mm） Metric thread lead
0～9999（r/min） Spindle speed specified
S
00～04 Multi-gear spindle output
Ⅰ Programming

T 01～32 Tool function

00～99 Miscellaneous function output,
M program execution flow
9000～9999 Subprogram call
0～9999999（0.001s） Pause time
Calling times of subprogram
0～9999
number
0～999 Subprogram call times

P 0～9999999 X circle movement in G74, G75 Relevant to IS-B, IS-C

Thread cutting parameter in G76
Initial block number of finishing in
0～99999
the compound cycle command
Parabola mouth size in G7.2,
1～9999999 Relevant to IS-B, IS-C
G7.3
0～9999 End block number of finishing in
the compound cycle
0～9999999 Z circle movement in G74, G75 Relevant to IS-B, IS-C
1～9999999 First cut-in depth in G76 Relevant to IS-B, IS-C
1～9999999 Min. cut-in depth in G76 Relevant to IS-B, IS-C
Q 0～360000 Offset angle between one-turn
signal and starting point of thread
cutting at the initial angle in G32
0～9999 Angle between long axis of the
ellipse and Z in G6.2, G6.3
0～9999 Angle between long axis of the
ellipse and Z in G7.2, G7.3
0～99999999 Length of long radius of ellipse in
A Relevant to IS-B, IS-C
G6.2, G6.3
0～99999999 Length of short radius of ellipse in
B Relevant to IS-B, IS-C
G6.2, G6.3
H 01～99 Operand in G65

Block
A block which is basic unit of CNC program consists of a sequence of words, ending with “;” or
“*” . There is the character “;” or “*” between blocks. “;” is used to separate blocks in the manual as
follows:

16
 Chapter 1 Programming

/ N0030 G0 X20 Z30 ;

End of block
Block number
Block skip
One block may be with a number of words or only with “; ”ending character(EOB) instead of

Ⅰ Programming
words. There must be one or more blank space between many words.
There is only one for other addresses except for N, G, S, T, H, L in one block, otherwise the
system alarms. The last word in the same address is valid when there are more N, G, S, T, H, L in the
same block. The last G code is valid when there are more G codes which are in the same group in
one block.
Block number
A block number consists of an address N and its following 4-digit: N0000～N9999, and the
leading zero can be omitted. The block number must be at the beginning of block, otherwise the block
is invalid.
The block number can be omitted, but there must be the block number when the program
calls/skips the target block. The increment of block number is at will and it better to increase or
decrease the sequence of block number in order to conveniently search and analyze programs.
When “Automatic number” in the switch window is set to “ON”, block numbers will be
automatically created incrementally and their increment is defined by No.42.
Character for block skip

Insert “/” in the front of block and startup when some block cannot be executed (cannot be
deleted), and the system skips the block and executes the next one. The block with “/” in the front of it
is executed if the block skip switch is not started.

Character for end of a program

“%” is an ending character of program. “%” is a mark of communication ended when the program
is transmitted. The system will automatically insert “％” at the end of program.
Program Note
To make it convenient for the user to search, read the program, the program note can be edited
followed each program, and its note locates within the bracket following with the block. Only the
English Letters and Numbers can be edited the notes on the CNC; but the Chinese can be performed
on the PC. The CNC can be displayed the Chinese note after the program loads to the CNC.

1.4.2 Main Program & Subprogram

To simply the programming, when the same or similar machining path and control procedure is
used many times, its program commands are edited to a sole program to call. A program which calls
the program is the main program and the called program (end with M99) is subprogram. They both
take up the program capacity and storage space of system. The subprogram has own name, and can
be called at will by the main program and also can run separately. The system returns to the main
program to continue when the subprogram ends as follows.

17
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual
Ⅰ Programming

1.5 Program Run

1.5.1 Sequence of Program Run
Running the current open program must be in Auto mode. GSK980TDi cannot open two or more
programs at the same, and runs only program any time. When the first block is open, the cursor is
located in the heading of the first block and can be moved in Edit mode. In the run stop state in Auto

mode, the program starts to run by the cycle start signal ( is pressed or external cycle start
signal)from a block pointed by current cursor, usually blocks are executed one by one according to
their programming sequence, the program stops running till executing M02 or M30. The cursor moves
along with program running and is located at the heading of the current block. Sequence and state of
program running are changed in the followings:

 The program stops running after pressing or emergent stop button;

 The program stops running when the system or PLC alarms;
 The program runs and single block stops (the program run stops after the current block runs
completely) in Edit, MDI mode, and then a block pointed by the current cursor starts running

after the system switches into Auto mode, is pressed or external cycle start signal is
switched on;
 The program stops running in Manual(Jog), Handwheel (MPG), Single Block, Program
Reference Point Return, Machine Reference Point Return mode and it continuously runs

from current position after the system is switched into Auto mode and is pressed or
the external cycle start signal is switched on;

 The program pauses after pressing or the external cycle start signal is switched off,

and it continuously runs from current position after pressing or the external cycle
start signal is switched on;
 When Single Block is ON, the program pauses after every block is executed completely, and

18
 Chapter 1 Programming

then it continuously runs from the next block after is pressed or the external cycle
start signal is switched on;
 Block with “/” in the front of it is not executed when the block skipping switch is ON;
 The system skips to the target block to run after executing G65;
 Please see I Programming, Section Three G Commands about execution sequence of

Ⅰ Programming
G70~73;
 Call corresponding subprograms or macro program to run when executing M98 or
M9000~M9999; the system returns to main program to call the next block when executing
M99(if M99 specifies a target block number, the system returns to it to run) after the
subprograms or macro programs run completely;
 The system return to the first block to run and the current program is executed repetitively
when M99 is executed in a main program.

1.5.2 Execution Sequence of Word

There are many words (G, X, Z, F, R, M, S, T and so on) and most of M, S, T is transmitted to
PLC by NC explaining and others are directly executed by NC. M98, M99, M9000～M9999, S word
used to specify the spindle speed r/min, m/min is directly executed by NC.
NC firstly executes G and then M commands when G codes and M00, M01, M02 and M30 are in
the same block.
NC firstly executes G and then M commands( without transmitting M signal to PLC) when G
codes and M98, M99, M9000～M9999 are in the same block.
When G codes and M, S, T executed by PLC are in the same block, PLC defines M, S, T and G
to be executed simultaneously, or execute M, S ,T after G codes. Please see User Manual of machine
manufacturer for execution sequence of commands.
Execution sequence of G, M, S, T in the same block defined by GSK980TDi standard PLC
program is as follows:
M3, M4, M8, M10, M12, M32, M41, M42, M43, M44, S□□, T□□□□ and G codes are executed
simultaneously;
M5, M9, M11, M13, M33 after G codes are executed;
M00, M01, M02, M30 after other commands of current block are executed.

1.6 Basic Axis Incremental System

The incremental system includes least input increment (input) and least command increment
(output). Least input increment is the least movement unit of programming movement distance, and
least command increment is the least unit of tool traversing on the machine. The two increment
systems use mm, inch or deg.
The basic axes include X, Z, and their incremental system has IS-B, IS-C selected by No.00.1
ISC.
001 ISC
Increment 0－IS-B（μ level）
1－IS-C（0.1μ level）

19
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

1.6.1 Incremental system speed of basic axis

μ level（IS-B） 0.1μ level（IS-C）
Metric machine Inch machine Metric machine Inch machine
(mm/min) (inch/min) (mm/min) (inch/min)
speed 120,000 12,000 120,000 12,000
Ⅰ Programming

1.6.2 Incremental System Unit of Basic Axis

In different incremental system and different metric/inch, the least input/output increment is
different as follows:
μ level（IS-B） Least input Least command
increment（input） increment（output）
0.001 (mm) 0.001 (mm)
metric input(G21)
0.001 (deg) 0.001 (deg)
Metric machine
0.0001 (inch) 0.001 (mm)
inch input(G20)
0.001 (deg) 0.001 (deg)
0.001 (mm) 0.0001 (inch)
metric input (G21)
0.001 (deg) 0.001 (deg)
Inch machine
0.0001 (inch) 0.0001 (inch)
inch input (G20)
0.001 (deg) 0.001 (deg)

0.1μ level（IS-C） Least input Least command

increment（input） increment（output）
0.0001 (mm) 0.0001 (mm)
metric input (G21)
0.0001 (deg) 0.0001 (deg)
Metric machine
0.00001 (inch) 0.0001 (mm)
inch input (G20)
0.0001 (deg) 0.0001 (deg)
0.0001 (mm) 0.00001 (inch)
metric input (G21)
0.0001 (deg) 0.0001 (deg)
Inch machine
0.00001 (inch) 0.00001 (inch)
inch input (G20)
0.0001 (deg) 0.0001 (deg)
Least input increment (input) using the metric or the inch is specified by G20 or G21 or is
completed by modifying #001 increment bit.
Least command increment (output) using the metric or the inch is determined by the machine,
and is set by#004 output increment.

1.6.3 Incremental System Data Range of Basic Axis

In different incremental system and pulse output frequency, the corresponding different data
range is as follows:
Incremental system Command data input range Data format
-99999.999 ~ 99999.999 (mm) 5.3
metric input (G21)
μ level（IS-B） -99999.999 ~ 99999.999 (deg) 5.3
inch input (G20) -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (inch) 4.4

20
 Chapter 1 Programming

-9999.999 ~ 9999.999 (deg) 4.3

-9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (mm) 4.4
metric input (G21)
0.1μ level -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999 (deg) 4.4
（IS-C） -999.99999 ~ 999.99999 (inch) 3.5
inch input (G20)
-999.9999 ~ 999.9999 (deg) 3.4
Note : 5.3 in the above table means 5-bit integer and 3-bit decimal. And other data likes these.

Ⅰ Programming
1.6.4 Incremental System Data Range & Unit of Basic Axis
 Speed parameter
Linear axis speed parameter unit is determined by the machine type. i.e.: metric machine speed
unit: mm/min, inch machine is: 0.1inch/min.
Linear axis speed parameter range is determined by the machine type and incremental system
type.
Data parameter No. 027(cutting upper speed):
Machine type Incremental system Linear axis speed unit Parameter range Rotary axis speed unit
μ level（IS-B） 10~ 15000
Metric machine mm/min
0.1μ level（IS-C） 10~ 15000
deg/min
μ level（IS-B） 5~58000
Inch machine 0.1inch/min
0.1μ level（IS-C） 5~5800
Rotary axis does not execute the metric/inch conversion, the rotary axis speed unit is deg/min;
the parameter range is the same that of metric machine.
The different incremental system switch may cause the set max. run speed in the data parameter
exceeding max. range permitted by the system, so, the operator should modify the speed parameter
to avoid the unexpected when the first power-on after switch.

 Incremental parameter
The unit and range of linear axis incremental parameter are determined by the machine type and
incremental system type as follows:
Machine type Incremental system Linear axis incremental unit Linear axis parameter range
μ level（IS-B） 0.001mm -99, 999.999~ 99,999.999
Metric machine
0.1μ level（IS-C） 0.0001 mm -9, 999.9999~ 9,999.9999
μ level（IS-B） 0.0001inch -9, 999.9999~ 9,999.9999
Inch machine
0.1μ level（IS-C） 0.00001 inch -999.99999~ 999.99999

The rotary axis does not execute the metric/inch switch, the unit of rotary axis incremental
parameter is determined by the incremental system type. The range of rotary axis incremental
parameter is the same that of the metric machine.

Machine type Incremental system Rotary axis speed unit Rotary axis parameter range
Metric, Inch μ level（IS-B） 0.001° 0~ 99999.999
machine 0.1 μ level（IS-C） 0.0001° 0~ 9999.9999

21
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

 Programming value input range

Linear axis coordinate data unit is determined by the metric/inch input system. i.e. metric input is
mm; inch input is inch;
Linear axis coordinate data range is determined by metric/inch input system and incremental
system. The range is the same that of the command data input range as follows:
Incremental system Linear axis coordinate data range
Ⅰ Programming

Metric input (G21) -99999.999 ~ 99999.999(mm)

μ level（IS-B）
Inch input (G20) -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999(inch)
Metric input (G21) -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999(mm)
0.1μ level（IS-C）
Inch input (G20) -999.99999 ~ 999.99999(inch)
The rotary axis does not execute the metric/inch switch, the rotary axis coordinate data unit is
deg. The range of programmed value is shown below:
Input type Incremental system Rotary axis coordinate data range
μ level（IS-B） -99999.999 ~ 99999.999（deg）
Metric, inch input
0.1μ level（IS-C） -9999.9999 ~ 9999.9999(deg)

 Offset data
Offset data unit is determined by metric/inch input system. i.e. metric input is mm; inch input is
inch.
Offset data range is limited to 9999999 and is determined by the metric/inch input system and
incremental system as follows:
Input type Incremental system Offset data unit Offset data range
μ level（IS-B） ±9999.999
Metric input(G21) mm
0.1μ level（IS-C） ±999.9999
μ level（IS-B） ±999.9999
Inch input (G20) inch
0.1μ level（IS-C） ±99.99999

 Pitch data compensation

Linear axis pitch compensation unit and range are determined by the machine type and
incremental system type as follows：
Linear axis pitch
Machine type Incremental system Linear axis data unit
compensation data range
μ level（IS-B） 0.001mm -2550～2550
Metric machine
0.1μ level（IS-C） 0.0001mm -2550～2550
μ level（IS-B） 0.0001inch -2550～2550
Inch machine
0.1μ level（IS-C） 0.00001inch -2550～2550
The rotary axis does not execute the metric/inch switch; the rotary axis pitch compensation unit is
determined by the least input unit as follows.
Incremental system Rotary axis pitch Rotary axis pitch
Machine type
compensation unit compensation range
μ level（IS-B） 0.001° 0～255
Metric, inch machine
0.1μ level（IS-C） 0.0001° 0～2550

22
 Chapter 1 Programming

1.6.5 Program Address Value Unit & Range of Incremental System of

Basic Axis

 Pitch definition and range:

Command μ level （IS-B） 0.1μ level（IS-C） Unit

Ⅰ Programming
F 0.001~500.000 0.0001~500.00 mm/tooth[lead]
Metric input （G21）
I 0.06~25400 0.06~2540 tooth[lead]/inch
F 0.0001~50.00 0.00001~50.0 inch/tooth[lead]
Inch input（G20）
I 0.06~2540 0.06~254 tooth[lead]/inch

 Speed F definition
G98 m/min: feed per minute: F unit: mm/min
G99 feed per rev: F definition and range are as follows:

Incremental system Address Metric input Inch input

IS-B system F（G98） 0～99999.999 (mm/min) 0～99999.999 (mm/min)
IS-C system 0～9999.9999 (mm/min) 0～9999.9999 (mm/min)
IS-B system F（G99） 0～500 (mm/r) 0～500 (mm/r)
IS-C system 0～50 (mm/r) 0～50 (mm/r)

1.7 Additional Axis Incremental System

Least incremental system in μ level（IS-B） or 0.1μ level（IS-C）, the additional axis does not
execute the link, and is not used alone. When the least incremental output of additional axis is 0.01 in
the low precision requirement and the feedrate must be fast, and so the working efficiency largely
increases. The least incremental system of additional axis does not sometime consist with the current
least incremental system. The system adds the optional function of the least incremental system of
the additional axis (Y, 4th , 5th axis) .
Additional axis incremental system is set by No..187 as follows:
187 nIS1 nIS0
nIS1, nIS0：select the least incremental system of each additional axis (n means the axis name of
each additional axis)
Least
nIS1 nIS0 Incremental system of axis
input/output
Same with current incremental
0 0
system of basic axis (XY)
0 1 IS-A 0.01
1 0 IS-B 0.001
1 1 IS-C 0.0001
Note: The least I/O in the above table is expressed without considering the metric/inch and rotary axis.

23
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

1.7.1 Additional Axis of Current Incremental System

IS-B or IS-C: The relative speed and data range of additional axis is the same that the described
in Section 1.6.
Ⅰ Programming

1.7.2 Additional Axis of IS-A Incremental System

IS-A: The max. speed of additional axis is separate 10 times and 100 times of IS-B and IS-C. The
relative data and parameter range are same those of the incremental system of current basic axis
(refer to Section 1.6).

24
 Chapter 2 MSTF Command

CHAPTER 2 MSTF COMMAND

2.1 M (Miscellaneous Function)

M command consists of command address M and its following 1～2 or 4 bit digits, used for

Ⅰ Programming
controlling the flow of executed program or outputting M commands to PLC.
M □□□□
Command value (00~99, 9000~9999, the leading zero can be omitted)
Command address
M98, M99, M9000～M9999 is executed by NC separately and NC does not output M commands
to PLC.
M02, M03 are for ending of programs defined by NC, and NC outputs M commands to PLC
which can control spindle OFF, cooling OFF and so on.
M98, M99, M9000～M9999 are for calling programs, M02, M30 are for ending of program which
are not changed by PLC. Other M commands output to PLC and their function are defined by PLC.
Please refer to User Manual from machine manufacturer.
There is only one M command in one block, otherwise the system alarms.
Table 2-1 M commands to control program execution
Commands Functions
M02 End of program
M30 End of program
M98 Call subprograms
Return from a subprogram; it is executed repeatedly when the program
M99
ends in M99(the current program is not called by other programs)
M9000～M9999 Call macro programs(their program numbers are more than 9000)

2.1.1 End of Program M02

Command format: M02 or M2
Command function: In Auto mode, after other commands of current block are executed, the
automatic run stops, and the cursor stops a block in M02 and does not
return to the start of program. The cursor must return to the start of program
when the program is executed again.
Besides the above-mentioned function executed by NC, M02 function is also defined by PLC
ladder diagram as follows: current output of CNC is reserved after M02 is executed.

2.1.2 End of Program run M30

Command format: M30
Command function: In Auto mode, after other commands of current block are executed in M30,
the automatic run stops, the amount of workpiece is added 1, the tool nose
radius compensation is cancelled and the cursor returns to the start of
program (whether the cursor return to the start of program or not is defined
by parameters).
If No.005 Bit 4 is set to 0, the cursor does not return to the beginning of program, and the cursor
25
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

returns immediately after the program is executed completely when No.005 Bit 4 is set to 1.
Except for the above-mentioned function executed by NC, M30 function is also defined by PLC
ladder diagram as follows: the system closes M03, M04 or M08 signal output and outputs M05 signal
after M30 is executed.

2.1.3 Subprogram Call M98

Ⅰ Programming

Command format:
M98 P○○○○□□□□
Called subprogram number （ 0000 ～ 9999 ） . The leading zero of
subprogram number can be omitted when the calling times is not input; the
subprogram number must be with 4 digits when the calling times is input..
Call times: 1～9999. The calling times cannot be input when it is 1.

Command function: In Auto mode, after other commands are executed in M98, CNC calls
subprograms specified by P, and subprograms are executed 9999 times at
most. M98 is invalid in MDI mode.

2.1.4 Return From Subprogram M99

Command format: M99 P○○○○

Executed block after returning to the main program is 0000～

9999，and its leading zero can be omitted.
Command function: After other commands of current block in the subprogram are executed, the
system returns to the main program and continues to execute next block
specified by P, and calls a block following M98 of current subprogram when
P is not input. The current program is executed repeatedly when M99 is
defined to end of program (namely, the current program is executed without
calling other programs). M99 is invalid in MDI mode.

Example: Execution path of calling subprogram (with P in M99) as Fig. 2-1.

Execution path of calling subprogram (without P in M99) as Fig. 2-2.

Fig. 2-1

26
 Chapter 2 MSTF Command

Ⅰ Programming
Fig. 2-2
Subprogram calls can be nested up to four levels as shown in Fig. 2-3.

M a in p ro g ra m S ub p ro g ra m S u b p ro gr a m S u bp ro g ra m S u b pr og ra m

O1 001 ； O 10 02； O1 003 ； O 10 04； O10 05；

... . .. ... . .. ...
... . .. ... . .. ...
... . .. ... . .. ...
M98 P10 02; M 98P 100 3; M98 P10 04; M 98P 100 5; ...
... . .. ... . .. ...
... . .. ... . .. ...
... . .. ... . .. ...
... . .. ... . .. ...
M30 ; M 99; M99 ; M 99; M99 ;

L ev el 1 L ev el 2 L ev el 3 Le ve l 4
Fig. 2-3 Subprogram nesting

2.1.5 Macro Program Call M9000～M9999

Command format: M□□□□
9000～9999
Command function: call macro programs corresponding to command values (O9000～O9999).
Macro programs: O9000～O9999 programs are for machine manufacturer, used for editing
subprogram with special functions, called macro programs. The system must have 2-level operation
level (machine manufacturer) when editing O9000～O9999, and macro programs calling commands
are executed to call with 3～5 operation level. M9000～M9999 are invalid in MDI mode.

2.1.6 M commands Defined by Standard PLC Ladder Diagram

Other M commands are defined by PLC except for the above-mentioned ones(M02, M30, M98,
M99, M9000～M9999). The following M commands are defined by standard PLC, and GSK980TDi
Turning Machine CNC system is used for controlling machine tool. Refer to commands of machine
manufacturer about functions, significations, control time sequence and logic of M commands.
M commands defined by standard PLC ladder diagram.

27
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

Table 2-2 M commands

Command Function Remark

M00 Program pause
M01 Program optional stop
M03 Spindle clockwise (CW)
Functions interlocked
M04 Spindle counterclockwise (CCW)
Ⅰ Programming

and states reserved

*M05 Spindle stop
M08 Cooling ON Functions interlocked
*M09 Cooling OFF and states reserved
M10 Tailstock forward Functions interlocked
M11 Tailstock backward and states reserved
M12 Chuck clamping Functions interlocked
M13 Chuck releasing and states reserved
M14 Spindle position control Functions interlocked
*M15 Spindle speed control and states reserved
M20 Spindle clamping Functions interlocked
*M21 Spindle releasing and states reserved
M24 The 2nd spindle position control Functions interlocked
*M25 The 2nd spindle speed control and states reserved
M32 Lubricating ON Functions interlocked
*M33 Lubricating OFF and states reserved
*M50 Spindle orientation cancel
M51 Spindle orientate to No. 1 point
M52 Spindle orientate to No. 2 point
M53 Spindle orientate to No. 3 point
Functions interlocked
M54 Spindle orientate to No. 4 point
and states reserved
M55 Spindle orientate to No. 5 point
M56 Spindle orientate to No. 6 point
M57 Spindle orientate to No. 7 point
M58 Spindle orientate to No. 8 point
M63 The 2nd spindle rotation CCW
Functions interlocked
M64 The 2nd spindle rotation CW
and states reserved
*M65 The 2nd spindle stop
*M41, M42, Functions interlocked
Spindle automatic gear shifting
M43, M44 and states reserved
Note: Commands with “*” defined by standard PLC is valid when power on.

2.1.7 Program Stop M00

Command format: M00 or M0
Command function: After M00 is executed, the program stops and the system displays “Pause”,
and then the program continuously runs after the cycle start key is pressed.

28
 Chapter 2 MSTF Command

2.1.8 Program Optional Stop M01

Command format: M01 or M1

Command function: in AUTO, MDI mode, it is valid. Press and its indicator lights and the
system enters the optional stop state, at the moment, the program stops run

Ⅰ Programming
and the system displays “PAUSE” after M01 is executed, after the cycle start
key is pressed, the program continuously runs. When the program optional
stop switch is not open, the program does not pause even if M01 runs.

2.1.9 Spindle CW, CCW & Stop Control M03, M04, M05
Command format: M03 or M3
M04 or M4;
M05 or M5.
Command function: M03: Spindle CW rotation;
M04: Spindle CCW rotation;
M05: Spindle stop.
Note: Refer to time sequence of output defined by standard PLC ladder in
Ⅲ INSTALLATION & CONNECTION.

2.1.10 Cooling Control M08, M09

Command format: M08 or M8;
M09 or M9;
Command function: M08: Cooling ON;
M09: Cooling OFF.
Note: Refer to time sequence and logic of M08, M09 defined by standard PLC ladder in
Ⅲ INSTALLATION & CONNECTION.

2.1.11 Tailstock Control M10, M11

Command format: M10;
M11;
Command function: M10: tailstock going forward;
M11: tailstock going backward.
Note: Refer to time sequence and logic of M10, M11 defined by standard PLC ladder in
Ⅲ INSTALLATION & CONNECTION

2.1.12 Chuck Control M12, M13

Command format: M12;
M13;
Command function: M12: chuck clamping;
M13: chuck releasing.
Note: Refer to time sequence and logic of M12, M13 defined by standard PLC ladder in
Ⅲ INSTALLATION & CONNECTION.

29
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

2.1.13 Spindle Position/Speed Control Switch M14, M15

Command format：M14；
M15；
Command function：M14：Spindle is in the position control mode from speed control mode;
M15：Spindle is in speed control mode from the position control mode.
Ⅰ Programming

Note: Refer to time sequence and logic of M14, M15 defined by standard PLC ladder in
Ⅲ INSTALLATION & CONNECTION.

2.1.14 Spindle Clamped/Released M20, M21

Command format：M20；
M21；
Command function：M20：Spindle clamped
M21：Spindle released
Note: Refer to time sequence and logic of M20, M21 defined by standard PLC ladder in
Ⅲ INSTALLATION & CONNECTION.

2.1.15 The 2nd Spindle Position/Speed Switch M24, M25

Command format：M24；
M25；
Command function：M24：The 2nd spindle is switched from the speed control mode to the position
control mode;
M25：The 2nd spindle is switched from the position control mode to the speed
control mode.
Note: Refer to time sequence and logic of M24, M25 defined by standard PLC ladder in
Ⅲ INSTALLATION & CONNECTION.

2.1.16 Lubricating Control M32, M33

Command format：M32；
M33；
Command function：M32：Lubricating ON;
M33：Lubricating OFF.
Note: Refer to time sequence and logic of M32, M33 defined by standard PLC ladder in
Ⅲ INSTALLATION & CONNECTION.

2.1.17 Spindle Automatic Gear Change M41, M42, M43, M44

Command format：M4n；(n=1, 2, 3, 4)
Command function：When the system executes M4n, the spindle changes to gear n.
Note: Refer to time sequence and logic of M41, M42, M43, M44 defined by standard PLC ladder in
Ⅲ INSTALLATION&CONNECTION.

30
 Chapter 2 MSTF Command

2.1.18 Spindle 8-point Orientation M50～M58

Command format：M5n；(n=0～8)
Command function：M50：Cancel orientation state;
M5n(n=0～8)：The spindle oriented to No. n point.
Note: Refer to time sequence and logic of M50～M58 defined by standard PLC ladder in

Ⅰ Programming
Ⅲ INSTALLATION & CONNECTION.

2.1.19 The 2nd Spindle Rotation CCW/CW, Stop M63, M64, M65
Command format: M63；
M64；
M65；
Command function:
M63: spindle rotation CCW;
M64: spindle rotation CW;
M65: spindle stop.
Note 1: The sequence of M63, M64, M65 defined by the standard PLC is the same that of M03, M04, M05.
Note 2: The function is enabled when the 2nd spindle function is valid.

2.2 Spindle Function

S command is used for controlling spindle speed and this GSK980TDi has two modes to control
it:
Spindle speed switching value control: S□□(2 digits command value)is executed by PLC, and
PLC outputs switching value signal to machine tool to change spindle speed with grades.
Spindle speed analog voltage control: S□□□□(4 digits command value)specifies actual speed of
spindle and NC outputs 0~10V analog voltage signal to spindle servo or converter to realize stepless
spindle speed.

2.2.1 Spindle Speed Switching Value Control

Spindle speed is controlled by switching value when No.001 BIT4 is set to 0. There is only one S
command in a block, otherwise the system alarms.
Their executing sequence is defined by PLC when S command and word for moving function are
in the same block. Please refer to User Manual from machine manufacturer.
When spindle speed is controlled by switching value, GSK980TDi Turning CNC system is used
for machine tool and the time sequence and logic of executing S command is according to User
Manual from machine manufacturer. Refer to S command defined by standard PLC of GSK980TDi as
follows:
Command format: S□□

00～04(the leading zero can be omitted): No.1～No.4 gear of spindle

speed is controlled by switching value.
In spindle speed switching value control mode, after S signal transmits to PLC, the system dwells
time defined by No.081, then return FIN signal, and the dwell time is called runtime of S command.

31
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

Dwell time
Start to execute S command Start to execute the following word or block

S01, S02, S03, S04 output are reserved when resetting CNC.
S1～S4 output are invalid when CNC is switched on. The corresponding S signal output is valid
Ⅰ Programming

and reserved, and others are cancelled at the same time when executing one of S01, S02, S03, S04.
When executing S00, S1～S4 output are cancelled and only one of S1～S4 is valid at the same time.

2.2.2 Spindle Speed Analog Voltage Control

Spindle speed is controlled by analog voltage when No.001 BIT4 is set to 1.
Command format: S □□□□
0000～9999 (the leading zero can be omitted.):Spindle speed
analog voltage control
Command function: The spindle speed is defined, and the system outputs 0～10V analog
voltage to control spindle servo or converter to realize the stepless timing. S
command value is not reserved, and it is 0 after the system is switched on.
When the spindle speed analog voltage control is valid, there are 2 methods to input the spindle
speed: the spindle fixed speed is defined by S command( r/min), and is invariant without changing S
command value, which is called constant speed control(G97 modal); other is the tangent speed of
tool relative to the outer circle of workpiece defined by S command, which is called constant surface
speed control (G96 modal), and the spindle speed is changed along with the absolute coordinates
value of X absolute coordinates in programming path when cutting feed is executed in the constant
surface speed.
Please refer to Section 2.2.4.
The system can execute 4 gears spindle speed. Count the analog voltage value corresponding
to the specified speed according to setting value(corresponding to No.037～No.040) of max. spindle
speed (analog voltage is 10V)of current gear, and then output to spindle servo or converter to ensure
that the spindle actual speed and the requirement are the same.
After the system is switched on, the analog output voltage is 0V. The analog output voltage is
reserved (except that the system is in cutting feed in the surface speed control mode and the
absolute value of X absolute coordinates is changed) after S command is executed. The analog
output voltage is 0V after S0 is executed. The analog output voltage is reserved when the system
resets and emergently stops.

2.2.3 Spindle Speed Series Control

When the Bit 4 of the state parameter No. 001 sets to 1, and the Bi7 of the No. 195 sets to 1, the
spindle speed is the series control.
Command format:S □□□□
0000～9999 (the leading zero can be omitted.): Spindle speed series
control
Command function: The spindle speed is defined, CNC directly controls the spindle servo drive
unit by delivering the series data based upon the bus to carry out the stepless speed

32
 Chapter 2 MSTF Command

of the spindle. S command value is not reserved, and it is 0 after the system is
switched on.
When the spindle speed analog voltage control is valid, there are 2 methods to input the spindle
speed: the spindle fixed speed is defined by S command( r/min), and is invariant without changing S
command value, which is called constant speed control(G97 modal); other is the tangent speed of
tool relative to the outer circle of workpiece defined by S command, which is called constant surface

Ⅰ Programming
speed control (G96 modal), and the spindle speed is changed along with the absolute coordinates
value of X absolute coordinates in programming path when cutting feed is executed in the constant
surface speed.
Please refer to Section 2.2.4.
The system can execute 4 gears spindle speed. Count the analog voltage value corresponding
to the specified speed according to setting value(corresponding to No.037～No.040) of max. spindle
speed (analog voltage is 10V)of current gear, and then output to spindle servo or converter to ensure
that the spindle actual speed and the requirement are the same.

2.2.4 Constant Surface Speed Control G96, Constant Rotational Speed

Control G97
Command format: G96 S__; (S0000～S9999, the leading zero can be omitted.)
Command function: The constant surface speed control is valid, the cutting surface speed is
defined (m/min) and the constant rotational speed control is cancelled.
G96 is modal G code. If the current modal is G96, G96 cannot be input.
Command format: G97 S__; (S0000～S9999, the leading zero can be omitted.)
Command function: The constant surface speed control is cancelled, the constant rotational
speed control is valid and the spindle speed is defined (r/min). G96 is
modal G code. If the current modal is G97, G97 cannot be input.
Command format: G50 S__; (S0000～S9999, the leading zero can be omitted.)
Command function: define max. spindle speed limit (r/min) in the constant surface speed control
and take the current position as the program reference point.
G96, G97 are the modal word in the same group but one of them is valid. G97 is the initial word
and the system defaults G97 is valid when the system is switched on.
When the machine tool is turning it, the workpiece rotates based on the axes of spindle as the
center line, the cutting point of tool cutting workpiece is a circle motion around the axes, and the
instantaneous speed in the circle tangent direction is called cutting surface (for short surface
speed). There are different surface speed for the different workpiece and tool with different material.
When the spindle speed controlled by the analog voltage is valid, the constant surface control
is valid. The spindle speed is changed along with the absolute value of X absolute coordinates of
programming path in the constant speed control. If the absolute value of X absolute coordinates adds,
the spindle speed reduces, and vice verse, which make the cutting surface speed as S command
value. The constant speed control to cut the workpiece makes sure all smooth finish on the surface of
workpiece with diameter changing.
Surface speed=spindle speed × |X| × π ÷1000 (m/min)
Spindle speed: r/min
|X|: absolute value of X absolute coordinate value, mm
π ≈3.14

33
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual
Ⅰ Programming

Fig. 2-4
In G96, the spindle speed is changed along with the absolute value of X absolute coordinates
value of programming path in cutting feed (interpolation), but it is not changed in G00 because there
is no actual cutting and is counted based on the surface speed of end point in the program block.
In G96 (constant surface speed control), Z coordinates axis of workpiece system must consist
with the axes of spindle (rotary axis of workpiece), otherwise, there is different between the actual
surface speed and the defined one.
G96 control is valid, G50 S_ can limit max. spindle speed (r/min). The spindle actual speed is the
limit value of max. speed when the spindle speed counted by the surface speed and X coordinates
value is more than the max. spindle speed set by G50 S_. After the system powers on, max. spindle
speed limit value is not defined and its function is invalid. Max. spindle speed limit value defined by
G50 S_ is reserved before it is defined again and its function is valid in G96. Max. spindle speed
defined by G50 S_ is invalid in G97 but its limit value is reserved.
Note: When NO.043 (lowest spindle speed in constant surface speed control) is set to 0 and G50 S0 is
executed, the spindle speed is limited to 0 r/min (the spindle does not rotate).
When the constant surface speed is controlled by the system parameter No.043, the spindle
speed is lower limit, which is higher than one counted by the surface speed and X axis coordinates
value.
Example:

Fig. 2-5
O0001 ; (Program name)

34
 Chapter 2 MSTF Command

N0010 M3 G96 S300; (Spindle rotates clockwise, the constant surface speed control is
valid and the surface speed is 300 m/min)
N0020 G0 X100 Z100; (Rapid traverse to A point with spindle speed 955 r/min)
N0030 G0 X50 Z0; (Rapid traverse to B point with spindle speed 1910 r/min)
N0040 G1 W-30 F200; (Cut from B to C with spindle speed 1910 r/min)
N0050 X80 W-20 F150; (Cut from C to D with spindle speed 1910 r/min and surface speed

Ⅰ Programming
1194 r/min)
N0060 G0 X100 Z100; (Rapid retract to A point with spindle speed 955 r/min)
N0110 M30; (End of program, spindle stopping and cooling OFF)
N0120 %
Note 1: S value commanded in G96 is also reserved in G97. Its value is resumed when the system is in G96
again; Example:
G96 S50; (Cutting surface speed 50m/min)
G97 S1000; (Spindle speed 1000 r/min)
G96 X3000; (Cutting surface speed 50m/min)
Note 2: The constant surface speed control is valid when the machine tool is locked (X, Z do not move when
their motion command are executed);
Note 3: To gain the precise thread machining, it should not be adopted with the constant surface speed
control but the constant rotational speed (G97) in the course of thread cutting;
Note 4: From G96 to G97, if none of S command (r/min) is commanded in the program block in G97, the last
spindle speed in G96 is taken as S command in G97, namely, the spindle speed is not changed at this
time;
Note 5: In G96, when the spindle speed counted by the cutting surface speed is more than max. speed of
current spindle gear (system parameter No.037～No.040), at this time, the spindle speed is limited to
max. one of current spindle gear.

2.2.5 Spindle Override

When the spindle speed analog voltage control is valid, the spindle actual speed can be tuned
real time by the spindle override and is limited by max spindle speed of current gear after the spindle
override is tuned, and it also limited by limited values of max. and min. spindle speed in constant
surface speed control mode.
The system supplies 8 steps for spindle override (50%～120% increment of 10%). The actual
steps and tune of spindle override are defined by PLC ladder and introductions from machine
manufacturer should be referred when using it. Refer to the following functions of GSK980TDi
standard PLC ladder.
The spindle actual speed specified by GSK980TDi standard PLC ladder can be tuned real time
by the spindle override tune key at 8 steps in 50%～120% and it is not reserved when the spindle
override is switched off. Refer to the operations of spindle override in Ⅱ OPERATION.

2.2.6 Multiple Spindle Control Function

GSK980TDi can control up to two analog spindles. One S code is used to command one of them
which are selected by PLC signal and which have the gear change function.
Because GSK980TDi has only one spindle encoder interface, the 2nd spindle has no encoder
feedback and the spindle speed is not displayed.
Being the speed command, S code is sent to the spindle selected by the spindle selection signal
（SWS1, SWS2 <G27＃0, G27＃1>）, and each spindle rotates with the specified speed. When the

35
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

spindle has not received the spindle selection signal, it rotates with the previous speed, which makes
the spindle rotates with different speed in different time. Each spindle has its own stop signal and
enabling signal.
When №001＃4 is set to 1, setting MSEN（№196＃4）to 1 can start the multiple spindle control
function.
The spindle control has several methods which are set by MSI（№196＃7）as follows:
Ⅰ Programming

 Multiple spindle control method A

When SWS1 signal selects the 1st spindle, SIND signal is used to determine that the spindle
analog voltage is controlled by PLC or CNC, R011 to R121 signals are used to set the spindle analog
voltage. These signals do not influence the 2nd spindle.
Multiple spindle control method A is shown below.

 Multiple spindle control method B

Each spindle has separate SIND signal.
When the spindle selection signal, the 1st spindle or the 2nd spindle SIND signal is set to 1, SIND
signals separately determine each spindle to be controlled by PLC or CNC.
Multiple spindle control method B is shown below.

 Multiple spindle control function being invalid

When the multiple spindle control is invalid, the control method is shown below.

36
 Chapter 2 MSTF Command

2.2.7 Cs Contour Control Funciton

Controlling a spindle speed is called as the spindle rotation control (the spindle rotates by the
speed command), and controlling the spindle position is called as the spindle contour control (the
spindle rotates by the movement command). The function of the spindle contour control is that of Cs
contour control. Being the servo feed axis, the spindle rotates and orients by the position movement
command, and executes the interpolation with other feed axes to machine the contour curve.

Ⅰ Programming
2.2.8 Spindle Positioning Function
In the turning machining, the spindle rotates at one certain speed, therefore, the workpiece
installed on the spindle revolved and machined. In this case, the spindle control state is called
“Spindle Rotation Mode”. Compare to the others, moves one angle for the spindle, so that the
workpiece installed on the spindle positions at one angle, which is regarded as “Spindle Positioning
Function”. In this case, the controllable state of the spindle is called “Spindle Positioning Mode”.
Generally, the spindle positioning axis is mechanically clamped to use after the positioning operation
is performed, and therefore, the relation operations between the spindle clamping and releasing may
be performed before/after the positioning.
The spindle positioning function can be devided into 3 steps based upon the operation:
 Release the spindle rotation method, shift to the spindle positioning mode
Shift the spindle to its positioning method by executing the specific M code (Parameter
setting), and then set up a reference position.
 The positioning spindle operation in the spindle positioning method.
Spindle positioning can be performed the position of arbitrary angle by axis address, which
can be used the absolute and relative commands. It is better not to perform with the shared
block other than the G00 or G50 command.
For example, suppose the controllable axis is C axis:
G00 C45.000
G00 H-60.000
 Release the spindle positioning method, shift to the operation of the spindle rotation
method.
Shift the spindle to the spindle rotation method by performing the specific M code (Parameter
Setting).
Compare the spindle positioning function with the Cs axis contour controllable function,
regardless of the linkage interpolation with other axes; generally, the mechanical equipment clamping
can be used when the position is completed.
Especially note, the spindle positioning function and Cs axis contour controllable function can not
be simultaneously used.

2.3 Tool Function

2.3.1 Tool Control
T functions of GSK980TDi: automatic tool change and executing tool offset. Control logic of
automatic tool change is executed by PLC and tool offset is executed by NC.
Command format:

37
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

T□□ ○○

Tool offset number（00-32，the leading zero cannot be omitted）

Target tool number（01-32，the leading zero cannot be omitted）
Command function: The automatic tool post rotates to the target tool number and the tool offset
of tool offset number commanded is executed. The tool offset number can be the same as the tool
number, and also cannot be the same as it, namely, one tool can corresponds to many tool offset
Ⅰ Programming

numbers. After executing tool offset and then T□□00, the system reversely offset the current tool
offset and the system its operation mode from the executed tool length compensation into the
non-compensation, which course is called the canceling tool offset, called canceling tool
compensation. When the system is switched on, the tool offset number and the tool offset number
displayed by T command is the state before the system is switched off.
Only one T command is in a block, otherwise the system alarms.
Toolsetting is executed to gain the position offset data before machining (called tool offset), and
the system automatically executes the tool offset after executing T command when programs are
running. Only edit programs for each tool according to part drawing instead of relative position of
each tool in the machine coordinate system. If there is error caused by the wearing of tool, directly
modify the tool offset according to the dimension offset.

Fig.2-6 tool offset

The tool offset is used for the programming. The offset corresponding to the tool offset number in
T command is added or subtracted on the end point of each block. Tool offset in X direction in
diameter or radius is set by No.004 Bit4. For tool offset in diameter or radius in X direction, the
external diameter is changed along with diameter or radius when the tool length compensation is
changed.
Example: When the state parameter No.004 Bit4 is set to 0 and X tool length compensation
value is 10mm, the external diameter of workpiece is 10mm; when No. 004 is set to 1 and X tool
length compensation value is 10mm, the external diameter of workpiec is 20mm. Fig.2-5 is the course
of creating, executing and canceling tool offset in traverse mode.

Fig. 2-7 Creation, execution and cancellation of tool length compensation

G01 X100 Z100 T0101; (Block 1, start to execute the tool offset)

38
 Chapter 2 MSTF Command

G01 W150; (Block 2, tool offset Block 2, tool offset)

G01 U150 W100 T0100; (Block 3, canceling tool offset)
There are two methods defined by No.003 Bit4 to execute the tool length compensation:
Bit4=0: The tool length compensation is executed by the tool traversing;
Bit4=1: The tool length compensation is executed by modifying the coordinates;
Example:

Ⅰ Programming
Table 2-4
Tool offset number X Z
00 0.000 0.000
01 0.000 0.000
02 12.000 -23.000
03 24.560 13.452

State of T State of T State of T

T0100 T0202 T0303

Coordinates Coordinates Coordinates

displaying displaying displaying
(Incremental (Incremental (Incremental
coordinates) coordinates) coordinates)
U: 0.000 U: 12.000 U: 24.560
W: 0.000 W: -23.000 W: 13.452
(Absolute (Absolute (Absolute
coordinates) coordinates) coordinates)
X: 0.000 X: 0.000 X: 0.000
Z: 0.000 Z: 0.000 Z: 0.000

№ 01 tool without Change №2 tool Change №3 tool

the tool and execute its offset and execute its offset
compensation by the tool traversing by the tool traversing
with 12mm in X with 12.56mm in X
positive direction and positive direction and
23mm in Z negative 36.452mm in Z positive
direction direction

Fig. 2-7 Tool traversing mode

39
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

State of T State of T State of T

T0100 T0202 T0303

Coordinates Coordinates Coordinates

displaying displaying displaying
(Incremental (Incremental (Incremental
Ⅰ Programming

coordinates) coordinates) coordinates)

U: 0.000 U: 0.000 U: 0.000
W: 0.000 W: 0.000 W: 0.000
(Absolute (Absolute (Absolute
coordinates) coordinates) coordinates)
X: 0.000 X: -12.000 X: -24.560
Z: 0.000 Z: 23.000 Z: -13.452
Change №3 tool
№ 01 tool Change №2 tool
and execute its and execute its
without the tool offset by
compensation offset by modifying
the coordinates modifying the
coordinates

Fig. 2-8 Modifying the coordinates mode

In Edit and Auto mode, a sole T word in executing tool offset (it is not with the motion command
in the same block) is relative to No.004 BIT3 setting (as Fig.2-6 and Fig.2-7). When No.003 Bit4=1
and a sole T command is executed, the tool offset number is displayed in poor, which is cleared
out(tool offset number is still displayed in poor when tool offset is not executed for one axis, the
previous bit of tool offset number is for X axis tool compensation and the next one is for Z axis tool
compensation) after executing tool offset.
Example: When No.003 Bit4 is 1 and a sole T0101 is executed, the system displays after
executing Z axis as follows:

Executing a sole T0101 and tool offsets of two axes are not executed

40
 Chapter 2 MSTF Command

Ⅰ Programming
Executing W0 after T0101, X tool offset is not executed but that of Z is done
When T command and the motion command are in the same block and execute tool offset by
modifying coordinates, the motion command and T command are executed at the same time, the
system executes by adding the current tool offset to coordinates of motion command and whether the
traverse speed is employed the cutting feedrate or the rapid traverse speed defined by the motion
command.
When T command and the motion command are in the same block and execute tool offset by
traversing tool, the motion command or T command is executed separately. Firstly tool change is
executed and then the motion command is executed. The tool offset is executed at current rapid
traverse speed.
The tool offset is cancelled after one of the following operations is executed:
1. Execute T□□00 command;
2. Execute G28 or manual machine reference point return (only the tool offset of coordinate
axis which is executed machine reference point return is cancelled, and another one which is
not executed machine reference point return is not cancelled);
When No.084 is not 1 (2～32) and target tool number is not equal to current display tool number,
the control sequence and logic of tool post is defined by PLC ladder diagram after commanding T
command, please see User Manual of machine tool manufacturer. GSK980TDi standard PLC ladder
diagram defines as follows: clockwise rotation for selecting tool, counterclockwise rotation for tool
post clamping, directly inputting tool selection signal for tool change. Please refer to Ⅲ
INSTALLATION & CONNECTION.
When the system is employed with line-up tool post, No.084 should be set to 1 and different tool
number is executed by different tool offset as T0101, T0102, T0103.

2.3.2 Tool Life Management

1. Starting tool life management function
The state parameter No.002 Bit0 (TLIF) is the market whether the tool life management function
is valid or not, the corresponding tool life management window is not displayed when it is invalid.
002 Tool life management

Bit 0 Tool life management function is not valid.

1 Tool life management function is valid.
2. Tool life management display window

41
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

Press repetitively into the tool life management display window .

1）“Tool compensation->tool life” window
The current window displays the life management data of current used tool life management and
defined tool groups. The window is shown below:
Ⅰ Programming

Current tool state: display the current used tool life management data;
Tool number: current used tool and tool compensation number;
Group: the group where the tool is;
Life: tool life data, the specified value can be time or number of times according to the different

count N value; press to record the time or clear the times.

Used: used tool life data.
Life unit: count unit of tool life, N1 is the used time (unit: minute), N0 is the used times (unit:

times) . Press ， to change the count unit of the tool.

State： display the tool state（0－not be used，1－being used ，2－used，3－skip）.

Press to change the tool state to skip when the tool is not used in the current window.
Defined group: It only display defined group number and the undefined group number is not
displayed. The displayed group back lighted means that all tool life in this group is
over.
2) Creating and displaying tool group number

A. In tool group state display window, press , group number, and the system
display the tool group life data, and when the group does not exist, it is defined to the new
group number( the parameter switch is ON in MDI mode).
Note: After the new group is defined, GSK980TDi will automatically define the first tool, for
example, the new defined group number is 01, the display is as follows:

42
 Chapter 2 MSTF Command

Ⅰ Programming
B. Press to move the cursor to Defined Group Number.

C. Press or to select the group number in Defined Group Number, and to

gradually display content of each group number.
3. Definition of tool life data
There are two ways to set the tool life data: 1) compile NC programs and run the program setting;
2) input directly in the tool life management window.
1) Compile NC programs and run program setting
Command format: G10 L3
Command function: set to be the tool life manage data input mode
Command format: G11
Command function: cancel the tool life management data input mode
Program Meaning Remark

O0020 (O0020) T_: tool and tool offset number;

G10 L3; Set to be the tool life management data

input mod
P01; Tool group number, too group number N_: tool life count mode, N0 is the
setting range(1～32) used time(minute) to count tool
T0101 L500 N0; Tool number, life, mode(number of life and N1 is the used number
times) setting of times to count the tool
T0201 L600 N1; Tool number, life and mode(min) setting life(unit: min)

P02; Another tool group number

T0303 L200 N0; L_: tool life data, the specified value
can be time or number of times
T0304 L300 N0;
according to the different count
G11; Cancel the tool life management data N value
input mode
M30;

Note 1: The tool group numbers specified by P may not be the continuous, but it is better to gradually
increase the sequence number to easily search the tool group number.
Note 2: The tool life is 0 when the life data L_ is omitted, and the tool mode is 0 (minute) when the specified

43
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

mode N_ is omitted, at the time, the system only counts and doest not alarm for the output.
Note 3: Other commands between G10 L3 and G11 are ignored.
Note 4: Running the tool life preset program (such as O0020) completely clear all previous life data and
preset the life data according to the program requirements.
Note 5: Prevent the life data from being modified manually when the part programs are running until the run
state stops (except for running the tool life preset programs).
Note 6: All tool life data is stored when power-down.
Ⅰ Programming

2) Input tool life management data in the tool life management window
Input directly the tool life management data in tool compensation- >tool life window in MDI
mode, parameter switch ON and 3-level operation limit.
A. alter data:

In tool compensation -> tool life window, press to move the tool to the life position, input

directly data, such as 500, press to confirm the input. Press to

complete data input (tool offset, life) .

B. Inserting data:

Insert any serial number in the current page, press ――＞［01～08］――＞ , insert
a new line, and the initial value definition is as follows:
Serial number Tool offset Life Used Mode State
N 0000 0 0 0 Over
a) Insert the front and the previous serial number moves backward.

44
 Chapter 2 MSTF Command

b) Insert the middle and the previous sequence number moves backward.

Ⅰ Programming
c) Insert behind

C. Delete data:
a) Delete data in all groups.

In tool compensation-> tool life window, press to delete all defined data.

Before operation

45
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual
Ⅰ Programming

After operation
b) Delete data in any group

Press ――＞input serial number［02］――＞ ;

Before operation

After deletion
c) Delete any serial number in the current page(the parameter switch is ON)

Press ――＞input serial number［04］――＞

46
 Chapter 2 MSTF Command

Ⅰ Programming
Before deletion

After deletion
4. Tool life function use
Command format:
Txx99: end of current used tool group, start the tool and execute the life management in XX
group.
Txx88: cancel the tool offset in XX group
Two examples are as follows:
Application example:
O0000 (O0000)
…
T0199; End of previous tool group, and start the tool in 01 group
…
T0188; Cancel tool offset in 01 group(current used tool offset)
…
T0508; Use No.05 tool and 08 tool offset without life management
…
T0500; Cancel No.05 tool offset
…
T0299; End of No.05 tool and start the tools in 02 group
…
End of tools in No.02 group, start tools in No.02 group, and start the
T0199;
next tool when there are many tools in No.01 group.
…

47
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

5. Tool life count:

When the count result is for the used life value being more than or equal to the setting value
of the life data, the next tool group number selects the standby tool in the commanded selection
tool group and the new selected tool will be counted, the count will be continuously executed and
the system alarms to output to PLC when all tool life in the tool groups reaches and there is no
standby tools. Executing the counting in MDI mode is determined by No.002 Bit3 (MDITL).
002 MDITL
Ⅰ Programming

MDITL＝0 Tool life management is invalid in MDI mode.

MDITL＝1 Tool life management is valid in MDI mode.
The tool life count has two methods including time and number of times.
1). Time count
Use the time (minute) to count the tool life in cutting feed mode(such as G01, G02, G03,
G32, G33, G34 and so on), and do not count it in G00, G04, single block stop, machine lock,
auxiliary lock, dry run and so on.
2). Number of times count
There are two methods about the number of times count which is determined by No.002 Bit2
(LIFC).

002 LIFC
LIFC=0 Tool life management count mode 1
Execute the tool select (Txx99) to change the tool number, execute the count in the cutting
feed mode (except for machine lock, auxiliary lock, dry run state). The count is not executed
when the tool number is changed and the system is not in the cutting feed mode.

Application example:

… …
T0199 1st times T0199
… …
T0299 T0199
… …
T0199 2nd times T0199
… …
T0299
…
T0199 3rd times
…

Use 3 times in 01 tool group use once in 01 tool group

LIFC＝1 Tool life management count 2
The tool group adds when the machining program runs to M30(M99), when the system
resets halfway, the number of time does not add, the count is not executed in machine lock,
auxiliary lock and dry run mode.
6. G, F signals relevant to tool life function
1)Tool change signal TLCH（F064＃0）
［Type］ output signal
［Function］ inform PLC that the last tool life ends of in this group
［Output condition］ the signal is set to 1, the last tool life in one group ends, all other tool

48
 Chapter 2 MSTF Command

life ends.
2)New tool selection signal TLNW（F064＃1）
［Type］ output signal
［Function］ inform a new tool in some tool group has been selected
［Output condition］ the signal is set to 1 and a new tool in some tool group has been
selected.

Ⅰ Programming
3)Tool change reset signal TLRST（G048＃7）
［Type］ input signal
［Function］ clear all execution data
［Operation］ when the signal is set to 1, the control unit clears the used tool life data of in
all groups; The tool state is reset to the unused.
Note: when the automatic operation signal OP is “0”, the tool change reset signal TLRST is valid.
4)Tool skip signal TLSKP（G048＃5）
［Type］ input signal
［Function］use the following two methods to change the tools which have not reached the
life:
a） When LIFJ（NO.2#4）is set to 1，the selection signals of the tool group number
（G47#0~#4）specify the tool group number, then, the tool skip signal TLSKP
becomes “1”，the next T command skips the tool which is being used of the
current group, and the tool which life has not reach in the group specified by
G47#0~#4 is used.
b）When LIFJ（NO.2#4）is set to 0，the group numbers specified by the tool group
number signal（G47#0~#4）are invalid, the tool skip signal TLSKP becomes “1”,
the machine skips to the next tool in the current used tool group.
［Operation］when the signal is set to 1, the operation described in [Function] is executed.
Note: When cycle start light signal(STL) and feed pause light signal(SPL) must be “0”, inputting TLSKP signal
is valid.
5)Tool group number selection signal TL01~TL16（G47#0~#4）
［Type］ input signal
［Function］ when TLSKP is input, using the tool group selection signal TL01~TL16
specifies the tool group number with the binary system. The specified tool
group number = G47#4~#0＋1.
［Operation］ specify the selected tool group

49
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual
Ⅰ Programming

50
 Chapter 3 G Commands

CHAPTER 3 G COMMANDS

3.1 Commands
G command consists of command address G and its following 1～2 bits command value, used

Ⅰ Programming
for defining the motion mode of tool relative to the workpiece, defining the coordinates and so on.
Refer to G commands as Fig. 3-1.
G □□

Command value（00～99，the leading zero can be omitted）

Command address G

G words are divided into 9 groups (00, 01, 02, 03, 06，07，12，14，16，21). Except that commands
in the group 01 and 00 are not in the same block, G words in the different groups can be input to the
same block and the last one is valid when two or more G words in the same group are input. The
words in the different groups without the same parameter (word) can be in the same block and their
functions are valid without sequence at the same time. The system alarms when G words do not
belong to Table 3-1 or they are optional functions without being supplied.

Table 3-1 G command list

Word Group Function Remark

G00 Rapid traverse movement Initial modal G command
G01 Linear interpolation
G02 Circular interpolation(CW)
G03 Circular interpolation(CCW)
G05(G5.1) Three-point circular interpolation
G6.2 Ellipse interpolation (CW)
G6.3 Ellipse interpolation (CCW)
G7.2 Parabola interpolation (CW)
G7.3 Parabola interpolation (CCW)
G32 01 Thread cutting
G32.1 Rigid thread cutting Modal G commands
G33 Z tapping cycle
G34 Variable pitch thread cutting
G90 Axial cutting cycle
G92 Thread cutting cycle
G83 axle drilling cycle
G84 End rigid tapping
G87 radial drilling cycle
G88 Side rigid tapping
G94 Radial cutting cycle
G04 Dwell time preset
G7.1 00 Cylinder interpolation Non-modal G commands
G10 Data input

51
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

G11 Data input cancel

G28 Machine reference point automatic return
G30 Machine 2nd, 3rd , 4th reference point return
G31 Skip interpolation
G36 Automatic tool compensation X
G37 Automatic tool compensation Z
G50 Setting workpiece coordinate system
Ⅰ Programming

G52 Setting local coordinate system

G65 Macro command
G70 Finishing cycle
G71 Axial roughing cycle
G72 Radial roughing cycle
G73 Closed c
G74 Axial grooving cycle
G75 Radial grooving cycle
G76 Multiple thread cutting cycle
G78 Enhancement thread cutting cycle
G20 06 Inch select Modal G command
G21 Metric select Initial mode G command
G96 Constant surface speed ON Modal G command
02
G97 Constant surface speed OFF Initial mode G command
G98 Feed per minute Initial mode G command
03
G99 Feed per rev Modal G command
G40 Cancel cutter radius compensation Initial mode G command
Tool nose radius compensation left contour
G41
07 (option)
Modal G command
Tool nose radius compensation right
G42
contour(option)

G22 Open the stored stroke limit detection 2

09 Non-modal G command
G23 Close the stored stroke limit detection 2

G66 Modal call

12 Modal G command
G67 Modal call cancel
G54 Workpiece coordinate system 1
G55 Workpiece coordinate system 2
G56 Workpiece coordinate system 3
G57 14 Workpiece coordinate system 4 Modal G command

G58 Workpiece coordinate system 5

G59 Workpiece coordinate system 6
G09 Exact stop between blocks
G61 Exact stop begins between blocks Non-modal G command
G64 Cancel the exact stop between blocks
G17 XY plane Modal G command
16
G18 ZX plane Initial mode G command

52
 Chapter 3 G Commands

G19 YZ plane Modal G command

G12.1 Polar coordinate interpolation
21 Non-modal G command
G13.1 Polar coordinate interpolation cancel

3.1.1 Modal, One-Shot & Initial Mode

Ⅰ Programming
G commands are divided into group 00, 01, 02, 03, 06, 07, 16, 21.
After G commands are executed, their defined functions and states are valid until they are
changed by others in the same group, which commands are called modal G commands. After the
modal G words are executed, and before their defined functions and states are changed, the G
command cannot be input again when they are executed by the following block.
The defined function and state are valid one time after G command is executed, and the G word
must be input again when it is executed every time, which command is called one-shot G command.
After the system is switched on, the valid modal G commands which are not executed their
functions or states are called initial mode G command. Take it as the initial mode G command to be
executed when it is not be input after the system is switched on.

3.1.2 Omitting Words

To simplify the programming, their command values are reserved after executing words in Table
3-2. If the words are contained in the previous blocks, they cannot be input when the words are used
with the same values and definitions in the following blocks.

Table 3-2

53
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

Command
Function Initial value when power-on
address
U Cutting depth in G71 No.51 parameter value
U Move distance of X tool retraction in G73 No.53 parameter value
W Cutting depth in G72 No.51 parameter value
W Move distance of X tool retraction in G73 No.54 parameter value
Ⅰ Programming

Move distance of tool retraction in G71, G72

R No.52 parameter value
cycle
R Cycle times of stock removal in turning in G73 No.55 parameter value
Move distance of tool retraction after
R No.56 parameter value
cutting in G74, G75
R Allowance of finishing in G76 No.60 parameter value
R Taper in G90, G92, G94, G96 0
(G98) F Feedrate per minute(G98) No.30 parameter value
(G99) F Feedrate per rev (G99) 0
F Metric pitch(G32, G92, G76) 0
I Inch pitch(G32, G92) 0
S Spindle speed specified(G97) 0
S Spindle surface speed specified(G96) 0
S Spindle speed switching value output 0
Finishing times of thread cutting in G76; No.57 parameter value
P Tool retraction width of thread cutting in G76 No.19 parameter value
Angle of tool nose of thread cutting in G76; No.58 parameter value
Q Min. cutting value in G76 No.59 parameter value

Note 1: For the command addresses with functions (such as F, used for feedrate per minute, feedrate per
revolution and metric pitch and so on), they can be omitted not to input when executing the same
function to definite words after the words are executed. For example, after executing G98 F_ without
executing the thread command, the pitch must be input with F word when machining metric thread.
Note 2: They can be omitted not to input when the address characters X(U) , Z(W) are the coordinates of end
point of block and the system defaults the current absolute coordinates in X or Z direction to the
coordinate value of end point of block.
Note 3: The corresponding words must be input when the command addresses which are not in Table 3-2
are used.

Example 1:
O0001;
G0 X100 Z100; (rapid traverse to X100 Z100; the modal G0 is valid)
X20 Z30; (rapid traverse to X20 Z30; the modal G0 is not input)
G1 X50 Z50 F300; (linear interpolation to X50 Z50, feedrate 300mm/min; the modal G1 is
valid)
X100; (linear interpolation to X100 Z50, feedrate 300mm/min; Z coordinate is
not input and is the current coordinates Z50; F300 is kept, G1 is modal
and is not input)
G0 X0 Z0; (rapid traverse to X0 Z0 and the modal G0 is valid)
M30;
Example 2:
O0002;

54
 Chapter 3 G Commands

G0 X50 Z5; (rapid traverse to X50 Z5)

G04 X4; (dwell 4 seconds)
G04 X5; (dwell 5 seconds again, G04 is non-modal and is needed to input again)
M30;
Example 3 (the first run after power-on) :
O0003;

Ⅰ Programming
G98 F500 G01 X100 Z100; (Feedrate per minute 500mm/min in G98)
G92 X50 W-20 F2 ; (F value is a pitch and must be input in thread cutting)
G99 G01 U10 F0.01 (Feedrate per revolution in G99 must be input again)
G00 X80 Z50 M30;

3.1.3 Related Definitions

In the user manual, the definitions of Word are as follows except for the especial explanations:
Starting point: position before the current block runs;
End point: position after the current block ends;
X: X absolute coordinates of end point;
U: different value of absolute coordinates between starting point and end point;
Z: Z absolute coordinates of end point;
W: different value of absolute coordinates between starting point and end point;
F: cutting feedrate.

3.2 Rapid Traverse Movement G00

Command format: G00 X(U) Z(W) ;
Command function: X, Z rapidly traverses at the respective traverse speed to the end points
from their starting point. G00 is initial command as Fig.3-1.
X, Z traverses at the respective traverse speed, the short axis arrives the
end point and the length axis continuously moves to the end point and the
compound path may be not linear.
Command specification: G00 is initial mode;
X, U, Z, W range: ±99999999× least input increment；
Can omit one or all command addresses X(U), Z(W). The coordinate values of starting point and
end point are the same when omitting one command address; the end point and the starting
point are in the same position when all are omitted. X, Z are valid, and U, W are invalid when X,
U, Z and W are in the same one block. X, U, Z, W rang is referred to Table 1-2 of Section 1.4.1,
unit: mm//inch.
Command path:

55
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual
Ⅰ Programming

Fig. 3-1

The respective rapid traverse speed of X, Z is defined by the system parameter No.022, No.023,
and their traverse speed can changed by rapid override key on the machine control panel.
Example: The tool rapidly traverses to B from A as Fig. 3-2.

Fig. 3-2

G0 X20 Z25; (absolute programming)

G0 U-22 W-18; (incremental programming)
G0 X20 W-18; (compound programming)
G0 U-22 Z25; (compound programming)

3.3 Linear Interpolation G01

Command format: G01 X(U) _ Z(W) _ F_;
Command function: The movement path is a straight line from starting point to end point as
Fig.3-3.
Command specification: G01 is modal.
Can omit one or all command addresses X (U), Z (W). The coordinate
values of starting point and end point are the same when omitting one
command address; the end point and the starting point are in the

56
 Chapter 3 G Commands

same position when all are omitted. X, U, Z, W rang is referred to

Table 1-2 of Section 1.4.1, unit: mm//inch.
F command value is the vector compound speed of X and Z
instantaneous speed and the actual cutting feedrate is the product
between the feedrate override and F command value.
After F command value is executed, it has been reserved unless the

Ⅰ Programming
new one is executed. Do not repeat it when the following G
commands adopt functions of F word. Its range is referred to Table
1-2 of Section 1.4.1.
Note: In G98, F max. value cannot exceed the value set by the data parameter No.027(upper speed of cutting
feed), otherwise, the system alarms.
Command path:

Fig. 3-3

Example: Cutting path from Φ40 to Φ60 as Fig.3-4:

Fig. 3-4

3.4 Circular Interpolation G02, G03

Command format: G02 R__
X(U) __ Z(W) __
G03 I__ K__
Command function:
G02 movement path is clockwise (rear tool post coordinate system)/counterclockwise (front tool
57
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

post coordinate system) arc from starting point to end point as Fig. 3-5.
G03 movement path is counterclockwise (rear tool post coordinate system/clockwise (front tool
post coordinate system) arc from starting point to end point as Fig. 3-6.
Command path:

A:Start point of arc

B:End point of arc
Z
Ⅰ Programming

X Z axis
B
U/2
A R
I
K
X axis
G03 path
Fig. 3-5 G02 path Fig.3-6 G03 path
Command specification:
G02, G03 are modal,
R is arc radius, range: ±99999999× least input increment;
I: X difference value between circle center and starting point of arc in radius;
K: Z difference value between circle center and starting point of arc;
Center point of arc is specified by address I, K which separately corresponds to X, Z, I, K expresses
the vector (it is the increment value) from starting point to center point of arc as the following figure;
I=Coordinates of center point-that of starting point in X direction; K= Coordinates of center
point-that of starting point in Z direction;
I, K are with sign symbol. When directions of I, K are the same as those of X, Z, they are positive,
otherwise, they are negative.
X, U, Z, W, R, I, K range is referred to Table 1-2 of Section 1.4.1, unit: mm/inch.

Fig. 3-7
Arc direction: G02/G03 direction (clockwise/counterclockwise) is opposite on the front tool post
coordinate system and the rear one as Fig.3-8:

58
 Chapter 3 G Commands

Ⅰ Programming
Fig. 3-8
Notes:
 When I = 0 or K = 0, they can be omitted; one of I, K or R must be input, otherwise the system
alarms.
 R is valid and I, K are invalid when they are input at the same time.
 R value must be equal to or more than half distance from starting point to end point, and the
system alarms if the end point is not on the arc defined by R command;
 Omit all or one of X(U), Z(W); coordinates of starting point and end point of this axis are the same
when omitting ones, the path is a full circle(360°) in G02/G03 when center point are specified
by I,K; the path is 0(0°) when center point is specified by R.
 R should be used for programming. The system executes in R= I 2  K 2 to ensure starting
point and end point of arc path are the specified ones in I, K programming.
 When the distance from center point to end point is not equal to R(R＝ I 2  K 2 ) in I,K
programming, the system automatically adjusts position of center point to ensure starting point
and end point of arc path are the specified ones; When the distance from center point to end
point is more than 2R, and the system alarms.
 Arc is less than 360° when R is commanded, the arc is more than 180° when R is negative, and it
is less than or equal to 180° when R is positive.
Example: Arc cutting path from Φ45.25 to Φ63.06 shown in Fig. 3-9.

59
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

φ 63.060
Z
Ⅰ Programming

S tarting point

E nd point

C ircle center

X
Fig. 3-9
Compound programming in G02/G03:

Fig. 3-10 Circular programming example

Program: O0001
N001 G0 X40 Z5; (Rapidly traverse)
N002 M03 S200; (Start spindle)
N003 G01 X0 Z0 F900; (Approach workpiece)
N005 G03 U24 W-24 R15; (Cut R15 arc)
N006 G02 X26 Z-31 R5; (Cut R5 arc)
N007 G01 Z-40; (Cut φ26)
N008 X40 Z5; (Return to starting point)
N009 M30; (End of program)

3.5 Three-point Circular Interpolation G05, G05.1

Command format: G05(G05.1) X(U)__ Z(W)__ I__ K__ F__
Command function: when you do not know positions of the circular center of arc and the radius
but coordinates of three points on the arc, you can use G5 to confirm the
arc direction through the middle position between the initial point and end
point.

60
 Chapter 3 G Commands

Command specification: G05(G05.1) is modal;

I: incremental coordinate value(X) (radius value, direction) of the middle point where
the circular passes corresponding to the starting point, range: ±99999999× least
input increment;
K: incremental coordinate value(Z, direction) of the middle point where the circular
passes corresponding to the starting point, range: ±99999999× least input

Ⅰ Programming
increment;
X, U, Z, W, R, I, K range is referred to Table 1-2 of Section 1.4.1, unit: mm/inch.

Fig. 3-11 G05 code Middle point Fig.3-12 G05.1 code Middle point
Notes:
1) Middle point: any one point except for the starting point and end point on the arc;
2) The system alarms when the three points are in the same line;
3) I=0 when it is omitted, K=0 when it is omitted; the system alarm when they are omitted
simultaneously;
4) The meanings of I, K I are similar to their displacement values of the circle center coordinates
corresponding to starting point ones in G02/G03;
5) G05 does not execute the whole circle machining;
Example: (machining semi-circle)

Z Z

(10,10) (10,10) (10,20)

(10,20)
I=5

K=5

X X (20,15)

Fig.3-13 G05 Fig.3-14 G05.1

Program 1 Program 2
G00 X10 Z20; G00 X10 Z20;
G5.1 X10 Z10 I5 K-5 F150; G05.1 X10 Z10 I20 K15;

61
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

3.6 Ellipse Interpolation G6.2, G6.3

Command format: G6.2
X(U)__ Z(W)__ A__ B__ Q__
G6.3
Command function: G6.2 motion path is the CW(rear tool post coordinates)/CCW(front tool
post coordinates) ellipse.
Ⅰ Programming

G6.3 motion path is the CCW(rear tool post coordinates)/CW(front tool

post coordinates) ellipse.
Command path:

Fig. 3-15 G6.2 path sketch map Fig. 3-16 G6.3 path sketch map

Explanation:
A: Length of ellipse’s long radius (0<A<= 99999.999mm, no sign )
B: Length of ellipse’s short radius (0<B<= 99999.999mm, no sign )
Q: angle between the long axis and Z coordinate system of ellipse (CCW 0-99999999,
unit: 0.001°)
Ellipse direction: defined by that of G6.2/G6.3, they are the reverse in the front and rear tool
post coordinates.
X

Z Z

X
Fig. 3-17 Front tool post coordinate system Fig. 3-18 Rear tool post coordinate system

62
 Chapter 3 G Commands

Q value:
1) In the G18 plane, Q value is the gained viewing XZ plane along with the positive direction of Y
axis in the Cartesian right-hand coordinate system, as well, it is an angle when the Z axis
positively rotates to the the overlapping with the ellispse long axis along with the CW; refer to the
following figure:
Z X

Ⅰ Programming
End Starting
point point
Starting End
point a X Z point a Z
a X a Starting End
point point
Starting End
point point

Z X
As for the above-mentioned four coordinates (Front tool-post), angle a is the symmetry
axis based upon that it rotates to ellipse along with the Z axis CCW.

X Z

X Starting End
point point
End a
a Starting
point X
Z point
X
a End Z Starting
point a point
Starting End
point point

X Z
As for the above-mentioned four coordinates (Back tool-post), angle a is the symmetry axis
based upon that it rotates to ellipse along with the Z axis CW.

Fig. 3-19
2) In the G17 panel, refer to the following figure:

63
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

X Y

End
point Starting
End point
Starting
point a point a X
Y X a Y a Starting End
point point
End
Starting
Ⅰ Programming

point
point

X Y

Y X

Starting End
point point
End Starting a
point
a point Y
X Y
a End X Starting
point a point
End
Starting point
point

Y X

Fig. 3-20
3) In the G19 plane, refer to the following figure:
Y Z

End Starting
point point
Starting End End
point point point a Y
a
Z Y a Z a Starting End
point point
End
Starting point
point

Y Z

Z Y

Starting End
point point
End
a Starting a
Y point point Z
End Y Z
a Starting
point a point
Starting End
point point

Z Y

Fig. 3-21
Notes:
1) A, B are not modal parameter. They are 0 when they are not input. When A=0 or B=0, the system

64
 Chapter 3 G Commands

alarms; when A=B, G02/G03 is executed to machine the circular;

2) Q value is a non-modal parameter, and it must be specified when it is used. When it is omitted, it
is 0°, the long and the short axis are parallel or coincident ;
3) Q unit is 0.001°, the angle between it and Z is 180°. When Q 180000 is input, Q180 or Q180.0 is
input, they are 0.18°;
4) The angle defined by Q value is an angle along Z axis in G18 panel, it is an angle along Y axis in

Ⅰ Programming
G19, an angle along X axis in G17.
5) When the distance between the starting point and end point is longer than the long axis, the
system alarms;
6) One or both of X(U), Z(W) can be omitted; omitting one of them indicates that the starting point
and the end point of the axis are consistent; omitting the both indicates they are the same one;
7) Only machines the ellipse which is less than 180°(including 180°);
8) G6.2/G6.3 are used to the compound cycle G70—G73, and their notes are the same those of
G02, G03;
9) G6.2, G6.3 are used to C tool compensation.
Example: machine from Φ43.14 to Φ63.82:

Z A:48
B:25
Q:0
Program:
G6.2 X63.82 Z-50.0 A48 B25 Q0 ；or
Z
G6.2 U20.68 W-50.0 A48 B25 ；
Starting point

End point

X
Fig. 3-22
Example: machine from Φ43.14 to Φ63.82:

Q:60
Z
Program:
Starting point G6.2 X63.82 Z-50.0 A48 B25 Q60000；or
End point
G6.2 U20.68 W-50.0 A48 B25 Q60000；

Fig. 3-23

65
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

G6.2/G6.3 compound program example :

Ⅰ Programming

Fig. 3-24
 Program: O0001
N001 G0 X60 Z5; (rapidly position)
N002 M03 S200; (spindle ON)
N003 G01 X24.24 Z0 F100; (approach the workpiece)
N005 G6.3 X40 W-35 A44 B20; (cutting A44 B20 ellipse block)
N006 G01 X32 Z-60;
N007 Z-79;
N008 G0 X60
N009 Z5; (return to the starting point)
N0010 M30; (end of program)

3.7 Parabola Interpolation G7.2, G7.3

Command format: G7.2
X(U)__ Z(W)__ P__ Q__
G7.3
Command function: G7.2 motion path is the CW (rear tool post coordinates)/CCW(front tool
post coordinates) parabola.
G7.3 motion path is the CCW (rear tool post coordinates)/CW(front tool
post coordinates) parabola.
Command path:

66
 Chapter 3 G Commands

Z Z

Ⅰ Programming
Starting of parabola

End point of parabola

抛
物

Starting point of parabola

End point of parabola

抛 线
X 物 终 X
线 点
起
点

Fig. 3-25 G7.2 path sketch map Fig. 3-26 G7.3 path sketch map
Explanation:
G7.2, G7.3 are modal;
P is in the parabola standard equation Y2=2PX, its range: 1 ～ 9999999(unit:
0.001mm, without sign);
Q is the angle between the symmetrical axis of parabola and Z, and its range: 0～
99999999 (unit: 0.001°) .
Parabola direction: G7.2/7.3 interpolation directions in the front tool post coordinate system and
the rear are reverse.
X

Z Z

X
Fig. 3-27 Front tool post coordinate system Fig. 3-28 Rear tool post coordinate system

Q value:
1) In the G18 plane, Q value is the gained viewing XZ plane along with the positive direction
of Y axis in the Cartesian right-hand coordinate system, as well, it is an angle when the Z
axis positively rotates to the the parabola with the ellispse long axis along with the CW; refer
to the following figure:

67
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual
Ⅰ Programming

Fig. 3-29
2) In the G17 plane, Q value is the gained viewing XY plane along with the positive direction
of Z axis in the Cartesian right-hand coordinate system, as well, it is an angle when the X
axis positively rotates to the the parabola with the ellispse long axis along with the CW; refer
to the following figure:

Fig. 3-30
3) In the G17 plane, Q value is the gained viewing ZY plane along with the positive direction

68
 Chapter 3 G Commands

of X axis in the Cartesian right-hand coordinate system, as well, it is an angle when the Y
axis positively rotates to the the parabola with the ellispse long axis along with the CW; refer
to the following figure:
Y Z

Ⅰ Programming
End Starting
point point
Starting End Y
point a Z Y point Z a
a a Starting End
point point
Starting End
point point

Y Z
As for the above-mentioned four coordinates (Front tool-post), angle a is the
symmetry axis based upon that it rotates to parabola along with the Y axis CCW.

Z
Y

End
Starting
point
point
End
a
Starting
Z Z a
Y Y point point
Starting
a End
Starting
point a End
point
point point

Z
Y
As for the above-mentioned four coordinates ( B a c k tool-post), angle a is the
symmetry axis based upon that it rotates to parabola along with the Y axis CW.

Fig. 3-31
Notes:
1) P cannot be 0 or omitted, otherwise the system alarms;
2) P has no sign. If it has the negative sign, its absolute value is executed;
3) Q can be omitted, at the time; the symmetrical axis of the parabola is parallel with or
coincident with Z;
4) The system alarms when the straight line on which the starting point and the end point is
parallel with the symmetrical axis of the parabola;
5) G7.2, G7.3 can be used to the compound cycle G70～G73, and their notes are the same
those of G02, G03;

Example: when the parabola P=100(the least increment is 0.0001mm), its symmetrical axis is
parallel with Z. Its machining sketch map and programming are as follows:

69
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

Program:
O0001(O0001)
G00 X120 Z100 T0101 M03 S800;
G00 X10 Z10;
G00 X0;
Ⅰ Programming

G01 Z0 F120 M08;

X30;
G7.3 X60 Z-40 P10000 Q0;
Z
G01 X90 Z-60;
X110 Z-85;
X120;
M09;
G00 X120 Z100 M05 S0;
X M30;
Fig.3-32

3.8 Plane Selection G17～G19

Command format：
G17……XY plane
G18……ZX plane
G19……YZ plane
Command function: use G commands to select the plane of the arc interpolation or the one of
the cutter compensation
Command explanation: G17, G18, G19 are modal, and the plane does not change in the block
without the command.
Notes:
1) Firstly set the basic axis Y when the system selects G17, G19 plane;
2) Cannot switch the planes in C tool compensation;
3) G71~G76，G90，G92，G94 can be used in G18 plane;
4) The plane selection code can be in the same block with G codes in the other groups;
5) The movement command is not relevant to the plane selection;
6) Diameter or radius programming: currently, because there is only one bit parameter No
1.2 to select the diameter or the radius programming and is valid to only X axis, Z and Y
axis use the only radius programming in G2, G3, and X axis is selected by the
parameter;
7) The tool nose direction of C tool compensation is 0 in G17, G19.
8) Angel Q in the oval and parabola command, in G18 panel, it is an angle along Y axis in
G19, an angle along X axis in G17.

70
 Chapter 3 G Commands

3.9 Polar Coordinate Interpolation G12.1, G13.1

Command format：G12.1----start polar coordinate interpolation method-（can be written to
G112）--- ⑴
G98
G01 X C

Ⅰ Programming
G04 X
G41/G42 G1 X C
G6.2/G6.3 X C A B Q
G7.2/G7.3 X C A B Q --- ⑵ available command
G05 X C I
G02/G03 X C R
G40 G1 X C
G65/G66/G67
G13.1----cancel polar coordinate interpolation method-（can be written to G113）--- ⑶

Command function: Polar coordinate interpolation is a function that exercises contour control in
converting a command programmed in a Cartesian coordinate system to
the movement of a linear axis (movement of a tool) and the movement of a
rotary axis (rotation of a workpiece). This method is useful in cutting a front
surface and grinding a cam shaft on the machine.
Command explanation: G12.1, G13.1 are non-modal
Linear axis: X or Z, Y or 4th or 5th axis
Rotary axis: axes except for feed axis(Y or 4th or 5th axis)
Before starting the polar coordinate, set the linear axis and the rotary axis by No.235
and No.236.
Taking example of the linear axis X and the rotary axis 5th .
Polar coordinate interpolation plane: G12.1 starts the polar coordinate interpolation mode and
selects a polar coordinate interpolation plane(below), and the polar coordinates are completed in
the plane.

Fig.3-33 Polar coordinate interpolation plane

Note1: After G12.1 is used, the previous plane is cancelled and the system enters the polar coordinate
interpolation plane, and after G13.1 is used, the plane is cancelled and the previous is recovered;
Note 2：After the system resets, it cancels the polar coordinate interpolation and recovers the previous plane,
and the cursor returns to the beginning of the program.
Programming format: create the rectangular coordinate system in the polar coordinate interpolation
plane below:

71
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

X：distance of linear axis, unit: mm/inch;

C：distance of rotary axis, unit: mm/inch;
The linear axis can use the diameter programming and the rotary
axis uses only the radius;
Ⅰ Programming

The polar coordinates in the polar coordinate interpolation plane is prepared below:
X: length between current tool and the origin, its unit: mm/inch;
Specified position
C：angle unit of current rotary axis: deg;
G16 is the polar coordinates of current coordinates being complied,
and G15 is to cancel it. The Cartesian coordinate system is used
Radius
without G16. G16/G15 is valid in the only polar coordinate
Angle Current position
interpolation.

The radius programming is applied to the linear axis and the rotary
axis below:
●Length compensation: the length compensation is not applied to the rotary axis, and the length
offset should be command before G12.1 mode, and cannot be changed in the polar coordinate
interpolation.
●Tool radius compensation: the tool nose direction is 0.
●Machine motion：the linear axis is vertical to the rotary axis.
●Circular interpolation in the interpolation plane: the address of the arc radius is determined by
the 1st axis(linear axis) in the interpolation
plane.
• When the linear axis is X or its parallel axis, I and J are used in Xp-Yp plane
• When the linear axis is Y or its parallel axis, J and K are used in Xp-Zp plane
• When the linear axis is Z or its parallel axis, K and I are used in Zp-Xp plane
The arc radius can also use R command.
●Command speed: tangential speed in the polar coordinate plane.
When the tool approaches the center of the workpiece, the speed component of C axis
exceeds its maximum cutting federate (set by No.27). F value is calculated by the followings:
L：the distance (mm) between the center of the tool and that of the workpiece
R：maximum cutting feedrate of C axis（deg/min）
Conclusion：F＜L×R×π /180（mm/min）
It is suggested that the workpiece should not be machined near the polar because the
feedate override must be changed in some occasion to avoid the overload of the rotary axis.

● Movement along the axis in the non polar coordinate interpolation plane in the polar
coordinate interpolation mode: The tool traverses normally along these axes and is not relevant
to the polar coordinate interpolation, the parameter specifies one
axis to execute the polar coordinate interpolation before
executing the polar coordinate interpolation, the axis which does
not specify the polar coordinate can moves along the normal
path in G00 or G01, but the axis which polar coordinate is not
specified is disabled (i.e. the block is ignored and the axis does

72
 Chapter 3 G Commands

not move) in arc or ellipse command.

● Coordinates display: After G12.1 is executed, the absolute coordinates, the machine coordinates
and the incremental coordinates display the actual position of the tool, the
remaining distance to move in a block is displayed based on the coordinates
in the polar coordinate interpolation plane, and after G13.1 is executed or
the reset is done, the coordinates in the current system plane is displayed.

Ⅰ Programming
Note 1: G12.1，G13.1 are in Group 21, G12.1，G13.1，G16，G15 are in a separate line.
Note 2: The tool change cannot be executed in G12.1-G13.1, the tool change operation and the positioning
followed by the tool change must be performed before G12.1.
Note 3: The system cannot start the polar coordinate interpolation during C tool compensation or in G99,
otherwise, it alarms.
Note 4: When G12.1 is commanded, the tool position of the polar coordinate interpolation is at the angle of 0.
5) It is necessary to firstly perform the length offset value before starting it; otherwise, the alarm may
occur.

Example:

Fig.3-34
O0000 (O0000)
T0101
G0 X80 C0 W0
G12.1
G6.3 X0 C20 A40 B20 F1000
G16----the followings are the length and the angle
programming
G2 X-10 C15 R5 replace to G2 X15.8114 C108.435 R5
G3 X-10 C-15 R15 G3 X15.8114 C251.565 R15
G15-----cancel the above programming mode and the
followings are Cartesian coordinate programming
G2 X0 C-20 R5
G1 X40 C-20
G7.3 X80 C0 P10000 Q60000
G13.1
M30

73
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

3.10 Cylindrical Interpolation G7.1

Command function：The amount of travel of a rotary axis specified by an angle is once
internally converted to a distance of a linear axis along the outer surface
so that linear interpolation or circular interpolation can be performed with
another axis. After interpolation, such a distance is converted back to
the amount of travel of the rotary axis. The cylindrical interpolation
Ⅰ Programming

function allows the side of a cylinder to be developed for programming

(below).

Spread

Fig.3-35
Command format：

Type I
G07.1 C(c); (1) starting the cylindrical interpolation
…
… (2)
…
G7.1 C0; (3) cancel the cylindrical interpolation

Type II
G07.1 C(c) J(Δi) L(d) R(Δd) K(Δu); (1) starting the cylindrical interpolation
…
… (2)
…
G7.1 C0; (3) cancel the cylindrical interpolation
Code meaning：Code devides into 3 sections:
(1): Provide a column radius, the column interpolation begins;
(2): Provide the block of the its section of the defined finish-turning path or the
finish-turning residual;
(3): Cancel the column interpolation
There are two programming types of cylinder interpolation, J(Δi), L(d) , R(Δd) and
K(Δu) settings are not desired for the type I; the system operates based upon the
block of the finish-turning path. Type II is the circular interpolation cycle; System is
automatically calculated the rough-turning offset value, single feed value and path
based upon the data such as the finih-turning allowance, total cutting value and
cutting times, etc. The path of each cutting is the offset of the finishing-turning path,
the cutting path is gradually closed to the path of the finish-turning, the last cutting
path is the finish-turning one.
Command explanation:

74
 Chapter 3 G Commands

Cc: the radius of the cylinder；

Radius ≠0：starts the cylindrical interpolation mode
Radius＝0：cancels the cylindrical interpolation mode
its range: 0～99999999×least input increment (unit：mm/inch)
J(Δi)：Total cutting value along X axis in the rough-turning,its range:±99999999×least input
increment(unit：mm/inch，diameter，with sign, when the symbol is positive, X axis

Ⅰ Programming
infeeds along with the positive direction; when the symbol is negative, X axis infeeds
along with the negative direction), type I setting does not desire；
R(Δd)：Tool-retraction value along X axis in the rough-turning，its range:±99999999×least
input increment(unit：mm/inch，diameter，without sign symbol) ，type I setting does
not desire；
K(Δu) ： Finish-turning allowance along X axis, its range:-99999.999~99999.999(IS_B)
/-9999.9999~9999.9999(IS_C) (unit：mm/inch，diameter，without sign symbol), the
last rough-turning path offsets related to the X axis coordinate of the finish-turning,
type I setting does not desire；
L(d)：Cutting times（without including the finish-turning path）,its range:1~9999 (unit：
times), L5 means that the rough cutting cycle is completed for 5 times, the 6th times is finish
turning cycle. If the cutting times is 1, the system will complete the rough cutting cycle based
upon 2 times. Type I setting does not desire.
Code path explanation: (Type II)
1) X axis rapidly moves to cycle start G from start point F；
2) X axis is performed the feedrate to An point, in-feed value is Δd＋n×Δu, which is
performed the circular interpolation along with the path of the An－>Bn－>Cn－>Dn
(Note: n is the nth times cycle, the resolution n=1, 2, 3…)
3) X axis rapidly retreats to point E along Dn－>E path
4) Tool returns to the cycle start G along E－>G path (Note: X, Z and C axes are
returned to the cycle start);
5) Repeated steps 2), till to the machining allowance along X axis is 0;

Fig.3-36
Note：
1) G7.1 is non-modal；

75
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

2) The cylindrical interpolation mode is cancelled in power-on and reset;

3) The rotary axis executes a program by an angle, a rolling function of a rotary axis in the
cylindrical interpolation mode will be automatically invalid, and a programming
command value must be more than 3600 when the interpolation range is more than
one circle;
4) The tool nose radius compensation G41, G42 can be executed and their tool nose
directions are 0；
Ⅰ Programming

5) A feedrate specified in the cylindrical interpolation mode is a speed on the developed

cylindrical surface, its unit: mm/min or inch/min
6) In the cylindrical interpolation mode, the linear G1, the arc G2, G3（arc radius is
specified by R, its unit is mm or inch）, ellipse G6.2, G6.3, parabola G7.2, G7.3
interpolation；
7) G00 positioning operation cannot be executed in a cylindrical interpolation mode；
8) Before executing the cylindrical interpolation mode, the tool nose radius compensation
mode which is being executed is cancelled, the tool compensation is started or
completed in a cylindrical interpolation mode；
9) Miscellaneous function T cannot be used in the cylindrical interpolation mode；
10) The feedrate in the cylindrical interpolation mode specifies G98(feed per minute)；
11) G50 setting workpiece coordinate system in the cylindrical interpolation mode cannot
be used；
12) A rotary axis and a linear axis of only current cylinder in the cylindrical interpolation is
specified；
Plane selection: Before a cylindrical interpolation, the plane where the interpolation is should
be selected firstly, one axis in the plane is a linear axis in the cylindrical
interpolation and another is a corresponding linear axis of the developed
rotary axis (below).
① Basic coordinate system:

Fig.3-37
② The rotary axis is set to X or its parallel axis in the cylindrical interpolation mode:

Fig.3-38
③ The rotary axis is set to Y or its parallel axis in the cylindrical interpolation mode:

76
 Chapter 3 G Commands

Ⅰ Programming
Fig.3-39
④The rotary axis is set to Z or its parallel axis in the cylindrical interpolation mode:

Fig.3-40
Relative parameters:
Only rotary axis is specified in the cylindrical interpolation, and it can be a basic axis or an axis
parallel to the basic axis. The axis name of three additional axes are set by NO.225, NO.226, NO.227
(Y：89，A：65，B：66，C：67）, the attribute of an axis is set by NO.230, NO.231, NO.232 (see the
following table).
Setting value Meaning
0 It is not three basic axes and their parallel axis
1 X of three basic axes
2 Y of three basic axes
3 Z of three basic axes
5 An axis parallel to X axis
6 An axis parallel to Y axis
7 An axis parallel to Z axis
Example：
No. 224 is set to 5, the cylindrical interpolation is executed in G18 plane, and the rotary axis of
the cylindrical interpolation is set to the 5th axis (state parameter P187). The axis name of the 5th is C
(data parameter No. 225), the axis is one parallel to X axis (NO.230）. The radius of the cylinder is
57.299mm, and the developed cylindrical surface is shown below:
O0071（taking example of the cylindrical interpolation G7.1）

77
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

Type I：
O0071 (Cylinder interpolation G7.1
application example)
G18；
G98；
C(deg) G00 X150 Z105 C0；
G01 X114.598 Z105 F200；
360
Ⅰ Programming

G07.1 C57.299；
G41 G01 Z120；
N10 G01 C30.0；
N20 G03 Z90 C60 R30；
N90 N30 G01 Z70；
N40 G02 Z60 C70 R10；
N50 G01 C150；
N60 G02 Z70 C190 R75；
270 N70 G01 Z110 C230；
N80 G03 Z120 C270 R75；
N90 G01 C360；
N80 G40 G01 Z105；
230 G07.1 C0；
M30；

Type II：
N70 O0071 (Cylinder interpolation G7.1
190
application example)
G18；
N60 G98；
G00 X150 Z105 C0；
150
T0101
G01 X114.598 Z105 F200；
G07.1 C57.299 J-10 K0.25 R2 L4；
G41 G01 Z120；
N50
N10 G01 C30.0；
N20 G03 Z90 C60 R30；
tool N30 G01 Z70；
N40 G02 Z60 C70 R10；
70 N40 N50 G01 C150；
60 N20
N30 N60 G02 Z70 C190 R75；
N70 G01 Z110 C230；
N80 G03 Z120 C270 R75；
30
N90 G01 C360；
N10 G40 G01 Z105；
G07.1 C0；
0 60 70 90 110 120 Z(mm) M30；

Fig.3-41

Note: In the progrmming example of the type II, the overall cutting value is 10mm, the finish machining
residual is 0.25mm, tool is 2mm distant from the workpiece along with X direction, the rough-turning
cycle times is 4, finish-turning cycle times is 1; tool retreats from the start position (116.598,105,0) after
the rough-tuning cutting is performed each time.

78
 Chapter 3 G Commands

3.11 Chamfering Function

Chamfering function is to insert one straight line or circular between two contours to make the tool
smoothly transmit from one contour to another one. GSK980TDi uses the linear and circular
chamfering functions.

Ⅰ Programming
3.11.1 Linear Chamfering
Linear chamfering: insert one straight line in the linear contours, arc contours, linear contour and
arc contour. The command address of linear chamfering is L, behind which data is the length of
chamfering straight line. The linear chamfering must be used in G01, G02 or G03 command.
Linear chamfering divides into two types, two types are mainly distinguished from the different
definitions of the command value L in the program, one is L chamfering length, the other is length
between the chamfering point and intersection point, which can be selected by state parameter
No.181.0. In the following explanation, type I represents that L is chamfering length; type II is the
length between the chamfering point and intersection point.
1). Linear to linear
Command format: G01 X(U)_ Z(W)_ L_ ;
G01 X(U)_ Z(W)_ ;
Command format: Insert a section of linear block between two straight line interpolation.
Command function: insert one straight line between two linear interpolation blocks.

typeⅠ type Ⅱ

2). Linear to circular

Command format: G01 X(U)_ Z(W)_ L_;
G02/G03 X(U)_ Z(W)_ R_;
Or
G01 X(U)_ Z(W)_ L_;
G02/G03 X(U)_ Z(W)_ I_ K_;
Command function: insert one straight line between the linear and circular interpolation blocks.

79
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

L
Ⅰ Programming

typeⅠ type Ⅱ

3). Circular to circular

Command format: G02/G03 X(U)_ Z(W)_ R_ L_;
G02/G03 X(U)_ Z(W)_ R_;
Or
G02/G03 X(U)_ Z(W)_ I_ K_ L_;
G02/G03 X(U)_ Z(W)_ I_ K_;
Command function: insert one straight line between two circular interpolation blocks.

R2

L
R1

typeⅠ type Ⅱ
4). Circular to linear
Command format: G02/G03 X(U)_ Z(W)_ R_ L_;
G01 X(U)_ Z(W)_;
Or
G02/G03 X(U)_ Z(W)_ I_ K_ L_;
G01 X(U)_ Z(W)_;
Command function: insert one straight line block between circular and linear interpolation
block.

80
 Chapter 3 G Commands

R R

L
L

Ⅰ Programming
L

typeⅠ type Ⅱ

3.11.2 Circular Chamfering

Circular chamfering: insert one circular between linear contours, circular contours, linear contour
and circular contour, the circular and the contour line are transited by the tangent. The command of
circular chamfering is D, and the data behind the command is the radius of chamfering circular. The
circular chamfering must be used in G01, G02 or G03.

1). Linear to linear

Command format: G01 X(U)_ Z(W)_ D_;
G01 X(U)_ Z(W)_;
Command function: insert one circular between two straight lines, the inserted circular
block and two straight lines are tangent, the radius is the data behind
the command address D.

Tangential point

Tangential point

2). Linear to circular

Command format: G01 X(U)_ Z(W)_ D_;
G02/G03 X(U)_ Z(W)_ R_;
or
G01 X(U)_ Z(W)_ D_;
G02/G03 X(U)_ Z(W)_ I_ K_;
Command function: insert one circular between linear and circular, the inserted circular is
tangent to the linear and the circular, and the radius is the data
behind the command address D.

81
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

Tangential point
Ⅰ Programming

Tangential point

3). Circular to circular

Command format: G02/G03 X(U)_ Z(W)_ R_ D_;
G02/G03 X(U)_ Z(W)_ R_;
or
G02/G03 X(U)_ Z(W)_ R_ D_;
G02/G03 X(U)_ Z(W)_ I_ K_;
or
G02/G03 X(U)_ Z(W)_ I_ K_ D_;
G02/G03 X(U)_ Z(W)_ I_ K_;
or
G02/G03 X(U)_ Z(W)_ I_ K_ D_;
G02/G03 X(U)_ Z(W)_ R_;

Command function: insert one circular between two circular blocks, the inserted circular is
tangent to the two circular blocks, and the radius is the data behind
the command address D.

Tangential point

Tangential point

4). Circular to linear

Command format: G02/G03 X(U)_ Z(W)_ R_ D_;
G01 X(U)_ Z(W)_;
Or
G02/G03 X(U)_ Z(W)_ I_ K_ D_;
G01 X(U)_ Z(W)_;
Command function: insert one circular block between the circular and the linear, the
inserted circular block is tangent to the circular and the linear, and

82
 Chapter 3 G Commands

the radius is the data behind the command address D.

Tangential point

Ⅰ Programming
Tangential point

3.11.3 Special Cases

The chamfering function is invalid or alarms as follows:

1) Linear chamfering
Case 1. The chamfering function is invalid when two interpolation straight lines are in the same
linear.

Case 2. CNC alarms when the chamfering linear is too long.

L1 i is the chamfering linear, and the length is L1; l2 is the third edge of the triangle which is formed
by two interpolation straight lines, the length is L2, CNC alarms when L1 is bigger than L2 as follows:

Case 3. Some linear block is too short

The chamfering linear length is L, CNC alarms when other end of the caculated chamfering
linear is not in the interpolation linear(in the extension line of the interpolation linear).

typeⅠ type Ⅱ
2) Circular chamfering
Case 1. The circular chamfering function is invalid when two interpolation straight lines are in the
same block.

83
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

Case 2. CNC alarms when the chamfering circular radius is too big.
CNC alarms when the chamfering circular radius is D, max. circular radius of the tangential
linear lines is Rmax which is less than D as follows.
Ⅰ Programming

D Rmax

Case 3. The circular chamfering function is invalid when the linear and the circular, or the circular
and the linear are tangential.

Case 4. The circular chamfering function is invalid when one circular and another one are
tangential.

The circular chamfering function is valid when the circular tangency is as follows:

R2
D
R1

3.12 Exact Stop Function Between Blocks

Command format：G09
G61 ……
G64
Command Command specification
the programmed axis of a block must exactly stop at the end point of the block,
G09
and the system continuously executes a next block., Non-modal G commands

84
 Chapter 3 G Commands

The blocks included the overall motions between the current block and the G64
G61
are exactly performed, and then execute the next block, modal command.
G64 Cancel the G61 modal.
Note：
1) G09, G61/G64 are disabled in the G71, G72 and G73 cycle procedure;
2) G09 is only enabled to the current block, if the cutting command generates in the block of

Ⅰ Programming
the G09, execute the next block after this block is exactly stopped; if the cutting command
does not generate in this block, the next block will not perform the exact stop;
3) When the current parameter №0007.5 sets to "1", modal information column is fixedly
displayed as G61, and the G64 shows disabling;
4) When the current parameter №0007.5 sets to "1", the G61/G64 position in modal
information column is immediately displayed as G61; when the current parameter
№0007.5 sets to "0", the G61/G64 position in modal information column is immediately
displayed as G64, and then enters to the smooth state between the blocks.
5) When G64 are shared a block with cutting command, the G64 locates at the block which
is cancelled the exact-stop in-position;
6) When G09, G64 and G61 are shared with a same block, the last G code is enabled;
7) Perform G64 code or power-on again, G61 modal is being cancelled.
G09 code application example:
After the motion command of the block of the G09 command is performed, the next block
command is then performed. The N2 block of the program 1 does not add the G09 command,
smoothly transit between N2 block and N3 block; refer to the path in the Fig. 3-42. The N2 block of
the program 2 adds G09 command. The command of N3 can be performed till the motion command
of the N2 block is performed; refer to the path in Fig. 3-43.
Program 1: Program path is shown in the Fig. 3-42.
N1 G00 X0 Z0
N2 G01 Z50
N3 X100
N4 Z100
N5 M30
F
Fig. 3-42

Program 2: Program path is shown in the Fig. 3-43.

N1 G00 X0 Z0
N2 G09 G01 Z50; G09 command is only
enabled to the current line.
N3 X100
N4 Z100
N5 M30
Fig. 3-43

85
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

G61, G64 code application example:

G61 is modal command, the next block can be performed after the overall motion blocks
between G61 and G64 are executed. There is G61 command in the program 3, smoothly transit
between two blocks, and refer to the Fig. 3-44. The N2 block of the program 4 adds G61 command,
N7 block adds G64 command, and therefore, after the overall motion blocks between N2 block and
N7 block are performed, the next block is then executed; refer to the Fig. 3-45.
Program 3: Program path is shown as Fig. 3-44.
Ⅰ Programming

N1 G00 X0 Z0
N2 G01 Z50
N3 X100
N4 Z120
N5 X200
N6 M30

F
Fig. 3-44
Program 4: Program path is shown as Fig. 3-45.
N1 G00 X0 Z0
N2 G61；
N3 G01 Z50
N4 X100
N5 Z120
N6 X200
N7 G64
N8M30
Fig. 3-45

3.13 Function of Directly Inputting Graphic Dimension

The function of directly inputting graphic dimension can make the user directly use the linear
angle, chamfering value in the machining drawing to program.
Command format: Drawing dimension direct input function is only used the linear interpolation
(G01)，can specify the plane in G17 plane（XY plane）, G18 plane（XZ plane）, G19
plane（ZY plane）. Taking example of G18 plane（XZ plane），the format changes when
G17/G19 plane command is used：
G17 plane：“Z”→“X”，“X”→“Y”
G19 plane：“Z”→“Y”，“X”→“Z”

86
 Chapter 3 G Commands

Command format Command path

1 G01 X2_ (Z2_) Q_

Ⅰ Programming
G01 Q1_
2
G01 X3_ Z3_ Q2_

G01 Q1_ L_
3
G01 X3_ Z3_ Q2_

G01 Q1_ D_；

4
G01 X3_ Z3_ Q2_；

X L2
（X3，Z3）
Q2
G01 Q1_ L1_
5 G01 X3_ Z3_ Q2_ L2_
G01 X4_ Z4_ （X2，Z2）
Q1
L1
（X1，Z1）
Z

87
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

Command format Command path

G01 Q1_ D1_

6 G01 X3_ Z3_ Q2_ D2_
Ⅰ Programming

G01 X4_ Z4_

G01 Q1_ D1_

7 G01 X3_ Z3_ Q2_ L2_
G01 X4_ Z4_

G01 Q1_ L1_

8 G01 X3_ Z3_ Q2_ D2_
G01 X4_ Z4_

Command explanation: When the command format is treated as 1, X or Z direction coordinate

only can be specified one; otherwise, it is performed (Angle Q is ignored) based upon
the normal straight line. Wherein, Q_ is an angle between straight line and Z axis,its
range:-99999999~99999999（unit：0.001degree），its angle direction is shown below:

Z
Q

(X ，Z)

Fig. 3-46 Rear tool post coordinate system Fig. 3-47 Front tool post coordinate system
Note：
1) G00 and G01 commands are used for the drawing dimension direct input function; however,
G00 only performs the positioning when using drawing dimension direction input function of
the G00;

88
 Chapter 3 G Commands

2) Prevent the excessive distance from calculating, in the command format 1, the angle tolerance
value of the calculation intersection is ±1° (Q value converts into 0°～360°).
3) X_ Q_ (If the angle Q (0° or 180°) value is within (0° or 180°) ±1°, the alarm may occur.)
4) Z_ Q_ (If the angle Q (90° or 270°) value is within (0° or 180°) ±1°, the alarm may occur.)
5) When the intersection is calculated, the alarm may generate if the angle difference composes
of two straight lines between ±1.
6) In a movement block following with the block which only specifies an angle command of which

Ⅰ Programming
the coordinate (absolute command) and angle command values should be specified.
（Example）:
N1 X_ Q_
N2 Q_
N3 X_ Z_ Q_
An absolute command value and angle command Q along the X or Z axis should be specified in
N3 block; otherwsie, the alarm may occur.
7) In the consecutive drawing dimension direct input command, the G04 and the M, S and T
blocks can be inserted, however, if there are 2 or more blocks are inserted, the alarm may
occur.
8) In the copound canned cycle, use the program of the drawing dimension direct input between
the sequence numbers specified by P or Q; however, the block specified by Q sequence
number can not be stopped in the middle of consecutive drawing dimension direct input
command.

3.14 Dwell G04

Command format: G04 P__ Q_ ; or
G04 X__ Q_ ; or
G04 U__ Q_; or
G04;
Command function: each axis stops the motion, the modal of G commands and the reserved
data, state are not changed, and execute the next block after dwelling the
defined time. Within the G04 dwell time, receive the skip signal (it is
determined by Q value), intermit the dwell and then perform the next block.
Command specification: G04 is non-modal.
G04 dwell time is defined by the word P__, X__ or U__.
P Range is -99999999～99999999 （unit: ms）.
X, U range is -9999.999～9999.999 (unit: s)
Q: Skip signal address selection, solution range 1～4,
Notes:
 The system exactly stop a block when P, X, U, Q are not input.
 When P, X or U specifies a negative value, it means that the dwell time is 0.
 P is valid when P, X, U are in the same block; X is valid when X, U are in the same block.
 In the G04 code execution, perform the feed hold operation, the dwell shows at the upper left
corner of the current page; however, the G04 timing does not stop, when the timing is
executed, the cursor stops at the next program.

89
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

3.15 Machine Zero Function

3.15.1 Machine 1st Reference Point G28
Command format: G28 X(U) Z(W) ;
Command function: the tool rapid traverses to the middle point defined by X(U), Z(W) from
starting point and then return to the machine zero.
Ⅰ Programming

Command specifications:
G28 is non-modal.
X, Z, Y: absolute coordinates of middle point;
U, W, V: Z absolute coordinates of middle point;
W: Difference value of absolute coordinates between middle point and starting point in Z
direction.
Omit all or one of X(U), Z(W) as follows:
Table 3-4
Command Function
G28 X(U) X returns to machine zero and Z axis remains in the previous position
G28 Z(W) Z returns to machine zero and X axis remains in the previous position
G28 in the previous positions and continuously execute the next block
G28 X(U) Z(W) X, Z return to machine zero simultaneously

Running path(as Fig. 3-48) :

(1) Rapid traverse to middle point of specified axis from current position(A point→B point) ;
(2) Rapid traverse to reference point from the middle point(B point→R point) ;
(3) If the machine is not locked, LED is ON when the machine reference point return is
completed.

Starting

point A
Middle point
B（X，Z）

X
Machine zero R

Fig.3-48
Note 1: Do not execute G28 and machine zero return without the zero switch on the machine.
Note 2: Machine zero returns in Jog mode and in G28 are the same and their deceleration signals and the
signal every rotation must be detected;
Note 3: X and Z move at the respectively rapid traverse speed from A to B and from B to R, and so the path is
not always a straight line;
Note 4: The system cancels the tool length compensation after executing G28 to perform the machine zero
return;

90
 Chapter 3 G Commands

3.15.2 Machine 2nd, 3rd, 4th Reference Point G30

Machine zero is fixed point in the machine tool, decided by the zero switch and zero return switch
installed on the machine tool.
Machine reference point is located at the position after the machine zero offsets No.114 or
No.115 value, when No.114, No.115 setting value is 0, the machine reference point coincides with the
machine zero. The coordinates of machine reference point are No.120, No.121 setting value.

Ⅰ Programming
Executing machine zero return is considered to executing the machine reference point return.
GSK980TDi has machine 2nd, 3rd, 4th reference point functions. Use separately No.122～No.127
to set X, Z machine coordinates of the machine 2nd, 3rd, 4th reference point.
The relationship between the machine zero, machine reference point, machine 2nd, 3rd, 4th
reference point is as follows:
X

№122 The 3rd machine reference point

№123 The 4th machine reference

№121 The 2nd machine reference point
№120
№114 The machine reference point
№114
The machine zero Z
№120 №121 №122 №123

Fig.3-49
Command format:
G30 P2 X(U) __ Z(W) __;
G30 P3 X(U) __ Z(W) __;
G30 P4 X(U) Z(W) ;
Command function: the tool rapidly traverses with the rapid traverse speed to the middle point
specified by X(U) , Z(W)
Command specifications: G30 is non-modal.
X: X absolute coordinate of the middle point;
U: difference value of X absolute coordinate value between the middle point and starting
point;
Z: Z absolute coordinate of the middle point;
W: difference point of Z absolute coordinate between the middle point and starting point.
Omit one or all of X (U) , Z(W) as follows:

Command Function
G30 Pn X(U) X returns to the machine nth reference point, Z axis retains
G30 Pn Z(W) Z return to the nth machine reference point, X axis retains
G30 X and Z retain, go on executing the next program block
G30 Pn X(U) Z(W) X and Z return to the machine nth reference point simultaneously

Note 1: n in the above table is 2, 3 or 4;

nd rd th
Note 2: Do not check the deceleration, zero signal when you execute the machine 2 , 3 , 4 reference point.

91
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

Command operations: (taking example of returning to machine 2nd reference point as follows):
(1) Rapidly traverse to the middle position of command axis from the current position (A point
→B point);
(2) Traverse from the middle point with the speed set by No.113 to the 2nd reference point set by
No.122 and No.123 (B point →R2 point);
(3) When CNC is not in the machine lock state, the completion signal of reference point return
ZP21 Bit0, Bit1 is high.
Ⅰ Programming

Starting point A
Middle point
B（X，Z）
X The machine 2nd
reference point R2

Note 1: Execute the machine 2nd, 3rd, 4th reference point return after you manually execute the machine
reference point return or G28 (machine reference point return).
Note 2: A→B and B0→R2, two axes separately traverse, and so their trails are linear or not.
Note 3: CNC cancels the tool length compensation after you execute G30 to return 2nd, 3rd, and 4th
reference point.
Note 4: Must not execute G30 (machine 2nd, 3rd, 4th reference point return) when the zero switch is not
installed on the machine.
Note 5: Do not set the workpiece coordinate system when you execute the 2nd, 3rd, and the machine 4th
reference point return.

3.16 Skip Interpolation G31

Command format: G31 X(U)_ Z(W)_ F_;
Command function: in executing the command, when the outside skip signal (X3.5) is input, the
system stops the command to execute the next block. The function is used
to the dynamic measure (such as milling machine), toolsetting measure
and so on of workpiece measure.
Command specifications: non-modal G command (00 group);
X(U)__ Z(W)__ ：End point
F__ ：Cutting feedrate
P__ ：Skip signal address selection，its range:1～4，The
skip signal address from the corresponding P1～
P4 are set by parameters №148～№151, it is
regarded as 1 by default when the P value does
not input.
Note:
1) Cancel the tool nose radius compensation before using it;
2) Feedrate should not be set to too big to get the precise stop position;

92
 Chapter 3 G Commands

3.16.1 Following Block Execution After Skip

1. The next block of G31 is the incremental coordinate programming shown in Fig. 3-13:

Ⅰ Programming
Fig. 3-51
2. The next block of G31 is the absolute coordinate programming of one axis as Fig. 3-14:

Fig. 3-14
3. The next block of G31 is the absolute coordinate programming of two axes shown in Fig. 3-15:
Program: G31 Z200 F100
G01 X100 Z300

Fig. 3-15

93
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

3.16.2 Signals Relevant to G31

Skip signal:
SKIP: X3.5
Type: input signal
Function: X3.5 ends the skip cutting. I.e. in a block containing G31, the skip signal becoming the
absolute coordinate position of “1” is to be stored in the macro variable (#997～#999
Ⅰ Programming

separately corresponds to X, Z, Y)
Operation: when the skip signal becomes “0”, CNC executes as follows:
When the block is executing G31, CNC stores the current absolute coordinates of
each axis. CNC stops G31 to execute the next block, the skip signal detects its state
instead of its RISING EDGE. So when the skip signal is “1”, it meets the skip
conditions.

Note: If G31 is not used, X3.5 input interface is used to the common input interface. The skip signal is valid,
CNC immediately stops the feed axis (without acceleration/deceleration execution), and G31 feedrate
should be as low as possible below 1000 mm/min to get the precise stop position.

3.16.3 Parameters Relevant to G31: Refer to Ⅲ INSTALLATION &

CONNECTION, Section 3.2.15.

3.17 Automatic Tool Offset G36, G37

Command format: G36 X__;
G37 Z__;
Command function: when the command is executed to make the tool move to the measured
position, the CNC automatically measures the difference between the current
actual coordinates and the command coordinates to be the tool offset value.
The function is used to the automatic toolsetting.
Explanations: X absolute coordinate (only used to G36), Z absolute coordinate (only used to G37);
Non-modal G command (00 group);
Cancel the tool nose radius compensation before using it;
Only use the absolute programming;
Define the workpiece coordinate system before using the command;
Specify the tool number and tool compensation number before using the command;

3.17.1 Signals Relevant to G36, G37 Automatic Tool Offset:

Measured position arrival signal:
XAE(X3.6) ――――corresponding to G36
ZAE(X3.7) ――――corresponding to G37
Type: input signal
Function: when the position measured by the program command is different from that where the
tool actually reaches (i.e. at the time, the measured position arrival signal becomes “1”), the
difference of the coordinates is added to the current tool compensation value to update the
compensation value. When G36X_(or G37Z_) is executed, the tool firstly rapidly traverses to the

94
 Chapter 3 G Commands

position measured by the command, and decelerates and temporarily stop the position before the
measured position, and then, reaches to the measured position at the speed set by No.141. When
the measured position arrival signal corresponding to G command becomes “1”, and the tool is in the
measured position range ±ε, CNC updates the offset compensation value and ends the block. When
the measured position arrival signal does not become “1”, and after the tool reaches the measured
position distance ε, the CNC alarms, ends the block and does not update the offset compensation

Ⅰ Programming
value.

3.17.2 Parameters Relevant to G36, G37: Refer to INSTALLATION,

Section 3.2.16.

3.17.3 G36, G37 Automatic Tool Offset Command Use

Feedrate and alarm
From the initial position to the measured position specified by Xa or Za in G36 or G37, the tool
rapidly traverses to A zone and stops at T point (Xa–γx or Za–γz) , and then traverses to B, C and D
at the feedrate set by No.141. The system alarms when the tool traverses in B zone and the
measured point arrival signal of the end point is set to. CNC alarms when the tool stops at V point.

Example:
G50 X760 Z1100; create the workpiece coordinate system
T0101; define No. 1 tool and execute its tool compensation

95
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

G36 X200; traverse to X toolsetting point ( X toolsetting point coordinate: 200)

T0101; execute X tool compensation again
G00 X204; retract a little
G37 Z800; traverse to Z toolsetting point ( Z toolsetting point coordinate: 800)
T0101; execute Z tool compensation again and the toolsetting is completed
M30;
Ⅰ Programming

Tool No.

Programming zero X measured position

Z measured position

Offset value Offset value

(Before measure) (After measure)

Note: Measure position arrival signal is enabled, the feed of CNC stop axis is immediately stopped
(regardless of the acceleration or deceleration treatment). Therefore, in order to guarantee the accuracy of the
stop position, the measure speed of the G36 or G37 should be set as low as possible; it is clamped at the
speed when the federate exceeds 200mm/min.

3.18 Workpiece Coordinate System G50

Command format: G50 X(U) Z(W) ;
Command function: define the absolute coordinates of current position and create the
workpiece coordinates system (called floating coordinates system) by
setting the absolute coordinates of current position in the system. After
G50 is executed, the system takes the current position as the program
zero (program reference point), and the system returns to the point after
executing the program zero return. After the workpiece coordinate system
is created, input the coordinate values with the coordinate system in the
absolute coordinates programming until the next workpiece coordinate
system is created again (using G50).
Command specifications:
G50 is non-modal;
X: New absolute coordinates of current position in X direction;
U: Different value between the new absolute coordinates of current position in X direction and
the absolute coordinates before executing commands;
Z: New absolute coordinates of current position in Z direction;
W: Different value between the new absolute coordinates of current position in X direction and

96
 Chapter 3 G Commands

the absolute coordinates before executing commands;

In G50, when X(U) or Z(W) are not input, the system does not change current coordinates
position as program zero; when X(U) and Z(W) are not input, the system takes the previous setting
position as program zero.
Example:

Ⅰ Programming
Before setting coordinate system with G50 After setting coordinate system with G50
Fig.3-54
As Fig.3-54, create the above-mentioned workpiece coordinate system and set (X100 Z150) to
the reference point of program after executing “G50 X100 Z150”.
Note: When No.003 Bit4 is 1(executing tool compensation by coordinates offset), T function is executed,
motion command is not executed and the system creates workpiece coordinate system with G50, the
displayed coordinate value are ones which are defined by G50 adding or subtracting tool compensation
value which is not executed.
Current tool Executing motion Coordinate value after No. 01 tool
compensation state command executing G50 X20 Z20 compensation value
G0 X Z X: 20 Z: 20
Motion command Coordinate value after
T0100
not executed executing G50 X20 Z20 X: 12
or
X: 8 Z: -3 Z: 23
T0101
※※※ or
X: 32 Z: 43

3.19 Local Coordinate System

When the programming is executed in a workpiece coordinate system, a sub workpiece
coordinate can be created in the workpiece coordinate system, which is called as a local coordinate
system.
Command format：G52 X(U) Z(W)
Command function: when G52 is executed, all workpiece coordinate system can (G54～G59)
set a local coordinate system. Origin of each local coordinate system is the
specified position X(U) Z(W) of each workpiece coordinate system.
Corresponding relation of workpiece coordinate systems is shown below:

97
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

X′
X

Local coordinate system

G52 X Z
Z′

Z system X′
G54 workpiece coordinate X
Ⅰ Programming

G55 Local coordinate system

G56
G57 G52 X Z
G58 Z′

G59 workpiece coordinateZsystem

Origin of coordinate system

Explanation: G52 is in Group 00, and is simple. X(U) Z(W) is the position of origin of the
specified local coordinate system in the current workpiece coordinate system.
Results in absolute or incremental execution are the same.
Notes：
1. Setting of local coordinate system does not change a workpiece coordinate system and a
machine
coordinate system.
2. Temporarily cancel tool nose radius compensation when G52 is executed.
3. After G52 is specified, the local coordinate system does not remain valid until the next G52 is
specified. G52 does not perform movement when it is specified.
4. When a local coordinate system is cancelled, its zero and that of workpiece coordinate system
are
consistent, i.e., command G52 X0 Z0 or G52 U0 W0.
5. When G50 sets a workpiece coordinate system, local coordinate systems of all workpiece
coordinate
systems which axes are specified are cancelled. The local coordinate systems which
coordinate axes are not specified are not cancelled when not all axes’ coordinate value are
specified.
6. Whether the local coordinate system is cancelled is determined by a parameter when reset,
machine zero return or end of program.
Example： X
G54 G55
N6
N1 G28 X0 Z0; 300 X 0 100
Z 0 100
N2 G55 G00 X50 Z50; N4
250
N3 G52 X100 Z100; N5
N3
N4 G00 X50 Z50; 200
N7 Local coordinate system
N5 G01 Z100 F100; N2 created by G52
150
N6 X100;
N7 G52 X0 Z0; 100
N8 G55 workpiece coordinate system
N8 G00 X0 Z0;
50
N9 M30;

50 100 150 200 250 300 350 Z

98
 Chapter 3 G Commands

In N3 block, a local coordinate system is created according to G55 workpiece coordinate system,
and it is cancelled in the block N7.

3.20 Workpiece Coordinate System G54～G59

Command format：G54 workpiece coordinate system 1

Ⅰ Programming
G55 workpiece coordinate system 2
G56 workpiece coordinate system 3
G57 workpiece coordinate system 4
G58 workpiece coordinate system 5
G59 workpiece coordinate system 6
Command function: one of G54～G59 is specified, one of workpiece coordinate system 1～6 is
selected. After a workpiece coordinate system is specified, the specified
point is in the specified workpiece coordinate system till a new workpiece
coordinate system is set.
Explanation: G54～G59 are modal.
In the system, each coordinate system should correspond to ZOFS1~ ZOFS6 of zero offset
value of one workpiece coordinate system, relation between ZOFS1~ ZOFS6 and previous
workpiece is shown below:

Workpiece
Workpiece coordinate Workpiece
coordinate system 3 G56 coordinate
system 2 G55 system 4 G57
Workpiece
coordinate
system 1 G54 Workpiece
coordinate
ZOFS3 system 5
ZOFS4
G58
ZOFS2
ZOFS5 Workpiece
ZOFS1 coordinate
system 6 G59
ZOFS6

EXOFS

Absolute coordinate at machine zero

EXOFS：external workpiece coordinate zero（it is added to zero offset value of each workpiece
coordinate system, its value is a part of tool compensation->setting in the workpiece coordinate
system）
ZOFSn：zero offset value of each workpiece coordinate system ZOFS1～ZOFS6（its value is a
part of tool compensation->setting in the workpiece coordinate system）

When №11.7（APRS）is set to 1, an absolute coordinate system is set after machine zero return,
and then EXOFS and ZOFSn setting values are offset. Current workpiece coordinate setting after
zero return is shown: new workpiece coordinates=current absolute coordinates-（ZOFSn + EXOFS）.
G54～G59 workpiece coordinate system switch
Specifying G54~G59 can switch 6 workpiece coordinate systems to make the system work in
99
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

different workpiece systems. Absolute coordinate variation of current position is the origin offset value
between the new workpiece coordinate system and the old. Namely：new absolute coordinates
=current absolute coordinates -（ZOFS new – ZOFS old）
Example：
Example 1：
Absolute coordinates after zero return is（0,0）；EXOF=(0,0) ； ZOFS1=(-10,-10);
Ⅰ Programming

Absolute coordinate values after zero return in G54: 0 - (-10 + 0) = 10;

Example 2：
Absolute coordinate values after zero return:（20,20）；EXOF=(5,5) ； ZOFS2=(10, 10);
Absolute coordinate values after zero return in G55: 20 - (10 + 5) = 5;
Example 3：
Current absolute coordinates (10,10); EXOF=(5,5) ; ZOFS1=(-10,-10); ZOFS2 =
(-30,-30); absolute coordinate values from G54 to G55: 10-（-30-（-10））= 30
Notes：
1. When №12.7（APRS）is set to 0, the absolute coordinate system after machine
zero return is not set, and the EXOF and ZOFSn offset cannot be executed
because the workpiece coordinate system is not set again.
2. Modification setting of EXOFS and ZOFSn are valid only in non-run state, namely,
setting values of each workpiece coordinate system cannot be modified when a
program is running.
3. The workpiece coordinate system offset is immediately valid after values of
EXOFS and ZOFSn are modified.
4. Whether the incremental coordinates include offset values of the coordinate
system is set by№05.1（PPD）.
5. In tool nose radius compensation mode, compensation is cancelled temporarily
in G54~G59, and is recovered in the next movement command.
6. When G54~G59 and G50 are in the same block, G54~G59 are invalid, but G50 is
valid.
7. When G50 sets the coordinate system, origin of the current workpiece system is
modified. So, there is an offset value of origins between a new coordinate
system set by G50 and previously current coordinate system. The offset value
should be added to offset values of origins of all workpiece coordinate systems,
i.e. all workpiece coordinate systems move the same values, which are shown
below:

Offset value A are all workpiece coordinate systems, which are shown below:

100
 Chapter 3 G Commands

G54 coordinate system

All workpiece coordinate
G55 coordinate system systems offset vector A in
the figure
New coordinate system
New coordinate system
A
Original coordinate system Original coordinate system
A

Ⅰ Programming
ZOFS1
ZOFS2

3.21 Fixed Cycle Command

To simplify programming, the system defines G command of single machining cycle with one
block to complete the rapid traverse to position, linear/thread cutting and rapid traverse to return to
the starting point:
G90: axial cutting cycle;
G92: thread cutting cycle;
G94: radial cutting cycle;
G92 will be introduced in section Thread Function.

3.21.1 Axial Cutting Cycle G90

Command format: G90 X(U) __ Z(W) __ F__; (cylinder cutting)
G90 X(U) __ Z(W) __ R__ F__; (taper cutting)
Command function: From starting point, the cutting cycle of cylindrical surface or taper surface
is completed by radial feeding(X) and axial (Z or X and Z) cutting.
Command specifications:
G90 is modal;
Starting point of cutting: starting position of linear interpolation (cutting feed)
End point of cutting: end position of linear interpolation (cutting feed)
X: X absolute coordinates of cutting end point
U: Different value of X absolute coordinate between end point and starting point of cutting
Z: Different value of Z absolute coordinate between end point and starting point of cutting
W: Different value of Z absolute coordinate between end point and starting point of cutting
R: Different value (radius value) of X absolute coordinates between end point and start point of
cutting. When the signs of R is not the same that of U, R│≤│U/2│; when R＝0 or the input is
default, the cylinder cutting is executed as Fig.3-17, otherwise, the cone cutting is executed
as Fig. 3-18; unit: mm.
Ranges of X, U, Z, W，R are referred to Table 1-2 of Section 1.4.1, unit: mm/inch.
Cycle process:
① X rapidly traverses from starting point to cutting starting point;
② Cutting feed (linear interpolation) from the cutting starting point to cutting end point;
③ X executes the tool retraction at feedrate (opposite direction to the above-mentioned ①), and
return to the position which the absolute coordinates and the starting point are the same;
④ Z rapidly traverses to return to the starting point and the cycle is completed.

101
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual
Ⅰ Programming

Fig. 3-55

Fig. 3-56
Cutting path: Relative position between cutting end point and starting point with U, W, R, and tool path
of U, W, R with different signs are shown in Fig. 3-19:

1） U>0，W<0，R>0 2） U<0，W<0，R<0

Z Z
W

④
R
②
U/2 ③
①
U/2 ①
③
②
R

W ④

X X

3） U>0，W>0，R<0 ,│R│≤│U/2│ 4） U<0，W>0，R>0,│R│≤│U/2│

102
 Chapter 3 G Commands

Z W Z

R
②
④

① ③ ③
U/2 U/2
①

Ⅰ Programming
② ④
R

X X

Fig. 3-57

Example: Fig. 3-58, rod Φ125×110

Fig. 3-58
Program : O0002;
M3 S300 G0 X130 Z3;
G90 X120 Z-110 F200; (A→D, cut Φ120)
X110 Z-30;
X100;
X90;
（A→B，6 times cutting cycle Φ60, increment of 10mm）
X80;
X70;
X60;
G0 X120 Z-30;
G90 X120 Z-44 R-7.5 F150;
Z-56 R-15
Z-68 R-22.5 （B→C，4 times taper cutting）
Z-80 R-30
M30;

103
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

3.21.2 Radial Cutting Cycle G94

Command format: G94 X(U) __ Z(W) __ F__; (face cutting)
G94 X(U) __ Z(W) __ R__ F__; (taper face cutting)
Command function: From starting point, the cutting cycle of cylindrical surface or taper surface
is completed by radial feeding(X) and axial (Z or X and Z) cutting.
Command specifications:
Ⅰ Programming

G94 is modal;
Starting point of cutting: starting position of linear interpolation (cutting feed). Unit: mm;
End point of cutting: end position of linear interpolation (cutting feed). Unit: mm;
X: X absolute coordinate of end point of cutting. Unit: mm;
U: Different value of absolute coordinate from end point to starting point of cutting in X
direction .Unit: mm;
Z: Z absolute coordinates of end point of cutting, Unit: mm;
W: Different value of X absolute coordinate from end point to starting point of cutting, Unit:
mm;
R: Different value(R value) of X absolute coordinates from end point to starting point of
cutting. When the sign of R is not the same as that of U, R, │R│≤│W│.
Radial linear cutting is shown in Fig. 3-21, radial taper cutting is as Fig. 3-60.
Ranges of X, U, Z, W，R are referred to Table 1-2 of Section 1.4.1, unit: mm/inch.
Cycle process:
① Z rapidly traverses from starting point to cutting starting point;
② Cutting feed (linear interpolation) from the cutting starting point to cutting end point;
③ Z executes the tool retraction at the cutting feedrate (opposite direction to the
above-mentioned ①), and returns to the position which the absolute coordinates and
the starting point are the same;
④ The tool rapidly traverses to return to the starting point and the cycle is completed.

Z axis

Rapid traverse
D X/2 Cutting feed
C 3(F)
2(F) 4(R) U/2 A:Starting point(End point)
B:Cutting starting point
B 1(R) A C:Cutting end point

X axis W
Z

Fig. 3-59

104
 Chapter 3 G Commands

Ⅰ Programming
Fig. 3-60
Cutting path: Relative position between cutting end point and starting point with U, W is shown in
Fig.3-61:

1) U>0 W<0 R<0 2) U<0 W<0 R<0

Z Z
W
R
③
①

U/2 ② ④
U/2 ② ④

①
③

W X R
X

3）U>0 W>0 R<0 （│R│≤│W│） 4）U<0 W>0 R<0 （│R│≤│W│）

Z Z
W
R
① ③

U/2 ④ ②
② U/2
④

③ ①

X W X

Fig. 3-61
Example: Fig. 3-62, rod Φ125×112

105
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual
Ⅰ Programming

Fig. 3-62
Program: O0003;
G00 X130 Z5 M3 S1;
G94 X0 Z0 F200 End face cutting
X120 Z-110 F300;
（Outer cutting Φ120）
G00 X120 Z0
G94 X108 Z-30 R-10
X96 R-20
X84 R-30 （C→B→A，cutting Φ60）
X72 R-40
X60 R-50;
M30;

3.21.3 Caution of Fixed Cycle Commands

1) After X(U) , Z(W) , R are executed in the canned cycle command, their command values are
value if X(U) , Z(W) ,R are not redefined by executing a new canned cycle commands. The command
values of X(U) ,Z(W) ,R are cleared if non-modal G command(00 Group) except for G04 or G00,
G01, G02, G03, G32 is executed.
2) In MDI mode, the previous canned cycle can be executed by pressing the cycle start key after
the canned cycle is completed.
3) Pause or single block is executed in G90, G94, the single block stops after the tool moves end
point of current path.

3.22 Multiple Cycle Commands

Multiple cycle commands of the system includes axial roughing cycle G71, radial roughing cycle
G72, closed cutting cycle G73, finishing cycle G70, axial grooving multiple cycle G74, axial grooving
multiple cycle G75 and multiple thread cutting cycle G76. When the system executes these
commands, it automatically counts the cutting times and the cutting path according to the
programmed path, travels of tool infeed and tool retraction, executes multiple machining cycle (tool
infeed → cutting→retract tool→tool infeed ), automatically completes the roughing, finishing
workpiece and the starting point and the end point of command are the same one.
The G76 multi-thread cutting cycle code will describe in the Section of the Thread Function.

106
 Chapter 3 G Commands

3.22.1 Axial Roughing Cycle G71

G71 has two kinds of roughing cycle: type I and type II.
Command format：G71 U(Δd) R(e) F S T ；⑴
G71 P(ns) Q(nf) U(Δu) W(Δw) K0/1 J0/1；⑵
N(ns) G0/G1 X(U)．．； N(ns) G0/G1 X(U) Z(W)…；

Ⅰ Programming
．．．．．．．．； ．．．．．．．．；
．．．．F； ．．．．F；
．．．．S； ⑶Type I ．．．．S； ⑶Type II
．．．． ．．
N(nf)．．．．．； N(nf)．．．．．；

Command function: G71 is divided into three parts:

⑴ 1st blocks for defining the travels of tool infeed and retract tool, the cutting feedrate, the
spindle speed and the tool function when roughing;
⑵ 2nd blocks for defining the block interval, finishing allowance;
⑶ 3rd blocks for some continuous finishing path, counting the roughing path without being
executed actually when executing G71.
According to the finishing path, the finishing allowance, the path of tool infeed and tool retract,
the system automatically counts the path of roughing, the tool cuts the workpiece in paralleling with Z,
and the roughing is completed by multiple executing the cutting cycle tool infeed→cutting→tool
retraction. The starting point and the end point are the same one. The command is applied to the
formed roughing of non-formed rod.
Relevant definitions:
Finishing path: The above-mentioned Part 3 of G71(ns～nf block)defines the finishing path, and
the starting point of finishing path (starting point of ns block)is the same these of
starting point and end point of G71, called A point; the first block of finishing
path(ns block)is used for X rapid traversing or tool infeed, and the end point of
finishing path is called to B point; the end point of finishing path(end point of nf
block)is called to C point. The finishing path is A→B→C.

Roughing path: The finishing path is the one after offsetting the finishing allowance(Δu,Δw) and
is the path contour formed by executing G71. A, B, C point of finishing path
after offset corresponds separately to A’, B’, C’ point of roughing path, and the
final continuous cutting path of G71 is B’→C’ point.
Δd: It is each travel of X tool infeed in roughing, its value: 0.001~99.999（IS_B）/0.0001~99.9999
（IS_C）(unit: mm/inch,radius value) without sign, and the direction of tool infeed is defined
by move direction of ns block. The command value Δd is reserved after executing U(Δd).
The value of system parameter No.051 is regarded as the travel of tool infeed when U(Δd) is
not input.
e: It is travel of X tool retraction in roughing its value: 0~99.999（IS_B）/0~99.9999（IS_C）(unit:
mm/inch,radius value) without sign, and the direction of tool retraction is opposite to that of tool
infeed, the command value e is reserved after R(e) is executed. The value of system
parameter No.052 is regarded as the travel of tool retraction when R(e) is not input.
ns: Block number of the first block of finishing path.

107
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

nf: Block number of the last block of finishing path.

Δu: X finishing allowance is -99999.999~99999.999(IS_B ） /-9999.9999~9999.9999(IS_C)
(diameter, unit: mm/inch, with sign). X coordinate offset of roughing path compared to
finishing path, i.e. the different value of X absolute coordinates between A’ and A. The system
defaults Δu=0 when U(Δu) is not input, i.e. there is no finishing allowance in X direction for
roughing cycle.
Ⅰ Programming

Δw: Z finishing allowance is -99999.999~99999.999(IS_B ） /-9999.9999~9999.9999(IS_C)

(diameter, unit: mm/inch, with sign). the Z coordinate offset of roughing path compared to
finishing path, i.e. the different value of Z absolute coordinate between A’ and A. The system
defaults Δw=0 when W(Δw) is not input, i.e. there is no Z finishing allowance for roughing
cycle.
K: When K is not input or is not 1, the system does not check the program monotonicity except
that the Z value of starting point and end point of the arc or ellipse or parabola or the arc is
more than 180 degree; K=1, the system checks the program monotonicity.
F: Feedrate; S: Spindle speed; T: Tool number, tool offset number.
M, S, T, F: They can be specified in the first G71 or the second ones or program ns～nf. M, S, T,
F functions of M, S, T, F blocks are invalid in G71, and they are valid in G70 finishing blocks.
Type I：
1）Execution process: (Fig. 3-63)
① X rapidly traverses to A’ from A point, X travel is Δu, and Z travel is Δw;
② X moves from A’ is Δd( tool infeed), ns block is for tool infeed at rapid traverse speed with G0,
is for tool infeed at feedrate F with G71, and its direction of tool infeed is that of A→B point;
③ Z executes the cutting feeds to the roughing path, and its direction is the same that of Z
coordinate A→B point;
④ X, Z execute the tool retraction e (45° straight line) at feedrate, the directions of tool
retraction is opposite to that of too infeed;
⑤ Z rapidly retracts at rapid traverse speed to the position which is the same that of Z
coordinate;
⑥ After executing X tool infeed (Δd+e)again, the end point of traversing tool is still on the
middle point of straight line between A’ and B’(the tool does not reach or exceed B’), and
after executing the tool infeed (Δd+e)again, execute ③; after executing the tool infeed
(Δd+e)again, the end point of tool traversing reaches B’ point or exceeds the straight line
between A’→B’ point and X executes the tool infeed to B’ point, and then the next step is
executed;
⑦ Cutting feed from B’ to C’ point along the roughing path;
⑧ Rapid traverse to A from C’ point and the program jumps to the next clock following nf block
after G71 cycle is ended.

108
 Chapter 3 G Commands

Ⅰ Programming
Fig. 3-63 G71 cycle path

2）Coordinate offset direction with finishing allowance:

Δu, Δw define the coordinate offset and cut-in direction in finishing, and their sign symbol are as
follows Fig. 3-64: B→C for finishing path, B’→C’ for roughing path and A is the tool start-up point.

Fig.3-64
Type II：
The type II is different from the type I as follows:
1）Relative definition: More one parameter than the type I.
J：When J is not input or J is not 1, the system does not execute the run along the roughing
contour; J=1: the system executes the run along the roughing contour.

109
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

2）The system does not execute the monotonous increasing or the monotonous decreasing
along X external contour, and the workpiece can be up to 10 grooves as follows:
Ⅰ Programming

Fig. 3-65（type Ⅱ）
But, the Z external contour must be the monotonous increasing or the monotonous
decreasing, and the following contour cannot be machined:

Fig. 3-66（type Ⅱ）
3）The first tool cutting need not the vertical: The machining can be executed when Z is the
monotonous change shape as follows:

Fig. 3-67
4）After the turning, the system should execute the tool retraction, the retraction travel is
specified by R（e）or No. 52 as follows:

Fig. 3-68（typeⅡ）
5）Command execution process：roughing path A->H

110
 Chapter 3 G Commands

C B
24

G F 25
39 23
19

40 20
38 22 18
34 14

35 15 26 21

Ⅰ Programming
37 33 17 13
29 7

36 E D 8 16
30 41 28
32 9 12 6
27
10 2

3 31 11
5 1
H 4
A
42

Fig. 3-69（typeⅡ）

Notes：
1. ns block is only G00, G01. When the workpiece is type II, the system must specify the
two axes X(U) and Z(W), and W0 must be specified when Z does not move;
2. For type II, only X finishing allowance can be specified; when Z finishing allowance is
specified, the whole machining path offsets, and it can be specified to 0;
3. For type II, after the current grooving is completed to execute the next, the tool
approaches the workpiece(remark 25 and 26) in the remainder tool retraction distance
at G1 speed; when the tool retraction is 0 or the remainder distance is less than the tool
retraction, and the tool approaches the workpiece at G1 speed;
4. Some workpiece without remarking the type I or the type II adapts the both;
5. For the finishing path(ns～nf block)，Z dimension must be monotonous change(always
increasing or decreasing), X dimension in the type I must be monotonous change and
does not need in the type II;
6. ns～nf blocks in programming must be followed G71 blocks. If they are in front of G71
blocks, the system automatically searches and executes ns～nf blocks, and then
executes the next program following nf block after they are executed, which causes the
system executes ns～nf blocks repetitively;
7. ns～nf blocks are used for counting the roughing path and the blocks are not executed
when G71 is executed. F, S, T commands of ns～nf blocks are invalid when G71 is
executed, at the moment, F, S, T commands of G71 blocks are valid. F, S, T of ns～nf
blocks are valid when executing ns～nf to command G70 finishing cycle;
8. In ns～nf blocks, there are only G commands: G00, G01, G02, G03, G04, G05, G6.2,
G6.3, G7.2, G7.3, G96, G97, G98, G99, G40, G41, G42 and the system cannot call
subprograms (M98/M99);
9. In ns～nf ,the program block quantity cannot exceed 100;
10. G96, G97, G98, G99, G40, G41, G42 are invalid when G71 is executed, and are valid
when G70 is executed;
11. When G71 is executed, the system can stop the automatic run and manual traverse, but
return to the position before manual traversing when G71 is executed again, otherwise,
the following path will be wrong;

111
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

12. When the system is executing the feed hold or single block, the program pauses after
the system has executed end point of current path;
13. ᇞd,ᇞu are specified by the same U and different with or without being specified P, Q
commands;
14. There are no the same block number in ns~nf when compound cycle commands are
executed repetitively in one program;
15. The tool retraction point should be high or low as possible to avoid crashing the
Ⅰ Programming

workpiece.
Cutter radius compensation:
When the cutter radius compensation should be used in the compound cycle code (G70,
G71, G72 or G73), the G41/G42 code should be specified at the 1st block (ns block) of the
finish-turning path; otherwise, the cutter compensation will not be used in the compound cycle; it
is not necessary to specify the G40 in the finish-turning path. The cutter radius compensation will
authomatically cancel when the compound cycle is completed. Actually, when the cutter radius
compensation is used in the compound cycle code, the CNC system is performed the cutter nose
radius offset for the finish-turning path instead of entering the state of the cutter radius
compensation. Therefore, the cutter radius compensation state on the position interface will not
change.
The cutter radius compensation genterates before entering the compound cycle, temporarily
cancel the cutter radius compensation; restore the cutter radius compensation when the cycle
end tool leaves from the cycle start; refer to the following schematic:

Fig. 3-70

When the compound the cycle is performed in the rough machining, perform the infeed
along with the cycle start and 1st point offset vector point of the finish-turing path, and its feed
value is ᇞd; refer to the following figure:

112
 Chapter 3 G Commands

B B

Z Z
X X

Ⅰ Programming
C C
A A
Fig. 3-71 G71 cycle I start-up

Z
X

C A
Fig 3-72 G71 cycle II start-up
Example：Fig. 3-73（Type I）

Fig. 3-73
Program: O0004;
G00 X200 Z10 M3 S800; (Spindle clockwise with 800 r/min)

113
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

G71 U2 R1 F200; (Cutting depth each time 4mm, tool retraction 2mm [in
diameter])
G71 P80 Q120 U0.5 W0.2; (roughing a---e, machining allowance: X, 1mm;Z, 2mm)
N80 G00 X40 S1200; (Positioning)
G01 Z-30 F100 ; (a→b)
X60 W-30; (b→c) a→b→c→d→e blocks for finishing path
W-20; (c→d)
Ⅰ Programming

N120 X100 W-10; (d→e)

G70 P80 Q120; (a---e blocks for finishing path)
M30; (End of block)

3.22.2 Radial Roughing Cycle G72

Command format：G72 W(Δd) R(e) F S T ； ⑴
G72 P(ns) Q(nf) U(Δu) W(Δw) K0/1 J0/1； ⑵
N(ns) G00(G01) X(U)_； N(ns) G00(G01) X(U)_ Z(W)_
．．．F； ．．．F；
．．．S； ⑶type I ．．．S； ⑶type II
．．． ．．．
N(nf)．．．．．； N(nf)．．．．．；

Command function: G72 is divided into three parts:

⑴ 1st blocks for defining the travels of tool infeed and tool retraction, the cutting speed, the
spindle speed and the tool function in roughing;
⑵ 2nd blocks for defining the block interval, finishing allowance;
⑶ 3rd blocks for some continuous finishing path, counting the roughing path without being
executed actually when G72 is executed.
According to the finishing path, the finishing allowance, the path of tool infeed and retract tool,
the system automatically counts the path of roughing, the tool cuts the workpiece in paralleling with Z,
and the roughing is completed by multiple executing the cutting cycle tool infeed→cutting feed→tool
retraction. The starting point and the end point of G72 are the same one. The command is applied to
the formed roughing of non-formed rod.
Relevant definitions:
Finishing path: the above-mentioned Part ⑶ of G71(ns～nf block)defines the finishing path,
and the starting point of finishing path (i.e. starting point of ns block)is the same
these of starting point and end point of G72, called A point; the first block of
finishing path(ns block)is used for Z rapid traversing or cutting feed, and the end
point of finishing path is called to B point; the end point of finishing path(end
point of nf block)is called to C point. The finishing path is A→B→C.
Roughing path: The finishing path is the one after offsetting the finishing allowance Δu, Δw) and
is the path contour formed by executing G72. A, B, C point of finishing path after
offset corresponds separately to A’, B’, C’ point of roughing path, and the final
continuous cutting path of G72 is B’→C’ point.
Δd: it is Z cutting in roughing, its value: 0.001~99.999（IS_B）/0.0001~99.9999（IS_C）(unit:
mm/inch) without sign symbol, and the direction of tool infeed is determined by ns block

114
 Chapter 3 G Commands

traverse direction. The value of system parameter No.051 is regarded as the tool infeed
clearance when W(Δd) is not input.
e: it is Z tool retraction clearance in roughing, its value: 0~99.999（IS_B）/0~99.9999（IS_C）
(unit: mm) without sign symbol, and the direction of tool retraction is opposite to that of tool
infeed, the specified value e is reserved after R(e) is executed. The value of system
parameter No.052 is regarded as the tool retraction clearance when R(e) is not input.

Ⅰ Programming
ns: Block number of the first block of finishing path.
nf: Block number of the last block of finishing path.
Δu ： it is X finishing allowance in roughing, its range: -99999.999~99999.999(IS_B ）
/-9999.9999~9999.9999(IS_C) (X coordinate offset of roughing contour corresponding to
the finishing path, i.e. X absolute coordinate difference between A’ and A.(diameter, unit:
mm/inch, with sign symbol).
Δw ： it is Z finishing allowance in roughing, its range: -99999.999~99999.999(IS_B ）
/-9999.9999~9999.9999(IS_C) (Z coordinate offset of roughing contour corresponding to
the finishing path, i.e. Z absolute coordinate difference between A’ and A.(diameter, unit:
mm/inch, with sign symbol).
When K is not input or is not 1, the system does not check the program monotonicity except
that the Z value of starting point and end point of the arc or ellipse or parabola or the arc
is more than 180 degree; K=1, the system checks the program monotonicity.
F: Cutting feedrate; S: Spindle speed; T: Tool number, tool offset number.
M, S, T, F: They can be specified in the first G72 or the second ones or program ns～nf. M, S, T,
F functions of M, S, T, F blocks are invalid in G72, and they are valid in G70 finishing blocks.
Execution process:
①X rapidly traverses to A’ from A point, X travel is Δu, and Z travel is Δw;
②X moves from A’ is Δd( tool infeed), ns block is for tool infeed at rapid traverse speed
with G0, is for tool infeed at G72 feedrate F in G1, and its direction of tool infeed is
that of A→B point;
③X executes the cutting feeds to the roughing path, and its direction is the same that of
X coordinate B→C point;
④X, Z execute the tool retraction e (45°straight line)at feedrate, the directions of tool
retraction is opposite to that of tool infeed ;
⑤X rapidly retracts at rapid traverse speed to the position which is the same that of Z
coordinate;
⑥After Z tool infeed (Δd+e)again is executed, the end point of traversing tool is still on
the middle point of straight line between A’ and B’(the tool does not reach or exceed
B’), and after Z executes the tool infeed (Δd+e)again, ③ is executed; after the tool
infeed (Δd+e) is executed again, the end point of tool traversing reaches B’ point or
exceeds the straight line between A’→B’ point and Z executes the tool infeed to B’
point, and then the next step ⑦ is executed;
⑦Cutting feed from B’ to C’ point along the roughing path;
⑧Rapidly traverse to A from C’ point and the program jumps to the next clock following
nf block after G71 cycle is completed.

115
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual
Ⅰ Programming

Fig. 3-74

Command specifications:
1. ns～nf blocks in programming must be followed G72 blocks. If they are in the front of
G72 blocks, the system automatically searches and executes ns～nf blocks, and then
executes the next program following nf block after they are executed, which causes the
system executes ns～nf blocks repetitively;
2. ns～nf blocks are used for counting the roughing path and the blocks are not executed
when G72 is executed. F, S, T commands of ns～nf blocks are invalid when G72 is
executed, at the moment, F, S, T commands of G72 blocks are valid. F, S, T of ns～nf
blocks are valid when executing ns～nf to command G70 finishing cycle;
3. The dimensions in X, Z direction must be changed monotonously (always increasing or
reducing) for the finishing path;
4. In ns～nf blocks, there are only G commands: G01, G02, G03, G04, G05, G6.2, G6.3,
G7.2, G7.3, G96, G97, G98, G99, G40, G41, G42 and the system cannot call
subprograms (M98/M99);
5. G96, G97, G98, G99, G40, G41, G42 are invalid when G72 is executed, and are valid
when G70 is done;
6. In the ns～nf, the program block quantity cannot exceed 100;
7. When G72 is executed, the system can stop the automatic run and manual traverse, but
return to the position before manual traversing when G72 is executed again, otherwise,
the following path will be wrong;
8. When the system is executing the feed hold or single block, the program pauses after
the system has executed end point of current path;
9. ᇞd, ᇞw are specified by the same W and different with or without being specified P, Q
commands;
10. There are no the same block number in ns~nf when compound cycle commands are
executed repetitively in one program;
11. The tool retraction point should be high or low as possible to avoid crashing the
workpiece.
Coordinate offset direction with finishing allowance:

116
 Chapter 3 G Commands

Δu, Δw define the coordinate offset and its direction of cut-in in finishing, and their sign symbol
are as follows Fig. 3-29: B→C for finishing path, B’→C’ for roughing path and A is the tool start-up
point.
ΔU>0、ΔW>0 ΔU>0、ΔW<0

C Z C Z
C' C'

Ⅰ Programming
B A A B
A' A'
X B' X

ΔU<0、ΔW>0 ΔU<0、ΔW<0

A' Z A' Z
B A A B

C' C'
X C X C

Fig.3-75
The selection both type I and II
G72 owns type I and II. It is necessary to use the type II when the slot in the finish-turining
shape.
The tool-retraction operation of the type I and II machining are different after the
rough-turning is performed towards to the 2nd axis of the panel (It is the X axis on the ZX
panel). Type I executes the tool-retraction along with the 45°, and the type II is performed
the cutting along with the finish-turning. When there is no slot in the finish-turing shape,
flexibly use based upon the tool-retraction method.
Select the type I or II in the 1st block (Block number is ns) of the finish-turning path.
1) Type I selection
Only specify the command of the 1st axis of the panel (It is the Z axis on the ZX panel). There
is no command of the 2nd axis (It is the X axis on the ZX panel) of the panel.
2) Type II selection
Specify the command of the 2nd axis (It is X axis on the ZX panel) and 1st axis (It is Z axis on
the ZX panel) on the panel. If the movement does not on the 2nd axis of the panel instead of using
the type II, the increment code specified the movement value is 0, which is programmed (It is U0
on the ZX panel).
The distinction between the G72 type II and G71 type II:
The differences from the G71 are shown below:
1) G72 moves the cutting workpiece by the 2nd axis paralleled with the panel (It is the X axis
on the ZX panel).
2) It is not necessary that the shape is simply added or reduced of the 1st axis (It is the Z axis
on the ZX panel) on the panel; the sunken part (slot) can be set. However, there is not
alternative other than the simply change along with the 2nd axis (It is X axis on the ZX panel)
direction on the panel.
3) In the finish-turning, the block parallels with the 2nd axis on the panel which is regarded as
botton of the slot.
4) Tool is temporarily returned to the start after the overall rough machining cuttings of the
2nd axis on the panel are performed, and then the rough machining cutting is executed.
G72 code cutter radius compensation function:

117
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

Refer to the partial description of the G71 code cutter radius compensation function.
G72 code machining example (Type I):
Ⅰ Programming

Fig.3-76
Program:
O0005;
G00 X176 Z10 M03 S500 (Change No.2 tool and execute its compensation, spindle
CW rotation with 500 r/min)
G72 W2.0 R0.5 F300; (Tool infeed 2mm, tool retraction 0.5mm)
G72 P10 Q20 U0.2 W0.1; (Roughing a--d,X roughing allowance 0.2mm and Z 0.1mm)
N10 G00 Z-55 S800 ; (Rapid traverse)
G01 X160 F120; (Infeed to a point)
X80 W20; (Machining a—b) Blocks for finishing path
W15; (Machining b—c)
N20 X40 W20 ; (Machining c—d)
G70 P050 Q020 M30; (Finishing a—d)

3.22.3 Closed Cutting Cycle G73

Command format: G73 U(Δi) W (Δk) R (d) F S T ; ⑴
G73 P(ns) Q(nf) U(Δu) W(Δw) ; ⑵
N (ns) ．．．．．;
．．．．．．．;
．．．．F;
．．．．S; ⑶
．．．．;
·
N (nf) ．．．．．;
Command functions: G73 is divided into three parts:
⑴ Blocks for defining the travels of tool infeed and tool retraction, the cutting speed, the spindle
speed and the tool function when roughing;
⑵ Blocks for defining the block interval, finishing allowance;

118
 Chapter 3 G Commands

⑶ Blocks for some continuous finishing path, counting the roughing path without being
executed actually when executing G73.
According to the finishing allowance, the travel of tool retraction and the cutting times, the system
automatically counts the travel of roughing offset, the travel of each tool infeed and the path of
roughing, the path of each cutting is the offset travel of finishing path, the cutting path
approaches gradually the finishing one, and last cutting path is the finishing one according to the

Ⅰ Programming
finishing allowance. The starting point and end point of G73 are the same one, and G73 is
applied to roughing for the formed rod. G73 is non-modal and its path is shown in Fig.3-77.
Relevant definitions:
Finishing path: The above-mentioned Part 3 of G73 (ns～nf block)defines the finishing path,
and the starting point of finishing path (start point of ns block)is the same these
of starting point and end point of G73, called A point; the end point of the first
block of finishing path(ns block)is called B point; the end point of finishing
path(end point of nf block) is called C point. The finishing path is A→B→C.
Roughing path: It is one group of offset path of finishing one, and the roughing path times are
the same that of cutting. After the coordinates offset, A, B, C of finishing path
separately corresponds to An, Bn , Cn of roughing path(n is the cutting times,
the first cutting path is A1, B1, C1 and the last one is Ad, Bd, Cd). The
coordinates offset value of the first cutting compared to finishing path is
(Δi×2+Δu, Δw+Δk) (diameter programming) , the coordinates offset value of
the last cutting compared to finishing path is(Δu, Δw) , the coordinates offset
value of each cutting compared to the previous one is as follows:
i  2 k
( , )
d 1 d 1
Δi: It is X tool retraction clearance in roughing, and its range is ±99999999× least input
increment (radius, unit: mm/inch, with sign symbol) , Δi is equal to X coordinate offset
value (radius value) of A1 point compared to Ad point. The X total cutting travel(radius
value) is equal to |Δi| in roughing, and X cutting direction is opposite to the sign of Δi: Δi
＞0, the system executes X negative cutting in roughing.The No.053 value is regarded
as X tool retraction clearance in roughing when U(Δi) is not input.
Δk: It is Z tool retraction clearance in roughing, and its range is -99999.999 ～
99999.999(IS_B ） /-9999.9999 ～ 9999.9999(IS_C) (radius, unit: mm/inch, with sign
symbol) , Δk is equal to Z coordinate offset value (radius value) of A1 point compared to
Ad point. Z total cutting travel(radius value) is equal to |Δk| in roughing, and Z cutting
direction is opposite to the sign of Δk: Δk＞0, the system executes Z negative cutting in
roughing.The No.054 value is regarded as Z tool retraction clearance in roughing when
W(Δk) is not input.
d: It is the cutting times 1~9999 (unit: times). R5 means the closed cutting cycle is completed
by 5 times cutting.No.055 value is regarded as the cutting times when R(d) is not input.
When the cutting times is 1, the system completes the closed cutting cycle based on 2
times cutting.
ns: Block number of the first block of finishing path.
nf: Block number of the last block of finishing path.
Δu: It is X finishing allowance and its range is -99999.999~99999.999(IS_B ）
/-9999.9999~9999.9999(IS_C) (diameter, unit: mm/inch, with sign symbol) and is the X
coordinate offset of roughing path compared to finishing path, i.e. the different value of

119
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

X absolute coordinates of A1 compared to A. Δu＞0,it is the offset of the last X positive

roughing path compared to finishing path. The system defaults Δu=0 when U(Δu) is
not input, i.e. there is no X finishing allowance for roughing cycle.
Δw: It is Z finishing allowance and its range is-99999.999~99999.999(IS_B ）
/-9999.9999~9999.9999(IS_C) (diameter, unit: mm/inch, with sign symbol) and is the X
coordinate offset of roughing path compared to finishing path, i.e. the different value of Z
Ⅰ Programming

absolute coordinates of A1 compared to A. Δw＞0,it is the offset of the last X positive

roughing path compared to finishing path. The system defaults Δw=0 when W(Δw) is not
input, i.e. there is no Z finishing allowance for roughing cycle.
F: Feedrate; S: Spindle speed; T: Tool number, tool offset number.
M, S, T, F: They can be specified in the first G73 or the second ones or program ns～nf. M, S,
T, F functions of M, S, T, F blocks are invalid in G73, and they are valid in G70 finishing blocks.
Execution process: (Fig. 3-77)
① A→A1: Rapid traverse;
② First roughing A1→B1→C1 :
A1→B1: Rapid traverse speed in ns block in G0, cutting feedrate specified by G73 in ns block
in G1;
B1→C1: Cutting feed.
③ C1→A2: Rapid traverse.
④ Second roughing A2→B2→C2 :
A2→B2: Rapid traverse speed in ns block in G0, cutting feedrate specified by G73 in ns block
in G1;
B2→C2: Cutting feed.
⑤ C2→A3: Rapid traverse:
…………
No. n times roughing, An→Bn→Cn :
An→Bn: ns Rapid traverse speed in ns block in G0, cutting feedrate specified by G73 in ns
block in G1;
Bn→Cn: Cutting feed.
Cn→An+1: Rapid traverse;
…………
Last roughing, Ad→Bd→Cd :
Ad→Bd: Rapid traverse speed in ns block in G0, cutting feedrate specified by G73 in ns block
in G1;
Bd→Cd: Cutting feed.
Cd→A: Rapid traverse to starting point;

120
 Chapter 3 G Commands

Ⅰ Programming
Fig. 3-77 G73 path
Command specifications:
1. ns～nf blocks in programming must be followed G73 blocks. If they are in the front of
G73 blocks, the system automatically searches and executes ns～nf blocks, and then
executes the next program following nf block after they are executed, which causes the
system executes ns～nf blocks repetitively.
2. ns～nf blocks are used for counting the roughing path and the blocks are not executed
when G73 is executed. F, S, T commands of ns～nf blocks are invalid when G71 is
executed, at the moment, F, S, T commands of G73 blocks are valid. F, S, T of ns～nf
blocks are valid when executing ns～nf to command G70 finishing cycle.
3. There are only G00, G01 in ns block.
4. In ns～nf blocks, there are only G commands: G00, G01, G02, G03, G04, G05, G6.2,
G6.3, G7.2, G7.3, G96, G97, G98, G99, G40, G41, G42 and the system cannot call
subprograms (M98/M99) .
5. In ns～nf, the program block quantity cannot exceed 100;
6. G96, G97, G98, G99, G40, G41, G42 are invalid when G73 is executed, and are valid
when G70 is executed.
7. When G73 is executed, the system can stop the automatic run and manual traverse, but
return to the position before manual traversing when G73 is executed again, otherwise,
the following path will be wrong.
8. When the system is executing the feed hold or single block, the program pauses after
the system has executed end point of current path.
9. ᇞi, ᇞu are specified by the same U and Δk, Δw are specified by the same U, and they
are different with or without being specified P,Q commands.
10. G73 cannot be executed in MDI, otherwise, the system alarms.
11. There are no the same block number in ns~nf when compound cycle commands are
executed repetitively in one program.
12. The tool retraction point should be high or low as possible to avoid crashing the
workpiece.
Coordinate offset direction with finishing allowance:

121
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

Δi, Δk define the coordinates offset and its direction of roughing; Δu, Δw define the coordinate
offset and the cut-in direction in finishing, and their sign symbols are as follows Fig. 3-32: A is tool
start-up point, B→C for workpiece contour, B’→C’ for roughing contour and B’’→C’’ for finishing path.

1）Δi<0 Δk>0， △u<0 Δw>0； 2）Δi>0 Δk>0， △u>0 Δw>0；

Z Z
B ’’
Ⅰ Programming

A B’
C A’
C’ B
A ’’
C ’’

C ’’
B C’ A ’’
B’ C A’
B ’’ A

X X

3）Δi<0 Δk<0， △u<0 Δw<0； 4）Δi>0 Δk<0， △u>0 Δw<0；

Z B’’ Z
B’
A B
A’ C
A’’ C’
C’’

C’’
A’’ C’
A’
C
A
B
B’
B’’
X X

G73 code cutter radius compensation function:

Refer to the parital description of the G71 code cutter radius compensation.
G73 code machining example:

0.3

0.5/2

0.5/2
starting point
(200,10)
0.3

Fig.3-78

122
 Chapter 3 G Commands

Program: O0006;
G99 G00 X200 Z10 M03 S500; (Specify feedrate per rev and position starting point and
start spindle)
G73 U1.0 W1.0 R3 ; (X tool retraction with 2mm, Z 1mm)
G73 P14 Q19 U0.5 W0.3 F0.3 ; (X roughing with 0.5 allowance and Z 0.3mm)
N14 G00 X80 W-40 ;

Ⅰ Programming
G01 W-20 F0.15 S600 ;
X120 W-10 ;
W-20 ; Blocks for finishing
G02 X160 W-20 R20 ;
N19 G01 X180 W-10 ;
G70 P14 Q19 M30; (Finishing)

3.22.4 Finishing Cycle G70

Command format: G70 P(ns) Q(nf) ;
Command function: The tool executes the finishing of workpiece from starting point along with
the finishing path defined by ns～nf blocks. After executing G71, G72 or
G73 to roughing, execute G70 to finishing and single cutting of finishing
allowance is completed. The tool returns to starting point and execute the
next block following G70 block after G70 cycle is completed.
ns: Block number of the first block of finishing path.
nf: Block number of the last block of finishing path.
G70 path is defined by programmed one of ns～nf blocks. Relationships of relative position
of ns, nf block in G70～G73 blocks are as follows:
G71/G72/G73 ……；
N (ns) ．．．．．．
．．．．．．．．
·F
·S Blocks for finishing path
·
·
N (nf)……
．．．
G70 P(ns) Q(nf)；

Command specifications:
1. ns～nf blocks in programming must be followed G70 blocks.
2. F, S, T in ns～nf blocks are valid when executing ns～nf to command G70 finishing
cycle.
3. G96, G97, G98, G99, G40, G41, G42 are valid in G70;
4. When G70 is executed, the system can stop the automatic run and manual traverse, but
return to the position before manual traversing when G70 is executed again, otherwise,
the following path will be wrong.
5. When the system is executing the feed hold or single block, the program pauses after
the system has executed end point of current path.

123
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

6. There are no the same block number in ns~nf when compound cycle commands are
executed repetitively in one program.
7. In ns～nf, the program block quantity cannot exceed 100;
8. The tool retraction point should be high or low as possible to avoid crashing the
workpiece.
9.
Ⅰ Programming

3.22.5 Axial Grooving Multiple Cycle G74

Command format: G74 R(e) ;
G74 X(U) Z(W) P(Δi) Q(Δk) R(Δd) F ;
Command function: Axial (X axis) tool infeed cycle compounds radial discontinuous cutting
cycle: Tool infeeds from starting point in radial direction( Z), retracts, infeeds again,
and again and again, and last tool retracts in axial direction, and retracts to the Z
position in radial direction, which is called one radial cutting cycle; tool infeeds in axial
direction and execute the next radial cutting cycle; cut to end point of cutting, and
then return to starting point (starting point and end point are the same one in G74),
which is called one radial grooving compound cycle. Directions of axial tool infeed
and radial tool infeed are defined by relative position between end point X(U) Z(W)
and starting point of cutting. G75 is used for machining radial loop groove or column
surface by radial discontinuously cutting, breaking stock and stock removal.
Relevant definitions:
Starting point of axial cutting cycle: starting position of axial tool infeed for each axial cutting
cycle, defining with An(n=1,2,3……), Z coordinate of An is
the same that of starting point A, the different value of X
coordinate between An and An-1 is Δi. The starting point A1
of the first axial cutting cycle is the same as the starting
point A, and the X coordinate of starting point (Af ) of the
last axial cutting cycle is the same that of cutting end point.
End point of axial tool infeed: starting position of axial tool infeed for each axial cutting cycle,
defining with Bn(n=1,2,3……), Z coordinate of Bn is the same
that of cutting end point, X coordinate of Bn is the same that of
An , and the end point (Bf ) of the last axial tool infeed is the
same that of cutting end point.
End point of radius tool retraction: end position of radius tool infeed (travel of tool infeed is Δd)
after each axial cutting cycle reaches the end point of axial
tool infeed, defining with Cn(n=1,2,3……), Z coordinate of
Cn is the same that of cutting end point, and the different
value of X coordinate between Cn and An is Δd;
End point of axial cutting cycle: end position of axial tool retraction from the end point of
radius tool retraction, defining with Dn(n=1, 2, 3……), Z
coordinate of Dn is the same that of starting point, X
coordinate of Dn is the same that of Cn (the different value
of X coordinate between it and An is Δd);
Cutting end point: it is defined by X(U) Z(W) , and is defined with Bf of the last axial
tool infeed.
R(e) : it is the tool retraction clearance after each axial(Z) tool infeed, and its range is
0~99.999(IS-B)/0~99.9999(IS-C) (unit:mm,radius) without sign symbols. The specified

124
 Chapter 3 G Commands

value is reserved validly after R(e) is executed. The NO.056 value is regarded as the
tool retraction clearance when R(e) is not input.
X: X absolute coordinate value of cutting end point Bf (unit: mm).
U: Different value of X absolute coordinate between cutting end point Bf and starting point.
Z: Z absolute coordinate value of cutting end point Bf (unit: mm).
W: Different value of Z absolute coordinates between cutting end point Bf and starting point.

Ⅰ Programming
P(Δi) ：radial(X) cutting for each axial cutting cycle , range: 0＜Δi≤9999999(IS_B)/0＜Δi≤
99999999（IS_C） (unit: least input increment, diameter value, without sign symbol).
Q(Δk)：radial(Z) cutting for each axial cutting cycle, range: 0＜Δk≤ 9999999(IS_B)/0＜Δk
≤99999999（IS_C）(unit: least input increment, diameter value, without sign symbol).
R(Δd) : radial (X) tool retraction after cutting to end point of axial cutting, range: 0~99999999×
least input increment (unit: mm/inch, diameter value, without sign symbol).. The radial (X)
tool retraction clearance is 0 when the system defaults the axial cutting end point. The
system defaults the tool retraction is executed in positive direction when X(U) and P(Δi)
are omitted.
Execution process: (Fig. 3-79)
① Axial (Z) cutting feed ᇞk from the starting point of axial cutting cycle, feed in Z
negative direction when the coordinates of cutting end point is less than that of
starting point in Z direction, otherwise, feed in Z positive direction;
② Axial (Z) rapid tool retraction e and its direction is opposite to the feed direction of
①;
③ X executes the cutting feed (Δk+e) again, the end point of cutting feed is still in it
between starting point An of axial cutting cycle and end point of axial tool infeed, Z
executes the cutting feed (Δk+e)again and execute ②; after Z executing the cutting
feed (Δk+e)again, the end point of cutting feed is on Bn or is not on it between An and
Bn cutting feed to Bn in Z direction and then execute ④;
④ Radial(X) rapid tool retraction ᇞd/2 to Cn , when X coordinate of Bf (cutting end point)
is less than that of A (starting point), retract tool in X positive, otherwise, retract tool
in X negative direction;
⑤ Axial(Z axial) rapid retract tool to Dn, No. n axial cutting cycle is completed. If the
current axial cutting cycle is not the last one, execute ⑥ ; if it is the previous one
before the last axial cutting cycle, execute ⑦;
⑥ Radial(X axial)rapid tool infeed, and it direction is opposite to ④ retract tool. If the
end point of tool infeed is still on it between A and Af (starting point of last axial
cutting cycle) after X executes the tool infeed (ᇞd/2+ᇞi/2) , i.e. Dn→An+1 and then
execute ① (start the next axial cutting cycle); if X end point of tool infeed is not on it
between Dn and Af after tool infeed (ᇞd/2+ᇞi/2), rapidly traverse to Af and execute
① to start the first axial cutting cycle;
⑦ X rapidly traverse to return to A, and G74 is completed.

125
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual
Ⅰ Programming

Fig. 3-34 G74 path

Command specifications:
1. The cycle movement is executed by Z(W) and P(Δk) blocks of G74, and the movement
is not executed if only “G74 R(e) ; ” block is executed;
2. Δd and e are specified by the same address and whether there are Z(W) and P(Δk)
word or not in blocks to distinguish them;
3. The tool can stop in Auto mode and traverse in Manual mode when G74 is executed,
but the tool must return to the position before executing in Manual mode when G74 is
executed again, otherwise the following path will be wrong.
4. When the single block is running, programs dwell after each axial cutting cycle is
completed.
5. R(Δd) must be omitted in blind hole cutting, and so there is no distance of tool retraction
when the tool cuts to axial end point of cutting.
Example：Fig. 3-80

126
 Chapter 3 G Commands

Ⅰ Programming
Fig.3-80
Program (suppose that the grooving tool width is 4mm, system least increment is 0.0001mm):
O0007;
G0 X36 Z5 M3 S500; (Start spindle and position to starting point of machining)
G74 R0.5 ; (Machining cycle)
G74 X20 Z-20 P30000 Q50000 F50; (Z tool infeed 5mm and tool retraction 0.5mm each time;
rapid return to starting point (Z5) after cutting feed to end point
(Z-20), X tool infeed 3mm and cycle the above-mentioned
steps)
M30; (End of program)

3.22.6 Radial Grooving Multiple Cycle G75

Command format：G75 R(e)；
G75 X(U) Z(W) P(Δi) Q(Δk) R(Δd) F ；
Command function: Axial (Z) tool infeed cycle compounds radial discontinuous cutting cycle:
Tool infeeds from starting point in radial direction, retracts, infeeds again,
and again and again, and last tool retracts in axial direction, and retracts to
position in radial direction, which is called one radial cutting cycle; tool
infeeds in axial direction and execute the next radial cutting cycle; cut to
end point of cutting, and then return to starting point (starting point and
end point are the same one in G75), which is called one radial grooving
compound cycle. Directions of axial tool infeed and radial tool infeed are
defined by relative position between end point X(U) Z(W) and starting
point of cutting. G75 is used for machining radial loop groove or column
surface by radial discontinuously cutting, breaking stock and stock
removal.
Relevant definitions:
Starting point of radial cutting cycle: Starting position of axial tool infeed for each radial cutting
cycle, defined by An(n=1, 2, 3……), X coordinate of An is
the same that of starting point A, the different value of X
coordinate between An and An-1 is Δk. The starting point
A1 of the first radial cutting cycle is the same as the
starting point A, and Z starting point (Af ) of the last axial
cutting cycle is the same that of cutting end point.
127
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

End point of radial tool infeed: Starting position of radial tool infeed for each radial cutting
cycle, defined by Bn (n=1, 2, 3……), X coordinates of Bn is
the same that of cutting end point, Z coordinates of Bn is the
same that of An, and the end point (Bf ) of the last radial tool
infeed is the same that of cutting end point.
End point of axial tool retraction: End position of axial tool infeed (travel of tool infeed is Δd)
after each axial cutting cycle reaches the end point of axial
Ⅰ Programming

tool infeed, defining with Cn(n=1,2,3……), X coordinate of

Cn is the same that of cutting end point, and the different
value of Z coordinate between Cn and An is Δd;
End point of radial cutting cycle: End position of radial tool retraction from the end point of
axial tool retraction, defined by Dn(n=1, 2, 3……), X
coordinate of Dn is the same that of starting point, Z
coordinates of Dn is the same that of Cn (the different value
of Z coordinate between it and An is Δd);
Cutting end point: It is defined by X(U) Z(W) , and is defined with Bf of the last radial
tool infeed.
R(e) : It is the tool retraction clearance after each radial(X) tool infeed, its range is 0~99.999 (unit:
mm, radius value) without sign symbols. The specified value is reserved validly after R(e)
is executed and the data is switched and saved to No.056. NO.056 value is regarded as
the tool retraction clearance when R(e) is not input.
X: X absolute coordinate value of cutting end point Bf (unit: mm).
U: Different value of X absolute coordinate between cutting end point Bf and starting point.
Z: Z absolute coordinate value of cutting end point Bf (unit: mm).
W: Different value of Z absolute coordinate between cutting end point Bf and starting point A(unit:
mm).
P(Δi) : Radial(X) discontinuous tool infeed of each axial cutting cycle, its range: 0＜Δi≤ 9999999
(IS_B)/ 0＜Δk≤ 99999999（IS_C） (unit: least input increment, without sign symbol).
Q(Δk) : Axial(Z) discontinuous tool infeed of each radial cutting cycle, its range: 0 ＜ Δk≤
9999999(IS_B)/0 ＜ Δk≤ 99999999 （ IS_C ） (unit: least input increment, without sign
symbol)..
R(Δd)：Axial (Z) tool retraction clearance after cutting to end point of radial cutting, its range:
0~99999999×least input increment (unit: mm/inch, without sign symbol).
The system defaults the tool retraction clearance is 0 after the radial cutting end point is
completed when R (Δd) is omitted.
The system defaults it executes the positive tool retraction when Z(W) and Q(Δk) are
omitted.

128
 Chapter 3 G Commands

Ⅰ Programming
Fig. 3-81 G75 path
Execution process: (Fig. 3-81)
① Radial (X) cutting feed ᇞi from the starting point of radial cutting cycle, feed in X
negative direction when the coordinates of cutting end point is less than that of
starting point in X direction, otherwise, feed in X positive direction;
② Radial(X) rapid tool retraction e and its direction is opposite to the feed direction of
①;
③ X executes the cutting feed (Δi+e) again, the end point of cutting feed is still in it
between starting point An of radial cutting cycle and end point of radial tool infeed, X
executes the cutting feed (Δi+e) again and executes ②; after X cutting feed (Δi+e) is
executed again, the end point of X cutting feed is on Bn or is not on it between An and
Bn cutting feed to Bn and then execute○4 ;
④ Axial(Z) rapid tool retraction ᇞd to Cn , when Z coordinate of Bf (cutting end point) is
less than that of A (starting point), retract tool in Z positive, otherwise, retract tool in Z
negative direction;
⑤ Radial (X) rapid retract tool to Dn, No. n radial cutting cycle is completed. The current
radial cutting cycle is not the last one, execute ⑥; if it is the previous one before the
last radial cutting cycle, execute ⑦;
⑥ Axial(X) rapid tool infeed, and it direction is opposite to ④ retract tool. If the end
point of tool infeed is still on it between A and Af (starting point of last radial cutting
cycle) after Z tool infeed (ᇞd+ᇞk), i.e. Dn→An+1 and then execute ① (start the next
radial cutting cycle); if the end point of tool infeed is not on it between Dn and Af after
Z tool infeed (ᇞd+ᇞk), rapidly traverse to Af and execute ① to start the first radial

129
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

cutting cycle;
⑦ Z rapidly traverses to A, and G75 is completed.
Explanation:
1. The cycle movement is executed by X(W) and P(Δi) blocks of G75, and the movement
is not executed if only “G75 R(e) ; ” block is executed;
2. Δd and e are specified by the same address R and whether there are X(U) and P(Δi)
Ⅰ Programming

words or not in blocks to distinguish them;

3. The tool can stop in Auto mode and traverse in Manual mode when G75 is executed,
but the tool must return to the position before executing in Manual mode when G75 is
executed again, otherwise the following path will be wrong;
4. When the system is executing the feed hold or single block, the program pauses after
the system has executed end point of current path;
5. R(Δd) must be omitted in grooving, and so there is no tool retraction clearance when
the tool cuts to radial cutting end point.
Example：

Program (suppose the grooving tool width is 4mm, the system least increment is 0.001mm):
O0008;
G00 X150 Z50 M3 S500; (Start spindle with 500 r/min)
G0 X125 Z-24; (Position to starting point of machining)
G75 R0.5 F150; (Machining cycle)
G75 X40 Z-50 P60000 Q30000; (X tool infeed 6mm every time, tool retraction 0.5mm,
rapid returning to starting point (X125) after infeeding
to end point (X40), Z tool infeed 3mm and cycle the
above-mentioned steps to continuously run programs)
G0 X150 Z50; (Return to starting point of machining)
M30; (End of program)

3.22.7 Drilling Cycle G83 or G87

Command format：axle drilling G83 X(U)__ C(H)__ Z(W)__ P__ Q__ R__ F__ K__M__ J0/1；
radial drilling G87 Z(W)__ C(H)__ X(U)__ P__ Q__ R__ F__ K__ M__ J0/1；
Code meaning: Drilling Cycle: Rapid traverse to the drilling position from start, then perform it
along with the drilling hole direction) feed, retraction, re-feed… till to the botton of a
hole, and then retreact to the drilling position, a drilling cycle is then completed;
Position to the drilling position again, and then perform the next drilling cycle; stop at

130
 Chapter 3 G Commands

the drilling position after the last drilling operation is performed, the drilling cycle is
then completed. The drilling cycle divides into axial drilling G83 and radial drilling G87,
which is used in the axial drilling (Z axis) and radial drilling (X axis) separately.
Relevant definition: G83, G87 is modle G code
G83: Axial drilling cycle G code, axial (Z axis) drilling;
G87: Radial drilling cycle G code, axial (X axis) drilling;

Ⅰ Programming
(X, C): Drilling position; ------G83
Z: at the bottom of a hole; ------G83
(Z, C); Drilling position; ------G87
X: at the bottom of a hole; ------G87
P: It is pause time at the bottom, modal data, initial default value is 0 (Unit: ms), its
resolution is shown in the table 1-2 of Section 1.4.1.
Q: In-feed value each time, its range:-9999999~9999999 (IS_B) /
-99999999~99999999 (IS_C) (unit ： least input increment, radius value);
Evaluate its absolute value when inputting the negative value, modal data; the
initial default value is 0. When the Q value is 0, directly feed to the botton of the
hole.
R: In-feed value after the in-feed for each time, its range:0~9999.999 (IS_B)/
0~999.9999 (IS_C) (unit：mm/inch，radius value); Evaluate its absolute value
when inputting the negative value, modal data; the initial default value is 1.
F: Cutting feddrate, refer to the table 1-2 in the Section 1.4.1 for its resolution.
K: Drilling repeated times can be omitted; it is regarded as 1 by default when
ignores; refer to the table 1-2 in the Section 1.4.4 for its resolution. If the the
drilling position is regarded as the relevant coordinate programming, drilling is
performed at difference positions.
M: The M code is used for clamping the indexing spindle; its code value is set by
data parameter No.170, which can be omitted; it does not use the spindle
clamping by default when it ignores.
J: 0：High speed peck drilling cycle;1：Peck drilling cycle, modal data. Its initial
value regardes as 0 by default.
Code performance procedure:
I：High speed deep hole drilling cycle（J＝0）：
① Rapidly position to the drilling start position（G83：X，C； G87：Z，C；）,if the M
code with clamping spindle exists, output Mα after the positioning is completed;
② Cutting feed Q distance: P specification time dwells and then perform ⑥ if it
reaches to the bottom of a hole;
③ Rapid tool-retraction R distance: If it reaches to the drilling start position during the
tool-retraction, it is then retreated to the drilling start position;
④ Cutting feed (Q+R) distance: If it retracts to the drilling start position at the last time,
and then cut the feed distance (Q+tool-retraction amount at last time);
⑤ Cycle ③④ till to the bottom of a hole, dwell the P specification time;
⑥ Rapid return to the drilling start position, if it executes the M code of spindle
clamping,output the Mβ after the positioning is completed;
⑦ If the cycle does not end instead of returning to the ①, the next machining cycle is
then started;
II：Deep hole drilling cycle（J＝1）：

131
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

① Rapidly position to the drilling start position,（G83：X，C； G87：Z，C；）,if the

M code with clamping spindle exists, output the Mα after the positioning is
completed;
② Cutting feed Q distance: P specification time dwells and then perform ⑦ if it
reaches to the bottom of a hole;
③ Rapid perform the tool-retraction to the drilling start position;
Ⅰ Programming

④ Rapid positioning to the R position distance from the last feeding depth (Point C in
the drawing);
⑤ Cutting feed (Q+R) distance
⑥ Cycle ③⑤ till to the bottom of a hole
⑦ Rapid return to the drilling start position, if it executes the M code of spindle
clamping, output the Mβ after the positioning is completed;
⑧ If the cycle does not end instead of returning to the ①, the next machining cycle is
then started;
Note: α value is set in the data parameter No. 170, β＝α＋1; therefore, the M codes in the PLC should be
treated.
Common drilling Peck drilling

G83

G87

Precautions:
1) G83 or G87 is the modal G command of the group 01, which can be cancelled by the G
command of group 01. The rest of the command words are the modal data other than the
positioning place, cycle times and the M code of the clamping index spindle.
2) Do not use the cutter compensation C in G83 or G87 command, the cutter
compensation may automatically retract when entering the drilling cycle, it may

132
 Chapter 3 G Commands

automatically recover after drilling.

3) It is necessary to select the G18 panel when performing the G83 or G87 command.
4) Fail to perform the G83, G87 command in the G71～G73 commands or polar coordinate
mode.
5) The drilling of G83, G87 command should be set as linear axis. (G83 drilling axis is
regarded as the 2nd axis, G87 treats as the 1st one).

Ⅰ Programming
6) When the in-feed amount Q of each time is 0, perform the common drilling cycle. The
drillingmachining will directly feed to the botton of a hole, and then moves to the start
position at the rapid traverse rate.

3.23 Thread Cutting Commands

GSK980TDi CNC system can machine many kinds of thread cutting, including metric/inch single,
multi threads, thread with variable lead and tapping cycle. Length and angle of thread run-out can be
changed, multiple cycle thread is machined by single sided to protect tool and improve smooth finish
of its surface. Thread cutting includes: continuous thread cutting G32, thread cutting with variable
lead G34, Z thread cutting G33, Thread cutting cycle G92, Multiple thread cutting cycle G76.
The machine used for thread cutting must be installed with spindle encoder whose pulses are set
by No.070m. Drive ratio between spindle and encoder is set by No.110 and No.111. X or Z traverses
to start machine after the system receives spindle signal per rev in thread cutting, and so one thread
is machined by multiple roughing, finishing without changing spindle speed.
The system can machine many kinds of thread cutting, such as thread cutting without tool
retraction groove. There is a big error in the thread pitch because there are the acceleration and the
deceleration at the starting and ending of X and Z thread cutting, and so there is length of thread
lead-in and distance of tool retraction at the actual starting and ending of thread cutting.
X, Z traverse speeds are defined by spindle speed instead of cutting feedrate override in thread
cutting when the pitch is defined. The spindle override control is valid in thread cutting. When the
spindle speed is changed, there is error in pitch caused by X and Z acceleration/deceleration, and so
the spindle speed cannot be changed and the spindle cannot be stopped in thread cutting, which will
cause tool and workpiece to be damaged.

3.23.1 Thread Cutting with Constant Lead G32

Command format: G32 X(U)_ Z(W)_ F(I)_ J_ K_ Q_
Command function: The path of tool traversing is a straight line from starting point to end point as
Fig.3-82; the longer moving distance from starting point to end point(X in radius value) is
called as the long axis and another is called as the short axis. In course of motion, the long
axis traverses one lead when the spindle rotates one revolution, and the short axis and
the long axis execute the linear interpolation. Form one spiral grooving with variable lead
on the surface of workpiece to realize thread cutting with constant lead. Metric pitch and
inch pitch are defined respectively by F, I. Metric or inch straight, taper, end face thread
and continuous multi-section thread can by machined in G32.
Command specifications:
G32 is modal;
Pitch is defined to moving distance when the spindle rotates one rev(X in radius);
Execute the straight thread cutting when X coordinates of starting point and end point are the
same one(not input X or U);

133
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

Execute the end face thread cutting when X coordinates of starting point and end point are the
same one(not input Z or W);
Execute the cutting taper thread when X and Z coordinates of starting point and end point are
different;
Related definitions:
F: Metric pitch is moving distance of long axis when the spindle rotates one rev: 0.001 mm～500
Ⅰ Programming

mm. After F is executed, it is valid until F with specified pitch is executed again.
I: Teeth per inch. It is ones per inch(25.4 mm) in long axis, and also is circles of spindle rotation
when the long axis traverses one inch(25.4 mm) :0.06tooth/inch～25400tooth/inch. After I is
executed, it is valid until I with specified pitch is executed again. The metric, inch input both
express the teeth per inch thread.
J: Movement in the short axis in thread run-out, its range:（-99999999~99999999）× least input
increment with negative sign; if the short axis is X, its value is specified with the radius; J value
is the modal parameter.
K: Length in the long axis in thread run-out, its range: 0~99999999× least input increment. If the
long axis is X, its value is in radius without direction; K is modal parameter.
Q: Initial angle(offset angle)between spindle rotation one rev and starting point of thread cutting:
0～360000 (unit: 0.001 degree). Q is non-modal parameter, must be defined every time,
otherwise it is 00.
Q rules:
1. Its initial angle is 0° if Q is not specified;
2. For continuous thread cutting, Q specified by its following thread cutting block except for the
first block is invalid, namely Q is omitted even if it is specified;
3. Multi threads formed by initial angle is not more than 65535;
4. Q unit : 0.0010 . Q180000 is input in program if it offsets 1800 with spindle one-turn; if Q180 or
Q180.0, it is 0.18°.
Difference between long axis and short axis is shown in Fig. 3-82.

Fz
Fx

Z axis K
X

End point

a Current point
Tool path
U/2

End point of G32 program

Z W

X axis
Fig. 3-82 G32 path

134
 Chapter 3 G Commands

Notes:
1. J, K are modal. The thread run-out is previous J, K value when they are omitted in the
next block in continuous thread cutting. Their mode are cancelled when no thread
cutting are executed;
2. There is no thread run-out when J, or K are omitted; K=J is the thread run-out value
when K is omitted;

Ⅰ Programming
3. There is no thread run-out when J=0 or J=0, K=0;
4. The thread run-out value J=K when J≠0,K=0;
5. There is no thread run-out when J=0 or K≠0;
6. When parameter No.107 set to 0, its tail-retraction angle is matched with the J or K ratio.
When the parameter No.107 does not set to 0, the tail-retraction speed of the short axis is
set by parameter value, and the tail-retraction angle is determined by thread cutting speed
and short axis tail-retraction speed;
6. If the current block is for thread and the next block is the same, the system does not test
the spindle encoder signal per rev at starting the next block to execute the direct thread
cutting, which function is called as continuous thread machining;
7. After the feed hold is executed, the system displays “Pause” and the thread cutting
continuously executes not to stop until the current block is executed completely; if the
continuous thread cutting is executed, the program run pauses after thread cutting
blocks are executed completely;
8. In Single block, the program stops run after the current block is executed. The program
stops running after all blocks for thread cutting are executed;
9. The thread cutting decelerates to stop when the system resets, emergently stop or its
drive unit alarms.
Example: Pitch: 2mm. δ1 = 3mm,δ2 = 2mm,total cutting depth 2mm divided into two times cut-in.

Starting point

End point

Fig.3-83
Program:
O0009;
G00 X27.4286 Z3; (First cut-in 1mm)
G32 X48.8571 W-75 F2.0; (First taper cutting)
G00 X55; (Tool retraction)
W75; (Z returns to the starting point)
X26.4286; (Second tool infeed 0.5mm)
G32 X47.4286 W-75 F2.0; (Second taper thread cutting )
G00 X55; (Tool retraction)
W75 ; (Z returns to the starting point)
M30;

135
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

3.23.2 Rigid Thread Cutting G32.1

Command format：G32.1 X(U)__ Z(W)__ C(H)__F(I)__ S__；
Command function：The traditional thread interpolation calculates the current distance of the
movement of the feed axis based on the feedback pulse count of the position encoder
Ⅰ Programming

installed on the spindle, which can realize the feed axis to follow the thread
interpolation mode of the spindle. Its disadvantages are that there is a big error in the
thread lead in acceleration/deceleration. In the rigid thread interpolation mode, the
working of the spindle motor is the same that of the servo motor, and the
interpolations between the feed axis and the spindle execute the thread interpolation
to get the thread with high precision.
Command explanation:
G32.1 ：Rigid thread interpolation command;
C ：Start angle of thread interpolation;
（X,Z） ：End point coordinates of thread interpolation;
F（I） ：Thread lead, F（I）> 0 right-hand thread, F（I）< 0 left-hand thread；
J: Movement in the short axis in thread run-out, its range:（-99999999~99999999）× least input
increment with negative sign; If the short axis is X, its value is specified with the radius; J value
is the modal parameter.
K: Length in the long axis in thread run-out, its range: 0~99999999× least input increment. If the
long axis is X, its value is in radius without direction; K is modal parameter.
S：spindle speed；
Explanations：
1) G32.1 is in Group 01;
2) When there is the C movement command in a block, the spindle firstly positions the
start point of C axis before turning the thread;
3) Start points of X, Z, C axis must be the same one in the repetitive machining;
4) G32.1 cannot specify the thread run-out, and the feed axis and the spindle stops
simultaneously at the end point of the thread;
5) The input range of the programmed address value in G32.1 is the same that of the
general thread turning command（G32）;
6)
When G32.1 is executed, the pause signal is disabled temporarily and the spindle
override is fixed to be 100%.
Command path is shown below:

136
 Chapter 3 G Commands

Fz

Fx
Z

Ⅰ Programming
a Current point

U/2
Z W
End point

X
Fig. 3-40 G32.1 path
Notes：
1) The spindle must be in the position control mode when it works;
2) In multiple spindle control function, G32.1 is used only between the 1st spindle and the
feed axis, and their uses and the related parameter settings are the same those of the
rigid tapping;
3) In G32.1, CNC does not check whether the current spindle is the position control mode
or the speed control mode. So, the servo control axis of the 1st spindle is set to Cs
working mode to avoid the coordinate overflow;
4) Absolute coordinates of C axis are set to the cycle mode to avoid the coordinate
overflow;
5) The speed control mode is switched to the position control mode in the spindle control
mode. Please execute that the spindle returns to the reference point or use G50 to set
the start point of the current C axis;
Example: Supposing M14: the spindle is switched to the position control mode; M15: the spindle is
switched to the speed control mode.
The thread is the right-hand, its lead is 2mm, the spindle speed is 500 r/m in thread cutting,
thread cutting length is 20mm, and its programming format is shown below:
O0132（0132）；
G00 X100 Z100；//position to the safe position to change the tool
T0101； //change a thread tool（supposing No. 01 is the thread tool）
G00 X25 Z2； //position to the thread starting point（supposing the shape has been made at
the last tool）
。
M14； //switch the spindle from speed control mode to position control mode（it is 0
position after switch）
G50 C0； // set the zero of the rotary axis(it is important to set it because the operation is
relevant to the start angle of the following thread turning）
G32.1 Z-20 F2 S500 M08；//thread turning; the speeds of the spindle and the feed axis are0 in
end point
G00 X100； //tool retraction
Z100； //return to tool change position

137
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

M15； //switch the spindle from position control mode to speed control mode
．．
．．； //execution the 2nd machining procedure
．．
．．；
M30； //end of program

3.23.3 Arc Threading Cutting Code G32.2 or G32.3

Ⅰ Programming

Code format: G32.2

X(U)__ Z(W)__ R__ (I__ K__) F__ Q__
G32.3
Code function: The movement path of arc thread is a section of arc from start to end; The
coordinate axis with bigger shifting value where from the start to end is regarded as
long axis; the other one is called short axis. The long axis moves a lead while the
spindle rotates one cycle during the operation. A constant pitch helical slot generates
on the workpiece surface when the tool cuts the workpiece, so that the constant pitch
thread machining is carried out. The F command is used for the provided thread pitch,
the arc thread machining of the constant pitch can be performed by executing the
G32.2／G32.3 command.
Code explanations:
1) G32.2/G32.3 is modal；
2) The leading of the thread is the displacement value (The displacement value along X axis
is based upon the radius value) of one cycle for the spindle.
3) When bit 7 of parameter No.202 is set to 0, arc thread follows with the feedback signal of
spindle encoder; when the bit 7 of the state parameter No.202 is 1, arc thread cutting feed
is performed the linkage interpolation with the servo spindle; in this case, the spindle,
there is not alternative other than the servo spindle;
4) G32.2 CW arc thread machining, G32.3 CCW arc thread machining; the judgement
methods for the CW, CCW and G02, G03 arc maching command are identical;
Q use rules:
1) When the bit 7 of state parameter No. 202 sets to 1, Q value is disabled; in this case, the
start angle of the thread can be directly specified by C address;
2) If the Q does not specify, namely, it is regarded as start angle 0 by default;
3) The overall threads of the mult-pitch formed by start angle indexing should be less than
65535.
4) Q’s unit is 0.001 degree, if it offsets 180 degree to the spindle one-turn signal, input
Q180000 to the program; if the Q180 or Q180.0 is input, it separately regards as 0.18
degree.
The schematic of the command execution path is shown below:

138
 Chapter 3 G Commands

A
A：Center
B：Start point
C：End point
R
I

Ⅰ Programming
Z
C B
K

X F
Precautions:
1) R value is enabled when R is simultaneously specified with I or K;
2) The specified arc block by arc thread must be performed within the certain area (The area
of which the X or Z axis is separately regarded as long axis); refer to the following figure:

End point

45° Z Z
45°
End point Start point Start point

X X
3) The arc specified by arc thread, if its long axis changes, the alarm may occur; refer to the
following figure:

45° Z
Start point

The change pos

End point
X

3.23.4 Thread Cutting with Variable Lead G34

Command format：G34 X(U)__ Z(W)__ F(I)__ J__ K__ R__ ；
Command function: The motion path of tool is a straight line from starting point of X, Z to end
point specified by the block, the longer moving distance from starting point
to end point(X in radius value) is called as the long axis and another is
called as the short axis. In course of motion, the long axis traverses one
lead when the spindle rotates one rev, the pitch increases or decreases a

139
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

specified value per rev and one spiral grooving with variable lead on the
surface of workpiece to realize thread cutting with variable lead. Tool
retraction can be set in thread cutting.
F, I are specified separately to metric, inch pitch. Executing G34 can machine metric or inch
straight, taper, end face thread with variable pitch.
Command specifications:
G34 is modal;
Ⅰ Programming

Meanings of X(U) , Z(W) , J, K are the same that of G32;

F: Specify lead, and its range is referred to Table 1-2;
I: Specify thread teeth per inch, and its range is referred to Table 1-2;
R: Increment or decrement of pitch per rev, R=F1- F2, with direction; F1>F2, pitch decreases
when R is negative; F1<F2, pitch increases when R is positive (as Fig. 3-41);
R: ±0.001~±500.000 mm/pitch (metric thread);
±0.060~±2540 tooth/inch (inch thread).

The system alarms when R exceeds the above-mentioned range or the pitch exceeds
permissive value or is negative owing to R increases or decreases.

Starting point of
machining

Fig. 3-85 Variable pitch thread

Note: It is the same as that of G32.
Example: First pitch of starting point: 4mm, increment 0.2mm per rev of spindle.

70

50 Z
δ2 δ1

X
Fig. 3-42 Variable pitch thread machining
Use macro variables to simplify programming when G34 is used many times. δ1 = 4mm,δ2 =
4mm, total cutting depth 4mm, total cutting cycle 15 times; first tool infeed 0.8mm, gradual decreasing
cutting every time 0.2mm, min. infeed 0.2mm.
Program：O0010；
G00 X60 Z4 M03 S500;
G65 H01 P#102 Q800; First tool infeed: assignment #102=0.8mm
G65 H01 P#103 Q0; Cycle count: assignment #103=0
N10 G65 H02 P#104 Q#103 Cycle count starting: #104=#103+1
R1; #103=#104
G65 H01 P#103 Q#104; Total cutting cycle times: #104=15,jump to block

140
 Chapter 3 G Commands

G65 H81 P30 Q#104 R15; N30

G00 U-10; Tool infeed to Ф50
G65 H01 P#100 Q#102; Cutting infeed: #100=#102
G00 U-#100; Tool infeed
G34 W-78 F3.8 J5 K2 R0.2; Variable pitch cutting
G00 U10; Tool retraction
Z4; Z returns to starting point
G00 U-10;

Ⅰ Programming
G65 H03 P#101 Q#100 R0.2; Decreasing of cutting feed again: #101=#100-0.2
G65 H01 P#102 Q#101; Assignment again #102=#101
G65 H86 P20 Q#102 R0.2; Infeed: Jump to block N20 when #102≦0.2mm
G65 H80 P10; Unconditionally jump to block N10
N20 G65 H01 P#102 R0.2; Min. infeed: #102=0.2
G65 H80 P10; Unconditionally jump to block N10
N30 ;

3.23.5 Z Thread Cutting G33

Command format：G33 Z(W)__ F(I)__ L__ ;
Command function: Tool path is from starting point to end point and then from end point to
starting point. The tool traverses one pitch when the spindle rotates one rev, the pitch
is consistent with pitch of tool and there is spiral grooving in internal hole of
workpiece and the internal machining can be completed one time.
Command specification: G33 is modal command;
Z(W): When Z or W is not input and starting point and end point of Z axis are the same one, the
thread cutting must not be executed;
F: Thread pitch, and its range is referred to Table 1-2;
I: Specify thread teeth per inch, and its range is referred to Table 1-2;
L: Multi threads: 1～99 and it is modal parameter. (The system defaults it is single thread when L
is omitted)
Cycle process:
① Z tool infeed (start spindle before G33 is executed);
② M05 signal outputs after Z reaches the specified end point in programming;
③ Test spindle after completely stopping;
④ Spindle rotation (CCW) signal outputs (reverse to the original rotation direction);
⑤ Z executes the tool retracts to starting point;
⑥ M05 signal outputs and the spindle stops;
⑦ Repeat the steps ①～⑥ if multi threads are machined.
Example: Fig. 3-87, thread M10×1.5

Fig.3-87
Program:

141
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

O0011;
G00 Z90 X0 M03; Start spindle
G33 Z50 F1.5; Tap cycle
M03 Start spindle again
G00 X60 Z100; Machine continuously
M30
Note 1: Before tapping, define rotation direction of spindle according to tool rotating. The spindle stops
Ⅰ Programming

rotation after the tapping is completed and the spindle is started again when machining thread
continuously.
Note 2: G33 is for rigid tapping. The spindle decelerates to stop after its stop signal is valid, at the moment,
Z executes continuously infeeds along with the spindle rotating, and so the actual cutting bottom
hole is deeper than requirement and the length is defined by the spindle speed and its brake in
tapping.
Note 3: Z rapid traverse speed in tapping is defined by spindle speed and pitch is not relevant to cutting
feedrate override.
Note 4: In Single block to feed hold, the tapping cycle continuously executes not to stop until the tool
returns to starting point when the system displays “Pause”.
Note 5: The thread cutting decelerates to stop when the system resets, emergently stop or its driver alarms.

3.23.6 Rigid Tapping G84, G88

Command format：End face rigid tapping G84 X(U)__ C(H)__ Z(W)__ P__ F(I)__ K__M__；
Side rigid tapping G88 Z(W)__ C(H)__ X(U)__ P__ F(I)__ K__ M__；
Command explanations: modal G codes
G84: End face tapping cycle G code
G88: Side tapping cycle G code
(X，C): Tapping hole position；------G84
Z: Hole bottom position of tapping；------G84
(Z，C)：Tapping hole position；------G88
X: Hole bottom position of tapping hole；------G88
P: Pause time (ms) when tapping to the hole bottom
F(I)：Thread lead, F（I）> 0 right-hand tapping, F（I）< 0 left-hand tapping, and its range is referred
to Table 1-2
K: Repetitive count of tapping. When the incremental programming is used to the tapping hole
position, the tapping is performed in the different hole position, and its range is referred to
Table 1-2
M: Used to clamp the graduation spindle.
Rigid tapping method:
1. M29 S_ before G84/G88 is specified below
M29 S_；
G84(G88) X_C_(Z_C_) Z_(X_) P_ F_ K_ M_；
2. M29 S_ in the same block is commanded below
G84(G88) X_C_(Z_C_) Z_(X_) R_ P_ F_ K_ M29 S_；
Notes ：
1) For the above 2nd method, the machine zero return is executed before the spindle executes the tapping,
otherwise, the method cannot be used. In M29, CNC cannot select a spindle to execute the tapping. The
rigid tapping needs to be clamped when the spindle positioning is completed, the method also cannot be
used because M codes cannot be in the same block;

142
 Chapter 3 G Commands

2) The axis movement command cannot be use between M29 and G84/G88;
3) M29 cannot be specified repetitively in rigid tapping;
4) In multiple spindle rigiding tapping, a spindle used to the rigid tapping must be selected before M29, and
it cannot be switched before the rigid tapping state is cancelled;
Operations is shown below:

Ⅰ Programming
S p in d le s to p
Mα

S p in d le s to p Mβ
O p e ra tio n 1

O p e ra tio n 4
O p e ra tio n 2

P
O p e ra tio n 3

Execution explanations：
1) Operation 1：positioning to the hole position（starting point of rigid tapping）；
2) Before starting operation 2, the system outputs Mα when it has M code used to clamp the
spindle;
3) Operation 2：start the rigid tapping；
4) Operation 3：pause time P in rigid tapping in hole bottom;
5) Operation 4：the rigid tapping returns to the hole bottom（starting point of rigid tapping;
6) When the block for rigid tapping specifies M code used to clamp the spindle, Mβ is output.

Note: α value is set in №170, β＝α＋1, so, these corresponding M codes in PLC are executed.
Rigid tapping sequence
Taking example of G84 right-hand tapping, explain the creation, execution and cancellation of
rigid tapping.
Creation and execution of rigid tapping

The spindle rotation operation is defined that the rotary axis is switched to the position control
mode(i.e. send the position mode switch signal to the servo spindle), and the system checks the
position mode arrival signal of the servo spindle.
Rigid tapping cancellation
The cancellation methods of rigid tapping are shown below:
1） G80 cancels the rigid tapping mode;

143
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

2） G codes commands other cycles;

3） Other G codes in Group 01;
4） CNC resets.
The falling edge of F76.3 signal cancels the rigid tapping mode signal.
1) RTCRG(№186＃2) is set to ‘1’ when:
The system executes directly the next block instead of waiting the rigid tapping mode signal
Ⅰ Programming

RGTAP<G61＃0> to become ‘0’.

Rigid tapping cancellation is shown below:

G80 or G code of one group

RATP(F76.3)

Output S command

RGTA(G61.0)

The spindle rotation operation

The spindle rotation signal

2) RTCRG(№186＃2) is set to ‘0’ when:

Wait the rigid tapping mode signal RGTAP<G61＃0> to become ‘0’ and then execute the next
block. Rigid tapping cancellation is shown below:

Notes:
1) In rigid tapping, when the tapping direction is changed（i.e. G84 and G88 are switched）
，the
system specifies again the hole bottom position of the tapping, otherwise, the unexpected
result rises;
2) The rigid tapping G command is in Group 01, it is cancelled temporarily in the rigid tapping
state, and then is recovered it after the tapping is done;
3) The dry run function is disabled in rigid tapping;
4) In the rigid tapping, the machine lock function is valid; the tapping axis and the spindle do not
move when the machine lock function is enabled;
5) When the reset is executed in the rigid tapping, the rigid tapping state is released and the
spindle returns to the previous state before the rigid tapping;
6) In rigid tapping, when the tapping block is executed and the tapping returns, the feed
hold/single block run function is disabled temporarily till the tapping return completes;
7) In rigid tapping mode, the backlash compensation is performed to compensate the dry run of
the spindle rotation(CW, CCW). It is set in parameters №34. The backlash compensation
along the tapping axis is performed in general method;
8) In multiple spindle tapping, the 1st spindle is used to the graduation and the 2nd to the tapping.
After the 1st spindle graduation is completed, the spindle must be clamped on the machine

144
 Chapter 3 G Commands

and the machine clamping/releasing M code can be specified in the rigid tapping. M code
used to clamp the spindle is added in G84/G88, i.e. the system can output two kinds of M
code. M code used to clamp the spindle is set in the data parameter (№170). M code used to
the releasing is the setting value +1 of №170;
9) Setting RTORI（state parameter №186＃7）to 1 can execute the reference point return of the
spindle before the system starts the rigid tapping.

Ⅰ Programming
3.23.7 Thread Cutting Cycle G92
Command format: G92 X(U) _ Z(W) _ F_ J_ K_ L ; (Metric straight thread cutting cycle)
G92 X(U) _ Z(W) _ I_ J_ K_ L ; (Inch straight thread cutting cycle)
G92 X(U) _ Z(W) _ R_ F_ J_ K_ L ; (Metric taper thread cutting cycle)
G92 X(U) _ Z(W) _ R_ I_ J_ K_ L ; (Metric taper thread cutting cycle)
Command function: Tool infeeds in radial(X) direction and cuts in axial(Z or X, Z) direction from
starting point of cutting to realize straight thread, taper thread cutting cycle with
constant thread pitch. Thread run-out in G92: at the fixed distance from end
point of thread cutting, Z executes thread interpolation and X retracts with
exponential or linear acceleration, and X retracts at rapidly traverse speed after
Z reaches to end point of cutting as Fig. 3-88.
Command specifications:
G92 is modal;
Starting point of cutting: starting position of thread interpolation;
End point of cutting: end position of thread interpolation;
X: X absolute coordinate of end point of cutting, unit: mm;
U: different value of X absolute coordinate from end point to starting point of cutting, unit: mm;
Z: Z absolute coordinate of end point of cutting, unit: mm;
W: Different value of X absolute coordinate from end point to starting point of cutting, unit: mm;
R: Different value(radius value) of X absolute coordinate from end point to starting point of cutting.
When the sign of R is not the same that of U, R│≤│U/2│, unit: mm;
F: Thread lead, its range: 0＜ F ≤500 mm. After F value is executed, it is reserved and can be
omitted;
I: Thread teeth per inch, its range: 0.06tooth/inch～25400tooth/inch , it is reserved and it can be
omitted not to input after I specified value is executed;
J: Movement in the short axis in thread run-out, its range 0~99999999× least input increment ,
unit: mm/inch, without direction ( automatically define its direction according to starting position
of program), and it is modal parameter. If the short axis is X, its value is specified by radius;
K: Movement in the long axis in thread run-out, its range: 0~99999999× least input increment ,
unit: mm/inch, without direction ( automatically define its direction according to starting position
of program), and it is modal parameter. If the long axis is X, its value is specified by radius;
L: Multi threads: 1～99 and it is modal parameter. (The system defaults it is single thread when L
is omitted).

145
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual
Ⅰ Programming

Fig. 3-88

Fig. 3-89

The system can machine one thread with many tool infeed in G92, but cannot do continuous two
thread and end face thread. Definition of thread pitch in G92 is the same that of G32, and a pitch is
defined that it is a moving distance of long axis(X in radius) when the spindle rotates one rev.
Pitch of taper thread is defined that it is a moving distance of long axis(X in radius). When
absolute value of Z coordinate difference between B point and C point is more than that of X (in
radius), Z is long axis; and vice versa.
Cycle process: straight thread as Fig.3-88 and taper thread as Fig.3-89.
① X traverses from starting point to cutting starting point;
② Thread interpolates (linear interpolation) from the cutting starting point to cutting end point;
③ X retracts the tool at the cutting feedrate (opposite direction to the above-mentioned ①), and
return to the position which X absolute coordinate and the starting point are the same;
④ Z rapidly traverses to return to the starting point and the cycle is completed.
Notes：
1) Length of thread run-out is specified by №019 when J, K are omitted;
2) Length of thread run-out is K in the long direction and is specified by №019 when J is omitted；

146
 Chapter 3 G Commands

3) Length of thread run-out is J=K when K is omitted;

4) There is no thread run-out when J=0 or J=0, K=0;
5) Length of thread run-out is J=K when J≠0,K=0;
6) There is no thread run-out when J=0,K≠0;
7) When parameter No. 107 sets to 0, the tail-retraction angle is matched with the J or K ratio.
When the No. 107 does not set to 0, the tail-retraction speed of the short axis is regarded as

Ⅰ Programming
parameter setting value, and the tail-retraction angle is determined by thread cutting speed
and short axis tail-retraction speed;
8) After executing the feed hold in thread cutting, the system does not stop cutting until the
thread cutting is completed with Pause on screen;
9) After executing single block in thread cutting, the program run stops after the system returns
to starting point(one thread cutting cycle is completed);
10) They are executed as the positive values when J, K negative values are input;
11) Thread cutting decelerates to stop when the system resets, emergently stops or its driver
alarms.
Command path: relative position between thread cutting end point and starting point with U, W, R
and tool path and thread run-out direction with different U, W, R signs below:
1） U>0，W<0，R>0 2） U<0，W<0，R<0

Z Z
④ W

U/2 ③
②
K R
①
J
② J
①
K R
U/2 ③
④
W

X X
3） U>0，W>0，R<0 、│R│≤│U/2│ 4） U<0，W>0，R>0、│R│≤│U/2│

Z Z
W
④
K
① J
R
③
U/2 ②

② ③ U/2
R
U/2 ①
J
K
④
W

X X
Fig.3-90
Example：Fig.3-91

147
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual
Ⅰ Programming

Fig.3-91
Program:
O0012;
M3 S300 G0 X150 Z50 T0101; (Thread tool)
G0 X65 Z5; (Rapid traverse)
G92 X58.7 Z-28 F3 J3 K1; (Machine thread with 4 times cutting, the first tool infeed
1.3mm)
X57.7 ; (The second tool infeed 1mm)
X57; (The third tool infeed 0.7mm)
X56.9; (The fourth tool infeed 0.1mm)
M30;

3.23.8 Rigid Thread Cutting Cycle G92.1

Command format:G92.1 X(U)_ Z(W)_ F_ L S_； (Metric straight thread cutting cycle)
G92.1 X(U)_ Z(W)_ I_ L S_； (Inch straight thread cutting cycle)
G92.1 X(U)_ Z(W)_ R_ F_ L S_； (Metric taper thread cutting cycle)
G92.1 X(U)_ Z(W)_ R_ I_ L S_； (Metric taper thread cutting cycle)
Command function: Perform the radial (X axis) in-feed or axial (Z axis or X and Z axes) cutting
from the cutting start, simultaneously, the work of the spindle motor is identical with
the feed servo motor, as well the thread interpolation is performed by interpolation
between the feed axis and spindle; therefore, the higher accuracy thread is then
gained to achieve the cutting cycle of the straight thread of the constant pitch or the
cone thread.
Command specification:
G92.1 is modal;
Starting point of cutting: starting position of thread interpolation;
End point of cutting: end position of thread interpolation;
X: X absolute coordinate of end point of cutting, unit: mm;
U: Different value of X absolute coordinate from end point to starting point of cutting,
unit: mm;
Z: Z absolute coordinate of end point of cutting, unit: mm;
W: Different value of X absolute coordinate from end point to starting point of cutting,
unit: mm;
R: Different value (radius value) of X absolute coordinate from end point to starting
point of cutting. When the sign of R is not the same that of U, R│≤│U/2│, unit: mm;

148
 Chapter 3 G Commands

F: Thread lead,. After F value is executed, it is reserved and can be omitted; F（I）> 0
right-hand thread,F（I）< 0 left-hand thread；
L: Multi threads: 1～99 and it is modal parameter. (The system defaults it is single
thread when L is omitted)
S: The speed of thread cutting and modal value can be specified the spindle speed
before this block;

Ⅰ Programming
F

Z
X/2

C ② B

③ ① U/2

④
D
A
Z
W

X
Fig. 3-92
F

B Z
X/2 ②
R

C
①
U/2 ③
④
A
D Z
W

X
Fig. 3-93
The system can machine one thread with many tool infeed in G92.1, but cannot do continuous
two thread and end face thread. Definition of thread pitch in G92.1 is the same that of G32, and a
pitch is defined that it is a moving distance of long axis(X in radius) when the spindle rotates one rev.
Pitch of taper thread is defined that it is a moving distance of long axis(X in radius). When
absolute value of Z coordinate difference between B point and C point is more than that of X (in
radius), Z is long axis; and vice versa.
Cycle process: straight thread as Fig.3-92 and taper thread as Fig.3-93.
① X axis rapidly moves to the cutting start B from the cycle start A. Spindle positions to
the start angle if it is the multi-head thread. Refer to the motion ① in the Fig. 3-92 or
3-93;
② The feed axis is interpolated to end C with the spindle thread from the cutting start B,

149
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

the feed axis and spindle are entirely stopped at the end C.Refer to the motion ② in
the Fig. 3-92 or 3-93;
③ X axis retracts to the point D from C at the rapid traverse rate, refer to motion ③ in
the Fig. 1 or 3-93;
④ Z axis retreats to A from point D at the rapid traverse rate, simultaneously, the spindle
positions to the initial angle of the cycle machining, and then the cycle is ended, refer
Ⅰ Programming

to the motion ④ in the Fig. 3-92 or 3-93.

Precautions:
1) The spindle, there is not alternative other than to work at the position controllable mode;
2) In the case of the multi-spindle controllable function, G92.1 is only used between the 1st
spindle simultaneous feed, the usage and relevant parameter setting is identical with the rigid
tapping;
3) When performing the G92.1 command, CNC system will not detect whether the current
spindle is on the position or speed controllable method, therefore, when using this command, it is
better to set the 1st spindle servo controllable axis as the Cs axis working mode to guarateen the
safety;
4) The absolute coordinate value of the spindle controllable axis (C axis) should be set as cycle
method to avoid the coordinate value flowing;
5) When the spindle controllable method shifts to the position method from speed controllable
method, it is better to perform the spindle reference point return operation or set the start position of
the current controllable axis (C axis) by G50.
6) Both the feed axis and spindle are performed the interpolation from the start of the cutting to
the end. The spindle and feed axis are stopped at the thread interpolation end position, instead of
performing the tail-retraction operation;
7) Spindle returns to the initial angle when the cycle is completed, for example, the current
position of the spindle is 30° before the cycle, the single cycle is then ended; spindle returns to 30° in
the motion ④; the positioning direction is identical with the spindle rotation direction of which when
the thread interpolation is performed.
8) During the multi-head thread, spindle positions to the outside of its corresponding start angle
by the current thread head when the motion ① is performed. For example: the current position of the
spindle is 30°, machine the 6-head thread, when machining at the 2nd theard head, the spindle
positions at the 90° when performing the motion ①, as well it returns to 30° again when performing
the motion ④;
9) After executing the feed hold in thread cutting, the system does not stop cutting until the
thread cutting is completed with Pause on screen;
10) After executing single block in thread cutting, the program run stops after the system returns
to starting point(one thread cutting cycle is completed);
11) Thread cutting decelerates to stop when the system resets, emergently stops or its driver
alarms.
Command path: relative position between thread cutting end point and starting point with U, W, R
and tool path and thread run-out direction with different U, W, R signs below:
1）U>0，W<0，R>0 2）U<0，W<0，R<0

150
 Chapter 3 G Commands

Z Z
④ W

U/2 ③
②
K R
①
J
② J
①
K R

Ⅰ Programming
U/2 ③
④
W

X X
3）U>0，W>0，R<0，|R|≤|U/2| 4）U<0，W>0，R>0，|R|≤|U/2|

Z Z
W
④
K
① J
R
③
U/2 ②

② ③ U/2
R
J
U/2 ①
K
④
W

X X
Example：

110

30 30

Z
M60X3
Φ120

B A

D
C
X
Program：
O0012；
G0 X150 Z50； (Tool-change performs after positioning at a safety place)
T0101； (Thread tool)
M14； (Shift the spindle to the position controllable method)
G0 X65 Z5； (Rapid traverse)
G92.1 X58.7 Z-28 F3 S600； (Machine thread with 4 times cutting, the first tool
infeed 1.3mm)
X57.7； (The second tool infeed 1mm)
X57； (The third tool infeed 0.7mm)
X56.9； (The fourth tool infeed 0.1mm)
M15； (Shift the spindle to the speed controllable method)
M30；

151
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

3.23.9 Thread Reparation Function G92 P1 or G92.1 P1

Code format: G92 X(U)_ Z(W)_ R_ F(I)_ L_ P_ S_； (Follow thread reparation)
G92.1 X(U)_ Z(W)_ R_ F(I)_ L_ P_ S_； (Interpolation thread reparation)
Code function: When the machine tool matches with the frequency-conversion spindle, the
damaged thread can be recovered using the G92 P1 code; the long axis moves a
lead while the spindle rotates one cycle, its motion procedure is identical with the G92.
Ⅰ Programming

When the machine tool matches with the servo spindle, the damaged thread can be
recovered using the G92.1 P1 code, and the thread interpolation can be performed by
the interpolation between the feed axis and spindle, its motion procedure is identical
with the G92.1.
Code explanations:
Modal command;
Starting point of cutting: starting position of thread interpolation;
End point of cutting: end position of thread interpolation;
X: X absolute coordinate of end point of cutting, unit: mm;
U: Different value of X absolute coordinate from end point to starting point of cutting,
unit: mm;
Z: Z absolute coordinate of end point of cutting, unit: mm;
W: Different value of X absolute coordinate from end point to starting point of cutting,
unit: mm;
R: Different value (radius value) of X absolute coordinate from end point to starting
point of cutting. When the sign of R is not the same that of U, R│≤│U/2│, unit:
mm;
F: Thread lead. After F value is executed, it is reserved and can be omitted; F（I）> 0
right-hand thread,F（I）< 0 eft-hand thread；
L: Multi threads: 1～99 and it is modal parameter. (The system defaults it is single
thread when L is omitted)
P: Thread recovery mark: 0：Do not perform the reparation function, 1：Perform the
reparation function;
S: The revolving speed of the thread cutting and the modal value can be specified the
spindle speed before this block;

Operation methods:
1) Thread reparation function usage: Before using the thread recovery, set the Bit 4 of
state parameter No.174 to "1", the function is then performed; the setting of Bit 5 of
state parameter No.174 can be recovered the mode of the thread.
2) Thread reparation position record: In the Manual, MPG or single-step mode, shift the
spindle into the position controllable method (Do not use this controllable method when
using follow thread reparation), move the tool to the measure position by the X, Z axis
or spindle; cutter nose should be coincided with the tooth cavity as much as possible by
moving the tool, refer to the following figure:

152
 Chapter 3 G Commands

Ⅰ Programming
In this case, enter to the position interface by , to the absolute coordinate page by

soft function button; press the soft function button, the system is then automatically
recorded the coordinate information of this position and the angle of the spindle. The recorded
position information is performed the M30 code in the program, alternatively, when the main program
is ended with M99 code; here, the recorded position is regarded as already used by the system, the
recorded value is then cleared; if the thread needs recover again, it is necessary to record the
position again. This operation will directly affect the accuracy of the thread recovery, therefore, it is
better to overlap the cutter nose of the tool and the thread slot as much as possible.
3) Thread recovery performance: Perform the thread recovery operation by using the G92.1
or G92 code; the system may automatically perform the thread recovery operation based
upon the recorded position previously.

Precautions:
1) When the thread reparation function is disabled, P1 parameter is specified in G92,
G92.1 code, the system is then automatically ignored;
2) When the thread reparation function is enabled, P1 does not specify in the G92, G92.1
code or the value of other Non-1, the system will not perform the reparation function;
3) When the thread recovery function is enabled, as well the P1 parameter is specified in
G92 or G92.1 code; the system alarm may occur when the thread recovery position
record does not prform in the Manual, MPG or Single-step mode;
4) When the multi-block G92, G92.1 code is used to repair the thread, the P1 parameter
only should be specified in the G92, G92.1 code of the 1st block, the thread machining
start angle calculated by system may be succeeded to the subsequent G92, G92.1
thread block;
5) When the coordinate of the measure position long axis does not between the start and
end points of which the thread block long axis is specified by P1, the alarm is then
generated.
6) When the thread is recovered by G92 P1, the Bit 5 of state parameter No.174 should be
set to 1; when the thread is recovered by G92.1 P1, the Bit 5 of state parameter No.174
should be set to 0.
7) When the thread reparation is performed, the numerical value of the data parameter
No.191 should be calibrated (This value is the tolerance value (EPO) at the stable

153
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

position where the axis operation speed of servo drive along each axis is 1m/min);
otherwise, the recovered thread may be generated an offset;

3.23.10 Multiple Thread Cutting Cycle G76

Command format: G76 P(m) (r) (a) Q(ᇞdmin) R(d) ;
Ⅰ Programming

G76 X(U) Z(W) R(i) P(k) Q(ᇞd) F(I) ;

Command function: Machining thread with specified depth of thread (total cutting depth) is
completed by multiple roughing and finishing, if the defined angle of
thread is not 0°, thread run-in path of roughing is from its top to bottom,
and angle of neighboring thread teeth is the defined angle of thread. G76
can be used for machining the straight and taper thread with thread
run-out path, which is contributed to thread cutting with single tool edge to
reduce the wear of tool and to improve the precision of machining thread.
But G76 cannot be used for machining the face thread. Machining path is
shown in Fig. 3-94:
Command specifications:
X: X absolute coordinate (unit: mm) of thread end point;
U: Different value (unit: mm) of X absolute coordinate between thread end point and starting point;
Z: Z absolute coordinate (unit: mm) of thread end point;
W: Different value (unit: mm) of Z absolute coordinate between thread end point and starting point;
P(m): Times of thread finishing: 00～99 (unit: times). The value of system parameter №057 is
regarded as finishing times when m is not input. In thread finishing, every feed cutting amount is
equal to the cutting amount d in thread finishing dividing the finishing times m;
P(r): Width of thread run-out 00～99(unit: 0.1×L,L is the thread pitch). The value of system parameter
№019 is the width of thread run-out when r is not input. The thread run-out function can be applied to
thread machining without tool retraction groove and the width of thread run-out defined by system
parameter №019 is valid for G92, G76;
P(a): Angles at taper of neighboring two tooth，range: 00～99，unit：deg(°). The system parameter
№058 value is regarded as angle of thread tooth. The actual angle of thread in defined by tool ones
and so a should be the same as the tool angle;
ᇞQ(ᇞdmin): Minimum cutting travel of thread roughing, range: 0 ～ 999999( IS-C)/ 0 ～

99999( IS-B),(unit: least input increment, radius value). When ( n  n  1 ) ×ᇞd＜ᇞdmin, ᇞdmin is
regarded as the cutting travel of current roughing and the subsequent rough-machining cutting value
and the in-feed depth will not calculate based upon the formula any more. Setting ᇞdmin is to avoid
the too small of roughing amount and too many roughing times caused by the cutting amount
deceleration in thread roughing. When Q (ᇞdmin) is not input, the system data parameter NO.059
value is taken as the least cutting amount;
R(d): It is the cutting amount in thread finishing, range: 00～99.999(IS_B）/00～99.9999(IS_C) (unit:
mm/inch, radius value without sign symbols), the radius value is equal to X absolute coordinates
between cut-in point Be of thread finishing and Bf of thread roughing.. The value of system parameter
№060 is regarded as the cutting travel of thread finishing when R(d) is not input;
R(i): It is thread taper and is the different value of X absolute coordinate between thread starting point
and end point, rang: -99999.999~99999.999(IS_B）/-9999.9999~9999.9999(IS_C) (unit:：mm/inch,
radius value). The system defaults R(i)=0(straight thread) when R(i) is not input;

154
 Chapter 3 G Commands

P(k): Depth of thread tooth, the total cutting depth of thread, range: 1～99999999(unit: least input
increment, radius value, without sign symbols). The system alarms when P(k) is not input;
Q(ᇞd): Depth of the 1st thread cutting, range: 1～99999999 unit: Least input increment, radius value,
without sign symbols). The system alarms when ᇞd is not input;
F: metric thread pitch, its range is referred to Table 1-2;
I: thread teeth per inch for inch thread, its range is referred to Table 1-2.

Ⅰ Programming
J：Movement amount (run-out amount) (unit: mm/inch, without direction) in the short axis when thread
run-out; when the short axis is X, its value is designated by radius and is simple parameter;
K：Movement amount (run-out amount) (unit: mm/inch, without direction) in the long axis when thread
run-out; when the long axis is X, its value is designated by radius and is simple parameter.
Note: J, K are not compiled in G76, its thread run-out method is the same that of the previous, i.e. the thread
run-out is executed according to P® or No.19; when J or, K, or J, K are compiled, the thread run-out
method is the same those of G32, G92.

Fig. 3-94
Cut-in method as follows: Fig. 3-95：

Fig. 3-95

155
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

Pitch is defined to moving distance ( X radius value) of long axis when the spindle rotates one rev.
Z is long when absolute value of coordinate difference between C point and D point in Z direction is
more than that of X direction ( radius value, be equal to absolute value of i); and vice versa
Execution process:
① The tool rapidly traverses to B1, and the thread cutting depth is ᇞd. The tool only
traverses in X direction when a=0; the tool traverses in X and Z direction and its
Ⅰ Programming

direction is the same that of A→D when a≠0;

② The tool cuts threads paralleling with C→D to the intersection of D→E (r≠0: thread
run-out);
③ The tool rapidly traverses to E point in X direction;
④ The tool rapidly traverses to A point in Z direction and the single roughing cycle is
completed;
⑤ The tool rapidly traverses again to tool infeed to Bn ( is the roughing times), the cutting
depth is the bigger value of ( n ×ᇞd) ,( n - 1 ×ᇞd+ᇞdmin) , and execute ② if the
cutting depth is less than(k-d) ; if the cutting depth is more than or equal to(k-d) , the tool
infeeds(k-d) to Bf, and then execute ⑥ to complete the last thread roughing;
⑥ The tool cuts threads paralleling with C→D to the intersection of D→E (r≠0: thread
run-out);
⑦ X axis rapidly traverses to E point;
⑧ Z axis traverses to A point and the thread roughing cycle is completed to execute the
finishing;
⑨ After the tool rapidly traverses to B(the cutting depth is k and the cutting travel is d),
execute the thread finishing, at last the tool returns to A point and so the thread finishing
cycle is completed;
⑩ If the finishing cycle time is less than m, execute ⑨ to perform the finishing cycle, the
thread cutting depth is k and the cutting travel is 0; if the finishing cycle times are equal
to m, G76 compound thread machining cycle is completed.
Notes:
1) In thread cutting, execute the feed hold, the system displays Pause after the thread
cutting is executed completely, and then the program run pauses;
2) The thread cutting decelerates to stop when the system resets and emergently stop or
the driver alarms;
3) Omit all or some of G76 P(m) (r) (a) Q(ᇞdmin) R(d) . The omitted address runs
according to setting value of parameters;
4) m, r, a used for one command address P are input one time. Program runs according to
setting value of №57, 19, 58 when m, r, a are all omitted; Setting value is a when address
P is input with 1 or 2 digits; setting values are r, a when address P is input with 3 or 4
digits;
5) The direction of A→C→D→E is defined by signs of U,W , and the direction of C→D is
defined by the sign of R(i) . There are four kinds of sign composition of U, W
corresponding to four kinds of machining path as Fig. 3-96.
Example: Fig. 3-96, thread M68×6.

156
 Chapter 3 G Commands

68

60.64

Ⅰ Programming
Cutting point
zooming in
62

Fig.3-96
Program:
O0013; （system least input increment is 0.0001mm）
G50 X100 Z50 M3 S300; (Set workpiece coordinate system, start spindle
and specify spindle speed)
G00 X80 Z10; (Rapid traverse to starting point of machining)
G76 P020560 Q1500 R0.1; (Finishing 2 times, chamfering width 0.5mm, tool
angle 60°, min. cutting depth 0.15, finishing
allowance 0.1)
G76 X60.64 Z-62 P36800 Q18000 F6; (Tooth height 3.68, the first cutting depth 1.8)
G00 X100 Z50 ; (Return to starting point of program)
M30; (End of program)

3.23.11 Enhancement Thread Cutting Cycle G78

Command format:G78 P(m)(r)(a) Q(ᇞdmin) R(d) J_ K_ D_ L_ E_；
G78 X(U) Z(W) R(i) P(k) Q(ᇞd) F(I) ；
Command function: Machining thread with specified depth of thread (total cutting depth)is
completed by multiple roughing and finishing, if the defined angle of thread is not 0°,
thread run-in path of roughing is from its top to bottom, and angle of neighboring
thread teeth is the defined angle of thread. G78 owns that the thread procession and
tail-retraction function can be selected the single-side blade thread cutting or
dual-side blade alternative cutting, which is contributed to thread cutting with single
tool edge to reduce the wear of tool and to improve the precision of machining thread.
G78 can be used for machining the straight and taper thread, But G78 cannot be
used for machining the face thread.
Command specifications:
X: X absolute coordinate of thread end point;
U: Different value of X absolute coordinate between thread end point and start point;
Z: Z absolute coordinate of thread end point;
W: Different value of Z absolute coordinate between thread end point and start point;
P (m): Cutting depth selection 0: Equidistance in-feed; 1: Diminishing in-feed (The
decreasing in-feed is identical with the G76 in-feed method).
The cutting value of each time of the equidistant in-feed is Q(ᇞd), the cutting value of

157
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

each time of the decreasing in-feed is ( n - n  1 )×ᇞd (n is the cutting times). The
specified value m reservation is enabled after the P(m) is executed, and then write the m
value to the data parameter No. 061.
P(r): Cutting method 0: Blade cuts in along with the netrual line of the thread theeth; 1:
Blade cuts in along with the left of the thread theeth;
2: Blade cuts in along with the right of the thread theeth; 3: Blade cuts in
Ⅰ Programming

along thread teeth with left/right in turn;

The specified value R reservation is enabled after the P(r) is executed; and then write
the r value to the data parameter No. 062.
P(a): Angles at taper of neighboring two tooth，range: 00～99，unit：deg (°). The system
parameter №058 value is regarded as angle of thread tooth. The actual angle of thread
in defined by tool ones and so a should be the same as the tool angle;
ᇞQ(ᇞdmin): Minimum cutting travel of thread roughing, range: 0～999999( IS-C)/ 0～

99999( IS-B),(unit: least input increment, radius value). When ( n  n  1 ) ×ᇞd＜

ᇞdmin, ᇞdmin is regarded as the cutting travel of current roughing and the subsequent
rough-turning cutting value and the in-feed depth will be not calculated based upon the
formula any more. Setting ᇞdmin is to avoid the too small of roughing amount and too
many roughing times caused by the cutting amount deceleration in thread roughing.
When Q (ᇞdmin) is not input, the system data parameter NO.059 value is taken as the
least cutting amount;
R(d): It is the cutting amount in thread finishing, range: 00 ～ 99.999(IS_B ） /00 ～
99.9999(IS_C) (unit: mm/inch, radius value without sign symbols), the radius value is
equal to X absolute coordinates between cut-in point Be of thread finishing and Bf of
thread roughing.. The value of system parameter №060 is regarded as the cutting travel
of thread finishing when R(d) is not input;
J：Movement amount (run-out amount) (its value range: 0~99999999×least input increment,
unit: mm/inch, without direction) in the short axis when thread run-out; when the short
axis is X, its value is designated by radius and is simple parameter;
K：Movement amount (run-out amount) (its value range: 0~99999999×least input increment
unit: mm/inch, without direction) in the long axis when thread run-out; when the long axis
is X, its value is designated by radius and is simple parameter.
D：Finish-turning times, its range:0~99；
L：Head quantity of multi thread, its value range: 1～99 and it is modal parameter. (The
system defaults it is single thread when L is omitted)；
E：The rotation distance value along with X, its range:-9999.9999~9999.9999（unit：mm，
radius value、without sign symbol)
R(i)：It is thread taper and is the different value of X absolute coordinate between thread start
point and end point, rang: -99999.999~99999.999(IS_B ）
/-9999.9999~9999.9999(IS_C) (unit:：mm/inch, radius value). The system defaults
R(i)=0(straight thread) when R(i) is not input;
P(k): Depth of thread tooth, the total cutting depth of thread, range: 1～99999999(unit: least
input increment, radius value, without sign symbols). The system alarms when P(k)
is not input;
Q(ᇞd): Depth of the 1st thread cutting, range: 1～99999999 (unit: least input increment,

158
 Chapter 3 G Commands

radius value, without sign symbols). The system alarms when ᇞd is not input;
F: metric thread pitch, its range is referred to 1.4.1 Table 1-2;
I: thread teeth per inch for inch thread, its range is referred to 1.4.1 Table 1-2.
Command path:
P(r)=0: Cut in from the middle of the teeth

Ⅰ Programming
Cut-in method as follows:

P(r)=1：Left cut-in method

159
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual
Ⅰ Programming

Cut-in method as follows:

P(r)=2：Right cut-in method

160
 Chapter 3 G Commands

Ⅰ Programming
Cut-in method as follows:

161
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

P(r)=3：Shifting cut-in method between left and right

Ⅰ Programming

Cut-in method as follows:

Interlaced thread cutting

Finish-turning residual

Cutter nose

162
 Chapter 3 G Commands

the rotation function：

Z
α /2
C
Be d
Bf
Bn
B1 k

Ⅰ Programming
d △ d n
i △
r T h r e a d c u ttin g
B
E Ae
D Af R a p id tra v e rs e
An
A1 A :S ta r tin g p o in t （ E n d p o in t ）
B :R e fe r e n c e p o in t o f th r e a d c u ttin g d e p th
u /2 C :S ta r tin g p o in t o f th re a d c u ttin g
D :E n d p o in t o f th r e a d c u ttin g
A
E A 1 ,A n , A f , A e :S ta r t p o s itio n
w
X

3.24 Constant Surface Speed Control G96, Constant Rotational

Speed Control G97
The detailed is referred to Section 2.2.3.

3.25 Feedrate per Minute G98, Feedrate per Rev G99

Command format: G98 F_; (its range is referred to Section 1.6.5, the leading zero can be
omitted, feed rate per minute is specified, mm/min)
Command function: cutting feed rate is specified as mm/min, G98 is the modal G command.
G98 cannot be input if the current command is G98 modal.
Command format: G99 F_; (its range is referred to Section 1.6.5, the leading zero can be
omitted)
Command function: Cutting feed rate is specified as mm/min, G99 is the modal G command.
G99 input may be omitted if current state is G99. The actual cutting
feedrate is gotten by multiplying the F command value (mm/r) to the
current spindle speed(r/min). If the spindle speed varies, the actual
feedrate changes too. If the spindle cutting feed amount per rev is
specified by G99 FXXXX , the even cutting texture on the surface of
workpiece will be gotten. In G99 state, a spindle encoder should be fixed
on the machine tool to machine the workpiece.
G98, G99 are the modal G commands in the same group and only one is valid. G98 is the initial state
G command and the system defaults G98 is valid when the system turns on.
Reduction formula of feed between per rev and per min:
Fm = Fr×S
Fm: feed per min (mm/min) ;
Fr: feed per rev (mm/r) ;
S: spindle speed (r/min) .
After the system turns on, the feedrate is ones set by №030 and F value is reserved after F is
executed. The feed rate is 0 after F0 is executed. F value is reserved when the system resets and
163
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

emergently stops. The feedrate override is reserved when the system is turned off.
Note: In G99 modal, there is the uneven cutting feed rate when the spindle speed is lower than 1 r/min; there
is the follow error in the actual cutting feed rate when there is the swing in the spindle speed. To gain
the high machining quality, it is recommended that the selected spindle speed should be not lower
than min. speed of spindle servo or converter.

Cutting feed: The system can control the motions in X, Z direction contributed that the motion path of
Ⅰ Programming

tool and the defined path by commands (line straight, arc ) is consistent, and also
instantaneous speed on the tangent of motion path and F word is consistent, which
motion control is called cutting feed or interpolation. The cutting feedrate is specified by
F, the system divides the cutting feedrate specified by F according to the programming
path into vector in X, Z direction, also controls the instantaneous speed in X, Z direction
to contribute that the combined speed of vector in X, Z direction is equal to F command
value.

dx F is the combined speed of vector of X/Y-axis instantaneous speed；

fx  F dx is the X-axis instantaneous(dt) increment,
dx2  dz2 fx is the X-aixs instantaneous speed in X direction;
dz is the Z-axis instantaneous(dt) increment ,
dz fz is the Z-axis instantaneous speed.
fz  F
dx2  dz 2

Example: In Fig. 2-97, the data in the brackets are the coordinates for each point (it is the
diameter in X axis), the system parameter No.022 is 3800, the system parameter
No.023 is 7600, the rapid override and feedrate override are 100%.

fz
fx

A Starting point

Fig. 3-97
Program as follows:
G50 X160 Z80; (Create a workpiece coordinate system)
G0 G98 X50 Z0; (Rapid traverse from A to B through M point. A→M: X-axis rapid traverse
speed 7600mm/min, Z-axis 7600mm/min in Z direction, M→B: X-axis
rapid traverse
speed 0mm/min, Z-axis 7600mm/min in Z direction
G1 W-30 F100; (B→C, X-axis rapid traverse speed 0mm/min, Z-axis 100mm/min)
X100 W-20; (C→D, X-axis rapid traverse speed 156mm/min, Z-axis 62mm/min)
X140; (D→E, X-axis rapid traverse speed 200mm/min, Z-axis 0mm/min)
G3 W-40 R20; (EFG circular interpolation, E point: X axis instantaneous speed 200mm/min,
Z axis 0mm/min
F point: X-axis instantaneous speed 0mm/min,
Z axis 100mm/min)

164
 Chapter 3 G Commands

W-10; (G→H, X axis rapid traverse speed 0 mm/min, Z axis 100mm/min)

M30;
The system supplies 16 steps for spindle override (0%～150%, increment of 10%).PLC ladder
defines tune ways of spindle override and whether the actual feedrate override steps is reserved or
not after the system is switched off, which is referred by user manual from machine manufacturer
when using the system. Refer to the following functions of GSK980TDi standard PLC ladder.

Ⅰ Programming
The cutting feedrate can be tuned real time by the feedrate override key on the operator panel or
the external override switch, and the actual cutting feedrate is tuned at 16 steps in 0～150%
(increment of 10%) but it is invalid for thread cutting to tune the feedrate override. Refer to Ⅱ
OPERATION about cutting feedrate override.
Related parameters:
System parameter No.027: the upper limit value of cutting feedrate(they are the same in X, Z
direction, diameter/min in X direction);
System parameter No.029: exponential function for time constant of acceleration/deceleration
when cutting feed and manual feed;
System parameter No.030: initial (ultimate) speed of acceleration/deceleration in exponential
function when cutting feed and manual feed.

3.26. Additional Axis Function

3.26.1 Additional Axis Start
Additional axis: Y, 4th, 5th. They can be set to the linear axis or rotary axis. Whether the selected
additional axis is valid is determined by the state bit parameter 187, and the axis name is changed by
data parameter 225; taking example of Y is as follows:

3.26.2 Motion of Additional Axis

1) rapidly traverse: G00 Y(V)__
2) feed motion: (G98/G99) G01 Y(V)__ F__
3) tapping: G33 Y(V)__ F(I)__
4) machine zero return: G28 Y(V)__
5) machine 2nd, 3rd, 4th reference point return: G30 P2(3,4) Y(V)__
6) G50 setting a coordinate system: G50 Y(V)__
7) Manual/Step/MPG feed, program zero return, manual machine zero return.
Note 1: Axis name is Y, absolute coordinate programming axis is Y, relative coordinate programming axis is V.
Axis name is C, absolute coordinate axis name is C, relative coordinate axis name is H. When axis
name is A or B, the relative coordinate programming axis name and absolute coordinate
programming axis name are the same.
Note 2: The additional axis Y does not execute X/Z interpolation motion;
Note 3: Y(V) in G00, G28 , X(U) , Z(W) are in the same block, and each rapidly traverses with their separately
specified speed;
Note 4: Y(V) in G50 , X(U) , Z(W) are in the same block;
Note 5: Y(V) in G01, X(U) , Z(W) are not in the same block, otherwise, the system alarms;
Note 6: Use the modal F of X/Z when G01 traverse speed of Y is not specified; the time constant is set by №29.

165
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

3.26.3 Additional Axis Coordinates Display

Ⅰ Programming

3.27 Macro Commands

GSK980TDi provides the macro command which is similar to the high language, and can realize
the variable assignment, and subtract operation, logic decision and conditional jump by user macro
command, contributed to compiling part program for special workpiece, reduce the fussy counting
and simplify the user program.

3.27.1 MACRO Variables

 Presentation of macro variables
Present with “#”＋ macro variables number.;
Format: # i(i=100,102,103,……) ;
Alternatively, the variable is specified by “#”+[Expression]
Format:# [i] (i = #100 + #102 + #103）
Example:#105，#109，# [#125 + #100 * #111]。
 Variable Type
The variable is divided into four types according to the variable number:
Number NO. Variable type Function
#0 Null variable The variable is null and is not valued.
The local variable is used to store data in the macro program,
such as result. When the system is turned off, the local variable is
#1~#33 Local variable
initialized to be null. When the macro program is called, the
argument values to the local.
The share variable has the same meaning in the different macro
#100~#199
Share variable program. When the system is turned off, the variable #100~#199
#500~#999
is initialized to be null, #500~#999 is saved and is not lost.
System System variable
#1000~
variable
 Macro variables reference
1. Macro variables can replace command values
Format: ﹤Address﹥+“# i” or﹤Address﹥+“－# I”. It shows the system takes variable value

166
 Chapter 3 G Commands

or negative value of variable value as address value.

Example: F#103…when #103=15, its function is the same that of F15;
Z-#110…when #110=250, its function is the same that of Z-250;
2. Macro variables can replace macro variables values.
Format: “＃”+“9”+macro variables number
Example: if #100 = 205, #105 = 500,

Ⅰ Programming
The command function of X#9100 is the same as X500;
The command function of X-#9100 is the same as X-500

Note 1: If macro variables values exceed the maximum rang of command values, they cannot be used. For
example: #130 = 120, M#130 exceeds the maximum command value.
 Null variable
When the variable value is not defined, it is null, the variable #0 is always null and only is read
instead of writing.
1). Reference
When an undefined variable (null variable) is referred, the address is ignored.
#1=<null> #1=0
G00 X100 Z#1 is equal to G00 X100 G00 X100 Z#1 is equal to G00 X100 Z0
2). Operation
Except for using <null variable > to value, the <null variable> used to operation in other
conditions is the same as that of “0”.
#1=<null> #1=0
#2=#1 #2=#1
↓(execution result) ↓(execution result)
#2=<null> #2=0
#2=#1﹡5 #2=#1﹡5
↓(execution result) ↓(execution result)
#2=0 #2=0
#2=#1+#1 #2=#1+#1
↓(execution result) ↓(execution result)
#2=0 #2=0
3). Condition expression
<null>s in EQ(=) & NE(≠) are different to “0”.
#1=<null> #1=0
#1 EQ #0 #1 EQ #0
↓ ↓
Valid Invalid
#1 NE #0 #1 NE #0
↓ ↓
Invalid Invalid
#1 GE #0 #1 GE #0
↓ ↓
Valid Invalid
#1 GT #0 #1 GT #0
↓ ↓
Invalid Invalid

167
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

 Variable display
Ⅰ Programming

(1) In macro window, the variable being displayed to the null means it is null, i.e. it is not
defined.
(2) The share variable (#100~#199, #500~#999) values are displayed in the macro variable
window, and is also displayed the window, the data is input directly to value the share
variable.
 System variable
（1）Interface signal: CNC only executes G and F signals. Whether there are I/O to correspond
to it is defined by PLC.
Variable No. Function
#1000~#1015 Correspond G54.0~G54.7, G55.0~G55.7 signal states
#1032 Correspond G54, G55 signal states
#1100~#1115 Correspond F54.0~G54.7, F55.0~F55.7 signal states
#1132 Correspond F54, F55 signal states
#1133 Correspond F56, F57, F58, F59 signal states

(2) Tool compensation system variable:

X compensation Z compensation Tool tip radius Y compensation
Imagery
Compensation value value compensation value value
tool tip
No. Geometric Geometric Geometric Geometric
Wear Wear Wear position T Wear
shape shape shape shape
1 #2001 #2701 #2101 #2801 #2201 #2901 #2301 #2401 #2451
… … … … … … … … … …
32 #2032 #2732 #2132 #2832 #2232 #2932 #2332 #2432 #2482

(3) Machined workpiece number:

Variable No. Function
#3901 Machined workpiece number(completion)
#3902 The Max. machining numbers

(4) System modal information variable

Variable
Function
No.
#4001 G00, G01, G02, G03, G05, G32, G33, G34, G80, No. 1 group

168
 Chapter 3 G Commands

G84, G88, G90, G92, G94, G124(G06.2),

G126(G06.3),G132(G32.1),G144(G07.2),G146(G07.3)
#4002 G96, G97 No. 2 group
#4005 G98, G99 No. 3 group
#4006 G20, G21 No. 6 group
#4007 G40, G41, G42 No. 7 group

Ⅰ Programming
#4012 G66, G67 No. 12 group
#4013 G54,G55,G56,G57,G58,G59 No. 14 group
#4016 G17,G18,G19 No. 16 group
#4109 F command
#4113 M command
#4114 Serial No.
#4115 Program No.
#4119 S command
#4120 T command

(5) System variable of coordinate position information:

Tool compensation
Variable No. Position signal Coordinate system Read in running
value
Workpiece
#5001~#5005 End point of block Not including Possible
coordinate system
Machine
#5021~#5025 Current position
coordinate system
Including impossible
Workpiece
#5041~#5045 Current position
coordinate system

Note: The position listed in the above table separately corresponds orderly to X, Y, Z, 4th, 5th axis. For example:
#5001 meanings to be X position information, #5002 meanings to be Y position information, #5003
meanings to be Z position information and #5004 meanings to 4th position information and #5005
th
meanings to 5 position information.

(6) The system variable of MPG interruption value: Readable variable

Variable No. Function
st
#5121 The 1 axis MPG interruption value
#5122 The 2nd axis MPG interruption value
#5123 The 3rd axis MPG interruption value
#5124 The 4th axis MPG interruption value
#5125 The 5th axis MPG interruption value

（7）Compensation values of workpiece coordinate systems

Variable No. Function
#5201~#5205 External workpiece zero offset value of 1st ~5th axis
#5221~#5225 G54 workpiece zero offset value of 1st ~5th axis
#5241~#5245 G55 workpiece zero offset value of 1st ~5th axis
#5261~#5265 G56 workpiece zero offset value of 1st ~5th axis
#5281~#5285 G57 workpiece zero offset value of 1st ~5th axis

169
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

#5301~#5305 G58 workpiece zero offset value of 1st ~5th axis

#5321~#5325 G59 workpiece zero offset value of 1st ~5th axis
Note: Message described in the above table separately corresponds to X, Y, Z, the 4th, 5th axis. For
example, #5201 means the offset message of X axis, #5202 means the one of Y axis，#5203 means
the one of Z axis,#5204 means the one of the 4th axis, #5205 means the one of the 5th axis.
Ⅰ Programming

(8) Application:
O0100; (#100 is the machined workpiece number, its O9580;
initial value=0) G65 H23 P#101 Q#4120 R100; (obtain the
G00 X100 Z100; tool offset No.)
T0101; IF[#101==0]GOTO10; (Do not modify the
IF[#100<100]GOTO10; (has continuously machined wear value when the tool offset is
100？) regarded as 0)
G65 P9580 U-0.01 W-0.01; (call the macro program #102=2000+#101; (X wear macro
compensation tool wear) variable)
N10 G00 X50 Z50; #103=2100+#101; (Z wear macro
……; variable)
……; #9102=#9102+#21; (modify X wear)
……; #9103=#9103+#23; (modify Z wear)
Machine program; T#4120; (call a new tool offset value)
……; N10 M99;
T0202;
IF[#100<100]GOTO20; (has continuously machined
100？)
G65 P9580 U-0.01 W-0.01; (call the macro program
compensation tool wear)
N20 ……;
……;
……;
#100=#100+1; (machined workpiece number +1)
IF[#100==101]THEN #100=0;
M30;

3.27.2 Operation & Jump Command G65

Command format:
G65 Hm P# i Q# j R# k;
Command significance:
m: operation or jump command, range 01～99.
#i: macro variables name for storing values.
# j: macro variables name 1 for operation, can be constant.
# k: macro variables name 2 for operation, can be constant.
# i = #j O # k
Note: Macro variable name has no “#” when it is presented directly with constant.
Macro command list Operation sign specified by Hm

170
 Chapter 3 G Commands

Command format Functions Definitions

G65 H01 P#i Q#j Assignment # i = # j assign value of j to i
G65 H02 P#i Q#j R#k; Decimal add operation #i=#j+#k
G65 H03 P#i Q#j R#k; Decimal subtract operation #i=#j-#k
G65 H04 P#i Q#j R#k; Decimal multiplication operation # i = # j×# k
G65 H05 P#i Q#j R#k; Decimal division operation # i = # j÷# k

Ⅰ Programming
G65 H11 P#i Q#j R#k; Binary addition # i = # j OR # k
G65 H12 P#i Q#j R#k; Binary multiplication(operation) # i = # j AND # k
G65 H13 P#i Q#j R#k; Binary exclusive or # i = # j XOR # k
G65 H21 P#i Q#j; Decimal square root #i= #j
G65 H22 P#i Q#j; Decimal absolute value # i = |# j |
G65 H23 P#i Q#j R#k; Decimal remainder Remainder of # i = (#j÷# k)
G65 H24 P#i Q#j; Decimal into binary # i = BIN(# j )
G65 H25 P#i Q#j; Binary into decimal # i = DEC(# j )
Decimal multiplication/division # i = # i×# j÷# k
G65 H26 P#i Q#j R#k;
operation
G65 H27 P#i Q#j R#k; Compound square root # i = # j 2 # k 2
G65 H31 P#i Q#j R#k; Sine # i = # j×sin(# k)
G65 H32 P#i Q#j R#k; Cosine # i = # j×cos(# k)
G65 H33 P#i Q#j R#k; Tangent # i = # j×tan(# k)
G65 H34 P#i Q#j R#k; Arc tangent # i = ATAN(# j / # k)
G65 H80 Pn; Unconditional jump Jump to block n
Jump to block n if # j = # k,otherwise
G65 H81 Pn Q#j R#k; Conditional jump 1
the system executes in order
Jump to block n if # j ≠ # k, otherwise
G65 H82 Pn Q#j R#k; Conditional jump 2
the system executes in order
Jump to block n if # j ﹥ # k,
G65 H83 Pn Q#j R#k; Conditional jump 3 otherwise the system executes in
order
Jump to block n if # j ﹤ # k,
G65 H84 Pn Q#j R#k; Conditional jump 4 otherwise the system executes in
order
Jump to block n if # j ≥ # k, otherwise
G65 H85 Pn Q#j R#k; Conditional jump 5
the system executes in order
Jump to block n if # j ≤# k, otherwise
G65 H86 Pn Q#j R#k; Conditional jump 6
the system executes in order
G65 H99 Pn; P/S alarm (500+n) alarms
Operation commands
1) Assignment of macro variables: # I = # J
G65 H01 P#I Q#J
(Example) G65 H01 P# 101 Q1005; (#101 = 1005)
G65 H01 P#101 Q#110; (#101 = #110)
G65 H01 P#101 Q-#102; (#101 = -#102)
2) Decimal add operation: # I = # J+# K

171
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

G65 H02 P#I Q#J R#K

(Example) G65 H02 P#101 Q#102 R15; (#101 = #102+15)
3) Decimal subtract operation: # I = # J－# K
G65 H03 P#I Q#J R# K
(Example) G65 H03 P#101 Q#102 R#103; (#101 = #102－#103)
4) Decimal multiplication operation: # I = # J×# K
Ⅰ Programming

G65 H04 P#I Q#J R#K

(Example) G65 H04 P#101 Q#102 R#103; (#101 = #102×#103)
5) Decimal division operation: # I = # J÷# K
G65 H05 P#I Q#J R#K
(Example) G65 H05 P#101 Q#102 R#103; (#101 = #102÷#103)
6) Binary logic add(or) : # I = # J.OR. # K
G65 H11 P#I Q#J R#K
(Example) G65 H11 P#101 Q#102 R#103; (#101 = #102.OR. #103)
7) Binary logic multiply(and) : # I = # J.AND. # K
G65 H12 P#I Q#J R#K
(Example ) G65 H12 P# 201 Q#102 R#103; (#101 = #102.AND.#103)
8) Binary executive or: # I = # J.XOR. # K
G65 H13 P#I Q#J R#K
(Example) G65 H13 P#101 Q#102 R#103; (#101 = #102.XOR. #103)
9) Decimal square root: # I = #J
G65 H21 P#I Q#J
(Example) G65 H21 P#101 Q#102 ; ( #101  #102 )
10) Decimal absolute value: # I = | # J |
G65 H22 P#I Q#J
(Example) G65 H22 P#101 Q#102 ; (#101 = | #102 |)
11) Decimal remainder: # I = # J－TRUNC(#J/#K)×# K,TRUNC: Omit decimal fraction
G65 H23 P#I Q#J R#K
(Example) G65 H23 P#101 Q#102 R#103; (#101 = #102- TRUNC (#102/#103)×#103
12) Decimal converting into binary: # I = BIN (# J)
G65 H24 P#I Q#J
(Example) G65 H24 P#101 Q#102 ; (#101 = BIN(#102) )
13) Binary converting into decimal: # I = BCD (# J)
G65 H25 P#I Q#J
(Example) G65 H25 P#101 Q#102 ; (#101 = BCD(#102) )
14) Decimal multiplication/division operation: # I =(# I×# J) ÷# K
G65 H26 P#I Q#J R# k
(Example) G65 H26 P#101 Q#102 R#103; (#101 =(# 101×# 102) ÷#103)

15) Compound square root: # I = # J 2 # K 2

G65 H27 P#I Q#J R#K

(#101 = #102  #103 )

2 2
(Example) G65 H27 P#101 Q#102 R#103;
16) Sine: # I = # J•SIN(# K) (Unit: ‰)
G65 H31 P#I Q#J R#K
(Example) G65 H31 P#101 Q#102 R#103; (#101 = #102•SIN(#103) )
17) Cosine: # I = # J•COS(# K) (Unit: ‰)

172
 Chapter 3 G Commands

G65 H32 P#I Q#J R# k

(Example) G65 H32 P#1Q#102 R#103; (#101 =#102•COS(#103) )
18) Tangent: # I = # J•TAM(# K) (Unit: ‰)
G65 H33 P#I Q#J R# K
(Example) G65 H33 P#101 Q#102 R#103; (#101 = #102•TAM(#103) )
19) Cosine: # I = ATAN(# J /# K) (Unit: ‰)

Ⅰ Programming
G65 H34 P#I Q#J R# k
(Example) G65 H34 P#101 Q#102 R#103; (#101 =ATAN(#102/#103) )
Jump commands
1) Unconditional jump
G65 H80 Pn; n: Block number
(Example) G65 H80 P120; (jump to N120)
2) Conditional jump 1 #J.EQ.# K ( = )
G65 H81 Pn Q#J R# K; n: Block number
(Example) G65 H81 P1000 Q#101 R#102;
The program jumps N1000 when # 101= #102 and executes in order when #101 ≠#102.
3) Conditional jump 2 #J.NE.# K ( ≠ )
G65 H82 Pn Q#J R# K; n: Block number
(Example) G65 H82 P1000 Q#101 R#102;
The program jumps N1000 when # 101 ≠ #102 and executes in order when #101 = #102.
4) Conditional jump 3 #J.GT.# K ( ＞ )
G65 H83 Pn Q#J R# K; n: Block number
(Example) G65 H83 P1000 Q#101 R#102;
The program jumps N1000 when # 101 ＞ #202 and executes in order when #101 ≤
#102.
5) Conditional jump 4 #J.LT.# K ( ＜ ＝)
G65 H84 Pn Q#J R# K; n: Block number
(Example) G65 H84 P1000 Q#101 R#102;
The program jumps N1000 when # 101＜#102 and executes in order when #101≥#102.
6) Conditional jump 5 #J.GE.# K ( ≥ )
G65 H85 Pn Q#J R# K; n: Block number
(Example) G65 H85 P1000 Q#101 R#102;
The program jumps N1000 when # 101 ≤ #1 and executes in order when #101 ＜ #102.
7) Conditional jump 6 #J.LE.# K ( ≤ )
G65 H86 Pn Q#J R# K; n: Block number
(Example) G65 H86 P1000 Q#101 R#102;
8) P/S alarm
G65 H99 Pi; i: alarm number +500
(Example) G65 H99 P15;
P/S alarm 515.
Note 1: The alarm content (/***) can be omitted. When this alarm content is omitted, only the alarm occurs, and
the alarm content is null.
Note 2: Block number can be specified by variables. Such as: G65 H81 P#100 Q#101 R#102;
The program jumps to block that its block number is specified by #100.

173
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

3.27.3 Program Example with Macro Command

Differences between user macro program call (G65, G66) and subprogram call (M98) are as
follows:
1. G65, G66 can specify the argument data and send them to macro program and M98 has no
such function.
2. G65, G66 can change the level of local variable and M98 has no such function.
Ⅰ Programming

3. G65, G66 only follows N and only P or H follows them.

3.27.3.1 One-Shot Call G65

Command format: G65 P_ L_ <argument>_;
Macro program specified by P is called, the argument (data) is sent to the user macro
program body.
Command explanation:
P —— called macro program number
L —— called times (it is 1 when it is omitted, it can be the repetitive times from 1 to
9999)
<Argument> —— data sent to macro program is valued with the corresponding local
variable.
Nest call: G65 call has four-level nest.
Main program macro program (1st level) macro program (2nd level) macro program (3rd level) macro program (4th level)

O____； O____； O____； O____； O____；

……； ……； ……； ……； ……；
G65 P_； G65 P_； G65 P_； G65 P_； ……；
……； M99； M99； M99； M99；

(0 level) (1st level) (2nd level) (3rd level) (4th level)

#01 #01 #01 #01 #01

Local
variable … … … … …
… … … … …
#33 #33 #33 #33 #33

Specifying argument: the argument can be specified by two forms.

Method 1: Use the letter besides G, L, O, N, P, and each is only specified one time, and the last
which is specified many times is valid.

Argument address and corresponding variable No. table in method 1

Address Variable No. Address Variable No. Address Variable No.
A #1 I #4 T #20
B #2 J #5 U #21
C #3 K #6 V #22
D #7 M #13 W #23
E #8 Q #17 X #24
F #9 R #18 Y #25
H #11 S #19 Z #26
Note: The addresses which are not needed to specify can be omitted, the corresponding local variable of
the omitted address is valued by <Null>.

174
 Chapter 3 G Commands

Method II: Use A, B, C and li, Ji, Ki (I is 1~10), the used letter and executed times (I, J, K)
automatically decides the corresponding variable number of argument. The argument in the method
specifies A, B, C one time for each and I, J, K up to 10 times ( 10 times replacing the more).
Argument address and corresponding variable No. table in method II
Address Variable No. Address Variable No. Address Variable No.
A #1 K3 #12 J7 #23

Ⅰ Programming
B #2 I4 #13 K7 #24
C #3 J4 #14 I8 #25
I1 #4 K4 #15 J8 #26
J1 #5 I5 #16 K8 #27
K1 #6 J5 #17 I9 #28
I2 #7 K5 #18 J9 #29
J2 #8 I6 #19 K9 #30
K2 #9 J6 #20 I10 #31
I3 #10 K6 #21 J10 #32
J3 #11 I7 #22 K10 #33
Note 1: The subscripts of I, J, K are used to confirming the specified sequence of argument, and are not
written in the actual programming.
Note 2: The system can identify the variable number according to the present sequence and times of I, J, K in
the method.
Note 3: CNC internal can automatically identify the argument specifying mode I and II. When the two modes
are specified, the later specified is valid.

3.27.3.2 Modal Call G66

Command format: G66 P_ L_ <Argument>_;
Command explanation: P —— called macro program number
L —— called times (It is 1 when it is omitted, it can be the repetitive
times from 1 to 9999)
<Argument> —— data sent to macro program is valued with the
corresponding local variable.
Nest call: G66 call has four-level nest.
Note:
1) Macro program is called firstly after G66 block is executed.
2) The macro program is called again after G00, G01, G02, G03, G05 are executed (after
G66 is executed and before the modal call is cancelled).
3) Call the value which is updated from the argument to the local variable.
4) G65 call will automatically cancel G66 modal call.

3.27.3.3 Modal Call Cancel G67

Command format: G67;
Command explanation: cancel G66 modal macro program call
Application:
O2005(O2005) ;
G00 X100 Z50;
G66 P0100 L2 A2 B20 C20 I30 J20 K20; call P0100 two times when the system executes the
block
G01 X80 Z50; call P0100 two times (update the local variable according to the argument) after

175
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

the system has executed the block

G67; cancel G66 modal call
G01 X20 Z50; the system does not call P0100 after it executes the block
M30；

3.28 Statement Macro Command

Ⅰ Programming

3.28.1 Arithmetic & Logic Operation

Arithmetic and logic operation
Function Expression format Remark
Definition or assignment #i = #j
addition #i = #j + #k
subtraction #i = #j - #k
multiplication #i = #j * #k
division #i = #j / #k
Or #i = #j OR #k
Logic operation is executed by
And #i = #j AND #K
the binary system
Exclusive Or #i = #j XOR #K
Square root #i = SQRT[#j]
Absolute value #i = ABS[#j]
Rounding-off #i = ROUND[#j]
FUP #i = FUP [#j]
FIX #i = FIX [#j]
Natural logarithm #i = LN[#j]
Exponential function #i = EXP[#j]
Sine #i = SIN[#j]
Arc sine #i = ASIN[#j]
Angle unit is specified by
Cosine #i = COS[#j]
degree. For example: 90°30’
Arc cosine #i = ACOS[#j]
is expressed by 90.5°
Tangent #i = TAN[#j]
Arc tangent #i = ATAN[#i]/ [#j]
BCD to BIN #i = BIN[#j]
Used for switching with PMC
BIN to BCD #i = BCD[#j]
Relative explanation:
1. Angle unit
Angle units of SIN, COS, ASIN, ACOS, TAN and ATAN are degree (°). For example: 90°30ˊ
means to be 90.5° (degree).
2. Arc sine # i=ASIN[#j]
i. result output range:
No.180#7 NAT is set to 1: 90°~ 270°;
No.180#7 NAT is set to 0: -90°~ 90°;
ii. when #j exceeds the range from -1 to 1, the system alarms P/S.
iii. the constant replaces the variables #j.
3. Arccosine # i =ACOS[#j]
i. Result output range 180°~ 0°.

176
 Chapter 3 G Commands

ii. When #j exceeds the range from -1 to 1, the system alarms P/S.
iii. The constant replaces the variables #j.
4. Arc tangent #i=ATAN[#j]/[#k]
Specify the lengths of two sides and separate them with a slash “/”.
i. Result output range:
When No.180#7 NAT is set to 1: 90°~ 270°;

Ⅰ Programming
[For example] #1=ATAN[-1]/[-1]: #1=225°;
When No.180#7 NAT is set to 0 -90°~ 90°;
[For example]#1=ATAN[-1]/[-1]: #1=45.0°;
ii. The constant replaces the variables #j.
5. Natural logarithm #i=LN[#j]
The constant replaces the variables #j
6. Exponential function #i=EXP[#j]
The constant replaces the variables #j
7. ROUND function
When arithmetical operation or logic operation IF or WHILE includes ROUND, ROUND rounds in
the first decimal place.
For example: #1=ROUND[#2]: #2=1.2345, the variables 1 is 1.0.
8. FUP FIX
After CNC executes the operation, the result integer absolute value is bigger the previous
absolute value, which is called FUP; the result integer absolute value is less than the one, which is
call FIX. Pay more attention to the negative execution.
Example:
Hypothetically, #1=1.2, #2= -1.2
When #3=FUP[#1] is executed, 2.0 is assigned to #3.
When #3=FIX[#1] is executed, 1.0 is assigned to #3.
When #3=FUP[#2] is executed, -2.0 is assigned to #3.
When #3=FIX[#2] is executed, -1.0 is assigned to #3.

3.28.2 Transfer & Cycle

In the program, the system uses GOTO and IF statement to change the control flow. There are
three types of transfer and cycle operation.
1. GOTO statement (unconditional transfer).
2. Condition control IF statement.
3. WHILE cycle statement.
1) Unconditional transfer (GOTO statement )
Transfer to the block which serial number is n. The system alarms when others exceeds the
range from 1 to 99999, and it specifies the serial number with the statement.
Format: GOTO n; n: serial number(1~99999)
Example: GOTO 1;
GOTO #101;
2) Conditional control (IF statement )
GOTO format: IF[ conditional statement]GOTO n;
When the specified conditional statement is valid, the system transfers to the block which serial
number is n; When the specified conditional statement is valid, the system executes the next block.
Example:

177
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

When the variable #1 is more than 10, the system transfers to the block which serial
number is N2.

IF [#1GT10] GOTO2;

If the condition Program If the condition

is not met. is met.
Ⅰ Programming

N2 G00 X10.0;

THEN format: IF[conditional expression]THEN<macro program statement >;

When the condition expression is valid, the system executes only one statement following THEN.
Example: IF[#1 EQ #2] THEN #3=0;
When #1 value is equal to the #2, 0 is assigned to the variable #3; when they are not equal, the
system orderly executes the followings instead of the assignment statement after THEN.

Conditional expression: the conditional expression must include the conditional operator, two
sides of conditional operator can be variable, constant or expression, and it must be closed with the
brackets ‘[’ ‘]’.
Conditional operator: the system uses the conditional operators listed in the following table.

Conditional operator Meaning

EQ or = = Equal to (=)
NE or <> Not equal to (≠)
GT or > More than (>)
GE or >= More than or equal to (≥)
LT or < Less than (<)
LE or <= Less than or equal to (≤)
Example: IF[3<>2]GOTO 2; its meaning: when 3 is not equal 2, the system skips to N2 block;
IF[#101>=7.22]THEN #101=SIN30; its meaning: when #101 is more than or equal to
7.22, the system executes the assignment after THEN. i.e. the sine value of 30 degree
is assigned to the variable #101.
Typical program: the following program counts the sum of the integer 1~10.
O9500
#1=0；… …the sum is initialized to be 0
#2=1；… …the summand number is initialized to be 1
N1 IF[#2 GT 10]GOTO2；… … the system skips to N2 when the summand is more than 10
#1= #1+#2； … …count the sum of two numbers
#2= #2+1； … … the summand adds 1
GOTO1； … … unconditionally skip to the block N1
N2 M30； … … end of program

3) Cycle (WHILE statement)

Specify one conditional expression after WHILE. When the specified conditional is valid, the
system executes the blocks between DO and END; otherwise, the system skips to the block after
END.
Example:

178
 Chapter 3 G Commands

WHILE [conditional expression] DOm; (m=1, 2, 3)

Program
When the condition When the
is not met. condition is met.

END m;

Ⅰ Programming
Explanation: when the specified condition is valid, the system executes the block between DO
and END; otherwise, executes the block after END. The two tabs after DO and END are consistent,
and the tab value can be 1, 2 or 3, otherwise, the system alarms.
Nest: the tab (1~3) in DO, END can be used many times. But the system alarms when there is
the intercross repetitive cycle in the program.

3.29 Metric/Inch Switch

Command format: G20; (inch input)
G21; (metric input)
Explanation: input/output unit of CNC system is divided into two, i.e., metric unit: mm and inch unit:
inch.
Input unit of modifying the system has also:
Modifying BIT0 (metric/inch): 0: metric input 1: inch input
No. 001# 0 completely corresponds to G20/G21, namely, the parameter also changes
when G20/G21 is executed; G20/G21 mode also changes when the parameter is
modified, and the alarm prompt occurs after modification. Parameters relevant to
metric/inch are referred to Installation & Connection, Section 3.2.17.

179
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

Notes
⑴ No.001＃0(INI) input increment unit change
After the input increment unit is changed (inch/metric input), the following unit system is
changed: (i.e.: mm<>inch; mm/min<>inch/min):
 F specifies the feedrate (mm/min<>inch/min), thread lead (mm <>inch)
 position command (mm<>inch)
Ⅰ Programming

 tool compensation value (mm<>inch)

 MPG graduation unit (mm<>inch)
 movement distance in incremental feed (mm<>inch)
 some data parameters, including №.45~ №.46、№.56、№.59、№.60、№.114、№.120~
№.123、№.140、№.154; the unit is 0.001mm (IS-B) in the metric input system, is
0.0001inch(IS-B) in the inch input system. For example, the same parameter NO.47
setting value is 100m, it means to be 0.1mm in the metric input system (G21), and it
means 0.01inch in the inch input system (G20).
(2) The machine coordinates will automatically switch after the input increment unit change is
switched:
(3) No.004＃0(SCW) output command unit change
SCW=0: the system minimal command increment uses the metric output (0.001mm)
SCW=1: the system minimal command increment uses the inch output (0.0001inch)
Some data parameter meanings will be changed when the output control bit parameter SCW is
changed:
 Speed parameter:
Metric machine: mm/min
Inch machine: 0.1 inch/min
Example: when the speed is set to 3800, the metric machine is 3800 mm/min and the
inch machine is 380 inch/min.
Speed parameters: №.22、№.27、№.28、№.30～№.33、№.41、№.107、№.113;
 Position(length) parameter
metric machine: 0.001 mm
inch machine: 0.0001 inch
When the setting is 100, the metric machine is 0.1mm and the inch machine is 0.01
inch.
Position parameters: №.34、№.45~ №.47、№.99 and all pitch error compensation
parameter;
Note 1: When the minimal input increment unit and the minimal command unit are different, the maximal error
is the half of minimal command unit. The error cannot be accumulated.
Note 2: The current system increment is IS-B in the above explanation.

3.30 Stored Stroke Limit 2 Detection G22 or G23

Code format: G22 X__ Y__ Z__ I__J__ K__；
G23；
Code function: Set the stored stroke limit 2 detection. Make out a fixed area, and specify the
inner or outer side (Bit 2 of parameter No.172 setting) of this area as the limit area. An
alarm issues when the machine tool coordinate enters into the limit area.
Code explanation: G code of the group 9

180
 Chapter 3 G Commands

G22： Open the stored stroke limit detection 2

G23： Close the stored stroke limit detection 2
X_Y_Z_： The limit coordinate value along positive direction, after the command is
performed, this data is then converted into the corresponding value to
save in the data parameter No.100. When the data does not input, the
value of the data parameter No.100 is regarded as the limit coordinate

Ⅰ Programming
value along the positive direction based upon the stored stroke limit
detection.
I_J_K_： The limit coordinate value along negative direction, after the command is
performed, this data is then converted into the corresponding value to
save in the data parameter No.101. When the data does not input, the
value of the data parameter No.101 is regarded as the limit coordinate
value along the negative direction based upon the stored stroke limit
detection.
Precautions:
1) The limit coordinate values of the stored stroke limit detection 2 are the coordinate
values of the machine tool coordinates;
2) When the Bit 4 of state parameter No. 172 sets to 0, the limit function is disabled, the
modal is fixed as G23; the alarm may issue by using the G22/G23 command;
3) The initial modal is G23 when the system power is turned on;
4) The inner/outer prohibition of the setting range is set by bit 2 of parameter No. 172;
5) When the bit 1 of state parameter No. 172 sets to 1, if the stored stroke limit detection 2
sets as inner limit, the limit function is then enabled after the overall axes are returned to
zero following with the system power is turned on; if it sets as the outer limit, after the
system ON, the limit function of an axis is enabled after this axis returns to zero;
6) G22/G23 coe can not be shared a same block with other G and MST codes; otherwise,
the alarm issues.
7) G22 code only can be changed the limit area of the X, Z or Y axis, if the limit area of the
rest of the axes should be altered, which can be set by the data parameter No. 100 or
No.101;
8) When the prohibition area of the stored stroke limit detection 2 is set, as well when the
positive stroke is less than or equals to the negative one and the external prohibition is
selected, the overall areas are the forbidden areas;
9) When the prohibition area of the stored stroke limit detection 2 is set, as well when the
positive stroke is less than or equals to the negative one and the internal prohibition is
selected, the overall areas are the movable areas;
10) Set whether an axis is performed the stored stroke detection 2 by the bit 2 of parameter
No.190.

3.31 G Code Macro Program Call

Code format: G□□□□ L <Agrument >_
Code value（0~9999）
Code explanation: Code value: It is set by data parameter №.86~№.95;
L: The called times (It defaults to 1 if it omits, which can be specified the repeated
times from 1 to 9999);

181
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

<Argument>: The data converted to the macro program, its value is assigned to the
corresponding local variable, it is same that the G65 calls macro program.
Code value and the setting of program number call:
Data parameter No.86~No.95 set the used G code in the macro command call, use
the set G code, that is, the macro program call using G code can be defined. If the
data parameters No.86~No.95 are set to 0, this function will be then disabled. The
callable macro programs are O9010~O9019, the corresponding relationships
Ⅰ Programming

between parameter number and program number are as follows:

Para. No. Program No. Para. No. Program No.
86 O9010 91 O9015
87 O9011 92 O9016
88 O9012 93 O9017
89 O9013 94 O9018
90 O9014 95 O9019
For example: №.86 ＝ 100, №.87 ＝ 103, then:
G00 X0 Z0;
G100; //Call the No. O9010 macro program
G103; // Call the No. O9011 macro program
…;
M30;
Precaution:
The allowable range of the data parameters No. 86~No. 95 setting value is 0～9999,
when the setting value is identical with the G code, this function is automatically
disabled.

3.32 Editable Parameter Read/Write G10 L52

Code format: G10 L52; Set the parameter read or write method
N_/K_/D_/DT_/DC_ R(W)_; Read/write program of the system/K/D/DT/DC
parameters
N_ P_ R(W)_; Read/write program of axis, spindle or channel
parameter
…
G11; Cancel the parameter read/write
Code explanation: N_ ：Parameter number；
K_ ：K parameter number of PLC；
D_ ：D parameter number of PLC；
DT_ ：DT parameter number of PLC；
DC_ ：DC parameter number of PLC；
R(W) _：R is the read address from parameter, which only can be regarded
as the macro variable number；W is the write-in value from parameter, which
can be treated as the constant or marco variable；When the read/write
parameter is the state one, its value from reading/writing is binary, and the
others are decimal system;；
P_: The axis number 1 to the top controllable axis number (from 1 to the

182
 Chapter 3 G Commands

Max. channel number) can be used for reading the axis, spindle or channel
parameter;
Precautions:
1) In the parameter write/read method, simultaneously, when two or more command words
(including the repeated display for a same command word) of N_/K_/D_/DT_/DC_ are
displayed at the same line, system alarm is then shown: 178 alarm, parameter

Ⅰ Programming
(N_/K_/D_/DT_/DC_) (including the inexistent specified parameter) does not specify in
the parametr read/write mode or the parameter is repeatedly specified;
2) In the parameter write/read method, when block specifies the operation command
(R/W), but it does not exist any one command word of the N_/K_/D_/DT_/DC_,
alternatively, there is the command word without data, system alarm is then shown: 178
alarm, parameter (N_/K_/D_/DT_/DC_) (including the inexistent specified parameter)
does not specify in the parametr read/write mode or the parameter is repeatedly
specified;
3) In the parameter write/read method, when the block specifies the parameter number,
but it does not exist in R/W operation command or R, W exist at the same time, system
alam is then shown: 177 alarm; the read/write method does not specify or the read/write
method is repeatedly specified in the parameter read/write method;
4) In the parameter write/read method, if there are command words other than the
_/P_/K_/D_/DT_/DC_ R_/W_, ignore it, the command operations except from the
parameter reading/writing will not be performed;
5) Specify P value in the block, if the axis corresponding set parameter does not exist,
igore it;
6) When reading or writing the axis parameter or spindle parameter, if the P value does not
occur, the system alarm is then displayed: 178 alarm; the axis number does not specify
when reading/writing the axis parameter;
7) The system can not set the parameter with 2 authority levels or above if it is under the 3
or less authories. If the program exists the block to be modified the parameter with 2 or
more authority levels, the system alarm is then displayed: 174 alarm, the current
authority prohibits to be modified the parameter;
8) In the parameter write/read method, R_ can only be accompanied with macro variable,
otherwise, the alarm occurs: 180 alarm, as well, R only can be specified the marco
variable in this method;
9) When writing the bit parameter, if the W_ is followed with the operation number other
than the binary constant and macro variable, the system alarm is then displayed: 176
alarm. The W value or the macro variable value followed with the W are not the enabled
binary value;
10) When writing the bit parameter, when the value followed with the W exceeds the
corresponding parameter range, the system alarm is then displayed: 175 alarm; The W
value or the macro variable value followed with the W are not the enabled binary value;
11) The dual-channel system forbids other channels to perform the machining procedure in
the parameter read/writing state; otherwise, the system alarm is then displayed: 186
alarm; the other channels can not performed the machining procedure during the
parameter is read or written;
12) The parameter read/write function+n can not be used together with the tool life span
administration function.

183
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

Programming example:

1) State parameter read, write example

Program Explanation
＃101 ＝ 10000000； Macro variable No. 101 is the setting value of the
state parameter No.2.
Ⅰ Programming

G10 L52； Set the parameter read or write method

N1 R#100； Read the state parameter No.1 to the macro
variable No.100.
N1 W00000010； Set the state parameter No.1 as 00000010.
N2 W#101； Set the state parameter No.2 as the value of the
macro variable No.101.
G11； Cacnel the read or write method of the parameter.

2) Data parameter read/write example

Program Explanation
＃101 ＝ 50； Marco variable ＃101 is the setting value of the
data parameter No.31.
G10 L52； Set the parameter read or write method
N30 R#100； Read data parameter No.30 to the macro variable
＃100.
N30 W200； Set the data parameter No.30 as 200.
N31 W#101； Set the data parameter No. to the value of the
macro variable ＃101.
G11； Cacnel the read or write method of the parameter.

3) Axle type parameter read or write example

Program Explanation
＃103＝00000101； Macro variable ＃103 is the setting value of the data parameter
No.188 along with the 1st axis (X axis).
＃104＝100； Macro variable ＃104 is the setting value of the data parameter
No.23 along with the 5th axis (C axis).
＃105＝6000； Macro variable ＃105 is the setting value of the data parameter
No.38 along with the 2nd axis (S2).
G10 L52； Set The read or write method of parameter.
N187 P1 R#100； Read the 1st axis parameter value of the axle-type state
parameter No, 187 to the macro variable ＃100.
N187 P5 Set the axle type state parameter No.187 along with the 5th axis
W01100001； is 01100001.
N188 P1 W#103； Set the 1st axis of the axle type state parameter No.188 to the
value of the macro variable ＃103
N22 P1 R#101； Read the 1st axis parameter value of the axle type data
parameter No.22 to the macro variable ＃101.
N22 P2 W8000； Set the 2nd axis parameter of the axle type data parameter

184
 Chapter 3 G Commands

No.22 as 8000.
th
N23 P5 W#104； Set the 5 axis of the axle type data parameter No.23 to the
value of the macro variable ＃104
N37 P1 R#102； Read the 1st axis parameter value of the axle type data
parameter No.37 to the macro variable ＃102.
rd
N37 P3 W8000； Set the 3 axis parameter of the spindle data parameter No.37

Ⅰ Programming
as 8000.
th
N38 P2 W#105； Set the 5 axis of the spindle data parameter No.38 to the
value of the macro variable ＃105
G11； Cacnel the read or write method of the parameter.
Note: The read/write programming method of the K parameter is consistent with the one of the
system state parameter; The read/write programming method of the D/DT/DC parameters are
coincident with the one of the system data parameter.

185
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual
Ⅰ Programming

186
 Chapter 4 Tool Nose Radius Compensation(G41,G42)

CHAPTER 4 TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION (G41, G42)

4.1 Application

Ⅰ Programming
4.1.1 Overview
Part program is compiled generally for one point of tool according to a workpiece contour. The
point is generally regarded as the tool nose A point in an imaginary state (there is no imaginary tool
nose point in fact and the tool nose radius can be omitted when using the imaginary tool nose point to
program) or as the center point of tool nose arc ( as Fig. 4-1). Its nose of turning tool is not the
imaginary point but one arc owing to the processing and other requirement in the practical machining.
There is an error between the actual cutting point and the desired cutting point, which will cause the
over- or under-cutting affecting the part precision. So a tool nose radius compensation is needed in
machining to improve the part precision.

Fig. 4-1 Tool

Tool nose center path without C compensation

Workpiece
Tool nose center path with C compensation

Tool path with imaginary

tool nose and C
compensation
Tool nose

Error

Tool path with imaginary tool nose and without C compensation

Fig. 4-2 Tool nose center path

4.1.2 Imaginary Tool Nose Direction

Suppose that it is generally difficult to set the tool nose radius center on the initial position as Fig.
4-3; suppose that it is easily set the tool nose on it as Fig. 4-4; The tool nose radius can be omitted in
programming. Fig. 4-5 and Fig.4-6 correspond separately to the tool paths of tool nose center
programming and imaginary tool nose programming when tool nose radius is executed or not.

187
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

Starting point
Starting point
Ⅰ Programming

Fig. 4-3 Programming with tool nose Fig. 4-4 Programming with imaginary tool nose

Tool path is shown in Fig.4-5 when the tool nose center programming is executed.

Tool nose
Tool nose center path Start compensation
center path

Programmed path
Programmed path

Fig. 4-5-1 the tool nose center path is Fig. 4-5-2 precise cutting with tool
the same that of programmed path without radius compensation
tool radius compensation

The tool path is shown in Fig. 4-6 when imaginary tool nose programming is executed

Imaginary tool nose

path Imaginary tool nose
path
Start compensation

Programmed path Programmed path

Fig. 4-6-1 the imaginary tool nose path is Fig. 4-6-2 precise cutting with tool
the same that of programmed path without radius compensation
tool radius compensation

The tool is supposed to one point in programming but the actual cutting blade is not one ideal
point owing to machining technology. Because the cutting blade is not one point but one circular,
machining error is caused which can be deleted by tool nose circular radius compensation. In actual
machining, suppose that there are different position relationship between tool nose point and tool
nose circular center point, and so it must create correct its direction of imaginary tool nose.
From tool nose center to imaginary tool nose, set imaginary tool nose numbers according to tool
direction in cutting. Suppose there are 10 kinds of tool nose setting and 9 directions for position
relationship. The tool nose directions are different in different coordinate system (rear tool post
coordinate system and front tool post coordinate system) even if they are the same tool nose
direction numbers as the following figures. In figures, it represents relationships between tool nose
and starting point, and end point of arrowhead is the imaginary tool nose; T1～T8 in rear tool post

188
 Chapter 4 Tool Nose Radius Compensation(G41,G42)

coordinate system is as Fig. 4-7; T1～T8 in front tool post coordinate system is as Fig. 4-8. The tool
nose center and starting point for T0 and T9 are shown in Fig. 4-9.
X axis

Rear tool post coordinate system

Ⅰ Programming
Z axis

Imaginary tool Imaginary tool

nose No.1 nose No. 2

Imaginary tool Imaginary tool

nose No.3
nose No.4

Imaginary tool
nose No.5 Imaginary tool
nose No.6

Imaginary tool
nose No.7 Imaginary tool
nose No. 8

Fig. 4-7 Imaginary tool nose number in rear tool post coordinate system

189
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

Z axis
Front tool post coordinate system

X axis
Ⅰ Programming

Imaginary tool
Imaginary tool
nose No.2
nose No. 1

Imaginary tool Imaginary tool

nose No.3 nose No.4

Imaginary tool
nose No.5
Imaginary tool
nose No.6

Imaginary tool
nose No.7
Imaginary tool
nose No.8

Fig. 4-8 Imaginary tool nose number in front tool post coordinate system

190
 Chapter 4 Tool Nose Radius Compensation(G41,G42)

Fig. 4-9 Tool nose center on starting point

Ⅰ Programming
4.1.3 Compensation Value Setting
Preset imaginary tool nose number and tool nose radius value for each tool before executing
tool nose radius compensation. Set the tool nose radius compensation value in OFFSET window (as
Fig. 4-1), R is tool nose radius compensation value and T is imaginary tool nose number.

Table 4-1 CNC tool nose radius compensation value display window

number X Z R T
000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0
001 0.020 0.030 0.020 2
002 1.020 20.123 0.180 3
… … … … …
032 0.050 0.038 0.300 6

Note: X tool offset value can be specified in diameter or radius, set by No.004 Bit4 ORC, offset value is in
radius when ORC=1 and is in diameter when ORC=0.

In toolsetting, the tool nose is also imaginary tool nose point of Tn (n=0~9) when taking
Tn(n=0~9) as imaginary tool nose. For the same tool, offset value from standard point to tool nose
radius center (imaginary tool nose is T3) is different with that of ones from standard point to imaginary
tool nose(imaginary tool nose is T3) when T0 and T3 tool nose points are selected to toolsetting in
rear tool post coordinate system, taking tool post center as standard point. It is easier to measure
distances from the standard point to the tool nose radius center than from the standard point to the
imaginary tool nose, and so set the tool offset value by measuring distance from the standard point to
the imaginary tool nose(tool nose direction of T3).

191
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual
Ⅰ Programming

Fig. 4-10 Tool offset value of tool post center as benchmark

4.1.4 Command Format

G40
G00 X Z T ；
G41
G01
G42

Commands Function specifications Remark

G40 Cancel the tool nose radius compensation

Tool nose radius left compensation is specified by G41 in rear tool
G41 post coordinate system and tool nose radius right compensation is See Fig.4-11
specified by G41 in front tool post coordinate system and 4-12
Tool nose radius right compensation is specified by G42 in rear tool
G42 post coordinate system and tool nose radius left compensation is
specified by G42 in front tool post coordinate system

4.1.5 Compensation Direction

Specify its direction according to relative position between tool nose and workpiece when
executing tool nose radius compensation is shown in Fig. 4-11 and Fig.4-12.

192
 Chapter 4 Tool Nose Radius Compensation(G41,G42)

Z
Tool

G42:Tool is right to G41:Tool is left to

Ⅰ Programming
workpiece from its workpiece from its
movement direction movement direction

Workpiece

X axis X axis

Z axis Z axis

Fig. 4-11 Compensation direction of rear coordinate system

193
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

Z
X
Tool

G41:Tool is right to G42:Tool is left to

Ⅰ Programming

workpiece from its workpiece from its

movement direction movement direction

Workpiece

Z axis Z axis

X axis X axis

Fig. 4-12 Compensation direction of front coordinate system

4.1.6 Notes
 In tool nose radius compensation mode, the system will alarm when it executes 7 block or more
than blocks without motion Command.
 Tool nose radius R is without negative value, otherwise there is a mistake running path.
 Tool nose radius compensation is created and cancelled in G00 or G01 instead of G02 or G03,
otherwise, the system alarms.
RESET

 The system cancels the tool nose radius compensation mode when pressing key or
execute M30
 G40 must be specified to cancel offset mode before the program is ended, otherwise the tool
path offsets one tool nose radius.
 The system executes the tool nose radius compensation in main program and subprogram but
must cancel it before calling subprogram (before execute M98) and then create it again in the
subprogram.
 The system does not execute the tool nose radius compensation in G74, G75, G76 and cancel it
temporarily.
 The system executes the tool nose radius compensation in G90, G94, it offsets one tool nose
radius (based upon the imagine cutter nose No.0) for G41 or G42.

194
 Chapter 4 Tool Nose Radius Compensation(G41,G42)

 The compensation mode will be automatically retreated by performing the G71, G72 or G73, if
the tool nose compensation should be used in the G71, G72 or G73 code, it can be rebuilt at the
1st part of the finish machining block.

4.1.7 Application

Ⅰ Programming
Machine a workpiece in the front tool post coordinate system as Fig. 4-13. Tool
number: T0101, tool nose radius R=2, imaginary tool nose number T=3.

R6

X
Fig. 4-13
For toolsetting in Offset Cancel mode, after toolsetting, Z axis offsets one tool nose
radius and its direction is relative to that of imaginary tool nose and toolsetting point,
otherwise the system excessively cuts tool nose radius when it starts to cut.
Set the tool nose radius R and imaginary tool nose direction in “TOOL OFFSET&WEAR”
window as following:

Table 4-3
No. X Z R T
001 2.000 3
002 … … … …
… … … … …
007 … … … …
008 … … … …

Program:
G00 X100 Z50 M3 T0101 S600; (Position, start spindle, tool change and execute
tool compensation)
G42 G00 X0 Z3; (Set tool nose radius compensation)
G01 Z0 F300; (Start cutting)
X16;
Z-14 F200;
G02 X28 W-6 R6;
G01 W-7;

195
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

X32;
Z-35;
G40 G00 X90 Z40; (Cancel tool nose radius compensation)
G00 X100 Z50 T0100;
M30;
Ⅰ Programming

4.2 Tool Nose Radius Compensation Offset Path

4.2.1 Inner & Outer Side
Inside is defined that an angle at intersection of two motion blocks is more than or equal to 180°;
Outside is 0~180°.
Workpiece side

Inner

Programmed path

Programmed path

Outer
Outer

Workpiece side

3 steps to execute tool nose radius compensation: tool compensation creation, tool
compensation execution and tool compensation canceling.
Tool traverse is called tool compensation creation (starting tool) from offset canceling to G41 or
G42 execution.
Note1: Meanings of S, L, C in the following figures are as follows: S――Stop point of single block;
L――linear; C――circular.
Note2: Tool movement path is marked with the tool nose direction 0 in the following figures.
Note3: Tool path is described in rear tool post coordinate system and tool compensation direction G41 in the
following figures.

4.2.2 Tool Traversing when Starting Tool

(a) Tool traversing inside along corner(α≥180°)
1) Linear → linear 2) linear → circular

196
 Chapter 4 Tool Nose Radius Compensation(G41,G42)

α Workpiece r Workpiece

Programmed path
S
C
L
L

Ⅰ Programming
S Tool nose center path
L Tool nose center path Programmed path

(b) Tool traversing inside along corner(180°＞α≥90°)

1) Linear→ linear 2) linear → circular

α Workpiece

r Programmed path
r

L S L Tool nose center path

L

(c) Tool traversing inside along corner (α＜90°)

1）Linear→linear 2）Linear→circular

L
r
α
L
L r
L
r L S W orkpiece
α C
Programmed path
L r

L L Tool nose center path Tool nose center path Program m ed path

197
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

(d) Tool traversing outside along corner , linear →linear (α≤ angle set by No. 237)

L Tool nose center path

S

r
Ⅰ Programming

L
Programmed path

4.2.3 Tool Traversing in Offset Mode

Offset mode is called to ones after creating tool nose radius compensation and before canceling
it.
 Offset path without changing compensation direction in compensation mode
(a) Tool traversing inside along corner(α≥180°)
1）Linear→ linear 2) Linear→circular
α Workpiece
α
Programmed path

Workpiece

S L Tool nose cneter path

S
C
L L
Tool nose center path
Programmed path

3) Circular→ linear 4) Circular→ circular

α Workpiece
α
Programmed path

S L Tool nose center path

Workpiece
C S

C C
Tool nose center path Programmed path

5）Inner side machining and scaling up compensation valid for acute angled being less than α（α：
set by No. 237）.

198
 Chapter 4 Tool Nose Radius Compensation(G41,G42)

Ⅰ Programming
(b) Tool traversing outside along corner(180°＞α≥90°)
1）Linear→ linear 2) Linear→circular

L r
Workpiece

α S
L Workpiece L
C
Programmed path

Programmed path
S L Tool nose center path Tool nose center path

3）Circular→Linear 4）Circular→Circular

α
C
Workpiece
α Workpiece
L
C
Programmed path
L
L C
Tool nose center path Programmed path
L Tool nose center path

(c) Tool traversing outside along corner(α＜90°)

1）Linear→linear 2）linear→circular

199
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

L
r
α
L
Workpiece
L r
Ⅰ Programming

L S
Workpiece L
α
C
Programmed path
L

S L L Tool nose center path Tool nose center path Programmed path

3）Circular→linear 4）Circular→circular

C L
α
L α Workpiece
L Workpiece
Programmed path
L L C
L L Tool nose center path Tool nose center path Programmed path

(d) Special cutting

1) Without intersection
Tool nose radius is big (r2):

There is an intersection P
Tool nose radius is small（r1）:
between arc and arc
compensation path when
the tool radius is small;
Programmed path none when the radius is
r2 big, and the system
alarms.

r2
r1 r1

Fig. 4-14 Paths without intersection after offset

 Offset path of changing compensation direction in compensation mode
The compensation direction can be changed in compensation mode in special cutting. There is
no inside and outside cutting when the system changes the compensation direction. The following are
the path of tool running when the compensation changes are changed:

200
 Chapter 4 Tool Nose Radius Compensation(G41,G42)

1）Linear→linear 2）Linear→circular

S
Workpiece L
G41 G42 r
r
Programmed path
L Workpiece

Ⅰ Programming
Tool center path

C
r
Workpiece
G42
Programmed path G41 Workpiece
r

L S
Tool center path

3）Circular→linear 4）Circular→circular

Workpiece
G41
Programmed path

r
C L
Tool center path
S r

Workpiece G42

Workpice

G41 C

Programmed path
r r

C G42
Tool center path
Workpiece
S

5) No intersection when compensation is executed normally

When the system executes G41 and G42 to change the offset direction between block A and B, a
vector perpendicular to block B is created from its starting point.
i ) Linear----Linear

201
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual
Ⅰ Programming

Fig. 4-15a Linear—linear, no intersection（changing compensation direction）

ii ) Linear ---circular

Tool nose center path

L L

G42
G41

G42 C

Programmed path

Fig. 4-15b Linear—circular without intersection （changing compensation direction）

iii ) Circular-----circular
Programmed path
G41

C
Tool nose center path
L
L

C
G42

Fig. 4-15c Circular—circular without intersection (changing compensation direction)

4.2.4 Tool Traversing in Offset Canceling Mode

In compensation mode, when the system executes a block with one of the followings, it enters
compensation canceling mode, which is defined to compensation canceling of block.

202
 Chapter 4 Tool Nose Radius Compensation(G41,G42)

1. Execute G40 in a program;

2. Execute M30.
The system cannot execute G02 and G03 when canceling C tool compensation (tool nose radius
compensation), otherwise the system alarms and stops run.
In compensation canceling mode, the system executes the block and ones in the register
for tool nose radius compensation. At the moment, the run stops after one block is executed

Ⅰ Programming
when single block is ON. The system executes the next one but does not read its following one
when pressing CYCLE START button again.
(a) Tool traversing inside along corner(α≥180°)
1）Linear→linear 2）Circular→linear

α
Workpiece α

Programmed path Workpiece

r
G40
r G40
S
Tool center path L S C L
Programmed path
L
Tool center path

(b) Tool traversing outside along corner(180°＞α≥90°)

1）Linear→linear 2）Circular→linear

α
L

G40 ece
r
α L
r
Workpiece

Programmed path
S
r
r L
L Intersection
S
Tool center path L Intersection C
L

(c) Tool traversing outside along corner(α＜90°)

1）Linear→linear 2）Circular→linear
G40 L
S
L
r
α
G40
L
S r L
L
r
Workpiece
α Workpiece L
Programmed path C
r L

Tool center path L Programmed path Tool center path

（d）Move along outer side of acute angle being less than α, linear→linear（α≦angle set
by No. 237）

203
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual
Ⅰ Programming

4.2.5 Tool Interference Check

“Interference” is defined that the tool cuts workpiece excessively and it can find out excessive
cutting in advance, the interference check is executed even if the excessive cutting is not created, but
the system cannot find out all tool interferences.
(1) Fundamental conditions
1) The tool path direction is different that of program path (angle is 90°~270° ).
2) There is a big difference (α＞180°) for two angles between starting point and end point of tool
nose center path, and between starting point and end point of program path.

Example: linear machining

Fig. 4-16a Machining interference (1)

Tool nose center path

Programmed path

Direction difference of two paths（180°）

Fig. 4-16b Machining interference (2)

(2) Executing it without actual interference

204
 Chapter 4 Tool Nose Radius Compensation(G41,G42)

1) Concave groove less than compensation value

Ⅰ Programming
Fig. 4-17 Executing interference (1)
Directions of block B and tool nose radius compensation path are opposite without interference,
the tools stops and the system alarms.
2) Concave channel less than compensation value

Fig. 4-18 Executing interference (2)

Directions of block B and tool nose radius compensation path are opposite without interference,
the tools stops and the system alarms.

4.2.6 Commands for Canceling Compensation Vector Temporarily

In compensation mode, the compensation vector is cancelled temporarily in G50, G71~G76 and
is automatically resumed after executing the commands. At the moment, the compensation is
cancelled temporarily and the tool directly moves from intersection to a point for canceling
compensation vector. The tool directly moves again to the intersection after the compensation mode
is resumed.
 Setting coordinate system in G50

205
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual
Ⅰ Programming

Fig. 4-19 Temporary compensation vector in G50

Note: SS indicates a point at which the tool stops twice in Single mode.

 Reference point automatic return G28

In compensation mode, the compensation is cancelled in a middle point and is automatically
resumed after executing the reference point return in G28.

Fig. 4-20 Cancel compensation vector temporarily in G28

 G71～G75 compound cycle; G76, G92 thread cutting
When executing G71～G76 , G96 thread cutting, the system does not execute the tool nose
radius compensation and cancel it temporarily, and there is G00, G01,in the following blocks, and
the system automatically recovers the compensation mode.
 G32, G33,G34 thread cutting
They cannot run in the tool nose radius compensation mode, otherwise, No.131 alarm occurs
“……CANNOT USED TO C COMPENSATION”.

N8 S

L S

S Tool nose center path

r
N6
N7
G71~G76 N5

Programmed path

Fig. 4-21 Cancel compensation vector temporarily in G71～G76

 G32, G33, G34 constant thread cutting

They cannot be executed in tool nose radius compensation mode, otherwise, No. 131 alarm

206
 Chapter 4 Tool Nose Radius Compensation(G41,G42)

occurs “……the command cannot be used in C compensation mode.”

 G90, G94 (taking an example of G42)
Compensation method of tool nose radius compensation in G90 or G94:
A. Cancel the previous tool nose radius compensation;
B. Create the previous C compensation before cutting, and the path ① in the following figure
creates the previous radius compensation mode;

Ⅰ Programming
C. The paths 2, 3 in the following figure are the radius compensation cutting;
D. The path 4 in the following figure can cancel the radius compensation, and the tool returns to
the cycle starting point; there is G00,G01 in the following block, and the CNC automatically
recovers the compensation mode.
Tool nose center path

Programmed path
3
Programmed path

2
2 4

Tool nose center path 1

3 1

Fig. 4-22 Offset direction of G90 tool nose Fig. 4-23 Offset direction of G94 tool nose
radius compensation radius compensation

207
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual
Ⅱ Operation

II Operation

208
Ⅱ Operation

209
 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display Interface

CHAPTER 1 OPERATION MODE AND DISPLAY INTERFACE

1.1 Panel Division

GSK980TDi, GSK980TDi-V CNC system uses an integrated panel, which is divided as follows:

State indicator

LCD
Edit keyboard

Display menu
Soft function key

Ⅱ Operation
Machine panel

GSK980TDi panel division

LCD

Soft function key

Edit keyboard Display menu

State indicator

Machine panel

GSK980TDi-V panel division

173
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

1.1.1 State Indication

Indicator for axis zero return completion

Three-color light

1.1.2 Edit Keypad

Press key Name Function
RESET key CNC reset, feed, output stop etc.

Address input

Address key
Ⅱ Operation

Double address key, switching them by pressing it

repetitively

Key to three addresses,, switching them by pressing it

symbol
repetitively

Number key Number input

Decimal
Decimal point input
point
Input key Parameter, compensation value and other data input

Output key Communication output

Change key Switching message, display

Inserting, altering, deleting programs, fields in

Edit key
EDIT working mode( compound key, switching
them by pressing it repetitively)
EOB key Inputting the end character of block

Cursor move
controlling cursor move
keys

174
 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display Interface

Press key Name Function

Window key Switch the page in the same display page

1.1.3 Menu Display

Menu key Remark
To enter Position interface including RELATIVE POS, ABSOLUTE POS, POS &
PRG, INTEGRATED POS, MPG interrupted page.
 “ABSOLUTE POS” page can display the current absolute coordinates, clear
out machining count, machining time, as well, it can be set the Max. workpiece
number, current number, and the tool-change safety position;
 “POS & PRG” page can display current coordinate information and current run
program;
 “RELATIVE POS” page can display current relative coordinates, clear relative

Ⅱ Operation
coordinates;
 “INTEGRATED POS” can display current coordinate information; the
reference position along each axis can be set under the 2nd level authority;
 The input/output equivelant amount along each axis can be displayed based
upon the MPG interruption on its MPG interruption page, which can be
eliminated the interruption amount along each axis.
To enter Program interface including program content, program list, Marco variable
note, program state page
 Edit/search current open programs in program content page;
 Edit MDI programs, display coordinates, override and modal state in MDI
page;
 Display, preview, open, copy machining programs in CNC in local catalog
page;
 The noted macro variable note name can be viewed on the macro variable
note page;
 Display, preview, open and copy machining programs in U disk in U disk
catalog page
Enter tool offset interface including offset setting, macro variables, workpiece
coordinate system and tool life page
 Set/search tool offset value and wear value in tool offset setting page;
 Set/search CNC macro variables in macro variable page;
 Set/search G54～G59 coordinate system and zero offset value in workpiece
coordinate system page;
 Set/search use information of current tool life
Enter alarm interface including alarm information, alarm log page
 Search CNC alarm, CNC warning, PLC alarm, PLC warning, servo alrm, in
alarm information page; the caused reason and troubleshootings can be
viewed by selecting some one alarm or precaution;
 Display alarm/warning history record in alarm log page

175
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

Enter Setting interface including CNC setting, system clock, file management,
machine tool debugging, GSKLink, setting IP page
 Set switch, level and parameters in CNC setting page;
 Set system clock, data in system clock page;
 Search/management files in CNC/U disk, copy/resume files in file
management page
 Rapid grouping can be performed in the machine tool debugging page, so that
the each functions for the machine tool can be easily debugged;
 Each controllable axis of the system corresponding the drive and motor can be
set in GSKLink page;
 Set the IP page for using the relevant parameter setting of the RJ45 internet
access communication
Enter Parameter interface including state parameters, data parameter, often-used
parameters, servo parameters, and pitch compensation page.
 Search/set state parameters in the state parameter page;
 Search/set data parameters in the data parameter page;
 Search/set user’s customized parameters in the often used parameter page;
Ⅱ Operation

 Search/set pitch error compensation data of each axis in the pitch

compensation page.
 View/set the drive parameter along each axis on the servo parameter page.
 Enter Diagnosis interface including the system diagnosis, system information,
Machine tool diagnosis、Servo diagnosis page
 Search the current diagnosis information of the CNC in the diagnosis page.
 Search the product information, ladder information and ladder state.
 Machine diagnosis can be directly inspected the working state of machine
tool’s each component;
 Servo diagnosis can be viewed servo operation state of each axis.
PLC page includes three subpages: PLC state, PLC monitor, PLC data, Program
list.
 PLC state page can search states of X, Y, F, G, R, A, C,T;
 PLC monitor page can monitors the execution state of current ladder on-line;
 PLC data page can search/set K, D, DT, DC value.
 The registered PLC program can be selected in the program list page, and
then start the operation.

Enter Graph page to display the movement path of X, Z axis

Entering to the system help page can be captured the helf information, such as
the programming, operation and installation.

1.1.4 Machine Panel

The key functions on GSK980TDi machine panel are defined by PLC program (ladder), the
detailed function meanings are referred to machine manufacturer manual.
The functions of this GSK980TDi machine panel keys defined by standard PLC program are as
follows:

176
 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display Interface

Key Name Function explanation Operation mode

Feed hold Dwell commanded by
Auto, MDI mode
key program, MDI code
Cycle Start Cycle start commanded by
Auto, MDI mode
key program, MDI code

Feedrate Auto, MDI, Edit , Machine zero

Override Adjusting feedrate return, MPG, Step, Manual,
keys Program zero return mode

Rapid Auto, MDI, Machine zero return,

override Adjusting rapid traverse Manual, Program zero return
keys mode

Spindle spindle speed adjustment Auto, Edit, MDI, Machine zero

Ⅱ Operation
override (spindle analog control return, Manual, Step, MPG,
keys active) Program zero return mode

Machine zero return, Manual,

Manual tool
manual tool change Step, MPG, Program zero return
change key
mode

JOG key spindle jog on/off

Machine zero return, Manual,
switch spindle speed/
C/S Switch Step, MPG, Program zero return
position control
mode
Lubricating
For lubricating ON/OFF
key
Auto, Edit, MDI, Machine zero
Cooling key For cooling ON/OFF return, Manual, Step, MPG,
Program zero return mode
Auto, Edit, MDI, Machine zero
Chuck key Chuck clamping/releasing return, Manual, Step, MPG,
Program zero return mode
Auto, Edit, MDI, Machine zero
Hydraulic
Hydraulic output ON/OFF return, Manual, Step, MPG,
key
Program zero return mode

For spindle CCW Machine zero return, Manual,

Spindle
For spindle stop Step, MPG, Program zero return
control keys
For spindle CW mode

Rapid For rapid traverse /feedrate

Auto, MDI, Manual mode
traverse key switching

177
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

Key Name Function explanation Operation mode

X feed key

Z feed key
Positive/negative Machine zero return, Step,
Y feed key movement of each axis in Manual, Program zero return
The 4th feed Manual, Step mode mode
key

Cs feed key

MPG axis
Each axis selection in
selection MPG mode
MPG mode
key
MPG/Step Move amount per MPG
increment scale 0.001/0.01/0.1 mm
Auto, MDI, Machine zero return,
and Rapid Move amount per step
Ⅱ Operation

Manual, Step, MPG, Program

override 0.001/0.01/0.1 mm
zero return mode
selection Rapid override F0, F50%,
key F100%
Execute M01 to pause
Optional Auto, MDI, and MPG trial-cut
when the optional stop is
stop mode
enabled
For switching of
Single Block block/blocks execution,
Auto, MDI mode
switch Single block indicator lights
up if Single mode is active
For skipping of block
headed with“/”sign, if its
Block Skip
switch is set for ON, the Auto, MDI mode
switch
Block Skip indicator lights
up
If the machine is locked, its Auto, MDI, Edit, Machine zero
Machine
indicator lights up, and X, Z return, Manual, Step, MPG,
Lock key
axis output is inactive. Program zero return mode
If the miscellaneous
function is locked, its
M.S.T. Lock
indicator lights up and M, Auto, MDI mode
key
S, T function output is
inactive.
If dry run is active, the Dry
Dry Run key run indicator lights up. Dry Auto, MDI mode
run for program/MDI codes
Auto, MDI, Machine zero return,
Edit mode
To enter Edit mode Manual, Step, MPG, Program
key
zero return mode

178
 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display Interface

Key Name Function explanation Operation mode

MDI, Edit, Machine zero return,
Auto mode
To enter Auto mode Manual, Step, MPG, Program
key
zero return mode
Auto, Edit, Machine zero return,
MDI mode
To enter MDI mode Manual, Step, MPG, Program
key
zero return mode
Machine Auto, MDI, Edit, Manual, Step,
To enter Machine zero
zero return MPG, Program zero return
return mode
mode key mode
To enter Step or MPG Auto, MDI, Edit, Machine zero
Step/MPG
mode (one mode by return, Manual, Program zero
mode key
parameter) return mode
Auto, MDI, Edit, Machine zero
Manual
To enter Manual mode return, Step, MPG, Program
mode key
zero return mode

Ⅱ Operation
Program Auto, MDI, Edit, Machine zero
To enter Program zero
zero return return, Step, MPG, Manual
return mode
mode key mode
Auto, MDI, Edit, Machine zero
MPG trial-cut To enter MPG trial-cut
return, Step, MPG, Manual,
selection key mode
MPG trial-cut mode

1.2 Summary of Operation Mode

There are 8 modes in GSK980TDi, which are Edit, Auto, MDI, Machine zero, Step/MPG, Manual,
Program Zero, and MPG trial-cut modes.
 Edit mode
In this mode, the operation of part program setup, deletion and alteration can be performed.
 Auto mode
In this mode, the program is executed automatically.
 MDI mode
In this mode, the operation of parameter input, command blocks input and execution can be
performed.
 Machine zero mode
In this mode, the operation of X, Z machine zero return can be performed separately.
 MPG / Step mode
In the Step/MPG feed mode, the moving is performed by an increment selected by CNC
system.
 Manual mode
In this mode, the operation of Manual feed, Manual Rapid, feedrate override adjustment, Rapid
override adjustment and spindle ON/OFF, cooling ON/OFF, Lubricating ON/OFF, spindle jog,
manual tool change can be performed.
 Program zero return mode
In this mode, the operation of X, Z program zero return can be performed separately.
 MDP trail-cut mode

179
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

In this mode, rotating the MPG can control program’s execution speed, which can check whether
the machining program is correct.

1.3 Display Interface

The chapter introduces page switch, relationship between operation input and soft key, and
concrete operation methods.
GSK980TDi has 9 function keys including POS, PRG, SET, etc. on its edit keyboard. Each
function key corresponds to one interface which has many pages and operation soft keys, which are
shown below:

1.3.1 POS Interface

Press to enter POS interface which includes pages , , ,

and , and these pages can be viewed by corresponding soft function key or
Ⅱ Operation

repetitively press .

1) ABSOLUTE POS display interface

The X, Z coordinates displayed are the absolute position of the tool in current workpiece
coordinate system, these coordinates are memorized as power is down and the workpiece coordinate
system is specified by G50.

180
 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display Interface

Basic information in POSITION interface (taking an example of the above figure):

 G code : information of each G code;
 M : last executed M code;
 S :it is input spindle speed when analog spindle is executed, and input spindle’s gear
when the spindle is executed;
 L : call times of subprogram;
 F :the first half (0.0000mm/min) is the actual speed, and the second half (200mm/min)
is the command speed;
 JOG F.( JOG speed): theory speed value of current override in JOG mode;
 FED OVRI(Feedrate override):override selected by feedrate override switch;
 RAD OVRI (Rapid override): display currently rapid override;
 SPI OVRI (Spindle override): display the spindle override when NO.001 Bit1 is set to 1;
 PART CNT(Part counting) : part counting adds 1; when program executes the M code set by
data parameter No.173;
 CUT TIME: the system counts the time when the automatic run is started, time unit is hour,
minute and second in order.
2) RELATIVE POS display interface

Ⅱ Operation
Displayed U, W coordinates are the current position relative to the reference point, and they are
held on when power on. They can be cleared at any time. When No.005 Bit1=1, and the absolute
coordinates are set by G50, the relative coordinates are set simultaneously.

3) INTEGRATED POS display interface

4) POS&PRG display interface

181
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

In POS&PRG interface, it displays ABSOLUTE, RELATIVE coordinate of the current

position (ABSOLUTE, DIST TO GO of current position and machine coordinates will be
displayed when No.180 BIT0 is set to 1) as well as 7 blocks of current program together. During
the program execution, the displayed blocks are refreshed dynamically and the cursor is located
in the block being executed.
Ⅱ Operation

5) MPG interrupted page

When the Bit 1 of state parameter No.0012 sets to "1", the MPG interruption sub-page is then
displayed on the position page; refer to the following figure:

1.3.2 PRG Interface

Press to enter PRG interface, which includes (the soft

function menu can be displayed when USB device is connected to the system). Press
repetitively or press the corresponding soft function keys to switch interfaces. The following
descriptions are aimed to program page set of the connected USB equipment of the GSK980TDi
system.
1) PRG CONTENT page
In the page, the program content including current block can be displayed. In Edit mode, the

program content can be viewed forward or backward by pressing or key.

182
 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display Interface

2) MDI program page

In MDI mode, the page can be displayed, and is value when the corresponding soft function key is
pressed as follows:

Ⅱ Operation
3) Local directory page

4) U disk directory page

183
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

1.3.3 TOOL OFFSET Interface

Press to enter the TOOL OFFSET interface which includes , , ,

Ⅱ Operation

, (it enters the interface when No. 002 Bit0 is set to 1). Press repetitively or
corresponding keys to switch pages.

1） TOOL OFFSET&WEAR interface

There are 5 pages and 33 offset & wear No. (No.000～No.032) available for user in the interface,

which can be shown as follows by pressing or key.

2） MACRO interface
The macro variable divides into 5 sub-pages: Common variable, Local variable, System variable,
Note list and Customized macro variable. There are 19 pages in this interface, which can be shown

by pressing or key. In Macro window there are 600 (No.100～No.199 and No.500～
No.999) macro variables which can be specified by macro command or set directly by keypad. The
public variable page is shown below:

184
 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display Interface

The local variable page is shown below:

Ⅱ Operation
The system variable page is shown below:

Note: The local variable and the system local are specified by macro codes instead of directly set by the
keyboard in the page.
3） Workpiec coordinate system setting

185
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

4） Tool life management

Ⅱ Operation

1.3.4 ALARM Interface

1) Alarm:

Press key to enter alarm interface including 、 which can be switched by

pressing repetitively , or the corresponding soft function.

1） Alarm information page

186
 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display Interface

Note: Alarm clearing: It can clear alarms by pressing .

2） Alarm log page

Ⅱ Operation
1.3.5 Setting Interface

Press to enter the SETTING interface including 、 、 、 、

、 which can be switched by pressing repetitively or corresponding soft keys.

1) CNC setting page

2) System clock page

187
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

3) Document management page

Ⅱ Operation

4) Machine function debugging page

5) GSKLink setting page

188
 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display Interface

6) IP page setting

Ⅱ Operation
1.3.6 Parameter Interfaces

Press to enters PARAMETER interface including pages 、 、 、

、 which can be switched by pressing repetitively or the corresponding soft

keys.
1) Bit parameter page

2) Data parameter page

189
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

3) Common used parameter page

Ⅱ Operation

4) Pitch compensation parameter page

Note: When the system axis number is more than 2, pitch compensation parameter page will not display the
“Coordinate information” window.
5) Servo parameter interface

190
 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display Interface

1.3.7 Diagnosis Interface

Press to enter diagnosis interface including pages 、 、 、

Ⅱ Operation
which can be switched by pressing repetitively or the corresponding soft keys.

1) System diagnosis page

The page is used to detect CNC interface signal and its inner run state.
2) System information page

191
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

3) Machine diagnosis page

4) Servo diagnosis page

Ⅱ Operation

1.3.8 Graph Interface

Press to enter GRAPH interface.Graph page is shown below:

192
 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display Interface

1.3.9 Ladder Interface

Press to enter LADDER interface including pages 、 、 、

which can be switched by pressing repetitively or corresponding soft keys.

1) PLC I/O state page

Ⅱ Operation
The page can display PLC I/O state information.
2) PLC data page

PLC data includes K, D, DT, DC, which can be set in the page.
3) Ladder monitor page

193
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

The monitor page can view states of current contact, coil ON/OFF state, values of timer and
counter. They are displayed with a green background when they are ON, otherwise, they are the

same those of the page background. means the contact X0.5 is ON, means Y25.2 is
OFF.
1. Page program view
In MONITOR page, the system can monitor simultaneously three windows, the ladder blocks

corresponded to each window can be viewed by separately pressing 、 、 ，

at the moment, the ladder corresponded to the selected block is displayed on the screen.

2. Window block selection

（1）Select the window which needs to select blocks, press respectively 、 、

to select the windows.

（2）Press to select the window program. At the moment, the display page is shown below:
Ⅱ Operation

（3）Move the cursor to select the ladder block for display.

（4）Press ，and then return the previous menu, press to cancel the selection operation
to return to the previous menu.
3. Find parameters, commands and network
（1）Select the required block window for finding commands, parameters and network, make the
corresponding block display in the window, and find the command, parameters and network
in the window.

（2）Respectively press 、 、 to find the corresponding parameter, functional

command and network in the current displayed block, and move the cursor to the
corresponding position.

（3）Press 、 to locate the cursor to the home or end of the current block.

194
 Chapter 1 Operation Mode and Display Interface

4) File list page

The ladder file list page displays all ladders and their relevant information included in the current
system, and the new ladder can run in the page. The program name marked with is the current
running ladder.

Ⅱ Operation
Note: The file list page is displayed when the above 2-level privilege is executed.

195
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

CHAPTER 2 POWER ON/OFF AND PROTECTION

2.1 System Power-on

Before GSK980TDi power on, the following items should be confirmed:
1. The machine is in a normal state.
2. The power voltage conforms to the requirement of the machine.
3. The connection is correct and secure.
The following window is displayed after GSK980TDi is turned on:
Ⅱ Operation

The current position (ABSOLUTE POS) page is displayed after GSK980TDi automatic detection and
initiation are finished.

2.2 System Power-off

Before power is off, ensure that:
1. The feed axes of the CNC is at stop;
2. Miscellaneous functions (spindle, cooling etc.) are OFF;
3. Cut off CNC power prior to machine power cutting off.
Note: Please refer to the machine manufacturer’s manual about turn-off the machine’s power supply.

196
 Chapter 2 Power ON/OFF And Protection

2.3 Overtravel Protection

Overtravel protection should be used to prevent machine from being damaged due to the
overtravel of X, Y, or Z.

2.3.1 Hardware Overtravel Protection

The stroke switches are fixed at the positive and negative maximum travel of the machine X, Z, Y
axis respectively, they are connected by the following figure. Standard PLC program defines that the
Bit7 of parameter K10 is whether the overtravel along each axis is enabled; Bit 6 is the overtravel
signal LEVEL selection. If the overtravel occurs, the stroke switch acts to make GSK980TDi stop, and
the emergency alarm issues.

Ⅱ Operation
When the hardware overtravel occurs, there will be an “overtravel stop” alarm in GSK980TDi.
The steps to eliminate this alarm are: In the Manual or MPG mode, move the table reversely to detach
the stroke switch (for positive overtravel, move negatively; vice versa).
2.3.2 Software Overtravel Protection
GSK980TDi sets the software overtravel protection of the machine tool by the stored stroke limit
function.There are 3 stored stroke limit areas can be set in GSK980TDi. The oblique area is the
forbidden one.

Stored stroke limit 2

(the inner prohibition)
Stored stroke limit 3

Stored stroke limit 2

(the outer porhibition)

Stored stroke limit 1

：the forbidden area

1) Open the limit function: Set the state parameter Bit 4 of No.172 to 0, and then open the
limit detection function.
2) Stored stroke limit detection 1: The limit area boundary is set by parameter (No.045,
No.046), the external side of the setting range is limit area. Usually, this area is regarded as
the Max. stroke range of the machine tool.
3) Stored stroke limit detection 2 (G22 G23): The limit area boundary is set by parameter

197
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

(No.100, No.101) or G22; the inner prohibition/outer forhibition of the setting range are set
by Bit 2 of parameter No.172. This limit is enabled when the G22 is at the current modal, and
the limit is disabled when the modal is G23. Refer to the program help G22/G23 command.
4) Stored stroke limit detection 3: The limit area boundary is set by parameter (No.102,
No.103); the inner side of the setting range is limit area.
5) Whether the axis is performed the limit inspection: Bit 2 of parameter No.190 and Bit 3 of
parameter No.190 can be set an axis whether it performs the stored stroke inspection 2 or 3.
The stored stroke inspectin 2 or 3 is only judged the axis from the inspection. For example:
When X or Z axis performs the judgement, and the Y axis does not, only detect whether the
X or Z axis enters to the limit area.
6) Zero return enabled: When the state parameter Bit 1 of No. 172 sets to 1, it needs to return
the reference position by manual or G28 after the power is turned on, the function is then
enabled accordingly. After an axis is performed the zero return for the external limit area,
and the limit area of this axis is immediately enabled; it is disabled of the axis that does not
perform the zero return. For the inner limit area, the limit function is enabled after the overall
axes executed the detection are performed the zero return.
7) Limit deceleration: State parameter Bit 0 of No.172 can be set a stop method when it
Ⅱ Operation

reaches to the limit boundary. Deceleration stop near the forbidden area or immediately stop
after entering to the forbidden area can be selected.
Note 1：If the positive stroke is less than or equals to the negative one in the setting forbidden area, the area is
shown below:
１）When the forbidden area is the stored stroke inspection 1 or the 2 from the external prohibition, the
overall areas are treated as the forbidden area.
２）When the forbidden area is the stored stroke inspection 3 or the 2 from the internal prohibition, the
overall areas are regarded as the moveable areas.
Note 2：An alarm may occur if the reference position locates within the limit area when returning the reference
position.

2.4 Emergency Operation

During the machining, some unexpected incidents may occur because of the user programming,
operation and product fault etc. So the GSK980TDi should be stopped immediately for these
incidents. This section mainly describes the resolutions that the system is capable of under the
emergency situation. Please see the relative explanation on these resolutions under the emergency
by machine manufacturer.

2.4.1 Reset

Press key to reset GSK980TDi system when there are abnormal output and axis
operations:
1 All axes motion stops;
2 M, S function output is inactive (the parameter sets whether the system automatically cuts off

signals of spindle rotation, lubricating, cooling by pressing key, defined by PLC ladder);
3 Automatic run ends, modal function and state remain.

198
 Chapter 2 Power ON/OFF And Protection

2.4.2 ESP
During machine running, if the ESP button is pressed under the dangerous or emergent situation
(external SP signal active), the CNC system enters into emergency status and the machine
movement is stopped immediately. All the outputs such as the spindle running, cooling are cut off. If
the emergency button is released, the emergency alarm is cancelled and the CNC resets.
Note 1: The ESP alarm generates during the operation of the machine tool, Re-perform the machine zero
return to get the correct position coordinate after the emergency alarm is cancelled (machine zero
return is forbidden if there is no machine zero on the machine.).
Note 2: Only Bit3 of the bit parameter No.172 is set to 0, is the external emergency stop active.

2.4.3 Feed Hold

Press key during the machine running to make the running pause. However, in threading
cutting, tapping cycle state, the function cannot stop the running immediately.

Ⅱ Operation
2.4.4 Power-Off
Under the dangerous or emergency situations during the machine running, the machine power
should be cut off immediately to avoid the accidents. But it should be noted that there may be a large
error between the CNC coordinates displayed and the actual position. So the tool-setting operation
should be performed again.

199
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual
Ⅱ Operation

200
 Chapter 3 Manual Operation

CHAPTER 3 MANUAL OPERATION

Note!
The key functions of this GSK980TDi machine panel are defined by PLC
program (ladders), please refer to the manual from the machine builder for their
function significance.
Please note that the following functions for the machine panel keys are
described based on the GSK980TDi standard PLC programs!

Press key, it enters Manual mode. In the mode, the system can perform the manual feed,
spindle control, override adjustment, tool change etc..

Ⅱ Operation
3.1 Coordinate Axis Move
In Manual mode, 2 coordinate axes can perform manual feeding and rapid traverse.

3.1.1 Manual Feed

Press or in and X feeds negatively or positively, and its

feeding stops if the key is released; press or and Z axis feeds negatively or positively,

and its feeding stops if the key is released; press or , and Y feeds negatively or

positively, and its feeding stops if the key is released; press or and the 4th axis feeds

negatively or positively, and its feeding stops if the key is released; press or and the 5th
axis feeds negatively or positively, and its feeding stops if the key is released.

In Manual mode, press key to make the indicator enter the manual rapid traverse mode.

201
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

3.1.2 Manual Rapid Traverse

Press in and the key indicator is ON; press or and X

feeds negatively or positively, and its feeding stops if the key is released; press or and Z

axis feeds negatively or positively, and its feeding stops if the key is released; press or ,

and Y feeds negatively or positively, and its feeding stops if the key is released; press or

and the 4th axis feeds negatively or positively, and its feeding stops if the key is released;

press or and the 5th axis feeds negatively or positively, and its feeding stops if the key
is released. The rapid override time-tuning is enabled.
Ⅱ Operation

In Manual mode, press key to make the indicator OFF, and the rapid traverse is disabled
and manual feed is executed.
Note 1: If no reference point return is performed after power on, as the rapid traverse switch is turned on
(rapid indicator ON), the manual feedrate or rapid rate for the traverse is defined by the Bit0 of the bit
parameter No.012 of this GSK980TDi system.

Note 2: In Edit/MPG mode, key is inactive.

3.1.3 Speed Regulation

In Manual mode, press , , to alter the manual feed override which is divided
into 16 steps. The relation of the override and the feedrate are as follows table when data parameter
No.031 is set to 1260:
Feedrate override (%) Feedrate (mm/min)
0 0
10 126
20 252
30 378
40 504
50 630
60 756
70 882
80 1008
90 1134
100 1260
110 1386
120 1512
130 1638

202
 Chapter 3 Manual Operation

Feedrate override (%) Feedrate (mm/min)

140 1764
150 1890

Note : There is about 2% error for the data in the above table.

In the manual rapid traverse, it can press key to alter the rapid override,
and there are 4 steps of F0, 25%, 50%,100% for the override.(F0 is set by data parameter No.032)
The rapid override is active under the following conditions:
(1) G00 rapid traverse (2) Rapid traverse in canned cycle
(3) Rapid traverse in G28 (4) Manual rapid traverse

3.2 Other Manual Operations

3.2.1 Spindle CCW, CW, Stop Control

Ⅱ Operation
: In Manual mode, the spindle rotates counterclockwise if pressing this key;

: In Manual mode, the spindle stops if pressing this key;

: In Manual mode, the spindle rotates clockwise if pressing this key.

3.2.2 Spindle JOG

: At the moment, the spindle is in JOG state.

Functional description:

Press to enter JOG mode, and the spindle JOG function ON/OFF is executed only when
the spindle is in the state of stop.

In spindle JOG mode, by pressing key, the spindle rotates counterclockwise for jogging;

by pressing key, the spindle rotates clockwise for jogging. The jog time and speed are set by
data parameter No.108 and No.109 respectively.

When the spindle JOG rotates, is pressed to stop the spindle JOG rotation, the spindle
brake signal is not output when the JOG rotation stops.
K10.4 is set to 1, the spindle JOG is valid in any mode. In Auto or MDI mode, the spindle is in the
JOG rotation state, the program closes the spindle JOG rotation and the JOG function.
Parameter setting:
PLC parameter K104 1/0: the spindle JOG is valid in any mode/Manual, MPG, Zero return mode.
Data parameter No.108: spindle JOG time
Data parameter No.109: rotary speed in spindle JOG.

203
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

3.2.3 Cooling Control

: In Manual mode, press this key, the cooling is switched on/off.

Parameter setting: PLC parameter K10.1 1/0: the spindle lubricating and cooling output
remains/closes in reset.

3.2.4 Lubricating Control

Function description:
1. Non-automatic lubricating (DT017 =0)

When PLC DT013=0, it is the lubricating turn output. Pressing the can execute the
output. And the lubricating is cancelled by pressing it again. M32 is to execute lubricating output, and
M33 is to cancel lubricating output.

When PLC DT013 ＞1, it is timing lubricating output. Pressing the can execute the output.
Ⅱ Operation

And it is cancelled after a setting time by data parameter DT013; M32 is to execute lubricating output
and the output is cancelled after a time set by DT013. If the setting time is not yet up, M33 is executed
to cancel the lubricating output.
2. Automatic lubricating (DT017>0)
For automatic lubricating, the system executes the lubricating in the time set by DT017 and the
stops the output. After lubricating interval time set by DT016, the output is done again, it does

repetitively like this. During the automatic lubricating, M32, M33 codes as well as the key are
all active.
Parameter setting:
PLC parameter: K10.1 1/0: the spindle lubricating/cooling output remains/closes in reset;
PLC parameter:K16.2 1/0: whether the lubricating outputs in power-on when the automatic
lubricating is valid;
PLC data DT005: M execution duration(ms);
PLC data DT013: lubricating start time (0-60000ms)(0:lubricating time is not limited);
PLC data: DT016 automatic lubricating interval time (ms);
PLC data: DT017: automatic lubricating output time (ms).

3.2.5 Chuck Control

: press it to switch the chuck releasing/clamping in any mode.

Function description:
When the chuck control is invalid, the system alarms in executing the chuck control M command;
When the system checks the chuck clamping (K12.1=1), the spindle cannot be started when the
chuck is not clamped, and the chuck cannot be released after the spindle is started;
When using the input signal controls the chuck operation, the spindle should stop and delay the
time set by DT21, the control is valid.
Parameter setting:
PLC parameter: K12.0 1/0: chuck control valid/invalid;

204
 Chapter 3 Manual Operation

PLC parameter: K12.1 1/0: do not check/check the chuck clamping before the spindle start;
PLC parameter: K12.2 1/0: chuck outer/inner control mode;
PLC parameter: K12.3 1/0: check/not chuck in-position signal;
PLC data: DT018: chuck pulse output width(ms);
PLC data: DT021: spindle stops, chuck operation enabling delays(ms).

3.2.6 Tailstock Control

: In any mode, press it to switch the tailstock forward/backward.

Function description:
When the tailstock control is invalid, the tailstock control M command alarms;
When the tailstock and the spindle control is interlocked, before the spindle is started, the system
check whether the tailstock forward is valid. After the spindle is started, the tailstock backward cannot
be executed.
Parameter setting:
PLC parameter：K13.0 1/0：tailstock control valid/invalid

Ⅱ Operation
PLC parameter：K13.1 1/0：the spindle rotation and the tailstock forward/backward are/not
interlocked
PLC parameter K13.2: 1/0: External tailstock control is enabled/disabled when the program is
being operated.

3.2.7 Hydraulic Control

: press it to switch the hydraulic motor ON/OFF in any mode.

Function description:

When the hydraulic control function is valid, is pressed to control HPST output to start the
hydraulic motor.

When the system is in non-run, the spindle stops and the speed is zero, is pressed to
close HPST output.
Parameter setting:
PLC parameter: K14.7 1/0: hydraulic control function valid/invalid

3.2.8 Manual Tool Change

: In Manual mode, pressing the key can manually change tools in sequence (if current tool
is No.1, it is changed for No.2 tool by pressing it; if current tool is No.4, it is changed for No.1 tool by
pressing it.

3.2.9 Spindle Override

In Manual mode, if the spindle speed is controlled by analog voltage output, the spindle speed
may be overrided.

205
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

Pressing , can change the spindle speed in real-time to adjust 8 steps of 50％～
120％ of the spindle override.
Ⅱ Operation

206
 Chapter 4 MPG/Step Operation

CHAPTER 4 MPG/STEP OPERATION

In MPG/Step mode, the machine moves by a specified increment.

Note!
The key functions of this GSK980TDi machine panel are defined by PLC
program (ladders), please refer to the manuals by the machine builder for their
significance.
Please note that the following description for the key functions in this chapter
is based on the GSK980TDi standard PLC program!

4.1 Step Feed

Ⅱ Operation
Set the system parameter No.001 Bit3 to 0, and press key to enter the STEP working
mode, it displays as follows:

4.1.1 Increment Selection

Press to select the move increment, the increment will be shown in the

page. When the BIT7(SINC) of K016 is 1, step width value is inactive; when the BIT7 is 0,

are all active. For example, to press key, the window is shown as
follows:

207
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

4.1.2 Moving Direction Selection

Pressing or key once can move X negatively or positively by a step increment;

Ⅱ Operation

pressing or key once can move Z negatively or positively by a step increment; pressing

or key once can move Y negatively or positively by a step increment.

4.2 MPG Feed

Set the BIT3 of the system parameter No.001 to 1, and press key to enter the MPG mode,
it displays as follows:

The MPG figure is shown as follows:

The handwheel (MPG) figure

208
 Chapter 4 MPG/Step Operation

4.2.1 Increment Selection

Press key to select the move increment, the increment will be shown in the

window. When the BIT7(SINC) of PLC K016 is 1, step is inactive; when BIT7 is 0,

are all active. For example, to press key, the window is shown as
follows:

Ⅱ Operation
4.2.2 Moving Axis & Direction Selection

In MPG mode, press 、 、 、 、 key, the corresponding axis will be

selected. For example, press key and the window is shown below:

The MPG feed direction is defined by its rotation direction. Generally, the MPG CW is for positive
feed, and CCW for negative feed. In case of that MPG CW is for negative feed, CCW for positive feed,
it may exchange the A, B signals of the MPG terminals. Bit0～Bit4 of NO. 013 selects the feed
direction of MPG rotation.

209
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

4.2.3 MPG Feedrate

The upper limit of the MPG feedrate is the rapid traverse rate of each axis, which can be set by
data parameter No. 022.
When the state parameter No.013.6 = 0, and the MPG feedrate exceeds the rapid traverse rate,
the exceeded pulse is ignored; the MPG scale is inconsistent with movement amount。
When the state parameter No.013.6 = 1, and the MPG feedrate exceeds the rapid traverse rate,
the exceeded pulse does not ignore; the MPG scale is consistent with movement amount, but the
axis may consecutively move when MPG stops.

4.2.4 Other Operations

1） Spindle CCW, CW, stop control

: In Manual mode, the spindle rotates counterclockwise if pressing this key;

: In Manual mode, the spindle stops if pressing this key;

Ⅱ Operation

: In Manual mode, the spindle rotates clockwise if pressing this key.

2） Spindle JOG

: at the moment, the spindle is in JOG working mode.

In spindle JOG mode, pressing can rotate counterclockwise for jogging; pressing
can rotate clockwise for jog. The jogging time and speed are set by DT12 and No.109 respectively.
Referred to Section 3.2.2.
3） Cooling control
Refer to OPERATION, Section 3.2.3
4） Lubricating control
Refer to OPERATION, Section 3.2.4
5） Chuck control
Refer to OPERATION, Section 3.2.5
6） Tailstock control
Refer to OPERATION, Section 3.2.6
7） Hydraulic control
Refer to II OPERATION, Section 3.2.7
8) Manual tool change

: In MPG/Step mode, press it to change tools orderly.

9) Spindle override tune
In MPG/Step mode, if the spindle speed is controlled by analog voltage output, the spindle speed
may be overrided.

Pressing ， can change the spindle speed in real-time to adjust 8 steps of 50％～
120％ of the spindle override

210
 Chapter 4 MPG/Step Operation

4.2.5 Explanation Items

The correspondence of the handwheel scale to the machine moving amount is as follows table:
Moving amount of each MPG scale
MPG increment 0.001 0.01 0.1 1
Specified coordinate value 0.001mm 0.01mm 0.1mm 1mm

（Taking example of the least input increment 0.001mm）

Note 1: The MPG increment is related to the system’s current metric/inch input state and the system’s least
input increment.
Note 2: The MPG speed cannot be more than 5r/s, otherwise, the scale value is inconsistent with the
movement amount.

Ⅱ Operation

211
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual
Ⅱ Operation

212
 Chapter 5 MDI Operation

CHAPTER 5 MDI OPERATION

In MDI mode, the operations of parameter setting, code words input and execution can be
performed.

Note!
The key functions of this GSK980TDi machine panel are defined by PLC
program (ladders), please refer to the manuals by the machine builder for their
significance.
Please note that the following description for the key functions in this chapter is
based on the GSK980TDi standard PLC program!

5.1 Block Input

Ⅱ Operation
Select MDI mode to enter PROGRAM->MDI page, to input an block G50 X50 Z100, the steps
are shown below:

1) Press key to enter MDI mode;

2) Press , and then press to enter MDI program page below:

The page is shown as follows after above operations are completed:

213
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

Note: Up to 10-block programs can be input of the MDI program.

5.2 Block Execution

Ⅱ Operation

After the word is input, is pressed and the display is as follows:

After the code words are input and is pressed to display the block, key is pressed

to execute the input block. During the execution, , and Emergency Stop button may be
pressed to terminate these code words execution.

5.3 Parameter Setting

In MDI mode, the parameter value can be altered after entering the parameter interface. The
detailed is referred to OPERATION, Chapter 11.

5.4 Data Alteration

There are , , , , , , and program edit operation

items on the MDI program page.

214
 Chapter 5 MDI Operation

In the MDI mode, press the , then soft key, and then enter to the MDI program
page.

soft button: Clear the overall contents of the MDI program input frame;

Ⅱ Operation
soft button: The movement cursor can be selected the block for the program after pressing
this button, which uses matching with other function soft buttons;

soft button: Copy the block that locates at the cursor; it can be used matching with the

soft button;

: Paste the copied block to the next line of the cursor;

: Delete the block of which the cursor locates, which can be used matching with the
soft button;

soft button: Retract the previous edit operation of the MDI program, up to 10 times can be
performed;

soft button, Cancel the retract operation happed just last step;

soft button: Spring out the macro command list, insert the selected macro command at the
cursor position;

5.5 Other Operations

1. Adjusting spindle override
In MDI mode, the spindle speed can be adjusted when the analog voltage output controls the
spindle speed.

Pressing , can adjust the spindle override to change the spindle speed, which can
realize the 8 steps adjustment in real-time from 50％～120％.
2.Adjusting rapid override

215
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

Pressing can execute the rapid traverse, which can realize the 4 steps
adjustment in real-time.
3. Adjusting feedrate

In MDI mode, pressing , , can adjust the federate override to change the
federate, which can realize 16 steps adjustment from 0～150％.
4. Feedrate override is available.
Ⅱ Operation

216
 Chapter 6 Program Edit & Management

CHAPTER 6 PROGRAM EDIT & MANAGEMENT

In Edit mode, a program can be created, selected, altered, copied and deleted, and the
bidirectional communication of CNC to CNC, or CNC to PC can also be done.
To prevent the program to be altered or deleted accidentally, a program switch is set up for this
GSK980TDi system. And it must be turned on before program editing. Please see details in Section
10.1.1 of the part.
The system provides multi-level user permission to facilitate the management. More than 4 levels
(4 level, 3 level) can open the program switch to edit programs. See OPERATION, Section 10.1.2 .

6.1 Program Creation

6.1.1 Creating a Block Number
In the program, a block number can be added or not, the program is executed by the sequence.
When the “AUTO SEG” switch in SWITCH SETTING window is OFF, CNC doesn’t generate the block

Ⅱ Operation
number automatically, but the blocks may be numbered manually.
When the “AUTO SEG” switch in SWITCH SETTING window is ON, CNC generates the block

number automatically, it automatically generates the next block number by pressing or

in editing. The block number increment is set by the CNC data parameter No.042. (See details in
Section 10.1.1 of this part.)

6.1.2 Inputting a Program

Press to enter the Edit mode. Press to enter the Program interface, create a
machining program before inputting a machining program. The creating method is shown below:
Method 1:

1） Press address key , number key , , and key by sequence (e.g.

taking an example of creating program O0001, the leading 0 can be omitted when its name is
input). Its display is shown below:

217
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

2） Press ( or ) to create the new program. The display is shown below:

Ⅱ Operation

Method 2:

1) Pres to enter the local directory page. The display is shown below:

2) Press ，input orderly , , , in the pop-up dialog box（taking example of

creating O0001, the leading zero can be omitted when it is input）. It display is shown below:

218
 Chapter 6 Program Edit & Management

3) Press ( or ) to create the new program. The current page is automatically switched
into the program content page. Its display is shown below:

Ⅱ Operation
Note: When a program is needed to create, the input program name exists, the system opens the file,
otherwise, it automatically create a new one.
Input the edited part program one by one, the character will be displayed on the screen
immediately as it is input(as for compound key, press this key repeatedly for alternate input),

after a block is finished, press or to terminate it.

Note: The unexpected power-off when the program is input, the program being edited cannot be saved.

6.1.3 Searching a Character

1. Scanning: To scan the character one by one by cursor

1) Press key to enter the Edit mode, then press key to enter the PRG CONTENT
window;

2） Press key, the cursor shifts a row upward; if the number of the column where the
cursor locates is over the total columns of the previous row, the cursor moves to the previous block

end (at “;” sign) after key is pressed;

3） Press key, the cursor shifts a row downward; if the number of the column where the

219
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

cursor locates is over the total columns of the next row, the cursor moves to the next block end (at “;”

sign) after the key is pressed;

4） Press key, the cursor shifts a column to the right; if the cursor locates at the row end,
it moves to the head of the next block;

5） Press key, the cursor shifts a column to the left; if the cursor locates at the row head,
it moves to the end of the next block;

6） Press key to window upward, the cursor moves to the 1st row and 1st column of the
previous window, if it windows to the head of the program, the cursor moves to the 2nd row and 1st
column;

7） Press key to window downward, the cursor moves to the 1st row and 1st column of
the next window, if it windows to the end of the program, the cursor moves to the last row and 1st
column of the program;
2. Finding: To search for the specified character upward or downward from the cursor
Ⅱ Operation

current location
The steps of finding is as follows:

1) Press to enter Edit mode, and press key to enter the PRG CONTENT window;

2) Press , and input the required characters to be searched(can input one block). For
example, finding “G00” page is shown below:

4) Press key ( or is determined by the location of the character searched to the

character where the cursor locates), it displays as follows:

220
 Chapter 6 Program Edit & Management

4) After the finding, the CNC system is still in FIND state, press or key again, the

next character can be found. Or press key to exit the FIND state.
5) If the character is not found, the prompt of “Search fail” will be displayed.

Ⅱ Operation
Note : During the searching, it doesn’t search the characters in the called subprogram, and the character in
subprogram is searched in subprogram.
3. Positioning the cursor to the specified line

1) Press to enter Edit mode, and press to enter the PRG CONTENT page.

2) Press , and input the line number (the line number of block is the left of one row label).
For example, the cursor positions to the 10th line, the display is shown below:

3) Press （or ），and the display page is shown below:

221
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

4. The method to return to the program head

1) In Program interface of the Edit mode, press key, the cursor returns to the program
head;
2) Search the program head character by the methods in OPERATION, Section 6.1.3.
Ⅱ Operation

6.1.4 Inserting a Character

Steps:

1) Press to enter PRG CONTENT page in Edit mode;

2) Press key to enter the INS mode (the cursor is an underline, and the “Insertion” shows
at the title column), the window is as follows:

3) Input the character to be inserted (to insert G98 code before G50 in the above figure,

input , , ); it displays as follows:

222
 Chapter 6 Program Edit & Management

Note 1: In the Insert mode, if the cursor is not located at the row head, a space will be automatically
generated when inserting the code address; if the cursor is located at the row head, the space will
not be generated, and it should be inserted manually.
Note 2: In the Insert mode, if the previous bit before the cursor is a decimal point and the cursor is not

Ⅱ Operation
located at the row end, input an address word, the “space” will be added automatically following the
decimal point.

6.1.5 Deleting a Character

Steps:

1) Press to enter PRG CONTENT page in Edit mode;

2) Press key to delete the character before the cursor; press key to delete the
character where the cursor locates.

6.1.6 Altering a Character

There are 2 methods for the character alteration:
Insertion: First delete the character altered by the methods in Section 6.1.5, then insert the
character required by the methods in Section 6.1.5 of this part.
Direct alteration:
1) Select the PRG CONTENT page in Edit mode;

2) Press key to enter the ALT state (the cursor is a backlight rectangle, and the
“Modification” shows at the tile column), the display page is as follows:

223
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

3) Input the modified character(as the above figure, alter X300 to X250, input , ,

), it displays as follows:
Ⅱ Operation

Note : In ALTER state, the current character where the cursor locates is altered for the input one, and the
cursor moves a byte forward;

6.1.7 Deleting a Single Block

Single block deletion:

1) Press in Edit mode to enter program interface, and switch program content page.

2) Move the cursor to the head of the block to be deleted, then press key.
Multi-block deletion:

1) Select the edit operation mode, enter to the program page set by button, and then shift
to the program content page;

2) Move the cursor to the beginning of the block to be deleted, press the soft button, and
then move the selected block by cursor, the page is as follows:

224
 Chapter 6 Program Edit & Management

4) Delete the selected block by .

6.1.8 Copying & Pasting a Block

Ⅱ Operation
Single block copy/paste
Steps:

1) Select Edit mode, enter to the program page set by and then shift to the program
content page;

2) Move the cursor to the required copy block, press and , and the current block is
copied;

3) Move the cursor to the required paste position, press , and the copied block is pasted.
Single block copy/paste
Steps:

1) Select the Edit mode, enter to the program page set by and then shift to the program
content page;

2) Move the cursor to the beginning of the block to be copied, press the soft button, and
then move the selected block by cursor;

3) Copy the selected block by soft button;

4) Move the cursor to the required paste position, press , and the copied block is pasted.

6.1.9 Canceling & Recovering a Program

Steps:

1) Select Edit mode, enter to the program page set by and then shift to the program
content page, which is shown below::

225
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

2) Press to enter the next menu, which is shown below:

Ⅱ Operation

3) When the current content is changed(after modification, copy or deletion), is pressed

to recover the previous content before the copy;

4) Recover and cancel are matched. Press ， to cancel the previous operation.
Note: Up to 10 previous steps can be retreated by using the retraction function;

6.1.10 Circle Command Aided Programming

The cycle G command should be input more parameter commands. This function is the
programming guiding function for each cycle command; Operator can easily finish the programming
operation for the cycle command by the miscellaneous programming function. There are two
methods to enter the miscellaneous function, refer to the following steps:
Method 1:

1）Press soft key enter to edit mode，press soft key, enter to the program page set and
then shift to the program content page, so that the cursor does not the line of that the cycle
command locates, which is shown below:

226
 Chapter 6 Program Edit & Management

2）Open the program content sub-page by soft button, which is shown below:

Ⅱ Operation
3 ） Enter to the miscellaneous programming page by controlling the soft function
button.，which is shown below:

4) Select the cycle command to be compiled by , , or button, the

selected cycle commands will show with highlight color; next page can be displayed by shifting the

, ( or ), and then enter to the next page by soft button; refer to the
following figure:

227
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

4) Perform the cutting-in direction selection on this page (Partial commands are regardless of the

cutting-in direction selection, but enter to the next page directly); enter to the next page by soft
button; refer to the following figure:
Ⅱ Operation

5) Input the parameter numerical value in this page, the figure at the left is the machining schematic;
the command parameter input frame is at the upper right coner; the command parameter to be input

can be selected by , , or button. When the command parameter is selected

the left machining schematic, the corresponding address may display with red color; the numerical
value then can be written into the input frame by its corresponding number buttons; write the

numerical value to the input frame by . The input frame (Only the G71, G72 or G73 owns the
accuracy-machining block input frame) at the lower right corner is the one for inputting the
accuracy-machining block. The cursor can be shifted between the command parameter input frame

and the one of the accuracy-machining block by or soft button. A new program is then

created by soft button after inputting data; refer to the following figure:

228
 Chapter 6 Program Edit & Management

Method 2:

1) Enter to the Edit operation mode by ; enter to the program page set by and the

shift to the program content page, and then open the program content sub-page by , put the

Ⅱ Operation
cursor on the cycle command line, which is shown below:

2) System may automatically identify that the cycle command type enters to the corresponding

programming help interface by , and then record the stored data, which is shown below:

3) A new program is created by soft button after inputting the data, which is shown below:

229
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

6.1.11 Program Save

In Edit mode, after the program is edited or modified, although the system automatically save
programs at regular time, shift to other working mode from edit or switch the current display page and
Ⅱ Operation

the CNC will automatically save the current program.

Note: “*” in the title bar is displayed when the program is not saved.

6.1.12 Macro Program Edit

Method 1:

Select the edit operation mode, enter to the program page set by and then shift to the

program content page; enter to the macro edit state consecutively pressing the ; refer to the
following figure:

Then it may input some special characters (［, ］, ＝, ＞, ＜, ＋, ＊).

For example: To input character “［”, it may press key repeatedly.

Method 2:

Edit operation method selection, enter to the program page set by and then shift to the

230
 Chapter 6 Program Edit & Management

program content page，press soft key，enter to the program content page，press soft
button to open the macro edit function menu, which is shown below:

In this case, automatically enter to the macro edit state, some special characters, such as ([,], ＝,
＞,＜, ＋ and ＊) can be input. The macro program command can be inserted by the function button

Ⅱ Operation
at the right side, so that the macro edit is more simple and enabled
Note: In the macro program edit state, program index or scan operation is unavailable.

6.1.13 Creating & Modifying a Program Annotation

GSK980TDi can add annotation to each line, and its steps are shown below:

1) Select Edit mode, press to enter program interface and switch enter the program
content page;

2) Press and the CNC automatically insert “( )” into the end of line where the cursor
is, and the display page is shown below:

3) Input annotation character into “( ). For example, input “KUAI” character string, and the
display page is shown below:

231
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

4) The modification of annotation is the same that of program content.

Note : The annotation added to the CNC could only be character. Actually, the CNC takes all content in “()”
as annotation, so, adding other annotation can be executed by using PC editing, and then be
transmitted to the CNC.
Ⅱ Operation

6.2 Deleting Programs

6.2.1 Deleting a Program
Steps:

1) Select Edit mode, press to enter program interface and switch enter the program
content page;

2) Press address key , number key , , , by sequence (taking

example of O0001);

3) Press key, pop-up the dialog box as follows:

232
 Chapter 6 Program Edit & Management

4) Press and O0001 program is deleted; press and the deletion is cancelled.
Method 2:

1) Select Edit mode, press to enter program interface, press to enter the local program

Ⅱ Operation
page;

2) Press or to select the required deleted program. For example, select O0001
program and the display is shown below:

3) Press key, pop-up the dialog box as follows:

233
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

4) Press and O0001 program is deleted; press and the deletion is cancelled.

6.2.2 Deleting All Programs

Steps:
1) Refer to Section 6.2.1, Method 2 to enter the local program page;

2) Press to enter the next menu and the display is shown below:
Ⅱ Operation

3) Press , and then press ，the all program are deleted.

6.3 Selecting a Program

When there are multiple programs in CNC system, a program can be selected by searching,
scanning and direct confirmation.

6.3.1 Searching

1) Select Edit or Auto mode，enter to the program page set by and then shift to the
program content page;

2) Press , (the short key is ) and the display is shown below:

234
 Chapter 6 Program Edit & Management

3) Input the program number in the pop-up dialogue box. For example, search O0001 program
(the leading zero can be omitted when the program name is input) and the display is shown
below:

Ⅱ Operation
4) Press （or , , ）, the searched program will be displayed. If the program
does not exist, the CNC prompts “File does not exist”.

Note: Press or to search programs in Edit mode. When there is no program, the CNC

automatically creates programs; press or to execute the search, and the CNC prompts

“The file does not exist” when there is not the program.

6.3.2 Scanning
1) Select Edit or Auto mode;

2) Press to enter the program display page;

3) Press ;

4) Press or to display the next or previous program;

235
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

5) Repeat step 3 and 4 to display the saved programs one by one.

6.3.3 Direct Confirmation

1) Select Edit or Auto mode (must be in non-run state);

2) Press to enter the program interface. When the system is not in “Local Directory” ,

is pressed, which displays is shown below:

Ⅱ Operation

3) Press ， to move the cursor to the program name which is to be selected.

4) Press (or ), and the selected program is opened and the CNC skips to “PRG.
CONTENT” page.
Note: when the CNC is connected with the U disk, the above similar method is referred to open the program in
the U disk.

6.4 Executing a Program

After the program to be executed is selected by the method in OPERATION, Section 6.3, select

the Auto mode, then press key (or external cycle start key), the program will be executed
automatically.

6.5 Renaming a Program

Methods of renaming a program is divided into two:
Method 1:

1) Select Edit mode, press to enter the program interface, and in necessity press

to enter PRG CONTENT page (must be in Insert, Alter state):

236
 Chapter 6 Program Edit & Management

2) Press to input a new program name;

3) Press .
Method 2:

Ⅱ Operation
1) Select Edit mode, press to enter the program interface, and in necessity press

to enter the local directory page:

2) Move the cursor to the program which is to be modified, press and input a new

program name in the pop-up diaglog box, and at last press .

Note: the method 1 is only used to the current program, and the method 2 is used to any programs.

6.6 Copying a Program

Methods of copying a program is divided into two:
Method 1:

1) Select Edit mode, press to enter the program interface, and in necessity press

to enter PRG CONTENT page (must be in Insert, Alter state):

237
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

2) Press to input a new program name;

3) Press .
Method 2:
Ⅱ Operation

1) Select Edit mode, press to enter the program interface, and in necessity press

to enter the local directory page:

2) Move the cursor to the program which is to be modified, press and input a new

program name in the pop-up diaglog box, and at last press .

Note: the method 1 is only used to the current program, and the method 2 is used to any programs.

6.7 Program Management

Press ,and then press to enter the local program display page. In the page, it
lists the program names saved in CNC system, and it can display up to 15 names in a page. When

the saved exceed 15 programs, it may press or to display the next page.

238
 Chapter 6 Program Edit & Management

Area 1

Area 2 Area 3

Area 4
Explanations:
1) The area 1 is used to display the saved programs, the total memory capacity, the used
capacity and the left;
2) The area is used to display the current program list;
3) The area 3 is used to preview the content of program where the current cursor is in the area

Ⅱ Operation
2;

4) The area 4 belongs to the soft function menu position. Pressing , can display in
order programs located at the area 2.

6.8 Counter Function

1、press to enter the program content page。

2、Spring out the counter window by soft button; Alternatively, directly press the at
the program content page, the calculator may appear, refer to the following figure:

3. Control the corresponding button function on the MDI panel to perform the number input and
calculation based upon the content of the calculator. The calculated result can be transmitted to the

program cursor on the MDI panel based upon the displayed from calculator, and then retreat
from the calculation function.

239
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

a) Press the to retreat from the calculation function, alternatively, it can be carried out

by soft button.

6.9 Font Scaling

Enter to the program page set by ; enter to the program content page by soft
button (It can not be entered in the MDI mode) if necessary, refer to the following figure:
Ⅱ Operation

Open the next level optional menu by pressing the soft button again; refer to the
following figure:

Open the font scaling function optional menu by soft button; refer to the following
figure:

240
 Chapter 6 Program Edit & Management

The font size can be adjusted by 、 ,this function is only enabled to the displayed
machining program on the program content page.

Ⅱ Operation
6.10 Program Preview Function
In order to reduce the alarm error in the operation program and improve the safety of component
program performance, GSK980TDi adds the [Path Preview] function, also displayed the direction of
the programming path, so that it is convenient to confirm whether the program is correct.

6.10.1 Interface Display of Path Preview

Select the Edit mode, on the program -> local program interface; press the soft button
after the program is compiled; refer to the following figure:

6.10.2 Operation of Path Preview

1) The beginning or dwell of path preview
Enter to the path preview page; the programming path is then automatically displayed.

Alternatively, the program path can be shown by soft button (or button) on the path
preview page, refer to the following figure:
241
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

The drawing can be temporarily stopped by soft button (or button) during the
diagram;
In the process of the path preview, when the path exceeds its range, the diagram can be
Ⅱ Operation

displayed at the middle of the screen by soft button (or ).

The current diagram path can be eliminated by soft button (or ).

2) Drawing speed selection

Enter to the next soft function menu by ; the drawing speed can be controlled by ,

, or (The corresponding shortcut buttons are , , or ); the

speed can be overridden with real-time during the drawing.

3) Scaling up/down of path

In the path preview page, the scaling up/down of the diagram path with real-time can be

performed by soft button (or ), soft button (or ). The diagram path can be

zoomed in 2 times by the ; the diagram path can be zoomed out 1 / 2 times by , as
well the current scaling shows at its corresponding prompt column.
4) The displayed movement of diagram path
The diagram path movement can be carried out by cursor movement button in the path display

page. The movement interval can be adjusted by soft button (or ); the current movement
interval is then displayed at its corresponding prompt column.
5) Mirror image path
In the path preview page, the programming path and symmetric line of the programming path

(cutting command) will display by ; refer to the following figure:

242
 Chapter 6 Program Edit & Management

The will be cancelled by soft button, only the programming path is then drawn.

6) Display the cutter compensation C

Ⅱ Operation
If the program in the cutter compensation C, and press the soft button; the programming
path and the cutter compensation C path will display, and the cutter compensation C shows with red,
refer to the following figure:

The will be cancelled by soft button; only the programming path is drawn.

6.10.3 Command Display of Path Preview

(Single dotted-line)：G00
(Double full-line)：G01/G02/G03/G05/G122/G124/G144/G146
(Thread line)：G32
(Symmetric line): Mirror image path symmetric axis
(Single full-line): The connection cable of the cutting path and
symmetric cables in the mirror image path.
Explanations:
(1) G28, G30: This section will not show if there is no intermediate point to be specified; if the
intermediate point is specified in command, the drawing will be performed to the intermediate point,
and part of the figure where from intermediate point to the mechanical zero will not be drawn;

243
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

(2) G50, G52-59 are denoted with coordinate systems, color: Green;
(3) M, S and T commands are shown by Yellow dot; the M30, M99, M00, M01 and M02 are not
displayed near the note M, S, T and M codes;
(4) G31/G36/G37 are treated as G01;
(5) The path at the G17, G19 plane can not be regarded as the path preview;
(6) The writ of the system variable in the macro program does not register to the cutter
compensation file; the read for the system variable, is the state, before entering to the program
preview;
(7) Enter to the polar coordinate, cylinder interpolation, the graph is shown be Red;
If the polar coordinate and cylinder command are programmed in the G17 and G19 planes, at
last, the graph is shown in the X, Z planes。
The difference between the displayed graph and the actual one of the programmed path are 90
degrees (The coordinate system of drawing can be consistent with the one of the programming by
adjusting the data parameter No. 175 and pressing the [SHIFT] soft button). The example program
(G17 panel) of the polar coordinate interpolation in this Manual can be illustrated as follows:
Ⅱ Operation

If the polar coordinate and the cylinder command are programmed in the G18 plane, but the
eventual graph displays in the X, Y plane。
The displayed graph and the programmed one are symmetric (The coordinate system and
programming system based upon drawing can be consistent by adjusting the data parameter 175) to
Z axis to describe the example program (G18 plane) in the cylinder interpolation; refer to the following
figure:

244
 Chapter 6 Program Edit & Management

6.10.4 Precautions
(1) The figure in the path preview is a schematic of the programming path, which is not absolutely
equal that of actual workpiece;
(2) Path preview is mainly inspected whether the programming path is correct, regardless of the
correction of the miscellaneous commands M, S and T.

6.11 Teaching function

Teaching is a programming method by the artificial guiding machining operation, GSK980TDi
adds a teaching function, so that the teaching programming is more simply and efficient.

Select the Manual or MPG operation method and press the to enter the program page set,

and then enter to the program content page by pressing if necessary; the display is shown
below:

Ⅱ Operation
Open the next optional menu by pressing the again, refer to the following figure:

Enter to the Teaching function page by , refer to the following figure:

245
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

、 : Insert the current absolute coordinate (original value input state) or the sum (offset
input state) of the absolute coordinate and offset value input for the corresponding axis at
the cursor position.
Ⅱ Operation

: Shift the system to the retyping offset value when the absolute coordinate value along

each axis is inserted; simultaneously, it becomes after controlling this button.

: Shift the system to state that only the absolute coordinate along each axis can be inserted;

simultaneously, it becomes after controlling this button.

: Retreat from Teaching mode.

6.12 Other Operations Available in Edit Mode

The operations by this GSK980TDi machine panel allowed in Edit mode are defined by ladders,
please refer to the materials by the machine builder.
Please note that the following functions are described based on the 980TDi standard PLC
programs!

1) Spindle override can be adjusted by pressing , ;

2) Feedrate override can be adjusted by pressing , ， ;

3) CNC can be reset by pressing key;

4) The operation mode is switched by pressing any of the keys among , , ,

, or ;
5) The data transmission
6) Refer to II OPERATION, Chapter 12
7) Cooling control
Refer to II Operation, Section 3.2.3
8) Lubricating control

246
 Chapter 6 Program Edit & Management

Refer to II Operation, Section 3.2.4

9) Chuck control
Refer to II Operation, Section 3.2.5
10) Tailstock control
11) Refer to II Operation, Section 3.2.6
12) Hydraulic control
Refer to II Operation, Section 3.2.7

Ⅱ Operation

247
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual
Ⅱ Operation

248
 Chapter 7 Tool Offset & Setting

CHAPTER 7 TOOL OFFSET AND SETTING

The actual location of tool can be overlooked in programming for simplifying programming. Three
methods including positioning tool-setting, trial tool-setting and machine zero tool-setting are
available in this GSK980TDi system. The tool offset data are obtained from this tool-setting operation.

7.1 Tool Positioning Setting

Steps:

Ⅱ Operation
Z

Fig. A Fig. B

1. Firstly determine if the offset values are zero in X, Z, if not, clear all the tool number offset
values;
2. Set the offset No. for 00 (i.e. T0100,T0300), as for the offset value: (method: execute a move
code or perform the machine zero return in T0100 state, then clear the offset value
automatically as returning to the machine zero);
3. Select a tool by random (usually the 1st tool, this tool will be used as the reference tool);
4. Position the tool nose of the reference tool to a point (tool-setting point), as shown in Fig. A;
5. In PRG STATE page of the MDI mode, set up the workpiece coordinate system by the
command G50 X__ Z__;
6. Clear the relative coordinate (U, W), see details in APPENDIX;
7. After the tool is moved to a safety height, select another tool and move it to the setting point,
as shown in Fig. B;

8. Press key and move the cursor by , key to select the corresponding offset
number of that tool;

9. Press address key , then press key to input the tool offset value of X axis into the
corresponding offset number;

10. Press address key , then press key to input the tool offset value of Z axis into the
corresponding offset number;
11. Repeat the steps from 7 to 10 to perform the tool-setting operation for other tools.
249
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

Note: For the fixed tool-setting, the original system tool offset should be cleared, input the new offset one

time instead of many times by pressing , . Refer to II OPERATION, Section 7.5.4 about the
tool compensation clearing method.

7.2 Trial Tool-setting

Whether the method of trial tool-setting is inactive is defined by the system parameter No.012
Bit5.
Steps (workpiece coordinate system by part end surface):

Surface B
Surface A

α Z
Ⅱ Operation

1) Select a tool by random and make it cut on Surface A;

2) Retract the tool along X axis without Z axis moving and stop the spindle; directly press

and , and the CNC records the absolute values of the position, at the moment, directly
move the tool;

Press key to enter the Offset interface, select the TOOL OFFSET page, then move

3) the cursor by pressing , key to select the corresponding offset number;

4) Key in by sequence the address key , number key and key;

5) Make the tool cut along Surface B;
6) Retract the tool along Z axis without the movement of X axis, and stop the spindle; directly

press and , and the CNC records the absolute values of the position, at the
moment, directly move the tool;
7) Measure the diameter "α" (supposing α=15) ;

8) Press key to enter the Offset interface, select the TOOL OFFSET window, then move

the cursor by pressing , key to select the corresponding offset number;

9) Key in the address key by sequence, number key , and key;

10) Move the tool to a safety height to change for another tool;

250
 Chapter 7 Tool Offset & Setting

Surface
表面 B1 B1
Surface
表面 A1A1

αˊ Z

βˊ

11) Make the tool to cut on Surface A1;

12) Retract the tool along X axis without Z axis moving and stop the spindle;
13) Measure the distance "β ˊ " between the Surface A1 and the workpiece coordinate
origin(supposing βˊ=1) ;

Ⅱ Operation
14) Press key to enter the Offset interface, select the TOOL OFFSET page, then move the

cursor by pressing , to select the corresponding offset number;

15) Key in by sequence the address key , sign key , number key , and
key;
16) Make the tool to cut on Surface B1;
17) Retract the tool along Z axis without the movement of X axis, and stop the spindle;
18) Measure the distance "α’ " (supposing α’=10);

19) Press key to enter the Offset interface, select the TOOL OFFSET window, then move

the cursor by pressing , to select the corresponding offset number;

20) Press orderly the address key , number key , and key;
21) Repeat the execution from Step 10 to Step 20 to perform the tool-setting operation for other
tools.
Note: The offset value may be large by this tool-setting method, so the tool compensation should be done by
the coordinate offset by the CNC system. (set the BIT4 of the CNC parameter No.003 to 1). Moreover,
the tool lengths compensation should be performed by using the T code in the 1st block, or the 1st
move block should contain the T code for the tool length compensation.

7.3 Tool-Setting by Machine Zero Return

There is no reference tool in this tool-setting methods, when the tool is worn or to be adjusted, it
only needs to be set again, and a machine zero return should be done before the tool-setting. The
machining could be continued by performing a machine zero return at power on after power-off, which
is very convenient for the operation.
Steps (workpiece coordinate system by part end surface):

251
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

B B
Surface
表面
表面 A
Surface A

α Z

1) Press key to enter Machine Zero mode, move axes to machine zero;
2) Select a tool by random and set the offset number of the tool to 00 (e.g. T0100, T0300) ;
3) Make the tool to cut on Surface A;
4) Retract the tool along X axis without the movement of Z axis, and stop the spindle; directly
Ⅱ Operation

press and , and the CNC records the absolute values of the position, at the
moment, directly move the tool;

5) Press key to enter the Offset interface, select the TOOL OFFSET window, then move

the cursor by pressing , key to select the corresponding offset number;

6) Key in by sequence the address key , number key and key to set the
offset value of Z axis;
7) Make the tool cut along Surface B;
8) Retract the tool along Z axis without the movement of X axis, and stop the spindle;
9) Measure the distance "α"(supposing α=15);

10) Press key to enter the Offset interface, select the TOOL OFFSET window, then move

the cursor by pressing , to select the corresponding offset number;

11) Key in by sequence the address key , number key , and key to set
the offset value of X axis;
12) Move the tool to a safety height for tool change;
13) Change for another tool, and set the tool offset number to 00 (i.e. T0100, T0300);

Surface
表面 B1 B1
表面 A1A1
Surface

α1 Z

β1

252 X
 Chapter 7 Tool Offset & Setting

14) Make the tool to cut on Surface A1;

15) Retract the tool along X axis without Z axis moving and stop the spindle; measure the
distance "β1" between the Surface A1 and the workpiece coordinate system origin
(supposing β1=1) ;

16) Press key to enter the Offset interface, select the TOOL OFFSET window, then move

the cursor by pressing , to select the corresponding offset number;

17) Key in by sequence the address key , sign key , number key , and
key to set Z offset value;
18) Make the tool to cut on Surface B1;
19) Retract the tool along Z axis without the movement of X axis, and stop the spindle;
20) Measure the distance "α1" (supposing α1=10);

21) Press key to enter the Offset interface, select the TOOL OFFSET window, then move

the cursor by pressing , key to select the corresponding offset number;

Ⅱ Operation
22) Key in by sequence the address key , number key , and key to set
X offset value;
23) Move the tool to a safety position;
24) Repeat the execution from Step 12 to Step 23 to perform the tool-setting operation for other
tools.
Note 1: Machine zero switch must be fixed for the tool-setting operation by machine zero return.
Note 2: The workpiece coordinate system setting can’t be done by G50 code after tool-setting by machine
zero return.
Note 3: The tool compensation should be done by coordinate offset by the CNC system (the system
parameter No.003 Bit4 is set to 1), further more, the tool lengths compensation should be performed
by using the T code in the 1st block, or the 1st move block should contain the T code for the tool
length compensation.
Note 4: The corresponding parameters should be set as follows:
Bit7=0 of the system parameter No.004;
Bit5=1 of the system parameter No.012;
Bit7=1 of the system parameter No.012.
Note 5: The setting values of the system parameter No.047 should be close to the absolute coordinate
values of machine zero in workpiece coordinate system XOZ, as is shown in the following figure:
As shown below:

253
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

Example: After machine zero returning, when the absolute coordinate of the tool in workpiece
coordinate system is (a,b), the setting value of system parameter No.047 should be close
to a,b.

7.4 Coordinates Record

When the trail-cut tool-setting or machine zero return tool-setting is executed, the coordinates
record function can be used to get the convenient tool-setting operation.
When the tool-setting is executed and after the tool cuts along X (or Z), the following steps are
executed to directly move the tool to the safety position as follows:

1) Press to enter the tool offset interface, and then press to enter the tool
offset page as follows:
Ⅱ Operation

2) Press and , absolute corrdinates of X and Z（without including current tool offset
values）are recorded in the CNC. After the absolute values are recorded correctly, there is a
flash “Record coordinates” in the upper of the screen, and there is a prompt “Current X、Z
Absolute coordinates have been recorded” in the bottom of the screen as follows:

3) Retract the tool to the safety position, and stop the spindle. When the diameter is measured
for the outer circle and the distance from the reference plane to it is done, the measured

254
 Chapter 7 Tool Offset & Setting

value is input in the tool offset page; the system counts the new tool offset value and sets it
to the selected tool offset number according to the input value and the previous recorded
absolute coordinates.
Use the following methods to clear the recorded coordinates when the above methods are used
to execute the tool-setting:
1) In the tool offset page, after the absolute coordinates are input in some tool offset(for
example: Z0 is input in the No.01 tool offset number) and then the axis moves, the recorded
coordinates are cleared;

2) Press or or in the tool offset page and the recorded coordinates are
cleared.
3)

7.5 Setting & Altering an Offset Value

Refer to Section 1.3.3 about methods of entering the offset setting page.

Ⅱ Operation
7.5.1 Offset Setting

1) Press key to enter the offset setting page, select the desired window by pressing the

, ;

2) Move the cursor to the location of the tool offset, wear number to be input.

Scanning: Press , to move the cursor in sequent

Searching: use the following press keys to directly move the cursor to the input position:

Press + offset number + or and input the offset number in the

pop-up dialogue box, press and the cursor directly positions the target offset
number.
3) Numerical value input.

Method 1: Input number after pressing the address button (the corresponding axis name

button for the , , etc.);

Method 2: Input number after pressing the soft button;

3) Press and the CNC calculates the offset value automatically and displays the result in
the window. Its range:-9999.999~9999.999（IS_B）/-9999.9999~9999.9999（IS_C）(unit：
mm)

7.5.2 Offset Alteration

1) Refer to OPERATION, Section 7.5.1, and move the cursor to the location of the offset
number that is to be altered;

255
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

2) If the offset value of X axis is to be altered, key in U; as for that of Z axis, key in W;

alternatively, select the data position to be changed by soft button;

3) Then key in the incremental value;

4) Press to add the current offset value to the value keyed in, the operation result will be
displayed as a new offset value.

Example: The set X axis offset value is 5.678

The increment keyed in is U 1.5
Then the new offset value is 7.178 (=5.678+1.5)

7.5.3 Offset Alteration in Communication Mode

For the alteration and setting of the offset value in the communication, please see Chapter 12 of
this part for its operations.
Note 1: While changing the offset value, the new offset value takes effect after the T code is executed.
Note 2: If the actual workpiece dimensions doesn’t conforms to that of the part drawing, subtract the error
Ⅱ Operation

from the original offset value for the oversize workpiece, add the error to the original offset value for
the undersize workpiece.
Example: The external diameter of the workpiece to be machined is Ф55.382, and the No.01 offset
value is applied in the machining. Before machining, the values in No.01 are shown as
follows table:
No. X Z T R
00 0 0 0 0
01 16.380 -24.562 0 0

In machining, the actual external diameter measured of workpiece is Ф55.561, so the offset
value of No.01 can be altered as follows table:

No. X Z T R
00 0 0 0 0
01 16.201 -24.562 0 0

16.380-（55.561-55.382）
Note: To backup and restore the tool offset values, the relevant operations may be performed on PC via
communication.

7.5.4 Offset Values Clearing

1) Move the cursor to the offset number to be cleared;

2) When the offset value of X axis is to be cleared, is pressed, then is done, the
offset will be cleared. Other axis clearing is done like that;
Note: The offset clearing in the tool offset page doesn’t mean that the system in under the state with no
offsetting, if the system is needed to be in this state, the offsetting is required to be executed, which is
shown as follows:
Execute a positioning command in T0100 state or perform a machine zero return. After the offsetting is
finished, the “□□”in “T○○□□” shown at the right bottom of the screen will not be backlighted.

256
 Chapter 7 Tool Offset & Setting

7.5.5 Setting & Altering a Tool Wear

To prevent the mistaken operation of the setting and alteration of the offset value (decimal point
missed, mislocated etc.), which may cause the tool collision by oversize offset value, for the visual
judgement for the tool wear by the operator, the TOOL WEAR window is set in this GSK980TDi
system. When the offset value is needed to be altered due to the inaccurate dimensions by the tool
wear, it may set or alter the wear input value. The wearing value resolution is -9999.999~9999.999
(IS_B) /-9999.9999~9999.9999 (IS_C) (unit：mm); The upmost incremental value of each input value
can be restricted to prevent the incorrect numerical value from inputting. The wear input range is
defined by the data parameter No.140, and they are saved even at power down.
The setting and alteration methods for the tool wear are approximately identical to that of the tool
offset, and the wear value is input by U(X axis), W(Z axis), V(Y axis).

7.5.6 Locking & Unlocking an Offset Value

In order to protect the offset value to be operated by mistaken, the offset values can be put into
lock, the operation steps are as follows:

Ⅱ Operation
1) Move the cursor to the location of the offset number to be locked;

2) Press the or key, the current offset value will be backlighted for locking, which

is forbidden to alter, press the or key again, the locking may be cancelled.
No.1 tool offset is locked as follows:

Note: The tool wear values can’t be locked.

7.5.7 No.0 Tool Offset Moving Workpiece Coordinate System

When No.012 Bit 6 is set to 1, No. 0 tool offset moving workpiece coordinate system is valid.
After the value is input in No. 0 tool offset, the workpiece coordinate system executes the offset
based on the input value.

257
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

Before inputting No.0 tool offset

Ⅱ Operation

After inputting No.0 tool offset

As the above figure, after X100, Z100 in No.0 tool offset is input, the workpiece coordinate
system offsets X100, Z100.
Note: When No. 0 offset modification is valid real-time, No. 0 tool offset must be set before the system runs a
program, otherwise, the run path will offset.

7.6 High Efficiency Tool-Change

7.6.1 Breif
When the tool operation is performed during the program machining; usually, the steps are
shown below:
1) Return to the specified safety tool-change position by program from the current position;
2) Perform the tool-change operation and waiting for the completion of the tool-change;
3) Return to the cutting position from safety tool-change position；
The tool-change safety area is set by machine operator before the machining is performed (that
is, the area, without any impact to the workpiece, when the tool-post rotates a circle); Tool returns to
the safety tool-change position specified by program from the current position. Tool is immediately
performed the tool-change operation as long as it enters to the tool-change safety area when the
tool-change operation is performed; that is, the step 1 and 2 in the above-mentioned combines a
completion motion, so that it can be reached to the high-efficiency tool-change. It is better to set the
Bit 7 of the state parameter to "1".

258
 Chapter 7 Tool Offset & Setting

7.6.2 Tool-Change Safety Area Setting

When the desired tools for program machining are totally installed, in the case that the spindle
clamps the workpiece blank, the area, without any impact for one cycle of the tool-post rotation, is
called as the tool-change safety area; refer to the following figure:

the tool-change impact area

the chuck the workpiece blank

X

the tool-change safety area

A(Px,Pz)

Ⅱ Operation
Z

The coordinate of point A in the figure is (Px, Pz), the tool-change safety area is X > Px or Z > Pz;
the tool will not collide with workpiece as long as the tool-change is performed in this safety area. To
carry out the high-efficiency tool-change in the actual machining, the machine operator should be
performed within the safety area setting based upon the following steps:

1) In the absolute coordinate page, press soft key, refer to the following figure:

2) Press the soft key, the tool-change safety point setting information window is shown
and covered the integrated information window. It will show a unset state when X or Z axis does
not set; it will show the coordinate value of setting when X or Z is set. The initial state is as
follows:

259
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

3) Manually move the tool-post at the side of + X of the workpiece, and the optimized position of
the impact will not occur when the tool-change executes at this side; record the X axis coordinate

at this position by pressing the ; refer to the following figure:

Ⅱ Operation

4) Manually move the tool-post at the side of + Z on the surface of the workpiece, and the
optimized position of the impact will not occur when the tool-change executes at this side; record

the Z axis coordinate at this position by pressing the ; refer to the following figure:

In the above-mentioned interface, shift the interface or press the , automatically conceal
the small window of “Tool-change safety point setting”, this area recovers and displays the small

260
 Chapter 7 Tool Offset & Setting

window of the “Integral information”

The high-efficiency tool-change function can be enabled after the X and Z are set; the setting
value at the tool-change safety area is memorized after the power is turned off. After the high
efficiency tool-change is enabled, the tool mark is then shown at the right corner of the page “ ”.
Note: The record in the setting of the tool-change safety point is the machine coordinate.

7.6.3 Setting Clear in Tool-Change Safety Area

The setting value of the set tool-change safety area can be eliminated by the following methods:

1) The set data along with the X or Z can be eliminated by soft button or after the
tool-change safety point setting window is shown;

Ⅱ Operation
2) The setting data set by X or Z axis on the tool-change safety area will be automatically eliminated
after the G50 command sets the coordinate system;
3) The setting data set by X or Z axis on the tool-change safety area will be automatically eliminated
after the machine zero return is operated;
4) On the tool offset page, if the tool-setting operation is performed by the measure input method or
trial cutting tool-setting method; the current tool is regarded as to be changed; the setting data set by
its corresponding data on the tool-change safety area will be automatically eliminated.

7.6.4 High-Efficiency Too-Change Programming Format

In order to realize the high-efficiency tool-change, user should use the shared programming
format both the positioning G code and Tool-change T code when the machining procedure is
programmed.
G00 X_ Z_ T_ or
G01 X_ Z_ T_
T code is performed sharing a same block with G00 or G01 code, simultaneously, the T code is
performed while the positioning code executes; and then deliver the tool-change strobe signal TF to
PLC. When the plate moves to the tool-change safety area, CNC delivers the tool-change allowable
signal TCEN. PLC program triggers the tool-change operation by identifying the tool strobe signal TF
and tool-change allowable signal TCEN. Refer to the following signal output time of high-efficiency
tool-change:

261
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

the tool-change
the plate safety area
moves

the tool-change
strobe signal TF

the tool-change
allowable signal
CEN

the tool-change
operation

When T code does not share a same block with the movement code, simultaneously output tool
strobe signal TF and tool-change allowable signal TCEN when T code is performed.

7.6.5 High-Efficiency Tool-Change Procedure Explanation

Ⅱ Operation

Firstly, set the tool-change safety area before using this function. If the tool is installed again or
the raw-material dimension is changed during using this function, the safety area should be set again.
For example:
…
G00 X100 Z100 T0404;
…
The tool-change motion and carriage plate positioning are performed as follows:

the tool-change impact area

the tool-change safety area

the chuck the workpiece blank

X

1
4

4
1

the tool-change
position A(100,100)

Z
The plate moves and the tool-change
operation can synchronously execute

7.6.6 Precaution of High-Efficiency Tool-Change

1) When the tool-change code does not performed with a same block to the axis positioning code; the
tool-change allowable signal will be output before performing the tool-change;
2) When the tool-change code and axis positioning code (G00 or G01) are performed based upon a
same block; the tool-change allowable signal TCEN output after the carriage plate enters to the
safety area. When the tool-change code and other movement codes are performed with a same
block; the tool-change allowable signal TCEN outputs after the movement ends;

262
 Chapter 7 Tool Offset & Setting

3) When the high-efficiency tool-change is performed, It is necessary to prevent the tool rotation from
impacting to other machine components during that the plate moves to the tool-change point
within the tool-change safety area;；
4) High-efficiency tool-change function is suitable for the tool-change safety detection within the XZ
panel, if additional axes are placed at the machine tool, it is necessary to confirm that tool-change
will not interfere to other additional axes when programming.
Note: The high-efficiency tool-change function will disable after performing G50 command or
mechanical zero point return, as well the tool-setting operation in measure input method is
performed; the high-efficiency tool-change function can be enabled after resetting the
tool-change safety area operation.

Ⅱ Operation

263
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual
Ⅱ Operation

264
 Chapter 8 Coordiate System

CHAPTER 8 COORDINATE SYSTEM

GSK980TDi owns workpiece coordinate system selection function, which can be contented
several workpiece coordinate system during the machining; specifying one of the G54~G59 code in
the block can be selected in the workpiece coordinate systems 1~6.

8.1 Coordinate System Setting

Press , to enter its corresponding page:

Ⅱ Operation
8.1.1 Directly Input

Enter to the workpiece coordinate system page, press 、 Move the cursor to the
inputted position, input the numerical value by the number buttons, and then directly input the

numerical value by the button.

265
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

8.1.2 Measure Input

CNC automatically calculates the data such as the cutter compensation or zero offset, etc. when
using the measure input, so that the input data becomes the absolute coordinate of the new
coordinate system at the machine’s current position.

Method 1: Press or Move the cursor to the inputted position, input the coordinate

value after pressing the soft button，the CNC will automatically calculate to input the data by

controlling the button;

Method 2: Move the cursor to the selected coordinate system by pressing or , key

the coordinate value by address button or ; CNC automatically calculates and then inputs

the data by ;
Ⅱ Operation

Note: The input data from measure will become the absolute coordinate of which the current point locates at
the setting coordinate system, for example:
System executes G54 command, input X100; Z100 in G54 coordinate system by measure input method.
CNC automatically calculates the G54 offset value, so that the absolute coordinate at the current position will
become X100; Z100.

8.1.3 Machine Tool Coordinate Record

Enter to the workpiece coordinate system setting page, move the cursor to the inputted position

by or ; directly input the machine tool coordinate by soft button.

8.2 Coordinate System Modification

Enter to the workpiece coordinate system setting page，press 、 ,move the cursor to the

data position to be modified; input the incremental value by the soft button ，press ，
add the current workpiece coordinate system offset value and the inputted incremental value, and its
result will show as a new workpiece coordinate system offset value.

266
 Chapter 8 Coordiate System

8.3 Coordinate System Clearing

Enter to the workpiece coordinate system setting page; the overall workpiece coordinate offset

Ⅱ Operation
values will clear after the confirmation by pressing the soft button; alternatively, Use the
directly input method of the workpiece coordinate system in this chapter to set the axis offset value of
any coordinate system as "0".

267
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual
Ⅱ Operation

268
 Chapter 9 AUTO Operation

CHAPTER 9 AUTO OPERATION

Note！
The key functions of GSK980TDi machine panel are defined by PLC program
(ladders), please refer to the materials by the machine builder for their
significance.
Please note that the following description for the keys function in this chapter
is based on GSK980TDi standard PLC program!

9.1 Automatic Run

9.1.1 Selection of a Program Running

Ⅱ Operation
Refer to Section 6.3.

9.1.2 Start of Automatic Run

1. Press to select the Auto mode;

2. Press to start the program, and the program automatically runs.

Note: Since the program execution begins from the block where the cursor locates, before pressing the

, make a check whether the cursor is located at the block to be executed.

9.1.3 Stop of Automatic Run

 Stop by code (M00)
1. M00
After the block containing M00 is executed, the auto run is stopped. So the modal function and

state are all reserved. Press the or the external run key, the program execution continues.
2. M01

Press and the optional stop indicator is ON and the function is valid. After the block with
M01 is executed, the system stops the automatic run, the modal function and the state are saved.

Press or the external run key, and the program continuously runs.
 Stop by a relevant key

1. In Auto run, by pressing or external pause key, the machine keeps the following state:
(1) The machine feed slows down to stop;
(2) The modal function and state are reserved;

269
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

(3) The program execution continues after pressing the key.

2. Stop by Reset key

(1) All axes movement is stopped.
(2) M, S function output is inactive (the automatic cut-off of signals such as spindle CCW/CW,

lubricating, cooling by pressing key can be set by the parameters)

(3) Modal function and state is held on after the auto run.
3. Stop by Emergency stop button
If the external emergency button (external emergency signal active) is pressed under the
dangerous or emergent situation during the machine running, the CNC system enters into emergency
state, and the machine moving is stopped immediately, all the output (such as spindle rotation,
cooling) are all cut off. If the Emergency button is released, the alarm is cancelled and CNC system
enters into reset mode.
4. Switching operation mode
When Auto mode is switched to the Machine zero, MPG/Step, Manual, Program zero mode, the
Ⅱ Operation

current block “dwells” immediately; when the Auto mode is switched to the Edit, MDI mode in Auto
mode, the “dwell” is not displayed till the current block is executed.
Note 1: Ensure that the fault has been resolved before cancelling the emergency alarm.
Note 2: The electric shock to the device may be decreased by pressing the Emergency button before power
on and off.
Note 3: The Machine zero return operation should be performed again after the emergency alarm is
cancelled to ensure the correctness of the position coordinates (but this operation is forbidden if
there is no machine zero in the machine).
Note 4: Only the BIT3 (MESP) of the bit parameter No.172 is set to 0, could the external emergency stop be
active.

9.1.4 Automatic Run From an Arbitrary Block

Press key to enter the Edit mode, press key to enter the program content page;
1) Move the cursor to the block to be executed (for example, move the cursor to the 3rd row head if
it executes from the 3rd row);

2) If the mode (G, M, T, F code) of the current block where the cursor locates is defaulted and
inconsistent with the running mode of this block, the corresponding modal function should be

270
 Chapter 9 AUTO Operation

executed to continue next step.

3) Press key to enter the Auto mode, then press key to start the execution.

9.1.5 Adjustment of Feedrate & Rapid Rate

In Auto mode, the running speed can be changed by adjusting the feedrate override, rapid
override. It doesn’t need to change the settings of the program and parameter.
 Adjustment of the feedrate override

Press , , 16-level real time feedrate can be obtained.

Note 1: The actual feedrate value is specified by F in feedrate override adjustment;
Note 2: Actual feedrate= value specified by F× feedrate override

 Adjustment of rapid override

It can realize the F0, 25 ％ , 50 ％ , 100 ％ 4-level real time rapid override adjustment by

pressing , , , .

Ⅱ Operation
Note 1: The rapid traverse speeds of X, Z axis are set by the system parameter No.022, No.023
X axis actual rapid traverse rate = value set by parameter No.022X×rapid override
Z axis actual rapid traverse rate = value set by parameter No.022Z×rapid override
Note 2: When the rapid override is F0, the min. rapid traverse rate is set by bit parameter No.032.

9.1.6 Spindle Speed Adjustment

While the spindle speed is controlled by the analog voltage output in Auto mode, it can be
adjusted by spindle override.

Press , to adjust the spindle override for the spindle speed, it can realize 8-level
real-time override adjustment between 50％～120％.
Note : The actual output analog voltage = analog voltage by parameter × spindle override.

9.2 Running State

9.2.1 Single Block Execution
When a program is executed firstly, the system selects the single block run mode to avoid the
program error to cause the unexpected.

Press to select the single block run function in Auto mode; in single block mode, after the

current block is executed, the CNC stops run; press to execute the next block. Such repetition
is executed till the program is done.
Note 1: The single block stops at the mid point of G28 code.
Note 2: For the single block state in the execution of canned cycle codes G90, G92, G94, G70～G76, refer to
the 1st part PROGRAMMING.
Note 3: While the subprogram calling (M98＿ ), or subprogram calling return (M99)is being executed, the
single block is inactive. But it is active except for N, O, P addresses in the block that contains M98 or
M99 code.

271
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

9.2.2 Dry Run

Before the program is to be executed automatically, in order to avoid the programming errors, it
may select the Dry run mode to check the program.

In Auto mode, press to enter the dry run state; in Dry run state, the machine feed and
miscellaneous functions are both active (as machine lock, MST lock are both OFF), that means the
dry run switch has nothing to do with the machine feeding, MST functions, so the feedrate by program
is inactive and the CNC system runs at the speed described in the following table:
Program command
Rapid traverse Cutting feed
Rapid traverse switch ON Rapid traverse Max. manual feedrate
Manual feedrate or rapid
Rapid traverse switch OFF Manual feedrate
traverse(see note)
Note 1: The rate by manual feedrate or rapid rate is set by the BIT6 of the CNC system parameter No.004.
Note 2: The shift of rapid switch in Dry run mode doesn’t affect the rate of the current block being executed,
but that of the next block.
Note 3: The switch operation of Dry run is inactive if the ladder of this GSK980TDi is defined to be in auto
Ⅱ Operation

running state (Auto, MDI mode).

9.2.3 Machine Lock

In Auto mode, press to enter the machine lock; the machine lock and MST lock are usually
used together to check the program. While the machine is in the lock run state:
1. The machine carriage doesn’t move, the “MACHINE” in the INTEGRATED POS window of the
Position interface doesn’t vary too. The RELATIVE POS and ABSOLUTE POS, DIST TO GO
are refreshed continuously, which is the same as that the machine lock switch is OFF.
2. M, S, T commands can be executed normally.

3. Press the on the system operation panel to close the machine lock; the system is then
automatically recovered the absolute coordinate value along each axis; that is, the coordinate
system automatically restores.

Precautions:
1) The machine lock open/close system automatically restores the absolute/relative coordinate
along each axis;
2) The tool state is regardless of the automatic recovery of the workpiece coordinate system
before/after the machine lock. For example, the tool state before the machine lock is T0101;
after is T0202;
3) The state of the cutter compensation C is regardless of the automatic recovery of the
workpiece coordinate system before/after the machine lock. For example, the state of the
cutter compensation C before the machine lock is G40; after is G42;
4) The system ON-OFF state is regardless of the automatic recovery of the workpiece coordinate
before/after the machine lock. For example, the machine is locked before the power-off; the
system can be automatically restored the workpiece coordinate system after the power is
turned on again.

272
 Chapter 9 AUTO Operation

5) To avoid the tool interval motion during the automatic operation, it is better not to change the
state of the machine tool after starting the program;

9.2.4 MST Lock

In Auto mode, press to enter the miscellaneous function lock state; The machine carriage
moves without the M, S, T code being executed. The machine lock and MST lock are usually used
together to check the program.
Note: When the MST lock is active, it takes no effect to the execution of M00, M29, M30, M98, M99.

9.2.5 Block Skip

When a block in program is not needed to be executed and not to be deleted, this block skip
function can be used. When the block is headed with “/ ” sign and Block skip indicator lights up (panel
key active or external skip input active), this block is skipped without execution in Auto mode. In Auto

Ⅱ Operation
mode, press to enter the state that the program skip is valid.
Note: While the block skip switch is off, the blocks headed with “/” signs are executed normally in Auto
mode.

9.3 MPG Trial-Cut

The user can use MPG trial-cut function after editing part programs, check the run path of
program. In MPG trial-cut function, rotating MPG controls the execution speed of program, which can
easily check the program error conveniently.

9.3.1 Switching MPG Trial-cut Mode

Press to enter the MPG trial-cut mode after a machinig program is selected as follows:

At the moment, press and the display is shown below:

273
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

At the moment, rotating MPG makes the program start running. When the execution speed of
program is proportional to MPG speed, execution speed of program fastens as soon as the MPG
rapidly rotates; the execution speed slows down as soon as the MPG slowly rotates. Movement
amount of one pulse can be adjusted by rapid override.
Ⅱ Operation

When the system is in the MPG trial-cut mode, it returns to Auto mode after is pressed. All
operations in MPG trial-cut mode are the same those of Auto mode.

9.3.2 Command Speed in MPG Trial-Cut Mode

1) Cutting feedrate
Cutting command speed in MPG trial-cut mode is determined by No. 241 and rapid override. The
command speed during actually rotating MPG is executed by the following:
[Command speed]×[MPG pulse amount per 1 second]×λ×([the parameter setting value] /100) ×
(8/1000) (mm/min or inch/min)。
λ value is determined by the current rapid override, and their relationship is:
Rapid override λ value Rapid override λ value
F0 1 25% 10
50% 100 100% 100
Rapid traverse speed is clamped at 100% speed when it exceeds 100%, i.e.:
[MPG pulse amount per 1 second]×λ×([No.241setting value]/100)×(8/1000)≤1
2) Rapid traverse speed
Rapid traverse speed is clamped at the speed set by No.240, i.e.:
[Rapid traverse speed]＝[rapid traverse speed of each axis]×([No.240 setting value]/100)× [MPG
pulse amount per 1 second]×λ×([No.241 setting value]/100)×(8/1000)
At the moment, when the speed by rapidly rotating MPG exceeds the clamped, the rapid traverse
speed is clamped at the setting value by parameter, i.e.:
[MPG pulse amount per 1 second]×λ×([No.241 setting value]/100)×(8/1000) ≤1

9.3.3 Notes in MPG Trial-Cut Mode

Pay more attention to the followings when the system is in MPG trial-cut mode:

1) Press in Auto mode and the CNC does not switch to MPG trial-cut mode; when the
CNC is in MPG trial-cut mode, it escapes the MPG trial-cut mode from the next block by

274
 Chapter 9 AUTO Operation

pressing the mode switch key;

2) When the system executes the MPG trial-cut control, the single block signal and the feed
hold signal are valid. When the single block or feed hold stops, the program execution state
is recovered to the MPG trial-cut control after the cycle start key is pressed.
3) Execution speed of blocks for movement and pause can be controlled by rotating MPG.
Their speed of blocks with M, S, T, F, i.e. without movement or pause cannot be
controlled(except for executing the tool offset in traverse mode) by rotating MPG which only
controls whether they are executed.
4) The spindle speed is not related to the MPG pulse. The spindle rotates with the commanded
speed even if the system is in the MPG trial-cut mode. For feed per rotation, reading the
current spindle speed is switched to the execution after feed per minute.

9.3.4 Temporarily Invalid in MPG Trial-cut Mode

1) Executing screw cutting commands
In the course of executing screw cutting blocks (G32, G32.1, G33, G34, G76, G84, G88,
G92，G92.1), the MPG trial-cut function is temporarily invalid with the speed under the override

Ⅱ Operation
100%, and is valid in the next block again. The MPG control is invalid when the screw cutting is
executed actually, and it is valid in others.
2) Executing from the middle point to machine zero
In the course of executing the block (G28, G30) from the middle point to machine, the MPG
trial cutting function is enabled from the start to intermediate point, and the MPG trial cutting is
temporarily disabled from intermediate point to mechanical zero. The block is executed with the
speed under the override 100%, and the next block is valid again.
3) Measuring related G commands execution with the override 100%
When the system measures the related G commands, the MPG trial-cut is invalid
temporarily, is executed with the speed under the override 100%, at the moment, execution of
the next block is valid again. The related G commands include:
G31, G36, G37

9.4 MPG Interrupted Function

In the Auto (Auto, MDI) and Edit mode, In the Auto (Auto, MDI) and Edit mode, the movement
value from MPG can be overlapped to the Auto movement by rotating the MPG. The axis performed
the MPG interruption can be selected by the MPG interruption axis selection signal. The movement
distance of the MPG interruption is determined by the rotation value of the MPG and hand-wheel
federate.
Note：It is necessary to set the Bit 1 of parameter No.0012 to "1" when using the MPG interruption
function, it is necessary to support by dedicated PLC program.

9.4.1 MPG Interrupted Operation

In the Auto, MDI and Edit mode, enter to the MPG interruption state to perform the MPG based
upon the MPG axle number on the selection panel after controlling the [MPG interruption switch]
(External switch) once; retreat from the MPG interruption by pressing the [MPG interruption switch]
again.

275
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

Perform the axle selection by , , , or button when entering to the

MPG state. When the axle selection signal of MPG interruption of one axis is “1”, then execute the
MPG interruption to this axis by rotating the MPG. The equivalent is identical between the MPG
interruption and MPG feed.
The velocity during the MPG interruption is the sum both in the Auto operation and MPG
interruption movement, and its overlapping speed is controlled within the upper limit speed of the
cutting feed. For example, cutting upper limit is 8000mm/min, if the current feedrate is 2000mm/min,
the MPG interruption speed range is -10000~6000mm/min (“-“ means that the MPG interruption
movement direction is reverse to the feed one).
Related parameter
K0019.4 MPG interruption function 0: Disabled 1: Enabled
K0019.5 MPG interruption operation 0: Disabled 1: Enabled

9.4.2 Affection of Coordinate System from MPG Interruption

Axis moves by MPG interruption, and the actual position of the movement axis changes, the
Ⅱ Operation

machine coordinate is renewed instead of the absolute coordinate. Therefore, machine moves after
the MPG interrupts, and the machine coordinate system holds, but the workpiece coordinate system
will offset.
 Absolute coordinate → Absolute coordinate value will not change due to the MPG
interruption.
 Relative coordinate → Due to the MPG interruption, Interrupted amount change.
 Mechanical coordinate → Due to the MPG interruption, interrupted amount change.

When automatically returning the reference point (G28), although the end (reference point) does
not affect by MPG interruption, the intermediate point may generate the offset of interruption value by
the MPG interruption at the workpiece coordinate system

276
 Chapter 9 AUTO Operation

9.4.3 MPG Interruption Value Cancel

The cancellation of the MPG interruption value can be returned the workpiece coordinate system
after offset to the one before offset.
When the cancellation operation of the interruption value is performed, the MPG interruption
value reflects to the absolute coordinate value.
The workpiece coordinate system offset generated from MPG interruption is shown below:

Ⅱ Operation
The workpiece coordinate system recovers to the state before interruption after the MPG
interruption is cancelled, however, the actual position is invariable, refer to the following figure:

Workpiece coordinate system after

MPG interruption cancellation

Interruption value cancel

Position after MPG

interruption cancellation
Workpiece coordinate system before
MPG interruption cancellation

Machine tool
coordinate system

The interruption value can be cancelled base upon the following situations:
 Reset, EMS (Set whether it is cancelled by parameter).
 Perform G28 or Manual return reference point operation. (When the absolute coordinate
system is set after returning to the reference position, the interruption value will be directly
eliminated regardless of the new-created absolute coordinate system. When the absolute
coordinate system does not set after returning to the reference position, the workpiece
system will recover to the previous state of the interruption, simultaneously, the interruption
value is then eliminated).

277
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

 When the non-block reference point set is performed. (The treatment is consistent with the
manual reference point return)
 When performing the G50 workpiece coordinate system setting. (In this case, the workpiece
coordinate is one by G50, simultaneously, the interruption value is eliminated)
 System restarts. The MPG interruption value will be also cleared after the system is power off,
but the workpiece coordinate system holds, and therefore, the system is turned off after the
MPG interrupt, the workpiece coordinate offset generated in the MPG interruption will always
enabled, and it can not recover to the previous state of interruption.)

9.4.4 MPG Interruption Display Page

The Bit 1 of state parameter No.0012 should be set to “1” before using the MPG interruption
function, and then lead in the dedicated PLC program;

Press the soft function button to enter its corresponding page after controlling the

button, refer to the following figure:

Ⅱ Operation

The following 4 data can be simultaneously displayed at the MPG interruption display page:
1) Input unit:
The MPG interruption movement value in the input unit means the specified movement
value of MPG interruption based upon its least input command unit.
2) Output unit:
The MPG interruption movement value in the output unit means the specified movement
value of MPG interruption based upon its least output movement unit.
3) Relative coordinate:
The position at the relative coordinate system and the position of the current relative
coordinate system may generate the change of the interruption value due to the interruption of
the MPG.
4) Residual movement value:
The residual movement value at the current block is irrelevant to the MPG interruption.
The MPG interruption movement value is cleared when the manual reference point end return is
performed along each axis.
Note 1: In the MPG interruption page, the letters of the coordinate axis name should be marked by in
the MPG interruption axis.
Note 2：Manually clear the MPG interruption value by the soft button of the MPG interruption page; the

278
 Chapter 9 AUTO Operation

workpiece coordinate system will not renew; that is, the coordinate system position before the MPG
interruption will not recover, the workpiece coordinate offset generated in the MPG interruption will
always enabled, and then can not be recover again.

9.4.5 Precaution of MPG Interruption

1) MPG interruption is disabled when the MPG feed (Including the Manual, MPG, Single-step,
Machine tool zero return or program zero return) is performed;
2) The axis is controlled by PLC axis; MPG interruption is disabled.
3) MPG interruption is disabled when MPG trial-cutting is performed.
4) The axis does not move when the machine is locked, and the MPG interruption is disabled.
5) MPG interruption is disabled when returning the reference position.
6) MPG interruption is disabled when the system alarm occurs.
Note: The MPG interruption disabling are on the states 1)～3), as the above-mentioned, the system will
not enter to the MPG interruption state. If it on the states 4)～6), the system can be entered to the MPG
interruption state, instead of generating the enabled MPG interruption value.

Ⅱ Operation
9.5 Other Operations

1. In Auto mode, press key to switch on/off the cooling;

2. Press any of the , , , , , , keys to switch the operation

modes;

3. Press the key to reset this CNC system.

4. Automatic lubricating operation (Refer to OPERATION, Chapter 3).

279
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual
Ⅱ Operation

280
 Chapter 10 Zero Return Operation

CHAPTER 10 ZERO RETURN OPERATION

Note!
The key functions of this GSK980TDi machine panel are defined by PLC
program (ladders), please refer to the manuals by the machine builder for their
significance.
Please note that the following description for the panel key functions in this
chapter is based on the GSK980TDi standard PLC program!

10.1 Program Zero Return

Ⅱ Operation
10.1.1 Program Zero
While the part is fixed on the machine, absolute coordinate of current tool position may be set by
G50 code according to the relative position between the tool and the part, so a workpiece coordinate
system is setup. The tool current position is called program zero, and this is the program zero return
position.

10.1.2 Program Zero Return Steps

1. Press key, it enters the Program zero return mode, the bottom line of the window
displays “P. ZERO”:

2. Press the direction key of X, Z , Y, 4th, C axis, it returns to the program zero of X, Z , Y, 4th or C
axis;
3. The machine axis moves toward the program zero return, and the axis stops with the program
zero return completion indicator ON after the axis returns to the program zero.
Note 1: The tool offset is not changed for the program zero return operation, if there is offset, the return
position is the point set by G50.

281
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

Note 2: Whether the key is held on at program zero return is defined by the bit parameter No.011 BIT2 (zero
return is locked automatically).

10.2 Machine Zero Return

10.2.1 Machine Zero
The machine coordinate system is a reference coordinate system for CNC coordinate
operation. It is an inherent coordinate system of the machine. The origin of the machine coordinate
system is called machine zero (or machine reference point). It is defined by the zero or zero return
switch fixed on the machine. Usually this switch is fixed at the positive stroke point of each axis.

10.2.2 Machine Zero Return Steps

1. Press key, it enters the Machine zero mode, the bottom line of the window displays
“REF”:
Ⅱ Operation

2. Press , , , or key to return to the machine zero of X, Z, Y, 4th or C

axis;
3. Carrier moves along with the machine tool zero; when it matches with the incremental encoder
motor, return to the machine tool zero after passing the deceleration signal or zero signal detection.
When it matches with the absolute encoder motor, directly position the set mechanical zero based
upon the velocity of the mechanical zero turn; in this case, the axis stops, and the zero return
indicator is ON.
Note 1: If there is no machine zero on the machine, the machine zero operation is forbidden;
Note 2: The machine zero finish indicator is gone out on condition that: 1)The axis is moved out from
machine zero; 2) CNC is powered off.
Note 3: After the machine zero operation, the tool length compensation is cancelled by CNC;
Note 4: Parameters related to machine zero return are referred to INSTALLATION and CONNECTION.
Note 5: After the machine zero return is executed, the original workpiece coordinate system is set again with
G50.

282
 Chapter 10 Zero Return Operation

10.3 Other Operations in Zero Return

1) The spindle rotates (CW, CCW), stops.
2) The cooling is ON or OFF.
3) The lubricating control.
4) Manual relative tool change.
5) The spindle override tuning.
6) Rapid override tuning.
7) Feedrate override tuning.
8) Hydraulic chuck control;
9) Hydraulic tailstock control.

Ⅱ Operation

283
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual
Ⅱ Operation

284
 Chapter 11 Data Setting

CHAPTER 11 DATA SETTING

11.1 Data Setting

Press and then to enter the CNC setting page which includes the switch setting,
level setting and parameter operation function as follows:

Ⅱ Operation
11.1.1 Switch Setting
When the cursor is in the switch set column, the system can set parameters, programs,
automatic sequence number ON/OFF state.
1) Switch explanation:
Parameter switch: parameters can be modified when the parameter switch is ON; they are
forbidden to alter when it is OFF.
Program switch: programs can be edited when the program switch is ON; they are forbidden to
edit when it is OFF.
Automatic block number: the block number is automatically generated when the automatic
sequence number switch is ON and a program is edited; when the switch is OFF, the
block number is input manually instead of being automatically generated.
2) Switch setting method:
a) Move the cursor to the setting item;

b) Directly press the , or soft button to open the switch, if it is ON, press

the corresponding , or soft button to close it; simultaneously, the cursor

will automatically move to the switch item;
Note: When the parameter switch is shifted from “OFF” to “ON”, an alarm will be issued by CNC system. The

alarm can be cancelled by pressing . If the PARM SWT is shifted again, no alarm is issued. For
security it should set the PARM SWT for “OFF” after the parameter alteration is finished.

285
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

11.1.2 Level Setting

To prevent programs, CNC parameters from being modified at will, GSK980TDi provides the
level setting function, and its password grade is divided into five, from high to low grade: 2nd grade
(machine manufacturer), 3rd grade (device management), 4th grade (engineer), 5th grade (machining
operation), 6th grade(operation limit). The current operation grade is displayed in “Current Level:_” in
the level setting page.

2nd grade：it is for the machine manufacturer, which permits the machine manufacturer to alter the
state parameters, data parameters, pitch compensation data, tool compensation data, to edit
programs, to transmit PLC and so on.
rd
3 grade: it permits to alter state parameters, data parameters, tool compensation data and to edit
programs.
th
4 grade: it permits to alter tool compensation data (tool-setting operation), macro variables, to edit
programs, but not to alter state parameters, data parameters and pitch compensation data.
th
5 grade: it permits to alter tool compensation data, not to select and edit programs, and not to alter
state programs, data programs and pitch compensation data.
Ⅱ Operation

6th grade: it has no level to operate only the machine operation panel, not to alter tool compensation
data, not select and edit programs, not to alter state parameters, data parameter and pitch
compensation data.
1) Operation grade entry
a) Move the cursor to the line “INPUT PASSWORD” in the CNC setting page;
b) Input the operation password(the system displays one “*” as soon as a number is input;

c) Press and the operator can enter the corresponding grade operation;
d) After the operator enters the corresponding operation grade page, the prompt column
prompts the system’s current grade, and the corresponding operations as follows:

Note 1: The defined password length corresponds to the operation grade, and the user cannot increase
or reduce the length at will, which is shown below:
Operation Initial
Length
grade password
3rd grade 5 digits 12345
4th grade 4 digits 1234
5th grade 3 digits 123
th
6 grade None None

286
 Chapter 11 Data Setting

Note 2: When the operation level is less than or equal to the 3rd grade ( 3rd, 4th, 5th or 6th grade) and the
system is turned on again, the operation level does not change. When the level is the 2nd grade and the
system is turned on again, the operation level defaults to the 3rd grade.
2) Password modification
Steps:
a) The operator enters the grade to alter the password according to the method “Operation
grade entry” after the system enters the setting page;

b) Press the soft button or manually move the cursor; Move the cursor to the line
“ALATER PASSWORD”;

c) Input the new password, and then press ;

d) The CNC prompts “ Input the new password again”;

e) Input the new password again and then press . When the two input passwords are
identical, the CNC prompts “Password has been altered, please save the new
password.” The password alteration is done successfully.
Note: The system prompts, “The new password is not identical with the confirmation” when the two

Ⅱ Operation
input passwords are not identical. At the moment, input the new password again.
3) Operation grade degradation
The degradation is to degrade from the high to the low, and its steps are shown below:

a) Input the password according the method of “Operation grade entry” after the system
enters the setting page;

b) Press soft key, Move the cursor to the line “CURRENT LEVEL” and the system

pops up as follows:

c) Press （or ）, and the CNC prompts “Password degrades one grade” as
follows:

287
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

Note 1: The degradation operation cannot be executed when the current level is the 6th grade.
Note 2: The current password can be altered after degradation. When the system is in the high level, the
degradation can be executed to set to the low-level password.

11.1.3 Parameter Operation

Ⅱ Operation

The parameter data (state parameter, data parameter) can be backup (stored) and recovered
(read). Programs can be stored in the CNC when the backup or recovery is executed. The display is
shown below:

1) Option explanation:
Backup current parameters (user): the user to backup the CNC data (store)
Resume backup parameters(user): the user resumes the backup data (read)
Resume parameter (servo 1u level): the user reads the original parameter data matched
with the servo drive with the precision 1um
Resume parameter (servo 0.1u level): the user reads the original parameter data matched
with the servo drive with the precision 0.1um
Note: When the level is the 2nd grade, the backuping current parameters (user ) and resuming backup
parameters (user) become backuping current parameters (machine manufacturer) and resuming backup
parameters (machine manufacturer), which is used to backup and resume the manufacturer’s data.
2) Operation methods:
a) Open the parameter switch;

b) Press to enter the MDI mode, move the cursor the required item;

288
 Chapter 11 Data Setting

c) Press , and the system prompts whether to confirm the current operation.

d) Press , and the system prompts the backup or resume is done successfully. When
the recovery is done, the system prompts power-on again.
Note: Don’t turn off the system and execute other operations when the backup or resuming is executed.

11.2 Clock Setting

Press and then to enter the system clock page. The operator can alter the
current data and time as follows:

Ⅱ Operation
Press or to enter the alteration mode, press , to move the cursor to the

required modification (Year/Month/Date/Minute/Second), input directly numbers, and press ,

then or to escape from the alteration mode.

11.3 Graphic Display

Press key to enter the path page as follows:

289
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

1) The START, STOP and CLEAR of the graphic path

In the path display page, press the (or ) and the system starts the drawing; press

(or ) , it stops drawing; press (or ), it clears the current graphic path.
Ⅱ Operation

When the path exceeds the display range during automatic graph, the system regulate the

graphic center following the tool nose position in real time. Press （or ） and the
display area is locked, the system does not regulate the graphic center on when the path

exceeds the display area. Press （or ） and the system releases the lock.
2) Scaling up and down

In the path display page, press (or ), (or ), the system scales up/down

the path in real time. Press (or ) each time, the graphic path is scaled up 2 fold, press

(or ) each time, the graphic path is scaled down 2 fold.

3) Path display moving

In the graph display page, press the cursor movement key to move the graphic path. Press

(or )to adjust mobile intervals.

4) Graphic attribution display

In the path display page, press (or ) to display the graphic attribution window, including
the current coordinate system, translation position, scaling and mobile interval. It is shown below:

290
 Chapter 11 Data Setting

Press (or ) again to close the graph attribution window.

5) Graphic parameter meaning
Coordinate system setting: 8 types of graphic paths can be displayed in this GSK980TDi CNC
system according to the front or rear tool post coordinate system, and there is 4 kinds of path as

Ⅱ Operation
follows: (switch X, Z axis by pressing or )
Bit parameter No.175
Graphic path coordinate display
Bit1 Bit0

0 0

0 1

291
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

Bit parameter No.175

Graphic path coordinate display
Bit1 Bit0

1 0
Ⅱ Operation

1 1

11.4 Parameter Setting

Parameter setting can adjust related characteristics of the drive unit and machine.

Press to enter Parameter interface which includes , , ,

, as follows:

292
 Chapter 11 Data Setting

11.4.1 State Parameter

1) Byte alteration:
a) Turn on the parameter switch;
b) Enter the MDI mode;
c) Move the cursor to the parameter number to be set:

Method 1: Press or to enter the page containing the parameter to be set, press

or key to move the cursor to the parameter number to be set;

Method 2: Press (or ) , and input the parameter number in the pop-up

dialogue box, at last, press .

4) Key in a new parameter value;

5)Press key, the parameter value is entered and displayed.

Ⅱ Operation
6)For security, the PARM SWT needs to be set to OFF after all parameter settings are
finished.
Example:
Set the bit parameter No.001 Bit 3(STEP/MPG) to 1, and the other bits remain unchanged.
Move the cursor to No.001, input 00011000 by sequence according to the above steps. The
display is shown below:

Press to finish the parameter alteration. The page is shown below:

293
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

2) Alteration by bit:
a) Turn on the parameter switch;
b) Enter the MDI mode;
c) Move the cursor to the parameter number to be set（the method is referred to Section
10.4.1 Step c）;
Ⅱ Operation

d) Press to enter the bit alteration mode, at the moment, some bit of the parameter

is backlighted. Press or to move the cursor to the bit to be altered, then key in 0 or
1;
e) After all parameters setting is finished, the PARM SWT needs to be set to OFF for
security.

Note: After the system enters some bit of the parameter, or is pressed to escape from the
alteration mode, and the cursor stops the parameter number .
Example:
Set the Bit3 of the bit parameter No.001 to 1, and the other bits remains unchanged.

Move the cursor to No.001 according to the above steps, press to skip to some bit of the
parameter, and move the cursor to Bit3. The display is shown below:

Input 1, and the parameter alteration is done.

294
 Chapter 11 Data Setting

11.4.2 Data Parameter, Pitch Compensation

1) Turn on the parameter switch;

Ⅱ Operation
2) Enter the MDI mode;
3) Move the cursor to the No. of the parameter to be set;
4) Key in the new parameter value;

5) Press key, the value is entered and displayed;

6) After all parameters setting is finished, the PARM SWT needs to be set to OFF for security.
Explanation: The screw-pitch parameter can only be altered under the 2 level password authority.

Example 1: set the data parameter No.027 to 7600.

Move the cursor to No.027 by the steps above, key in 7600 by sequence as follows:

Press to finish the alteration. The display is shown below:

295
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

11.4.3 Classification Parameter

Ⅱ Operation

Press soft button to enter its page after controlling the button，The display is shown below：

In the classification parameter, the parameter can be displayed based upon its function, it is
convenient to check or modification. The current displayed classification parameter can be shifted by

its corresponding soft button; for example, press the soft button, the following figure is shown
below:

296
 Chapter 11 Data Setting

11.4.4 Often Used Parameters

Press to enter parameter interface, and press to enter the often used parameter page.
The page is shown below:

Ⅱ Operation
The user can add the often used state parameter, data parameters to the often used parameters
to get the convenient search and alteration.
1) Adding often used parameters
In the state, data or classification parameter page, move the cursor to the parameter number

where is desired to add as the common parameter; press the soft button, the current
parameter is then add as the common one.
2) Sorting often used parameters
In the common parameter page, enter to the next menu of the common parameter by pressing

the soft button again; refer to the following figure:

Pressing , can move the parameter where the current cursor is. Pressing sorts all often
used parameter in sequence number.
3) Removing often used parameters

Move the cursor to the required parameter in the often used parameter page. Press and

the current often used parameter is removed. Press and all often used parameters are removed.

297
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

4) Altering often used parameter

Parameters can be altered directly in the often used parameter page. Its alteration
method is the same that of state parameter and data parameter. Its value is also refreshed
in the state parameter or data parameter page.

11.5 Macro Variable Note

Macro variable note display is mainly administrated for the macro note and macro note file. The
administration of the macro note file includes the leading-in, leading-out, rename, overloading and
remark, etc. of the macro note file.

11.5.1 Macro Variable Note Page

Press the soft button to enter its corresponding customization page ,after entering the

cutter compensation page by controlling the button, The page is shown below:
Ⅱ Operation

The overloaded file data can be set on the “Custom macro variable” page, only 4 and above
operation authorities can be performed.

11.5.2 Note List

Press the button to enter the macro variable note list after entering the macro variable
note page.

298
 Chapter 11 Data Setting

Function soft button explanations:

soft button: Select the note file to enable the file；

soft button: The file can be renamed for the current file, the note file at current

Ⅱ Operation
loading can not bealtered;

soft button: Modify or add the remark information, the note file at current loading can
not bealtered;

soft button: Delete the file at the cursor’s position; (2 or above authorities are
desired)

soft button: Clear the overall annotated files and contents；

soft button：The "EXT files" under the MAROEXT list of the U-disk are led to the
system note list；

soft button: The overall files in the note list are led out to the MACROEXT list of
the U-disk; if there are files are shared with a same name, the same
files will be replaced；

Note 1: The can be performed in any authority, the or should be operated with
2 or above levels authorities; other functions should be performed with 3 or more
authorities.

Note 2: The can be performed in any method, other functions should be operated in the
Edit method.

11.5.3 Macro Variable Note File

1. File content format
1）Create a TXT file，the surfix is renamed as .EXT。
2）The file content format is as follows：
0, Remark the display content
Variable number, custom content \t Note content.

299
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

For example: Set up a O0009.EXT file, its content is as follows:

0, Note file example
500, Note 1\t Detailed note 1
501, Note 2\t Detailed note 2
……
701, Note 12\t Detailed note 12
699, Note 13\t Detailed note 13
The displayed result of the above-mentioned note file is as follows:
Ⅱ Operation

2.File leading-in/out operation

Leading-in operation
1）Create a new file MACROEXT under the root list of the U-disk;；
2) The performed system custom file is delivered to the folder;
3) Set the system authority as 2-level or above, and then insert to U-disk;
4) The *.EXT file under the U disk MACROEXT list can be entirely lead out to the system

note list by soft button.

Leading-out operation
1) Insert an U-disk;
2) The overall files in the system note list are lead out to the U disk MACROEXT folder by

soft button; if the note file name is same as the system list under the U disk
MACROEXT; the same name note file will be covered under the systme root list.

300
 Chapter 12 U Operation Function

CHAPTER 12 U OPERATION FUNCTION

12.1 File Management Function Introduction

GSK980TDi has the file management function to execute the file copy, data backup, data resume,
the system upgrading (2nd grade) and so on.

In any states, press to select the setting interface, press to enter the file
management page. Insert U disk and the system automatically identifies it. The system displays the
icon at the lower right bottom of the system after it sucessfully identifies the icon as follows:

Display the user Display all files

parameters, tool in the U disk
compensation, catalog

Ⅱ Operation
pitch window
compensation,
PLC programs,
part program and
so on in the CNC
catalog window

Press the soft key (or ) to select the CNC catalog or the U disk catalog, and press

, to move the line where the current cursor is.

12.2 Often Used File Operation Function Introduction

12.2.1 File Extension & Return

1) Move the cursor to the required extension file, press to extend it as follows:

301
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

2) Move the cursor to the target file, press to return the previous catalog of the current
file as follow:

12.2.2 File Selection & Cancellation of File Selection

Ⅱ Operation

Take an example of U:\gsk980TDi_backup\user\NCPROG\O0000.CNC to introduce the

selection and cancellation.
1) After entering the file administration page, move the cursor above the O0000.CNC by

or , refer to the following figure:

2) Press （or ）to select O0000.CNC as follows:

302
 Chapter 12 U Operation Function

1) Press (or again ) to cancel the selection of O0000.CNC.

Ⅱ Operation
12.2.3 File Copy

Refer to Section 11.2.2 to select the file. When the cursor is in the U disk catalog window, is
pressed and the the files in the U disk is copied to the CNC; when the cursor is in the CNC catalog

window, is pressed and the file in the CNC is copied to the U disk.

12.3 Data Copy & Resume

In the file managemetn page, backup, resume the CNC data (including the system parameters,
part parameter, tool compensation, pitch compensation, ladder parameters, ladder, self-defined data,
servo parameter and daily record, etc.) via the U disk. The CNC can be operated to the file in the MDI
working mode and keeps at the stopping state.

12.3.1 Entering Backup/Resume Page

After the system identifies the U disk, it enters the file management page. Press to enter
the backup/resume page as follows:

303
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

12.3.2 Backup/Resume Operation

1) Press , , , to move the cursor to the required option;

Ⅱ Operation

2) Press （or ）to select the required option to be backup/resumed;

3) Press (or ) to cancel the selection when the cursor has been in the selected
option;

4) Press or to select or cancel all selection;

5) Press （or ）to execute the current selected.

Note 1: Data which has been backup or has been done to store in the U disk can be resumed.
Note 2: When the cursor is in the “BACKUP OPTION” column, all options in the the “RESUME OPTION”
column cannot be selected; when the cursor is in the “RESUME OPTOIN”, all options in the
“BACKUP OPTION” column cannot be selected;

Note 3: Pressing executes operations only in the column where the cursor is. When the cursor is in
“BACKUP OPTION” column, the resume operation is executed. The backup, resume cannot be
executed simultaneously.

12.3.3 Operation Path Selection

When the user uses the U disk to execute the CNC data backup, the CNC creates a backup file
“gsk980TDi_backup” in the root catalog of the U disk. The backup file includes two backup data “U:\
gsk980TDi_backup\user” and “U:\ gsk980TDi_backup\serial number” (it is created by the system’s
serial number). When the user uses one U disk to execute data backup of many CNC systems, the
data in “U:\ gsk980TDi_backup\user” is replaced by the new but data in “U:\ gsk980TDi_backup\serial
number” remains unchanged.
For the above reason, the user should execute the operation path selection during resuming
data:

304
 Chapter 12 U Operation Function

Default path ：U:\ gsk980TDi_backup\user

Serial number path：U:\ gsk980TDi_backup\serial number
Example: backup/resume data of many CNC systems
When the user backups the system A (serial number CT0000001), the generated file by data
backup is “U:\gsk980TDi_backup\CT0000001” and “U:\gsk980TDi_backup\user”; When the user
backups the system B （ serial number CT0000002 ） , the generated file by data backup is
“U:\gsk980TDi_backup\CT0000002”. The “U:\gsk980TDi_backup\user” generated by A is replaced
automatically by the same name of the system B. At the moment, the user can execute the operation
path selection when it executes the data resume operation of the system A:
1) When the previous data of the system A is resumed, the operation path is :
“U:\gsk980TDi_backup\CT0000001”；
2) When the backup data of the system B is copied to the system A, the operation path is:
“U:\gsk980TDi_backup\CT0000002” or default path;

Ⅱ Operation
Press and appear the dialog box of operation path selection, and then select the

operation path by , when the cursor is in the resume column. Taking an example of
selecting the default path, the display is shown below:

12.3.4 Format of Data Backup/Resume File

Extension
File Content
name
Parameter file PARAM .PAR State parameters, data parameters
Tool compensation
TOFF .CMP Tool offset, tool wear
data
Pitch compensation WOFF .WMP Pitch compensation
Alarm log Alarm.his .his Alarm log
No
PLC program .ld2 PLC programs
requirements
PLC parameter plcpar .dat K, D, DT, DC parameters
Part program O0000~O9999 .CNC Part programs

305
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

12.3.5 Level Explanation of Data Backup/Resume Operation

System
More than the 5th grade password
parameters
Tool
More than 5th grade(including the 5th grade)
compensation
password
data
Pitch More than 5th grade(including the 5th grade)
compensation password
Backup
Alarm log More than 5 grade(including the 5th grade)
th
operation
password
PLC programs More than 5 grade(including the 5th grade)
th

password
PLC programs More than 5 grade(including the 5th grade)
th

password
Part programs More than 5 grade(including the 5th grade)
th

password
Ⅱ Operation

System More than 3 grade(including the 3rd grade)

rd

parameters password
Tool
More than 5th grade(including the 5th grade)
compensation
password
data
Pitch More than 2nd grade(including the 2nd grade)
Resume
compensation password
operation
PLC programs More than 5 grade(including the 5th grade)
th

password
PLC More than 2 grade(including the 2nd grade)
nd

parameters password
Part programs More than 4th grade(including the 4th grade)
password

12.4 System Update

In the system update page, the CNC update operation can be performed by the U-disk. The
updated file is registered under the root-directory of the U-disk when the operation is performed; so
that the CNC can be operated holding on the MDI working method and keeping on the stop state.

306
 Chapter 12 U Operation Function

Select the update system by soft button, and confirm the update state by .
Note: Page update can be entered above the 2-level authorities.

Ⅱ Operation
12.5 Notes
The user should pay more attention to the followings during executing the data backup/resume
operation:
1) Need more than the 2nd grade password(including the 2nd grade) to resume more than
(including be equal to) 9000 part programs;
2) It is necessary to connect the GSKLINK bus normally when the back up/recovery of the servo
parameter is performed;
3) Backup/resume operation must be in MDI mode;
4) When the user executes the data backup operation, the system automatically replaces all files
in “U:\gsk980TDi_backup\user”, the user should save them as when they cannot be replaced;
5) Stop part programs running before data backup/resume;
6) They must not stop unless the data backup/resume operation is completed;
7) The system is turned on again after the data resume is done.

307
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual
Ⅱ Operation

308
 Chapter 13 Communication

CHAPTER 13 COMMUNICATION

13.1 GSK980TDi Communication Software GSKComm

GSKComm is an allocated project administrator. It can execute the upload/download between
PC and CNC, conveniently transmit batch with easy operation, high communication efficiency and
reliability.
The followings introduce communication transmission and setting between GSK980TDi and
GSKComm. Refer to GSKComm explanations about GSKComm communication software functions.

13.1.1 GSKComm’s System (PC) Requirements

Hardware: general PC with RS232 serial port, serial communication cable (3-wire)
Operation system: Microsoft Windows 98/2000/XP/2003

Ⅱ Operation
13.1.2 Software Interface
Interface after GSKComm’s initial run:

Fig. 12-1 file download（PC→CNC）interface

GSKComm software takes an administrator as a unit to complete management. When it run

firstly, it does not upload project files, at the moment, the user should create an project program or
upload project to execute the communication operation. The display is shown below after the an
project is created:

309
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

At the mode, the user can receive the files from the CNC to the current project or send files in the
current project to the CNC.

13.1.3 Receiving Files (CNC→PC)

Ⅱ Operation

Click the option [Receive files from CNC] in [Communication] and GSKComm can receive files
from the CNC after the current project is selected as follows:

After [Receive Files ] is clicked, a dialog box about receiving files from the CNC, the required files
from the CNC including part programs, tool compensation (TOFF. CMP), pitch compensation
(WOFF.WMP), parameters (PARAM.PAR).

After the user selects the required file, [ Start Receiving ] is pressed and the system pops up a
310
 Chapter 13 Communication

path selection dialog box to save the received files as follows:

Select the save path, start to receive the file from CNC to PC by pressing [确定, i.e. Confirm] as
follows:

Ⅱ Operation
After the receiving is done, the system displays below:

13.1.4 Sending Files (CNC→PC)

After the current project file is selected, the user clicks [Send projects to CNC] in the menu
[Communication], and so the receiving file from CNC is done. A dialog box to send files to CNC is
popped up as follows:

311
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

Hereby, the user can select the required receiving files from CNC including part programs, tool
compensation (TOFF.CMP), pitch compensation (WOFF.WMP), parameters (PARA.PAR). The part
programs which can be altered are saved to the file name of the CNC. Move the cursor to the part
program required to alter its program name, double-click the left key to pop up a dialog box as Fig. A,
and the file which can be altered is saved the file name of the CNC (as Fig. B).
Ⅱ Operation

Fig. A Fig. B
Select the required file to the CNC and confirm the saved file name, then press [start sending],
and the file is started to send to the CNC as follows:

When a file name in the CNC is the same that of the transmitting, a dialog box is popped up to
select the covering, skipping the file or cancelling transmission as follows:

312
 Chapter 13 Communication

When the part program name is the same that of the transmitted file, the covering cannot be
done, otherwise, the system pops up the wrong prompt as follows:

Ⅱ Operation
13.1.5 Part Program Management
Select the current project file, then click [Manage Part Programs] in the menu [Communication] ,
and the part programs in the CNC are managed. The system pops up a dialog box to manage part
programs in the CNC as follows:

Press [Delete File] and the selected part programs are deleted in the CNC after the required
programs are selected.
Note: The program being used in the CNC cannot be deleted.

313
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

13.2 Preparatory Before Communication

13.2.1 Communication Cable Connection
DB9 male plug is inserted into CN51 communication interface of the CNC, DB9 female plug is
inserted in to DB9-male serial port (COM0 or COM1) of PC. Connect the communication cable when
PC and CNC are turned off.

13.2.2 Communication Setting Baud Rate

Setting the baud rate of communication ensures that the baud rate of PC is the same that of the
CNC communication.
The communication baud of the serial port is set by No.044; click [Communication Setup] in the
menu [Communication] and the system pops up a dialog box as follows:
Ⅱ Operation

Set the serial port and baud rate. The baud rate should be not less than 4800 when the data is
transmitted between CNC and PC, the factory setting is :115200.

13.2.2.1 Network Cable Connection

Use the common network cable, one terminal connects with the internet access of GSK980TDi,
the other one directly connects the Computer or Router access.

13.2.2.2 Communication IP Setting

Set the IP address of communication, so that the IP address between PC and CNC
communication are consistant.

The IP setting of the GSK980TDi is as follows: －> and then set the IP address
and sub-net mask, etc. after entering the system IP setting page, refer to the following figure:

314
 Chapter 13 Communication

Wherein, the IP address can not be identical with the other PC computer in the network or CNC.
The subnet mask should be same with the PC computer or the subnet mask of the router; it is not
necessary to alter the default subnet.

Ⅱ Operation
In the GSKComm, click the [Communication Setting] in the [Communication] menu, its
corresponding dialog frame is shown below, refer to the following figure:

Network selection of communication equipment, write the IP address set to CNC in the network
setting.
Note 1: Stop machining when the machining is being done to get the stable communication.
Note 2: Must not turn off during the data transmission, otherwise, it causes the mistaken data transmission.

315
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual
Ⅱ Operation

316
 Chapter 14 Machining Examples

CHAPTER 14 MACHINING EXAMPLES

Machine a part by a bar stock with dimension Φ136mm×180 mm, as follows:

Ⅱ Operation

4

Fig. 13-1
Machine it with 4 tools as follows:
Tool number Tool shape Explanation

No. 1 Outer circle rough turning tool

No. 2 Outer circle finish turning tool

No. 3 Grooving tool, tool width 3mm

No. 4 Threading tool, tool nose angle 60°

317
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

14.1 Programming
Set up the workpiece coordinate system as Fig.13-1 according to the machining process and the
codes introduced in this manual. The programming steps are as follows:
Ｏ０００１； Name of the part program

Ｎ００００ G0 X150 Z50； Position to the safety height for tool change

Ｎ０００５ M12； Clamp the chuck

Ｎ００１０ M3 S800； Start the spindle with speed 800

Ｎ００２０ M8； Turn on the cooling

Ｎ００３０ T0101； Change for the No. 1 tool

Ｎ００４０ G0 X136 Z2； Approach the part

Ｎ００５０ G71 U0.5 R0.5 F200； Cut depth 2mm and retract 1mm

Ｎ００５５ G71 P0060 Q0150 U0.25 0.25mm pre-reserved in X axis, 0.5mm

Ⅱ Operation

W0.5； machining allowance in Z axis

Ｎ００６０ G0 X16； Approach to the end face of the part

Ｎ００７０ G1 Z-23； Cut the Φ16 outer circle

Ｎ００８０ X39.98； Cut the end face

Ｎ００９０ W-33； Cut the Φ39.98 outer circle

Ｎ０１００ X40； Cut the end face

Ｎ０１０５ W-30； Cut the Φ40 outer circle

Ｎ０１１０ G3 X80 W-20 R20； Cut the convex arc

Ｎ０１２０ G2 X120 W-20 R20； Cut the concave arc

Ｎ０１３０ G1 W-20； Cut the Φ120 outer circle

Ｎ０１４０ G1 X130 W-5； Cut the cone

Ｎ０１５０ G1 W-25； Cut the Φ130 outer circle

Ｎ０１６０ Rough cut end and back to the tool change

G0 X150 Z185；
point
Ｎ０１７０ Change for the No.2 tool and execute its
T0202；
offset
Ｎ０１８０ G70 P0060 Q0150； Fine cut cycle

Ｎ０１９０ Rough cut end and back to the tool change

G0 X150 Z185；
point
Ｎ０２００ Change for the No.3 tool and execute its
T0303；
offset
Ｎ０２１０ G0 Z-56 X42； Approach to the part

Ｎ０２２０ G1 X30 F100； Cut the Φ30 groove

318
 Chapter 14 Machining Examples

Ｎ０２３０ G1 X37 F300； Return

Ｎ０２４０ G1 X40 W1.5； Chamfering

Ｎ０２５０ G0 X42 W30； Keep the width of the grooving

Ｎ０２６０ G1 X40 ；

Ｎ０２６２ G1 X37 W1.5； Chamfering

Ｎ０２６４ G1 X10； Cut the Φ10 groove

Ｎ０２６６ G0 X17 Z-1；

Ｎ０２６８ G1 X16；

Ｎ０２７０ G1 X14 Z0 F200； Chamfering

Ｎ０２８０ G0 X150 Z50； Return to the tool change point

Ｎ０２９０ Changing for the No. 4 tool and set the

T0404 S100；
spindle speed for 100

Ⅱ Operation
Ｎ０３００ G0 X42 Z-20； Approach the part

Ｎ０３１０ G92 X39 W-34 F3； Thread-cutting cycle

Ｎ０３２０ X38； Feed 1mm for the 2nd cutting

Ｎ０３２０ X37； Feed 1mm for the 3rd cutting

Ｎ０３３０ X36.4； Feed 0.6mm for the 4th cutting

Ｎ０３３２ X36； Feed 0.4mm for the 5th cutting

Ｎ０３４０ G0 X150 Z50； Return to the tool change point

Ｎ０３５０ Change for the No.1 tool and execute its

T0100 U0 W0；
offset
Ｎ０３６０ M5； Turn off the spindle

Ｎ０３７０ M9； Turn off cooling

Ｎ０３８０ M13； Unclamp the chuck

Ｎ０３９０ M30； Program ends

14.2 Program Input

14.2.1 View a Saved Program

Press to enter program interface , and press to enter the local catalog page as
follows:

319
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

In above window the names of the programs saved can be viewed for renaming the new
program.

14.2.2 Creating a New Program

Ⅱ Operation

Enter the local catalog page in Edit mode, press address key , choose a name that is not

same with the ones in this window (i.e. 0001), key in the number key , , , and

to create a new program as follows:

Input the characters of the above edit program one by one and the editing program is done.

14.3 Checkout a Program

14.3.1 Graphic Setting

Press to enter graph interface as follows:

320
 Chapter 14 Machining Examples

14.3.2 Program Check

Ⅱ Operation
Press to enter graph display page. Press to enter Auto mode, press ， ，

to make the auxiliary function lock indicator , machine lock indicator , and dry run

indicator to enter the corresponding state. Press to start the drawing, press to
automatically run programs, check the program accuracy by displaying the tool motion path, and the
display page is the following after the run is completed:

When there is error in the program path, analysize the error and alter the part program, make
another checkout for the program by the method above till the error is eliminated.

14.4 Tool-setting & Running

1) Move the tool to a safe position, execute T0100 U0 W0 command in PROGRAM->MDI
page in MDI mode, and cancel the tool offset;

2) Move the tool to cut in the part end surface;

321
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

Φ 135

3) Release the tool along X when Z does not move, and stop the spindle, execute G50 Z0 in
PROGRAM->MDI page in MDI mode to set the coordinate of Z axis;

4) Switch to tool offset page and input Z0 to No.001 offset;

Ⅱ Operation

5) Move the tool and make it to cut along the outer circle of the part;

6) Release the tool along Z when X does not move, and stop the spindle, measure the
dimensions of the outer circle of the part (e.g. The measuring value is 135mm);

7) Execute G50 X135 command in PROGRAM>MDI page in MDI mode to set the coordinate
of X axis;

8) Switch to tool offset page, and input X135 to No.001 offset;

9) Move the tool to a safe position, and change No. 002 tool;

10) Start the spindle and move the tool to the tool-setting point, as A point in the following
figure;

322
 Chapter 14 Machining Examples

11) Switch to TOOL OFFSET window, move the cursor to No.002 offset and input X135 Z0;

12) Move the tool to a safe position, and change the No. 003 tool ;

Ⅱ Operation
13) Start the spindle and move the tool to the tool-setting point, as A point in the following
figure;

14) Switch to TOOL OFFSET window, move the cursor to No.003 offset and input X135 Z0;

15) Move the tool to a safe position, and to change the No. 004 tool;

16) Move the tool to the tool-setting point, as point A in the following figure;

323
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

17) Switch to tool offset, move the cursor to No.004 offset and input X135 Z0;

18) Move the tool to a safe position after the tool-setting is finished;
Ⅱ Operation

19) Start the machining in Auto mode;

20) If there is any error between the designed and the actual dimensions, the tool offset may be

altered till the part dimensions are within the tolerance.

Note: Press key to make the auto running to pause if dwell is needed during the machining. Also if

emergency occurs, the user presses the key, Emergency stop button to cut off the power to
terminate the program running.

324
III Connection

Ⅲ
Connection

307
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual
Ⅲ
Connection

308
 Chapter 1 Insrallation Layout

CHAPTER 1 INSTALLATION LAYOUT

1.1 GK980TDi System Connection

1.1.1 GK980TDi Rear Cover Interface Layout

Y9.1 +5V FG
Y9.0 0V 0V
0V HB
X9.3 HA 24V
X9.2 24VCOM
X9.1
X9.0 CN32 CN1
24V 手脉2 电源
CN21 CN22 CN31 MPG 2
CN78
编码器1 编码器2 手脉1 I/O接口 CN5
ENCODER 1 ENCODER 2 MPG 1 I/O INTERFACE
CN61 CN62
输入 输出
INPUT OUTPUT

CN15 CN16 CN51 CN54 CN67 CN66

模拟主轴1 模拟主轴2 RS232通信 网 口 CN4
SPINDLE 1 SPINDLE 2 COM PORT LAN

Fig. 1-1 GSK980TDi rear cover interface layout

Ⅲ
1.1.2 Interface Explanation

Connection
 CN1: power supply interface
 CN4, CN5:GSKLINK bus connection interface B,A are connected with the servo unit and IO
unit
 CN15:Analogy spindle 1,male socket of 9-cord in type D，connect with analogy spindle 1
 CN16:Analogy spindle 2,male socket of 9-cord in type D，connect with analogy spindle 2
 CN21: encoder, pin15 D male,connect with spindle encoder 1
 CN22: encoder, pin15 D male,connect with spindle encoder 2
 CN31: MPG, pin26 D male, connect with MPG
 CN51: communication, pin9 D female, connect PC RS232 interface
 CN54:Ethernet interface, plug are connected with the PC to transmit data
 CN61: input, pin44 D male, connect with machine input
 CN62: output, pin44 D female, connect with machine output
 CN66:the spindle override input signal, 4 input interfaces are connected with the additional
panel
 CN67:the feedrate override input signal, 5 input interfaces are connected with the additional
panel
 CN78:4 input/2 output interfaces, 8 connection terminals, machine input,output

307
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

1.2 GSK980TDi Installation

1.2.1 GSK980TDi External Dimensions
See Appendix Ⅰ, Ⅱ.

1.2.2 Preconditions of Cabinet Installation

 The dust, cooling liquid and organic resolution should be effectively prevented from entering the
cabinet;
 The designed distance between the CNC back cover and the cabinet should be not less than
20cm, the inside and outside temperature difference of the cabinet should be not more than 10℃
when the cabinet inside temperature rises;
 Fans can be fixed in the cabinet to ventilate it;
 The panel should be installed in a place where the cooling can’t splash;
 The external electrical interference should be taken into consideration in cabinet design to
prevent it from interfering the CNC system.

1.2.3 Measures Against Interference

In order to insure the CNC stable working, the anti-interference technology such as space
electromagnetic radiation shielding, impact current absorbing, power mixed wave filtering are
employed in CNC design. And the following measures are necessary during CNC connection:
1. Make CNC far from the interference devices (inverter, AC contactor, static generator,
high-voltage generator and powered sectional devices etc.);
2. To supply the CNC via an isolation transformer, the machine with the CNC system should be
grounded, the CNC and drive unit should be connected with independent grounding wires at
Ⅲ

the grounding point;

Connection

3. To inhibit interference: connect parallel RC circuit at both ends of AC winding (Fig. 1-3a), RC
circuit should approach to inductive loading as close as possible; reversely connect parallel
freewheeling diode at both ends of DC winding (Fig. 1-3b); connect parallel surge absorber at
the ends of AC motor winding (Fig. 1-3c);

a) b) c)
Fig. 1-3
4. The CNC leadout cables use the twisted shield cable or shield cable, the cable shield tier is
grounded by an terminal at CNC side, signal cable should be as short as possible;
5. To reduce the mutual interference among the CNC signal cables, and among the strong
current, the wiring should follow the following:

308
 Chapter 1 Installation Layout

Table 1-1 The Wiring requirement

Group Cable type Wiring requirement
AC power cable Tie up A group cables with a clearance at least 10cm
A AC coil from that of B, C groups, or shield A group cables from
AC contactor electromagnetism
DC coil(24VDC)
DC relay(24VDC)
Tie up B and A group cables separately or shield B
Cables between CNC and
B group cables; and the further B group cables are from
strong-power cabinet
that of C group, the better it is
Cables between CNC and
machine
Cables between CNC and
servo drive unit Tie up C and A group cables separately, or shield C
Position feedback cable group cables; and the cable distance between C group
C
Position encoder cable and B group is at least 10cm and they are twisted pair
Handwheel（MPG）cable cables.
Other cables for shield

Ⅲ
Connection

309
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual
Ⅲ
Connection

310
 Chapter 2 Definition and Connection of Interface Signal

CHAPTER 2 DEFINITION & CONNECTION OF INTERFACE

SIGNALS

2.1 GSKLink Bus Interface

Bus interfaces of GSK980TDi are CN4 and CN5 (GSKLinkB and GSKLinkA), which is connected
with the GSKLink bus communication function, the feedrate servo drive unit, spindle drive unit and
extended I/O communication. GSKLink bus communication uses a loop control, and therefore, CN4
AND CN5 interfaces should be used together.
GSKLINK bus connection is shown below:

2 TX- 2 TX-

1 TX+ 1 TX+

6 RX- 6 RX-

3 RX+ 3 RX+
Outmost layer Outmost layer
shielding cable shielding cable

Fig. 2-1 GSKLink communication connection

2.2 Being Connected with Spindle Encoder

2.2.1 Spindle Encoder Interface Definition

Ⅲ
Connection
8: PAS
7: *PAS 15: 0V Name Explanation
6: PBS 14: 0V *PAS/PAS Encoder A phase pulse
5: *PBS 13: +5V *PBS/PBS Encoder B phase pulse
4: PCS 12: 5V
11: 0V *PCS/PCS Encoder C phase pulse
3: *PCS

Fig.2-12 CN21 encoder interface

(15-core D type male socket)

2.2.2 Signal Explanation

*PCS/PCS,*PBS/PBS,*PAS/PAS are the encoder C, B, A phases differential input signals
respectively, which are received by 26LS32; *PAS/PAS,*PBS/PBS are orthogonal square wave with
phase shift 90°and their maximum signal frequency is less than 1MHz; the encoder pulses for
GSK980TDi are set at will by parameter, the setting range is from 100 to 5000.
Its interior circuit is shown in Fig. 2-13: (n=A, B, C)

311
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

PAS 1
7
*PAS 2
PBS 4
6
*PBS 3

Fig. 2-13 Encoder signal circuit

2.2.3 Spindle Encoder Interface Connection

GSK980TDi is connected with spindle encoder shown in Fig. 2-4, and it uses twisted pair cables.
(exemplified by CHANGCHUN YIGUANG ZLF-12-102.4BM-C05D encoder):
Ⅲ

Fig. 2-4 GSK980TDi is connected with the encoder

Connection

312
 Chapter 2 Definition and Connection of Interface Signal

2.3 MPG Connection

2.3.1 MPG Interface Definition
13：0V 26：
Signal Explanation
12：0V 25：X7.5
24：X7.4 HA+,HA- MPG A phase signal
11：0V
26 HB+,HB- MPG B phase signal
10：0V 23：X6.5
9：X6.3 22：X6.4 +24V
21：X7.3 DC power supply
8：X6.2 +5V,0V
7：X7.1 20：X7.2
6：X6.1 19：X7.0
18：+24V Standard PLC Definition
5：X6.0
4：HB- 17：+24V Address Function
3：HB+ 16：+5V X6.0 X MPG axis selection
1

2：HA- 10 19 15：+5V X6.1 Y MPG axis selection

1：HA+ 14：+5V
X6.2 Z MPG axis selection
Fig.2-5A CN31 MPG interface X7.0 4TH_axis selection signal
(26-core DB type male socket) X7.1 5TH_axis selection signal
X6.3 Increment0.001
X6.4 Increment0.01
X6.5 Increment0.1

HA
HB
GND Signal Explanation
VCC HA MPG A phase signal input

Ⅲ
HB MPG B phase signal input
Fig. 2-5B CN32 MPG interface

Connection
GND 0V
(4-point wiring terminal)
VCC 5V

2.3.2 Signal Explanation

HA,HB are the MPG A, B phase input signals respectively. Their interior circuit is shown in Fig.
2-6:
R93 470R U55
XHA- TLP181
VCC
1

D47
1N4148
2

XHA+ R94
GND
1K
R96 470R U57
XHB- TLP181
VCC
1

D49
1N4148
2

XHB+ R98
GND
1K

Fig. 2-6 MPG signal circuit

313
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

GSK980TDi is connected with MPG shown in Fig. 2-7:

CN31 MPG

A
HA+
3 HB+ B

0
V
11 0V

+
5
V
14 +5V
2 HA- 空
4 HB-
Metal shell

Fig. 2-6 CN31 connects with the single-port MPG input

CN31 MPG
1

A
+A
HA+

-+-5
2 HA-
3 HB+ B
4 HB- B
+
V
14 +5V
0
V

11 0V
Metal shell 空

Fig. 2-7 CN31 connects with the difference MPG input

CN32 MPG
A
1

2 B B
0
V

3 0V
+
5
V
Ⅲ

4 +5V
Connection

Fig. 2-8 CN32 connects with MPG

Note: Refer to the Fig. 3-14 and Fig. 3-15 for the connection of CN31 interface and MPG cabinet.

314
 Chapter 2 Definition and Connection of Interface Signal

2.4 Analog Spindle Interface

2.4.1 Analog Spindle Interface Definition

Signal Explanation
5：SVC 6：Y5.0 SVC 0~10V Analog voltage
4：GND 7：Y5.1 GND Signal grounding
3：Y5.2 8：X5.0
2：0V 9：X5.1
1：+24V Standard PLC Definition
1

6 Address Function
X5.0 Spindle 1 alarm signal
X5.1
Fig.2-9 CN15 analogy spindle series spindle 1 rotation
Y5.0
interface（male socket of signal CW(positive)
9-cord in type D） series spindle 1 rotation
Y5.1
signal CCW(negative)
Y5.2

5：SVC 6：Y8.0
4：GND 7：Y8.1 X8.0 Spindle 2 alarm signal
3：Y8.2 8：X8.0 X8.1
2：0V 9：X8.1
1：+24V series spindle 2 rotation
Y8.0
1

6 signal CW(positive)
series spindle 2 rotation
Y8.1
signal CCW(negative)
Fig.2-10 CN16 analogy Y8.2
spindle interface（male

Ⅲ
socket of 9-cord in type D）

Connection
2.4.2 Inverter Connection
The analog spindle interface SVC may output 0~10V voltage, its interior signal circuit is shown in
Fig. 2-20:

SVC

Fig. 2-20 SVC signal circuit

GSK980TDi is connected with the inverter shown in Fig. 2-21:

315
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

GSK980TDi INVERTER
CN15 U11
CN62/4 M03 L1 U
KA24 V11 L2 V
W11
L3 W
PE
CN62/5 M04 KA25

CN62/23 +24V
KA24
M03 FWD
KA25
M04 REV

DCM

PE
CN15/5 SVC AVI
CN15/4 GND ACM

CN15/8 SALM RB

CN15/2 0V RC

B1 B2

Brake
resistance
Fig. 2-12 GSK980TDi is connected with the inverter

2.5 GSK980TDi／GSK980TDi-V being Connected with PC

2.5.1 Communication Interface Definition
Ⅲ
Connection

1: 6: Signal Explanation
2: RXD 7: RXD Receiving data
3: TXD 8:
4: 9: TXD Transmitting data
5: GND GND Signal grounding

Fig. 2-22 CN51 communication interface (DB9-female)

2.5.2 Communication Interface Connection

GSK980TDi can perform the communication by CN51 and PC(optional communication software).
GSK980TDi is connected with PC shown in Fig 2-23A:

Fig. 2-23A GSK980TDi is connected with PC

316
 Chapter 2 Definition and Connection of Interface Signal

2.6 Network Interface

Network interfaces of GSKTDi CN54 are standard and their definitions are shown below:

PIN NO. Signal PIN NO. Signal

1 TXDLAN+ 9 LINK_LED
2 TXDLAN- 11 LAN_LED
3 RXDLAN+ 10、12 VDD33
6 RXDLAN- 13、14 Shell grounding

Note: TXD+ and TXD- are difference signal, as well the RXD+ 和 RXD-, which are required to connect

with twisted-pair.

2.7 Power Interface Connection

The power box is applied in GSK980TDi system, which involves 2 groups of voltage: +24V. The
connection of power box to GSK980TDi CN1 interface has been done for its delivery from factory,
and the user only need to connect it to a 220V AC power in using.

FG
0V
24V
24VCOM
CN1
POWER

Ⅲ
POWER UPPLY

Connection
Fig. 2-15 system power interface CN1

24VOM is connected with the output interface CN62 24V. When GSK980TDi's power supply box
supplies power supply for an external electron device, the supply box's +V is connected with
24VCOM. When an external power supply is used, its 24V is connected with 24VCOM and its 0V
must be connected with the system's supply box's-V.

317
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

2.8 I/O Interface Definition

Note!
The I/O function significances of the unlabelled fixed addresses of this
GSK980TDi/GSK980TDi-V turning machine CNC system are defined by PLC
programs (ladders), and they are defined by the machine builder when matching
with a machine, please refer to the manual by the machine builder.

The fixed address I/O function not be marked are described for GSK980TDi
PLC. The described contents without other special explanation are also applied to
GSK980TDi-V.
Ⅲ
Connection

318
 Chapter 2 Definition and Connection of Interface Signal

Pin Address Function Explanation

Power supply
21～24 0V
interface
17～20
Floating Floating Floating
25～28
1 X0.0 SAGT Guard door check signal
2 X0.1 Reserved Reserved
3 X0.2 DIQP Chuck input signal
4 X0.3 DECX(DEC1) X deceleration signal(fixed address )
5 X0.4 DITW Tailstock control signal
External emergency stop signal
6 X0.5 ESP
(fixed address )
7 X0.6 PRES Pressure check signal
Tool signal 5 /Sensor E
8 X0.7 T05 （LIO_SHING Tool Post ）/YA_XING locking
signal
Tool signa l 6/ strobe signal （YantaiAK31）
9 X1.0 T06/ strobe
/Sensor F（LIO_SHING Tool Post ）
Tool signal 7 /OV3/pregraducation proximity
10 X1.1 T07/ pregraduation
switch(YantaiAK31)/YA_XING releasing
T08/ tool post Tool signal 8//tool post worktable overheat
11 X1.2
worktable overheat check （YantaiAK31）
12 X1.3 DECZ(DEC3) Z deceleration signal(fixed address )
13 X1.4 Reserved Reserved
14 X1.5 M41I Shifting gear to 1st gear in-position
15 X1.6 M42I Shifting gear to 2nd gear in-position
Fig.2-25CN61
Tool signal ／ Sensor A （ LIO_SHING Tool
inputinterface 16 X1.7 T01
Post ）
(male socket
Tool signal ／ Sensor B （ LIO_SHING Tool

Ⅲ
of 44-cord in 29 X2.0 T02
Post ）
type D)

Connection
Tool signal ／ Sensor C （ LIO_SHING Tool
30 X2.1 T03
Post ）
Tool signal ／ Sensor D （ LIO_SHING Tool
31 X2.2 T04
Post ）
32 X2.3 DECY(DEC2) Y deceleration signal(fixed address )
4th deceleration signal(fixed
33 X2.4 DEC4/LUBS
address )/lubricating oil detection
34 X2.5 DEC5 5th deceleration signal(fixed address )/
35 X2.6 TCP Tool post clamping signal
36 X2.7 EXHP external hydraulic control input
37 X3.0 LMIX X overtravel
38 X3.1 LMIY Y overtravel
39 X3.2 LMIZ Z overtravel
40 X3.3 WQPJ/VPO2 Chuck releasing in-position signal
41 X3.4 NQPJ/SALM2 Chuck clamping in-position signal
42 X3.5 SKIP G31 skip signal
43 X3.6 AEX X tool measure position arrival signal （G36）
44 X3.7 AEZ Z tool measure position arrival signal（G37）

Note: Partial input interface is the fixed address for some functions, for example: the signal of ESP, DECX,
DECZ or SKIP, etc. If this function does not use, it will be redefined in PLC.

319
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

Pin Address Function Explanation

17,18,19, Power supply
0V Power supply 0V terminal
26,27,28 interface
20～25 +24V Power supply
Power supply ＋24V terminal
interface
1 Y0.0 M08 Cooling output
2 Y0.1 M32 Lubricating output
3 Y0.2 HOLD HOLD release output
4 Y0.3 M03 Spindle rotation (CCW)
5 Y0.4 M04 Spindle rotation (CW)
6 Y0.5 M05 Spindle stop
7 Y0.6 SCLP spindle clamped output
8 Y0.7 SPZD Spindle brake
9 Y1.0 S1/M41 Spindle machine gear output 1
10 Y1.1 S2/M42 Spindle machine gear output 2
11 Y1.2 S3/M43 Spindle machine gear output 3
12 Y1.3 S4/M44 Spindle machine gear output 4
13 Y1.4 DOQPJ(M12) Chuck clamping output
14 Y1.5 DOQPS(M13) Chuck releasing output
15 Y1.6 TL+ Tool post CCW rotation
16 Y1.7 TL- Tool post CW rotation
Tool post worktable brake
29 Y2.0 TZD/TLS （YantaiAK31）／tool pot releasing
（LIO_SHING Tool Post ）
Tool post worktable pregraduation coil
Fig.2-26 CN62output 30 Y2.1 INDXS/TCLP （ YantaiAK31 ） ／ tool pot lock
interface(female socket （LIO_SHING Tool Post ）
of 44-cord in type D) 31 Y2.2 YLAMP Three-color lamp-yellow
32 Y2.3 GLAMP Three-color lamp -green
Ⅲ

33 Y2.4 RLAMP Three-color lamp -red

34 Y2.5 DOTWJ(M10) Tailstock forward
Connection

35 Y2.6 DOTWS(M11) Tailstock backward

36 Y2.7 SLK Protective door lock
37 Y3.0 reserved
38 Y3.1 HPST Hydraulic control output
39 Y3.2 UO0/WKLP User macro output 0/ indicator
User macro output 1/ Extended M
40 Y3.3 UO1/EMOT1
function output signal 1
User macro output 2/ Extended M
41 Y3.4 UO2/EMOT2
function output signal 2
42 Y3.5 UO3 User macro output 3
User macro output 4/Chip-cleaner
43 Y3.6 UO4
forward
User macro output 5/ chip-cleaner
44 Y3.7 UO5
backward

320
 Chapter 2 Definition and Connection of Interface Signal

Pin.No Address Function Explanation

1 1 Y9.1 SPLAMP Extended pause lamp
2 2 Y9.0 STLAMP Extended start lamp
3 3 0V 0V Power supply 0 V
4 4 X9.3 EXESP Extended emergency stop signal
5
5 X9.2 reserved reserved
6
6 X9.1 SP Extended pause
7
7 X9.0 ST Extended cycle start
8
8 +24V 24V Power supply ＋24V

Fig.2-18 CN78

Pin.No Address Function Explanation

7 Spindle override wave-band switch
6 1 X29.4 BAUD1_A
signal 0
5 Spindle override wave-band switch
4 2 X29.6 BAUD1_B
signal 2
3 3 Floating Floating Floating
2 4 +24V 24V Power supply ＋24V
1
Spindle override wave-band switch
5 X29.7 BAUD1_E
signal 3
Spindle override wave-band switch
Fig.2-19 CN66 6 X29.5 BAUD1_F
signal 1
7 INH BAUD1_INH INH

Pin.No Address Function Explanation

7

Ⅲ
Spindle override wave-band switch
6 1 X29.0 BAUD2_A
signal 0
5

Connection
Spindle override wave-band switch
4 2 X29.2 BAUD2_B
signal 2
3 3 Floating Floating Floating
2 4 +24V 24V Power supply 24V
1
Spindle override wave-band switch
5 X29.3 BAUD2_E
signal 3
Spindle override wave-band switch
Fig.2-20 CN67 6 X29.1 BAUD2_F
signal 1
7 INH BAUD2_INH INH

Note 1: Various functions can be defined to some of the input and output interfaces, and they are indicated
by “/”sign in the table above.
Note 2: If output function is active, the output signal is through on to 0V. If output function is inactive, the
output signal is cut off by high impedance.
Note 3: If input function is active, the input signal is through on to +24V. If input function is inactive, the
input signal is cut off with it.
Note 4: The effectiveness of +24V, COM terminals are equivalent to those of the GSK980TDi/GSK980TDi
power box terminals that have the same names.

321
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

2.8.1 Input Signal

Input signal means the signal from machine to CNC, when this signal is through on with +24V,
the input is active; when it is off with +24V, the input is inactive. The contact of input signal at machine
side should meet the following conditions:
Capacity of the contact: DC30V, 16mA above
Leakage current between contacts in open circuit: 1mA below
Voltage drop between contacts in closed circuit: 2V below (current 8.5mA, including cable
voltage drop)
There are two external input types for input signals: one type is input by contact switch whose
signals are from keys, stroke switch and contacts of relay at machine side, as shown in Fig. 2-21A:

Fig. 2-27
The other type is input by switch with no contacts (transistor) as shown in Fig. 2-21B, 2-21C:
Ⅲ
Connection

图 2-21B Connection of NPN type

Fig. 2-21C Connection of PNP type

322
 Chapter 2 Definition and Connection of Interface Signal

The input interface signals defined by PLC of GSK980TDi／GSK980TDi-V system involve XDEC,
ZDEC, ESP, ST, SP/SAGT, PRES, DITW, DIQP, T01～T08, TCP and so on.

2.8.2 Output Signal

The output signal is used for the machine relay and indicator. When the output is enabled, the
output state of its corresponding Y address is 1, and its output signal potential is 0V. When the output
is disabled, the output state of its corresponding Y address is 0, this output signal represents as
high-impedance state. The digital value output of I/O interfaces are owned the same structure, refer
to the following figure:

Fig. 2-22 Circuit for digital volume output module

Ⅲ
Its typical application is as follows:
 To drive LED

Connection
A serial resistance is needed to limit the current (usually 10mA) that goes through the LED by
using output to drive LED, which is shown in Fig. 2-30:

Fig. 2-30
 To drive filament indicator
An external preheat resistance is needed to decrease the current impact at power on by using
output to drive filament indicator, and this resistance value should be within a range that the indicator
cannot be lighted up as shown in Fig. 2-31:

323
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

+24V
CNC Machine
side side
Output Y address

Fig. 2-31 Fig.2-32

 To drive inductive load (such as relay)
To use output to drive an inductive load, it requires connecting a freewheeling diode near the coil
to protect output circuit and reduce interference as shown in Fig. 2-25:
The significances of the output signal of I/O interface are defined by PLC program, these signals
include S1～S4 (M41～M44), M3, M4, M5, M8, M10, M11, M32, TL-, TL+, U00～U05, DOQPJ,
DOQPS, SPZD signals etc.. And their common terminal is +24V.

2.9 I/O Function & Connection

Note！
The I/O function significance of this GSK980TDi ／ GSK980TDi-V turning
machine CNC system is defined by PLC programs (ladders), and they are defined by
the machine builder when matching with a machine, please refer to the manual by
the machine builder.
The fixed address I/O function not be marked are described for GSK980TDi
Ⅲ

PLC. The described contents without other special explanation are also applied to
GSK980TDi-V.
Connection

2.9.1 Stroke Limit & ESP

 Relevant signal
ESP: emergency stop signal, alarm issued if the system is not connected with +24V
EXESP: External emergency stop signa, when not be connected with +24V emergency alarm
LMIX: X overtravel limit check input
LMIY: Y overtravel limit check input
LMIZ: Z overtravel limit check input
 Diagnosis data
0 0 0 ESP
Pin CN61.6

 Signal diagnosis
Signal ESP EXESP LMIX LMIY LMIZ
Diagnosis address X0.5 X9.3 X3.0 X3.1 X3.2
Interface pin CN61.6 CN78.4 CN61.37 CN61.38 CN61.39

324
 Chapter 2 Definition and Connection of Interface Signal

 Control parameter
Bit parameter
1 7 2 ESP
ESP =0: Check ESP signal
=1: Do not check ESP signal
 PLC bit parameter
K 1 0 LMIT LMIS EXESP
LMIT =1: Travel limit check function of each axis is valid.
=0: Travel limit check function of each axis is invalid
LMIS =1: The system alarms for overtravel when the travel limit check signal is not connected
with +24V.
=0: The system alarms for overtravel when the travel limit check signal is connected with
+24V
EXESP =1:External emergency stop signa is valid。
=0:External emergency stop signa is invalid。

 Signal connection
The ESP signal circuit is shown in Fig.2-33:

Ⅲ
Connection
Fig. 2-33 ESP signal circuit

 Machine external connection

(1) The series connection between the emergency stop and travel switch is shown in Fig. 2-34A:

Fig.2-27 Series connection between emergency stop and travel switch

(2) The separate connection between the emergency stop and travel switch is shown in Fig.
2-34B:

325
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

Fig. 2-28 Separate connection between the emergency stop and travel switch

 Control logic
(1) Series connection between the emergency stop and travel switch
When the contact of the emergency stop switch is cut off, the ESP signal is off to +24V, and CNC
makes an emergency alarm. Meanwhile the CNC turns off the enable (EN) signal to stop the pulse
output. Except the functions processed by NC, other functions can also be defined by PLC program
when the emergency alarm is issued. The function defined by standard PLC program is: when
emergency alarm is issued, it turns off the signal output of M03, M04, M08, and outputs M05 signal at
the same time.
(2) Separate connection between the emergency stop and travel switch
1. Each axis has only one overtravel contact, and the system judges the overtravel alarm
based on the axis movement direction.
2. When the system alarms for the overtravel, the axis moves reversely, the reset key is
pressed to clear the alarm after the axis exceeds the limit position.
Note: Before the overtravel limit function is enabled, the slider must be between the positive and the negative
limit; otherwise, the prompted alarm will not be consistent with actual situation.
Ⅲ

2.9.2 Tool Change Control

Connection

 Relevant signals (by standard PLC program)

Ladder diagram supports 4 kinds of tool-post controllable logic; refer to the tool-change logic for
the Signal Specification.
 Control parameter
Bit parameter
K 1 1 CHOT CHET TCPS CTCP TSGN CHTB CHTA
CHTA: tool change mode selection bit 0
CHTB: tool change mode selection bit 1（see following table）

CHTB CHTA Tool post type

0 0 Standard tool change mode B
0 1 Standard tool change mode A
1 0 Yantai AK31
1 1 Unused
TSGN =0 : tool signal HIGH(turn on +24V) is valid
=1 : tool signal LOW(turn off +24V) is valid
CTCP =0 : do not check tool post locking signal
=1 : check tool post locking signal

326
 Chapter 2 Definition and Connection of Interface Signal

TCPS =0 : tool post locking signal LOW(turn off +24V) is valid

=1 : tool post locking signal HIGH(turn on +24V) is valid
CHET=0 : do not check tool signal after the tool change is completed
=1 : check tool signal after the tool change is completed
CHOT=0 : do not check tool post overheat
=1 : check tool post worktable overheat

D T 0 4 TLMAXT
The maximum time limit for tool change

D T 0 7 T1TIME
Tool change time T1: Tool post delay time from CCW stop to CW output (ms)

D T 0 8 TCPCKT
Tool post lock signal detection time (ms)

D T 0 9 TCPTIME
Tool change time T2: tool post CW rotation locking time

0 0 8 4 TMAX
Total tools selection

 Signal connection
1. The T01～T08, TCP signals input are employed with photocoupler, its interior circuit is shown
in Fig. 2-35:

Ⅲ
Connection

Fig. 2-29
2. TL+, TL- are tool post CCW/CW output signal, its interior circuit is shown in Fig.2-36:
CNC side Machine side

Output signal

Fig. 2-30

3. The external circuit of the tool number signal is shown in Fig. 2-37, when the tool number
signal is low level active, it requires an external pull-up resistor.

327
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

CNC side Machine side

Hall switch
·
Fig. 2-31
 Function description (defined by standard PLC program)
The control sequence and control logic of the tool change are defined by PLC program. There
are 4 tool change modes defined as follows by standard PLC program:
1. CHTB (K11.1)=0, CHTA (K11.0)=0: tool change mode B
1.1 Signal specification
Signal type Code Interface Address Function Remark
CN61.16 X1.7 T01 tool signal

CN61.29 X2.0 T02 tool signal

CN61.30 X2.1 T03 tool signal

CN61.31 X2.2 T04 tool signal

Intput
CN61.8 X0.7 T05 tool signal
signal
CN61.9 X1.0 T06 tool signal

CN61.10 X1.1 T07 tool signal

CN61.11 X1.2 T08 tool signal

CN61.35 X2.6 TCP tool post locked signal

Output CN62.15 Y1.6 TL+ tool post CW rotation

Ⅲ

signal CN62.16 Y1.7 TL- tool post CCW rotation

Connection

1.2 Tool-Change schedule

①During the tool change process, CNC outputs TL+ signal until the tool in-position signal is
detected, then CNC turns off TL+ signal output and outputs TL- signal after a delay time
specified by data parameter No.082. Then CNC detects TCP signal till it is detected, the CNC
turns off TL- signal after a delay time specified by the data parameter No.085. So the tool change
is over.
②When CHET(K0011.5) is set to 1(check tool signal after the tool change ends) and the tool
post (CCW) rotation time ends to confirm whether the current tool input signal is consistent with
the current tool No., if not, the system alarms.
③ The tool change process ends.
④ After the system outputs the tool post rotation (CCW) signal, if the CNC doesn’t receive
the TCP signal within the time set by DT08, an alarm will be issued and the TL- signal will be
turned off.
⑤ When the tool post has no tool post locking signal, CTCP(K0011.3) is set to 0, at the time,
the system does not check the tool post locking signal.

328
 Chapter 2 Definition and Connection of Interface Signal

DT07

TL+

T1~T8

TL- DT08

TCP DT09

Sequence of tool change mode B

2. CHTB (K11.1)=0，CHTA (K11.0)=1: YA_XING hydraulic tool post HLT series:

2.1 Signal explanation
Signal type Code Interface Add. Function Remark
CN61.16 X1.7 T01 tool signal
CN61.29 X2.0 T02 tool signal Cutter position 8421
CN61.30 X2.1 T03 tool signal code
CN61.31 X2.2 T04 tool signal
Normally-closed
Input tool post locked
CN61.8 X0.7 TCP contactor (Low
signal signal
LEVEL enabled)
tool post strobe
CN61.9 X1.0 SELE
signal

Ⅲ
Normally-closed
tool post released
CN61.10 X1.1 TUCP contactor (Low

Connection
signal
LEVEL enabled)
CN62.15 Y1.6 TL+ tool post CW rotation
tool post CCW
CN62.16 Y1.7 TL-
Output rotation
signal tool post released
CN62.29 Y2.0 TRLS
outout
CN62.30 Y2.1 TCLP tool post locked
outout

Notice: The cutter-head clamping signal and releasing signal are normally-closed
contactor, which are enabled in low LEVEL.
2.2 Tool-change schedule
① Cutter-head relases and waits for that the cutter-head releasing signal is low LEVEL.
② The system judges the shortest path based upon the destination tool number and current
tool number; select the output rotation direction in terms of the principle of the
approximated tool-selection regardless of the positive signal (TL+) or negative one (TL-),
the tool starts to rotate and perform the tool-selection.
③ In the rotation process, the system performs the coding based upon the cutter position
encoder signals T1~T4 to identify the current tool number. When rotating to the previous

329
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

station of the destination tool number, detect the skip of the cutter-head strobe signal.
System closes the cutter-head releasing signal and outputs the cutter-head clamping
signal at the falling-edge of the previous state strobe signal of the destination tool number.
④ When the cutter-head clamping input signal in detecting is low LEVEL, close the
cutter-head rotation output signal (TL+ or TL-), the motor is then stopped.
⑤ Confirm whether the current tool position code signal is consistent with the detstination tool
number, confirm whether the cutter-head clamping signal is Low LEVEL again.
⑥ The tool-change is absolutely performed if the above-mentioned steps are correct.

2.3 Tool-Change Schedule

Ⅲ
Connection

2. CHTB（K11.1）=1，CHTA（K11.0）=0 Yantai AK31 series (6, 8, 10, 12 tools) Chanzhou

SBWD-80

3.1. Signal specification

330
 Chapter 2 Definition and Connection of Interface Signal

Signal type Code Interface Address Function Remark

CN61.16 X1.7 T01 tool signal

CN61.29 X2.0 T02 tool signal Tool position is

CN61.30 X2.1 T03 tool signal 8421 encoder
CN61.31 X2.2 T04 tool signal
Input
Tool post locked
signal CN61.35 X2.6 TCP
signal
CN61.9 X1.0 SELE strobe signal
Tool post worktable
CN61.10 X1.1 INDX
pregraduation coil
tool post overheat
CN61.11 X1.2 CHOT
check
Tool post CW
CN62.15 Y1.6 TL+
rotation
ool post CCW
Output CN62.16 Y1.7 TL-
rotation
signal Tool post worktable
CN62.29 Y2.0 TZD
brake
Tool post worktable
CN62.30 Y2.1 INDXS
pregraduation coil

3.2. Tool change process

⑴. Ensure the tool post brake TZD signal is turned on.
⑵.The system executes the shortest path judge based on the target tool no. and the current tool
no., and selects the rotation direction of the output according to the nearby tool selection, outputs the
positive signal(TL+) or negative signal (TL-), and the tool post rotates to select the tool.

Ⅲ
⑶.During the rotation, the system decodes to identify the current tool no. based on the tool

Connection
encoding signal T1~T4 input. When it rotates to the previous tool before the target tool no., it checks
the skip of the tool post strobe signal. The strobe signal of the previous signal before the target tool no.
executes the falling edge, the system outputs pregraduation electromagnetic signal of the tool post,
and the electromagnet is turned on.
⑷.When the input signal of the pregraduation proximity input signal of the tool post is HIGH, the
system closes the tool post rotation output signal (TL+ or TL-), and the motor stops.
⑸.After the system delays 50ms, it outputs the signal(TL- or TL+) which is reverse to the
previous rotation direction and the tool post rotates reversely.
⑹.When the proximity input signal of the tool post locked is HIGH, the system closes the rotation
signal (TL-, TL+), and the motor stops. Then the system outputs the tool post brake signal TZD, and
the motor brake is turned on.
⑺.When the system delays 200ms，it closes the pregraduation electromagnetic output signal,
and then the electromagnet is turned off.
⑻.The system checks the current tool no. again and confirms whether the encoding signal of the
current tool is consistent with the target tool no..
⑼.The system confirms again whether the locked proximity switch signal is HIGH.
⑽.When the above steps are correct, the system closes the tool post brake signal TZD, and so
the tool change is completed.

331
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

⑾.In the course of the tool change, when the system has found the motor overheat signal, it
alarms and closes output of all signals.

3.3. Tool change flow

Ⅲ
Connection

332
 Chapter 2 Definition and Connection of Interface Signal

4. CHTB (K11.1)=1，CHTA(K11.0)=1: LIO_SHING hydraulic tool post

4.1. Signal specification
Signal type Code Interface Address Function Remark
CN61.16 X1.7 T01 tool signal Sensor A
CN61.29 X2.0 T02 tool signal Sensor B
CN61.30 X2.1 T03 tool signal Sensor C

Input CN61.31 X2.2 T04 tool signal Sensor D

signal the tool pot stop and
CN61.8 X0.7 SSE the start signal be Sensor E
locked
tool post
CN61.9 X1.0 SSF Sensor F
releasing/lock signal
Tool post CCW
CN62.15 Y1.6 TL+
rotation Sol B
Output CN62.16 Y1.7 TL- Tool post CW rotation
signal tool post released
CN62.29 Y2.0 TRLS
outout Sol A
CN62.30 Y2.1 TCLP tool post locked
outout
Sensor A, B, C, D: only check the tool, and are not any start signals
Sensor E: it executes the inductive once when one tool change is executed, which makes the
tool pot stop and the start signal be locked. When the tool pot rotates to the required
position, Sensor is inductive, i.e. the electromagnet to control the tool pot rotation is
turned off, which makes the tool stop rotation and start the electromagnet to lock the
tool pot to ensure that the tool pot is locked.
Sensor F: releasing/lock confirmation signal. When it is not inductive, the tool pot is released, at

Ⅲ
the time, the tool pot is started to rotate. When it is not inductive, the tool pot is locked,

Connection
i.e. the tool change is completed.
Sol A: control the tool pot releasing/locking
Sol B: control the tool pot rotation(CW/CCW)

4.2 . Corresponding table between position and signal

8-tool:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A ● ● ● ●
B ● ● ● ●
C ● ● ● ●
D ● ● ● ●
E ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
10-tool:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
A ● ● ● ● ●
B ● ● ● ● ●
C ● ● ● ● ●
D ● ● ● ● ●

333
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

E ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
12-tool:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
A ● ● ● ● ● ●
B ● ● ● ● ● ●
C ● ● ● ● ● ●
D ● ● ● ● ● ●
E ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

4.3 Tool change process description

Example: No. 1 tool is changed into No. 4 tool
Step 1: Sol A is turned on(tool pot is released)
Step 2: Ensure Sensor F is not inductive, Sol B is turned and the oil hydraulic motor rotates
Step 3: check the tool signal(Note: Sensor E is inductive for No. 1, 2, 3 tool, does not execute the
locking operation when the tool pot does not reach No. 4 tool). When No. 3 tool signal is confirmed,
Sensor E preparatory operation should be set to make the tool pot rotate to No.4 tool, at the time,
Sensor E is inductive, i.e. Sol B is turned on, the tool pot stops rotation and Sol A makes the tool pot
be locked.

2.9.3 Machine Zero Return

Notice
When the feed axis matches with the absolute encoder, set the
arbitrary point as the machine reference point by the [n axis reference point
setting] on the page of the “Position －> Integral Coordinate”. It will directly
Ⅲ

position to the reference point when zero return after the reference position
Connection

is set.
Mainly, the following relevant description is about the adaptive
incremental encoder and the zero return procedure of the rotation axis.

 Relative signal
DECX: X deceleration signal；
DECY: Y deceleration signal；
DECZ: Z deceleration signal；
DEC4: 4th deceleration signal；
DEC5: 5th deceleration signal；
PCX: X zero signal；
PCY: Y zero signal；
PCZ: Z zero signal；
PC4: 4th zero signal；
PC5: 5th zero signal；

334
 Chapter 2 Definition and Connection of Interface Signal

DECX X deceleration signal PCX X zero signal

DECZ Z deceleration signal PCZ Z zero signal
DECY Y deceleration signal PCY Y zero signal
DEC4 4th deceleration signal PC4 4th zero signal
DEC5 5th deceleration signal PC5 5th zero signal

 Diagnosis data
0 0 0 DEC5 DEC4 DECZ DECY DECX
Interface pin CN61.34 CN61.33 CN61.12 CN61.32 CN61.4
0 0 8 PC5 PC4 PCY PCZ PCX
Interface pin CN15.10 CN14.3 CN13.3 CN12.3 CN11.3

 Controlling parameter
Status parameters
0 0 4 DECI
Bit 5 1: During machine zero return, the deceleration signal is at high level;
0: During machine zero return, the deceleration signal is at low level;

0 0 5 PPD
Bit 1: 1: G50 sets relative coordinate system value;
0: G50 does not set relative coordinate system value;

0 0 6 ZM5 ZM4 ZMY ZMZ ZMX

th
Bit4 1: 5 axis zero point return method C
0: 5th axis zero point return method B
Bit3 1: 4th axis zero point return method C

Ⅲ
0: 4th axis zero point return method B
Bit2 1:Y axis zero point return method C

Connection
0:Y axis zero point return method B
Bit1 1:Y axis zero point return method C
0:Y axis zero point return method B
Bit0 1:X axis zero point return method C
0:X axis zero point return method B

0 0 7 ZC5 ZC4 ZCY ZCZ ZCX

th
Bit 4 1: During machine zero return, the deceleration signal of the 5 axis (DEC5) and one-rotation
signal (PC5) are connected in parallel (use a proximity switch as a deceleration signal and
zero-point signal at the same time).
0: During machine zero return, the deceleration signal of the 5th axis (DEC5) and one-rotation
signal (PC5) are connected separately (use a proximity switch as a deceleration signal
and zero-point signal at the same time).
Bit 3 1: During machine zero return, the deceleration signal of the 4th axis (DEC4) and one-rotation
signal (PC4) are connected in parallel (use a proximity switch as a deceleration signal and
zero-point signal at the same time).
0: During machine zero return, the deceleration signal of the 4th axis (DEC4) and
one-rotation signal (PC4) are connected separately (use a proximity switch as a

335
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

deceleration signal and zero-point signal at the same time).

Bit 2 1: During machine zero return, the deceleration signal of the Y axis (DECY) and one-rotation
signal (PCY) are connected in parallel (use a proximity switch as a deceleration signal and
zero-point signal at the same time).
0: During machine zero return, the deceleration signal of the Y axis (DECY) and one-rotation
signal (PCY) are connected separately (use a proximity switch as a deceleration signal
and zero-point signal at the same time).
Bit 1 1: During machine zero return, the deceleration signal of the Z axis (DECZ) and one-rotation
signal (PCZ) are connected in parallel (use a proximity switch as a deceleration signal and
zero-point signal at the same time).
0: During machine zero return, the deceleration signal of the Z axis (DECZ) and
one-rotation signal (PCZ) are connected separately (use a proximity switch as a
deceleration signal and zero-point signal at the same time).
Bit 0 1: During machine zero return, the deceleration signal of the X axis (DECX) and one-rotation
signal (PCX) are connected in parallel (use a proximity switch as a deceleration signal and
zero-point signal at the same time).
0: During machine zero return, the deceleration signal of the X axis (DECX) and one-rotation
signal (PCX) are connected separately (use a proximity switch as a deceleration signal
and zero-point signal at the same time).
Note: In the zero return method B, it is set to 0; the zero return can be detected the PC signal after
releasing from the block when it independently connects. If it is set to 1, PC detection signal begins after
pressing the block to decelerate to zero when it is connected in parallel, and the block then can be reserved.

0 1 1 NORF ZNLK REFC2

Bit3 1: Manual machine zero return is invalid;
0: Manual machine zero return is valid;
Bit 2: 1: The direction key is self-locked during machine zero return; press the direction key once till
Ⅲ

the machine zero return is finished;

Connection

0: The direction key is not self-locked during machine zero return; press down the direction key;
Bit1 1:Ref.C mode,the feeding slowdown when machine press down switch, it is reversed after
decelerating to zero.
0:Ref.C mode,the feeding slowdown when machine release switch, it is reversed after
decelerating to zero.

0 1 2 APRS ISOT
Bit 7 1: CNC sets the absolute coordinate system automatically after reference point return;
0: CNC does not set absolute coordinate system automatically after reference point return;
Bit 0 1: Manual rapid traverse is valid after system power-on and before machine zero return;
0: Manual rapid traverse is invalid after system power-on and before machine zero return;

0 1 4 ZRS5 ZRS4 ZRSY ZRSZ ZRSX

Bit4, Bit3, Bit2, Bit1, Bit0
1: Machine zero point is set on the 5th, 4th, Y, Z, X axes; deceleration signal and zero point signal are
needed to be detected during machine zero return;
0: Machine zero point is not set on the 5th, 4th, Y, Z, X axes; deceleration signal and zero point signal
are not detected during machine zero return;

336
 Chapter 2 Definition and Connection of Interface Signal

1 8 3 MZR5 MZR4 MZRY MZRZ MZRX

Bit4/Bit3/Bit2/Bit1/Bit0 1: The direction of machine zero return is negative;
0: The direction of machine zero return is positive;
1 8 8 RFCK RRT
Bit7 1:G28 running every time to check the PC signal
0:G28 running only first to check the PC signal
Bit6 1:Zero return D mode is used when the additional axis is a rotary axis;
0:Zero return A, B, C mode is used when the additional axis is a rotary axis (power-on
again).

Data parameters
0 3 3 ZRNFLn
The low speed of machine zero return;
1 1 3 REF_SPDn
The high speed of machine zero return;
0 4 7 PRSn
Setting value of absolute coordinate after machine zero return;

 Signal connection
The interior circuit of deceleration signal is shown in Fig. 2-38:

Ⅲ
Connection
Fig. 2-32
 Machine zero return by regarding servo motor one-turn signal as the zero signal
①Its sketch map is shown below:

Fig. 2-39
② The circuit of deceleration signal

337
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

Fig. 2-40
③ Sequence of machine zero return
When the BIT0 (ZMX) of the bit parameter No.006 is set to 0, and the BIT5(DECI) of the bit
parameter No.004 is set to 0, the system chooses the machine zero return mode B, and the
deceleration signal low level is active.
So the sequence of machine zero return mode B is shown as follows:
Ⅲ

Fig. 2-41-a
Connection

Return process of machine zero mode B

A: Select Machine zero mode, press the manual positive or negative feed key (machine
zero return direction set by bit parameter No.183), the corresponding axis moves to the
machine zero by a rapid traverse speed (No.113). As the axis press down the
deceleration switch to cut off deceleration signal, the feeding slows down immediately,
and it continues to run in a fixed low speed (No.33).
B: When the deceleration switch is released, the deceleration signal contact is closed again.
And CNC begins to detect the encoder one-turn signal (PC), if this signal level skips, the
motion will be halted. And the corresponding zero return indicator on the operator panel
lights up for machine zero return completion.
When the BIT0 (ZMX) of the bit parameter and No.006 are both set to 1, and the BIT5 (DECI) of
the bit parameter No.004 is set to 0, it chooses the machine zero return mode C, and the deceleration
signal low level is active. The Bit 1 of status parameter No.011 can be set the deceleration time.
So the sequence of machine zero return mode C is shown as follows:

338
 Chapter 2 Definition and Connection of Interface Signal

Deceleration switch Deceleration switch

H
i
g
he
r
e
t
u
r
n

Do
e
ce
De c

l
s
p
e
d

e
r
High return speed

a
Z
e
r
o
r
e
t
u
r
n
s
p
e
e
d
to s elerat

t
Zero return

st

e
o

s
p
speed t op es

R
e
v
e
r
s
e
l
y
Reversely

Ls
op
we
r
e
t
u
r
n
Rf
tn
e
u
r
n
Low return

e
d
i Return
i
s
h
speed
finish
n
P
C

nPC
V
e
l
o
c
i
t
y
v

( ) Velocity(v)

T
i
m
e
t
(︶

Time(t)

Fig. 2-36 (Out-of-block deceleration) Fig. 2-37 (Push the block deceleration)
Return process of machine zero mode C
A: Select Machine zero mode, press the manual positive or negative feed key (return direction
set by bit parameter No.183), the corresponding axis moves to the machine zero by a rapid
traverse speed (No.113). As the axis press down the deceleration switch to cut off
deceleration signal, if the pushing block begins deceleration (Bit 1 of status parameter
No.011), the operation speed is then decelerated to zero. The feeding keeps rapid rate and
depart from the deceleration switch, when the DEC signal contact is closed, the feeding
slows down to zero, then run reversely to return to machine zero in a low speed.
B: In the reverse running, it presses down the deceleration switch to cut off the DEC signal
contact and continues returning; as it departs from the deceleration switch, the deceleration
signal contact is closed again. And CNC begins to detect the encoder one-turn signal (PC), if
this signal level skips, the motion will be halted. And the corresponding axis zero return
indicator on the operation panel lights up for zero return completion.

Ⅲ
 Machine zero return by a proximity switch taken as both deceleration and zero signals

Connection
① Its sketch map is as follows:
Sketch map of zero tongue for machine zero return mode B:

Fig. 2-42-a

Sketch map of zero tongue for machine zero return mode C:

339
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

Fig. 2-42-b
② Circuit of the deceleration signal
Machine side CNC side
+24V

nDECCn
*DE

nPC

Fig. 2-43
③Sequence of machine zero return (taking example of X)
When the BIT0 (ZMX) of the bit parameter No.006 are all set to 0, and the BIT5 (DECI) of the bit
parameter No.004 is 0, it chooses the machine zero return mode B.
The sequence of machine zero return is as follows:
Ⅲ
Connection

Fig. 2-44-a
B type machine zero return process
A: Select the Machine Zero mode, press manual positive or negative (zero return direction set
by bit parameter No.183) feed key, the corresponding axis will move to the zero at a high
speed(set by parameter No.113).
B: As the proximity switch touches the tongue for the first time, the deceleration signal is active
and speed immediately slows down and it runs in a fixed low speed (set by parameter
No.33 ).
C: As the proximity switch detaches the tongue, the deceleration signal is inactive; it moves at a
fixed low speed after deceleration and starts to detect zero signal (PC).

340
 Chapter 2 Definition and Connection of Interface Signal

D: As the proximity switch touches the tongue for the second time, the zero signal is active and
the movement stops. The zero return indicator on the panel lights up for machine zero return
completion.
When the BIT0 (ZMX) of the bit parameter No.006 are all set to 1, and the BIT5(DECI) of the bit
parameter No.004 is 0, it chooses the machine zero return mode C.
The sequence of machine zero return mode C is shown as follows:
D
e
c
e
l
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
s
w
i
t
c
h
Deceleration switch

Do
e
ce
l
e
t

r
H
i
g
h
r
e
t
u
r
n
s
p
e
e
d

a
t
s

e
t
High return speed

s
o
p
Zs
e
oe
r
r
e
t
u
r
n

Zero return speed Dec

p
e
d

to s elerat
top es
R
e
v
e
r
s
e
l
y
Return Reversely
Rf
e
t
us
r
n

Ls
op
we
r
e
t
u
r
n

finish
i
n
i
h

Low return speed

e
d
V
e
l
o
c
i
t
y
v

( ) Velocity(v)

T
i
m
e
t

(︶ Time(t)

Fig.2-42（the feeding slowdown release switch） Fig.2-43（the feeding slowdown press down switch）
Ref.C mode,the feeding slowdown when 0:release switch 1:press down switch
C type machine zero return process
A: Select the Machine Zero mode, press manual positive or negative (zero return direction set
by bit parameter No.183) feed key, the corresponding axis will move to the zero at a high
speed(set by parameter No.113).
B: As the proximity switch touches the tongue for the first time, the deceleration signal is active.

Ⅲ
If the pushing block deceleration begins (The Bit 1of the status parameter equals to 1), the
feed speed decelerates to zero, then it runs reversely by low return speed.

Connection
C: If the setting block begins to decelerate (The Bit 1 of the status parameter No.011 sets to 0), it
is still operated with same speed when its speed descends. When the deceleration signal
contactor is closed, the operation speed decelerates to zero till leaving the deceleration
switch, and then it reversely operates with low speed based upon the machine tool zero.
D: As the proximity switch touches the deceleration switch for the second time in reverse running,
deceleration signal contact is cut off, it still runs by low return speed; as it detaches the
deceleration switch, deceleration signal contact is closed again, so the movement stops. The
zero return indicator for the corresponding axis on the panel lights up for zero return
completion.
 The machine zero return (zero-return method D) of deceleration signal or zero signal by
using the servo motor one-turn signal
There are four zero return methods for rotation axis, which are separately divided into: A, B, C
and D. Wherein, zero return method A, B and C are identical with the one of the linear axis. Only the
D is a special zero return method of the rotation axis.
When the controllable axis is rotation one, and the Bit 6 of status parameter No.188 sets to 1,
select the machine zero return method D.
The time-sequency figure of the machine zero operation in method D is as follows:

341
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

Sequence of
machine zero

Ignore
PC

PC signal

Velocity (V)
High return
speed
Low
return
speed

Time (T)

The process of machine zero return in method D:

A: Select the mechanical zero return method, positively feed manually, the corresponding axis
moves to the zero direction at the rapid traverse rate.
B: When met the one-turn signal (PC) of the servo axis at the first time, the system
decelerates to the zero return.
C: When the system decelerates to the zero return, the system is then detected the one-turn
signal again (PC).
D: The system operation stops when mets the one-turn signal (PC) of the servo axis;
simultaneously, the zero return indicator of if its corresponding axis on the operation panel
is turned on, the mechanical zero return is then ended.

2.9.4 Spindle Control

 Relevant signal (by standard PLC program)
Ⅲ

Type Sign Interface Address Function Remark

Input
Connection

SALM CN15.8 X5.0 Spindle abnormity alarm input

signal
M03 CN62.4 Y0.3 Spindle rotation(CCW)
M04 CN62.5 Y0.4 Spindle rotation(CW)
M05 CN62.6 Y0.5 Spindle stop
SPZD CN62.8 Y0.7 Spindle brake
Output Its function is
signal SFR CN15.6 Y5.0 Spindle rotation(CW) consistent with
that of M03
Its function is
SRV CN15.7 Y5.1 Spindle rotation(CCW) consistent with
that of M04
M03 Spindle rotation(CCW)
Command
M04 Spindle rotation(CW)
format
M05 Spindle stop
Note: When the spindle is serial-connected, system delivers the rotation signal to servo by
bus regardless of the above-mentioned IO signals.
 Control parameter

342
 Chapter 2 Definition and Connection of Interface Signal

Bit parameter
K 1 0 RSJG

RSJG =1: CNC not turn off M03, M04, M08, M32 output signals when pressing key;

=0: CNC turns off M03, M04, M08, M32 output signals when pressing key.
K 1 7 SALM SSTP
SALM =1: The system alarms when the spindle abnormal detection input signal is LOW (it is
turned off with 0V);
=0: The system alarms when the spindle abnormal detection input signal is HIGH (it is
turned on with 0V) .
SSTP =1: The analog voltage is closed when the spindle stops;
=0: The analog voltage is not closed when the spindle stops.

1 7 5 SAR
Bit6 1: The spindle SAR signal is checked before cutting;
0: The spindle SAR signal is not checked before cutting.

Data parameter
0 7 2 SAR_DELEY
Delay check time (ms) of the spindle speed arrival.

D T 0 5 MTIME
Execution time of M code (ms)

D T 1 0 SPDDLT

Ⅲ
Spindle braking delay output time after spindle stop (M05) is output

Connection
D T 1 1 SPZDTIME
Spindle braking output time (ms)

D T 2 3 SVF_DELEY
Delay time before spindle motor torque decrease to 0 when spindle starts clamping;

D T 2 0 SCLPTIME
Spindle clamping/releasing command performance time (ms).

D C 0 0 SPZERO
Spindle zero speed output range (m/min);

 Signal connection
M03, M04, M05, SPZD signal output circuit is shown in Fig. 2-45A:

343
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

CNC side Machine side

Output signal

Fig. 2-45A
SAR, SALM signal input circuit is shown in Fig.2-45B:

Machine CNC
side side

Intput
signal

Fig.2-45
 Operation sequence （defined by standard PLC program）
Spindle operation sequence is show in Fig 2-46:
Stop signal

CW/CCW

Stop

T2 T3
Ⅲ

Brake
Connection

Fig. 2-46 spindle rotation(CW/CCW) sequence

Note: T2 is the delay time from sending the spindle stop signal to sending the spindle brake signal; T3 is the
spindle brake hold time.
 Function description（defined by standard PLC program）
① After the CNC is turned on, when M05 output is valid, M03 or M04 is executed, M03 or M04
output is valid and remains, at the time, M05 output is closed; when M03 or M04 output is valid, M05
is executed, M03 or M04 is closed, M05 output is valid and remains; the spindle brake SPZD signal
output delay is set by No.087（delay time from the spindle stop signal output to the spindle brake
SPZD signal output）, the hold time of the brake signal is set by No. 089（the spindle brake output
time）.
② When M03（M04）output is valid, M04（M03）is executed, the alarm occurs.
③ When №175.6 is set to 1, the system checks whether the speed arrival signal SAR is valid, if
it is valid, the system normally runs, if not, “Check speed arrival……” is displayed.
④ When the spindle speed command and the cutting feed command are in the same block, the
system executes the delay check for SAR signal to avoid that the CNC starts the cutting based on the
last spindle speed arrival signal SAR, the delay time is set by No.072.
⑤ DC00 is the spindle zero-speed output range. When the actual spindle speed is not more
than DC00 setting value, the system defaults the spindle speed to be zero, and can release the chuck,
close the hydraulic and other operations.

344
 Chapter 2 Definition and Connection of Interface Signal

⑥ SALM（X5.0）is spindle abnormity alarm input。

Note 1: In the emergency stop, it turns off M03, M04, M08 signals, and outputs M05 signal;
Note 2: Whether M03, M04 is cancelled is set by BIT3 of the bit parameter No.009 when CNC is reset.
If Bit 1=0, CNC turns off M03, M04 at reset;
If Bit 1=1, M03, M04 is kept at reset.

2.9.5 Spindle Wwitching Volume Control

 Relevant signal(defined by standard PLC program)
S01～S04: Control signal for spindle speed switching volume, they are compound interfaces
defined by standard PLC program, and they share common interfaces with M41～M44, U00～U03.
 Signal diagnosis
Signal S4 S3 S2 S1
Diagnosis address Y1.3 Y1.2 Y1.1 Y1.0
Interface pin CN62.12 CN62.11 CN62.10 CN62.09
 Control parameters
Bit parameter
0 0 1 ACS
Bit4 =1: Analog voltage control of spindle speed
=0: Switching volume control of spindle speed
 Control logic (defined by standard PLC program)
S1～S4 output are inactive at power on. If any code of them is executed, the corresponding S
signal output is active and held on, and the other S signal outputs are cancelled. S1～S4 outputs are
cancelled when executing S00 code, and only one of them is active at a time.

2.9.6 Spindle Automatic Gearing Control

Ⅲ
 Relevant signal (defined by standard PLC program)

Connection
M41～M44: Spindle automatic gear shifting output signals. It supports 4-gear spindle automatic
gear shifting control when the system selects the spindle analog value control(0～
10V analog voltage output)
M41I, M42I: spindle automatic gear shifting No.1, 2 gear in-position signals to support gear
shifting in-position check function
 Signal diagnosis
Signal M42I M41I M44 M43 M42 M41
Diagnosis address X1.6 X1.5 Y1.3 Y1.2 Y1.1 Y1.0
Interface pin CN61.15 CN61.14 CN62.12 CN62.11 CN62.10 CN62.09

 Signal connection
The circuit for M41~M44 is shown in Fig.2-47:

Fig. 2-47

345
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

 Control parameter
Bit parameter
0 0 1 ACS
Bit4 =1: Spindle analog volume control, set to 1 if using spindle automatic gearing
=0: Spindle switching volume control

1 9 5 PLCS
Bit6 =1: PLC spindle rotation speed function of each axis enabled；
=0: PLC spindle rotation speed function of each axis disabled。
K 1 5 SHT AGIM AGIN AGER
AGER =1: Spindle automatic gearing active
=0: Spindle automatic gearing inactive
AGIN =1: Detect M41I, M42I signal when shifting to gear 1, 2
=0: Not detect M41I, M42I signal when shifting to gear 1, 2
AGIM =1: Active when M41I, M42I signals disconnecting to +24V
=0: Active when M41I, M42I signals connecting to +24V
SHT =1: spindle gear power-down executes the memory
=0: spindle gear power-down does not execute the memory
Data parameter
0 3 7 GRMAX1
0 3 8 GRMAX2
0 3 9 GRMAX3
0 4 0 GRMAX4

GRMAX1, GRMAX2, GRMAX3, GRMAX4: The respective max. speeds of spindle gear 1, 2, 3, 4
when analog voltage output is 10V. Spindle speeds for M41, M42, M43, M44 when spindle automatic
Ⅲ

gearing is active.
0 6 7 SFTREV
Connection

The output voltage during spindle gear shift（0～10000, Unit: mV）

D T 0 0 SFT1TME
Time for original gear disable during spindle gear shift (ms)，refer to function description for
details.

D T 0 1 SFT2TME
Delay time after spindle gear shift (ms), refer to function description for details.
 Function description (defined by standard PLC program)
The spindle automatic gearing is active only under the spindle analog voltage control (BIT4 of the
bit parameter No.001 set to 1) and the BIT 7 of the bit parameter No.164 is set to 1; if the spindle auto
gearing is inactive, alarm will be issued when M41～M44 is being executed and only one of them is
active at a time.
When spindle auto gearing is used to control automatic spindle mechanical gear switching, as
CNC executes S□□□□ code, it calculates the analog voltage output to spindle servo or frequency
inverter based on the parameter of the current gear by M4n (M41 ～ M44 to data parameters
No.037~No.040 respectively) to make the actual speed to be consistent with the S code.

346
 Chapter 2 Definition and Connection of Interface Signal

When CNC is powered on, the spindle gear memorizing is set by the BIT1 of bit parameter
No.168.
If the BIT4 of bit parameter No.001 is 0, the spindle gear is not memorized at repowering after
power down, and the gear 1 will be defaulted, M41~M44 are not output. If BIT4 of bit parameter
No.001 is 1, the spindle gear is memorized at repowering after power down.
No gearing is done if the specified gear is consistent with the current gear. If not, gearing will be
performed, and the process defined by standard ladders is shown in the following:
① Execute any of M41, M42, M43, M44 codes, output analog voltage to spindle servo or
frequency inverter according to a value set by data parameter No.067 (Unit: mV);
②After a delay (gearing time 1) by the DT00, turn off the original gear output signal and output
the new gearing signal;
③If the gear is 1 or 2, and the BIT6 of the bit parameter No.164 is 1, it jumps to ④, or else it
jumps to ⑤;
④Check the gear in-position input signal M41I, M42I, it jumps to ⑤ if the gear in-position is
done; if not, the CNC waits the gear in-position signal;
⑤After a delay (gearing time 2) by DT01, output spindle analog voltage by the current gear
according to a value set by data parameter No.037~No.040 (gear 1~4) and finish the gearing.
Note: The output of M41～M44 is held on when CNC is reset or i emergency stop, which is defined by
standard PLC ladder.

2.9.7 Spindle 8-point Orientation Function

 Command format
M51: spindle orientation command
M50 : cancel spindle orientation command
Note: When the system is matched with GS-L Spindle Servo Unit, it can realize one-point orientation.

Ⅲ
 Control parameter
K 1 5 SPOR

Connection
SPOR =1: The spindle eight-orientation function is valid.
=0: The spindle eight-orientation function is invalid.
 Functional description(standard PLC program definition)
1. After the positioning function commands M51 are executed, PLC→CNC executes the
orientation signal.
2. CNC issues an orientation command after reciving the orientation signal; (after the system
delays 100ms, the spindle rotation(CW/CCW) is disabled, at the same time, the system starts to
check the orientation completion signal (COIN）.
3. Drive unit starts the orientation.
4. After the drive unit orientation is completed, Drive →CNC→PLC outputs the spindle
completion signal COIN;
5. After PLC receives the spindle orientation completion signal COIN, the spindle orientation is
completed, but the spindle orientation signal STAO keeps the output.
6. When M51 is input again, the spindle oriented to another position.
7. After the orientation is completed and when M50 is executed or the spindle orientation is
operated, PLC closes the spindle orientation signal STAO output and cancels the positioning function.
8. When the system has not received the orientation completion signal after the PLC sends the
orientation completion signal for 10000ms, it alarms “the spindle orientation time being long”.

347
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

9. Before the orientation, the spindle can rotate or stop; the spindle stops after the orientation.
Note 1: The drive is for the spindle servo drive unit.
Note 2: The spindle should be the serial-connected when selecting this function; simultaneously, adapt the
GS-L series spindle servo drive unit.
 Connected diagram
When GSK980TDi matches with the GS-L series servo drive, it is connected with bus regardless
of the special wiring.

2.9.8 Spindle Cs Axis Control Function

 Command format
M14: The spindle is switched from the speed control mode into the position
M15: The spindle is switched from the position control mode into the speed
Note: When the spindle is rotary, Cs function is valid and the corresponding spindle servo drive unit is
speed/position switch working mode, the spindle speed/position control switch is valid.
 Control parameters
State parameters
0 0 1 Analog
spindle
Bit4 =1: Spindle speed analog control. When the spindle automatic gear change function is
used, it must be set to 1;
=0: Spindle speed switch control.

1 8 7 ROS ROT
Bit1, Bit0 : 00: set the additional axis to the linear axis; 01: set the additional axis to the rotary
axis (A-type); 11: set the additional axis to the rotary axis (B-type); 10: set the
additional to be invalid.
Ⅲ

1 9 5 SSPD CSREF RCS

Connection

Bit0 =1:Cs function of spindle valid ,power on;

=0:Cs function of spindle is:invalid,power on.
Bit1 1:Change to position mode,the axis do return REF;
0:Change to position mode,the axis don't return REF.
Bit7 1:series spindle controllable function enabled (series spindle The slave ID number of the
spindle 1~3 is 11~13) , it is necessary to restart；
0:series spindle controllable function disabled (analogy spindle), it is necessary to restart.

2 2 1 Feed axis of the corresponding spindle

The feed axis number related with the spindle should be set when matches with the CS axis
function.

1 6 4 Spindle shifting M code

Spindle CS shifts the M code [Setting value +1 is the M code of the function releasing].
Note 1: When the spindle positioning function is enabled, it is regarded as the M code shifted by
spindle positioning.
Note 2: The setting value should be shifted the M code by the compiled CS in the ladder
diagram.

348
 Chapter 2 Definition and Connection of Interface Signal

Note 3: The setting is enabled when its setting is less than the 6. The coordinate system will not
be cleared as zero by shifting the CS axis when its value is disabled.

K 1 5 RCS RSCS
RCS =1: Cs function of the spindle is valid.
=0: Cs function of the spindle is invalid.
RSCS =1: The spindle contour control is disabled in emergency stop, reset.
=0: The spindle contour control is enabled in emergency stop, reset.
Note: K15.7 sets whether all Cs functions are valid, №o187.5, №o189.5, №o191.5 set whether Cs functions of
the special axis is valid. When the multiple spindle function is valid, Cs function of only one axis is valid.
 Function description（defined by standard PLC program）
1. Control logic
1.1. The PLC sets the spindle contour controllable shifting signal CON (G27.7) to 1 after the M14
is executed;
1.2. CNC controls the drive to shift the controllable method, after the switch is completed,
CNC→PLC outputs the spindle contour controllable shifting end signal FSCSL (F44.1);
1.3. Aafter the PLC detects the spindle contour controllable shifting end signal FSCSL (F44.1),
end the performance of the M14. The spindle controllable shifting method is ended.
2. M15 execute processes are the same those of M14.
3. Only, the M15 cancels the speed/position shifting performed by M14; if the spindle shifts into
the Cs contour control by executing the M29, the performance of the M15 will not be converted into
the speed controllable method.

4. on the panel is equal to the spindle speed/position control mode switch in Manual mode.

Ⅲ
In Manual/MPG mode, press and the CNC starts the spindle speed/position control mode

Connection
switch. After the CNC is switched into the spindle position control mode, the spindle orientation

indicator is ON, at the time, Cs position movement is performed. Press again and the CNC is
switched into the spindle speed control mode and the spindle orientation indicator is OFF.
5. Before switch, the spindle can rotate or stop. After switch, the spindle stops.
6. When the spindle is in Cs contour control mode, the spindle rotation(CW/CCW) output is
invalid.
7. When the spindle is in the external speed control mode, the manual operation of Cs axis is
invalid.
8. When the alarm occurs in the servo or because of the too long switch time or the reset or
emergency stop appears in switch, PLC switches the spindle into the speed control state.
9. When PLC K15.6 is set to 1, the spindle contour control is disabled in emergency stop, reset.
PLC switches the spindle into the speed control state.
10. There is the CS shifting M code (Standard ladder diagram defines as M14) in the setting of
the No.164; the coordinate system can be cleared after the feed CS shifts.
 Wiring diagram

349
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

When the GSK980TDi matches with the GS-L series servo drive; the bus then can be connected
regardless of the special wiring.

2.9.8 Multiple Spindle Function

When the multiple spindle function is valid, related signals, parameters and commands are
consistent with related explanations of the spindle control, the 1st, the 2nd spindle explanations are
shown below.
 Related signals（defined by PLC program）

Type Sign Interface Address Function Remark

Input
SALM2 CN16.8 X8.0 The 2nd spindle abnormality alarm signal
signal
SFR2 CN16.6 Y8.0 The 2nd spindle rotation(CW)
Output
signal SRV2 CN16.7 Y8.1 The 2nd spindle rotation(CCW)
Note: It is unnecessary to to connect the above-mentioned signals after the spindle is serial-connected.
 Command format
M63 the 2nd spindle rotates (CW)
M64 the 2nd spindle rotates (CCW)
M65 the 2nd spindle stops
M24 the 2nd spindle is switched from the speed control mode into the position control mode
M25 the 2nd spindle is switched from the position control mode into the speed control mode. The
speed control mode is defaulted after the system is turned on.
 Control parameters
1 8 7 RCS ROS ROT
Ⅲ

Bit5 =1: Cs function of the additional axis is valid (power-on again);

Connection

=0: Cs function of the additional axis is invalid(power-on again).

Bit 1, Bit0: 00 sets Y to be the linear axis; 01 sets Y to be the rotary axis (A type); 11 sets Y to be
the rotary axis(B type); 10 sets Y to be invalid.
Bit1, Bit0 : 00: set the additional axis to the linear axis; 01: set the additional axis to the rotary
axis (A-type); 11: set the additional axis to the rotary axis (B-type); 10: set the
additional to be invalid.

1 9 5 SSPD RCS
Bit0 =1:Cs function of spindle valid ,power on;
=0:Cs function of spindle is:invalid,power on.
Bit7 =1:series spindle controllable function enabled (series spindle The slave ID number of the
spindle 1~3 is 11~13) , it is necessary to restart;
=0:series spindle controllable function disabled (analogy spindle), it is necessary to
restart.

0 2 2 1 The feed axis related with the spindle

The feed axis number related with the spindle should be set when matches with the CS axis
function.
Setting value meaning: 0: Without 1~5: the 1st axis ~ the 5th axis

350
 Chapter 2 Definition and Connection of Interface Signal

1 9 6 MSEN
Bit4 1: The multiple spindle control function is valid;
0: The multiple spindle control function is invalid;

K 1 5 RCS RSCS
RCS =1: The spindle Cs function is valid;
=0: The spindle Cs function is invalid.
RSCS =1: The spindle contour control is disabled in emergency stop, reset;
=0: The spindle contour control is enabled in emergency stop, reset.

K 1 7 MSEN SALM2
MSEN =1: The multiple spindle control function is valid;
=0: The multiple spindle control function is invalid.
SALM2 =1: The system alarms when the check input signal of the 2nd spindle abnormality is
LOW;
=0: The system alarms when the check input signal of the 2nd spindle abnormality is
HIGH;
Function description(defined by the standard PLC program）
1.1. After the multiple spindle control function setting is valid, the system defaults to the 1st
spindle control after power-on;
1.2. When M03, M04, M05 is executed, the corresponding signal of the 1st spindle outputs, at
that time, the system sets the 1st spindle control, hereafter, the S command being executed
will change the 1st spindle speed. In a similar way, M63, M64, M65 is executed, the
corresponding signal of the 2nd spindle outputs, at the time, the corresponding signal of the
2nd spindle outputs, and is switched into the 2nd spindle control, after that, the executed S
command will change the 2nd spindle speed.

Ⅲ
1.3. The spindle switch is invalid in rigid tapping.
1.4. The manual CW, CCW, STOP, SPINDLE OVRRRIDE keys on the panel are valid only to the

Connection
1st spindle. When the current system is controlled by the 2nd spindle, the manual control key
of the spindle on the panel still controls the 1st spindle.
1.5. The spindle override of the 2nd spindle is fixed to 100%.
1.6. Cs axis control of two spindles can be separately switched and the current used spindle has
no requirements, that is, when the current is the 1st(2nd) spindle, the 2nd (1st) spindle
executes the Cs switch.
 Cs control logic of the 2nd spindle
1.1. After M24 is executed, PLC sets the spindle contour controllable signal CON (G127.7) to 1;
1.2. CNC controls the drive to shift the controllable method, after the shifting is performed,
CNC→PLC outputs the spindle contour controllable shifting end signal FSCSL (F144.1);
1.3. After the PLC detects the spindle contour controllable shifting end signal FSCSL (F144.1),
end the performance of the M24. The spindle controllable method is then completed.
2. M25 execute processes are the same those of M24.
3. M25 only cancels M24 executing the speed/position switch. Executing M25 cannot switch the
system into the speed control mode when executing M29 switches the spindle into Cs contour
control.

4. on the panel is only used to Cs switch of the 1st spindle.

5. Before switch, the spindle can rotate or stop. After switch, the spindle stops.

351
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

6. When the spindle is in Cs contour control mode, the spindle rotation(CW/CCW) output is
invalid.
7. When the spindle is in the external speed control mode, the manual operation of Cs axis is
invalid.
8. When the alarm occurs in the servo or because of the too long switch time or the reset or
emergency stop appears in switch, PLC switches the spindle into the speed control state.
9. When PLC K15.6 is set to 1, the spindle contour control is disabled in emergency stop, reset.
PLC switches the spindle into the speed control state.
 Wiring
When the GSK980TDi matches with the GS-L series servo drive; the bus then can be connected
regardless of the special cable.

2.9.9 Rigid Tapping Function

 Related commands
M20 spindle clamped output
M21 spindle clamped/released output
M29 entering rigid tapping state
Note: When only the selected spindle used to the rigid tapping interpolation is the rotary axis, the rigid
tapping function can be executed.
 Function description（defined by the standard PLC program）
① When the Cs function of the tapping spindle is invalid, the system is switched into the rigid
tapping state instead of switching the spindle servo speed/position in executing M29, defaults the
spindle servo to be the position control state.
② When Cs function of the tapping spindle is enabled, the spindle servo for the tapping is switched
into the position control state and the system is switched into Cs contour control state.
③ Before M29 switch, the tapping spindle is permitted to the spindle mode or Cs contour control
Ⅲ

mode. After the rigid tapping return, the tapping spindle returns to the previous control mode.
Connection

④ When the system is in the rigid tapping state, the manual movement tapping spindle cannot be
performed.
⑤ The rigid tapping state is cancelled in reset or emergency stop.
⑥ In M29, when the 1st or the 2nd spindle is currently used, it is switched into the rigid tapping state.
In rigid tapping, a spindle should be selected firstly to execute the rigid tapping interpolation. After
the spindle is switched into the rigid tapping state, the spindle switch is invalid.
⑦ After M29 is execute, M20 and the tapping command in the same block are executed to clamp
the spindle before drilling or tapping.

2.9.10 Spindle Clamped Function

 Relative signals（Standard PLC program definition）
Signal
Code Interface Address Function Remark
type
Output
SCLP CN62.07 Y0.6 Spindle clamped output
signal

 Relative commands
M20 Spindle clamping output

352
 Chapter 2 Definition and Connection of Interface Signal

M21 Spindle clamping output cancel

Note: The spindle clamping equipment should be matched with the machine tool.

 Control parameters
Status parameters
K 1 7 SCLP
SCLP =1:Spindle clamped function is valid。
=0:Spindle clamped function is invalid
D T 2 0 SCLPTIME
Spindle clamping/releasing command execution time (ms).
D T 2 3 SVF_DELEY
spindle is started to clamp, delay to reduce the spindle servo exciting time (ms).

 Function description（Standard PLC program definition）

① M20 and M21 are a pair of M commands for controlling the spindle clamp and release, and
they are for clamping the spindle after positioning, so that the spindle won’t rotate due to the
force during drilling or tapping.
② During executing M20, to avoid the clamped spindle servo motor current too big, CNC will
control the spindle and cut off the servo after the delay time set by DT23, and then, the
spindle servo reduces the motor excitation, while the position control can’t be executed.
However the position detection can still functions and the position won’t get lost.
③ The spindle can’t be clamped by M20 during the spindle moving or rotating. After the spindle
is clamped, the spindle can neither be rotated nor moved; otherwise, PLC issues the alarm.

2.9.11 Spindle Positioning Function

Ⅲ
 Relevant command
M14 Spindle shifts to the positioning control mode

Connection
M15 Spindle shifts back to speed control mode
Note: It is necessary to set the CS function of the spindle, and the spindle clamping equipment is matched with
the machine tool

 Control parameters
Status parameters

1 9 5 SSPD RPOS CSREF RCS

Bit7 1:series spindle controllable function enabled (series spindle The slave ID number of the
spindle 1~3 is 11~13) , it is necessary to restart；
0: Series spindle controllable function disabled (analogy spindle), it is necessary to restart.
Bit3 1: Spindle position function is valid (When it is enabled, the mechinial releasing/clamping
interlocking operaton is performed before/after the spindle is positioned);
0: Spindle position function is invalid.
Bit1 1: Change to position mode, the axis do return REF.
0: Change to position mode, the axis does not return REF.
Bit0 1: Cs function of spindle valid, power on
0: Cs function of spindle is: invalid, power on

353
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

1 6 4 Spindle shifting M code

Spindle CS shifts the M code [Setting value +1 is the M code of the function releasing].
Note 1: When the spindle positioning function is enabled that is regarded as the M code of the
spindle positioning method shifting.
Note 2: The setting value should be performed based upon compiled CS shifting M code in the
ladder diagram.
Note 3: The setting value is disabled when it is less than 6, in this case, the CS axis shifting will
not perform the coordinate system clearing.

 Function description（Standard PLC program definition）

① The system stops the detection spindle when executing the M14, simultaneously, output the
spindle releasing signal; the spindle is then converted into positioning mode after confirming
the spindle is released; the spindle is clamped after shifted.
② When the spindle is at the positioning mode, the arbitrary angle positioning based upon the
axis address command can be performed by G00 command. Firstly output the spindle
releasing signal when the position is performed, confirm that the spindle positions after
releasing; output the spindle clamping signal after moves to the specified position, the
positioning procedure is completed after confirming the spindle clamping.
③ The system will output the spindle releasing signal when executing M15; shift the spindle to
the controllable mode after confirming that the spindle is released, the shifting is then
performed.
④ Firstly set the Cs axis function before setting the spindle positioning function. When the
positioning function setting is enabled, only the positioning operation can be performed
instead of using the relevant function to the Cs contour control.
⑤ When the spindle positioning function is enabled, there are relevant operations between the
spindle clamping and releasing before/after positioning. Therefore, the spindle clamping
Ⅲ

equipment should be matched with the machine tool.

Connection

2.9.12 External Cycle Start & Feed Hold

 Relevant signal (defined by standard PLC program)
ST: External cycle start signal, whose function is the same with the CYCLE START key on the
machine panel;
SP: External feed hold signal, whose function is the same with the FEED HOLD key on the
machine panel, and it shares an interface with SAGT(safety door detect) signal.

 Signal diagnosis
Signal SP ST
Diagnosis address X9.1 X9.0
Interface pin CN78.6 CN78.7

 Signal connection
The interior circuit of SP/ST signal is shown in Fig. 2-48:

354
 Chapter 2 Definition and Connection of Interface Signal

Machine System
side side

Input
singnal

Fig. 2-48
 Control parameter
Bit parameter
1 7 2 MST MSP
Bit 6 =1: External cycle start signal (ST) is invalid;
=0: External cycle start signal (ST) is valid;
Bit 5 =1: External stop signal (SP) is invalid;
=0: External stop signal (ST) is valid; the external feed hold switch is needed,
otherwise, “Feed hold” is displayed.

 External connection circuit

The external connection circuit of SP, ST signals is shown in Fig. 2-49:
+24V
GSK980TDi

Normal-close contact without lock

SP

Ⅲ
Connection
ST

CN61 socket
Fig. 2-49

2.9.13 Cooling Control

 Relevant signal (defined by standard PLC program)

Type Sign Interface Address Function Remark

Output signal M08 CN62.1 Y0.0 Cooling control output
M08 Cooing ON
Command format
M09 Cooling OFF

 Signal connection
Its internal circuit is shown in Fig. 2-50:

355
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

Fig. 2-50 M08 internal circuit

 Function description (defined by standard PLC program)

M09 is active, i.e. M08 is inactive, after CNC power on. To execute M08, M08 output is active and
cooling is turned on; to execute M09, M08 output is cancelled and cooling is turned off.
Note 1: M08 output is cancelled at CNC emergency stop.
Note 2: Whether M08 is cancelled is set by BIT3 of the bit parameter No.009 when CNC is reset.
When Bit1=0, M08 output is cancelled as CNC is reset;
When Bit1=1, M08 output is not cancelled as CNC is reset;
Note 3: There is no corresponding output signal for M09, and M08 output is cancelled if M09 is executed.

Note 4: The cooling can be controlled by the key on operation panel, see details in OPERATION.

2.9.14 Lubricating Control

 Relevant signal (defined by standard PLC program)
Type Sign Interface Address Function Remark
Output signal M32 CN62.2 Y0.1 Lubricating control output
Lubricating position
Input signal LUBS CN61.33 X2.4
detection signal
Ⅲ

Command M32 Lubricating ON

Connection

format M33 Lubricating OFF

 Signal connection
The internal circuit is shown in Fig. 2-51:

Fig. 2-51 M32 circuit

 Control parameter
PLC state parameter
K 1 0 RSJG

RSJG =1: when is pressed, CNC does not close M03, M04, M08, M32 output signal.

=0: when is pressed, CNC closes M03, M04, M08, M32 output signal.

356
 Chapter 2 Definition and Connection of Interface Signal

K 1 6 LUBS LUBCK M32A

M32A =1: output lubricating in starting the system when the automatic lubricating is valid
=0: do not output lubricating in starting the system when the automatic lubricating is valid
PLC value
LUBCK =1: Detection with low lubricating position
=0: Without detection with low lubricating position
LUBS =1: Alarm with low lubricating position and low level
=0: Alarm with low lubricating position and high signal
D T 1 3 MANLUBT
Time for manual lubricating ON (ms) (0: lubricating time is not limited);
D T 1 6 AUTOLUBMT
Automatic lubricating time (0～2147483647ms)
D T 1 7 AUTOLUBT
Automatic lubricating interval time (0～2147483647ms)

 Function description
The lubricating defined by standard PLC program for this GSK980TDi system has two types:
Non-automatic and automatic lubricating, which are set by parameter:
DT17 =0: Non-automatic lubricating (same as version before)
DT17>0: Automatic lubricating, lubricating time DT17 and lubricating interval time DT16
available

1. Manual lubricating function

Press on the machine operator panel and the system executes the lubricating output,
pressing it again and the system cancels the output. Execute M32 and the system executes the

Ⅲ
output; execute M33 and the system stops it.

Connection
DT13>1: the system executes the timed lubricating output, and the output is executed by

pressing , and is cancelled when the output exceeds the one set by DT13. After the system
executes M32, the lubricating output is executed within the time set by DT13 and it is cancelled.
Execute M33 in the time set by No. 112 and the output is cancelled.

2. Automatic lubricating
When K16.2 is set to 1, the system executes the lubricating in the time set by DT17, and then
stops the output. After it keeps the stop in the time set by DT16, it executes the lubricating again

repetitively, and executes the cycle in turn. In automatic lubricating, M32, M33, on the machine
panel are valid, and the lubricating time is the one set by DT17.
Note 1: The lubricating output is disabled in emergency stop;
Note 2: K No.0.10 Bit1 sets whether the lubricating output is cancelled in reset:
Bit1＝0: the lubricating output is disabled in reset;
Bit1＝1: the lubricating output remains unchanged in reset.
Note 3: The lubricating position detectiong signal is duplicatedly usable with DEC4, therefore, when the
system uses the DEC4 signal, it is better to set the disabled lubricating position detection.

357
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

2.9.15 Chuck Control

 Relevant signal (defined by standard PLC program)
DIQP: Chuck control input signal
DOQPJ: Inner chuck clamping output/outer chuck releasing output signal
DOQPS: Inner chuck releasing output/outer chuck clamping output signal
NQPJ: Inner chuck clamping in-position/outer chuck releasing in-position signal, sharing a
common interface with T08, M42I
WQPJ: Inner chuck releasing in-position/outer chuck clamping in-position signal, sharing a
common interface with T07, M41I

Note 1: The key on the operation panel of GSK980TDi can replace DIQP input signal, and the
diagnosis address is X0026.6.

 Signal diagnosis
Signal DIQP NQPJ WQPJ DOQPJ DOQPS
Diagnosis address X0.2 X3.4 X3.3 Y1.4 Y1.5
Interface pin CN61.3 CN61.40 CN61.41 CN62.13 CN62.14

 Control parameter
K 1 2 RCKC CCHU NYQP SLSP SLQP
SLQP =1: Chuck control function is active;
= 0: Chuck control function is inactive;
SLSP =1: Check chuck clamping when the chuck function is active;
0: Does not check chuck clamping when the chuck function is active; if chuck is not
clamping, the spindle is disabled and an alarm is issued.
NYQP =1: Outer chuck mode; NQPJ is outer chuck releasing signal, WQPJ is outer chuck
Ⅲ

clamping signal
=0: Inner chuck mode; NQPJ is inner chuck clamping signal, WQPJ is inner chuck
Connection

releasing signal
CCHU =1: Check chuck in-position signal.
=0: Does not check chuck in-position signal.
RCKC =1: External chuck control is active during program running;
=0: External chuck control is inactive during program running;
D T 1 4
Chuck clamping command (M12) execution time (ms)
D T 1 5
Chuck released command (M13) execution time (ms)
DT0018
DT18 >0: Chuck clamping and releasing signals are pulse output, the pulse width is set by
DT18
=0: Chuck clamping and releasing signals are level output

 Signal connection
The circuit of DOQPJ/DOQPS is shown in Fig. 2-52:

358
 Chapter 2 Definition and Connection of Interface Signal

Fig. 2-52

 Sequence
①When SLQP=1, SLSP=0, NYQP=0, CCHU=1, CNC chooses inner chuck mode, and chuck
in-position signal detecting is active:
DOQPS: chuck releasing output; WQPJ: releasing in-position signal；
DOQPJ: chuck clamping output; NQPJ: clamping in-position signal.
DOQPJ and DOQPS output high resistance at power on, when CNC detects that the chuck input
signal DIQP is active for the 1st time, DOQPJ is connected to 0V and chuck is clamped.
After M12 is executed, DOQPS (pin 14 of CN62) outputs high resistance, DOQPJ(pin 13 of
CN62) outputs 0V, chuck is clamped and CNC waits for NQPJ signal to be in-position.
After M13 is executed, DOQPJ (pin 13 of CN62) outputs high resistance, DOQPS(pin 14 of
CN62) outputs 0V, chuck is released and CNC waits for WQPJ signal to be in-position.

Input signal:

Output signal:

Ⅲ
Input signal:

Connection
Output signal:

Input signal:

Fig. 2-53 (Chuck clamping, releasing signals are level output)

②When SLQP=1, SLSP=0, NYQP=1, CCHU=1, CNC chooses outer chuck mode, and chuck
in-position signal detecting is active:
DOQPS: chuck clamping output; WQPJ: clamping in-position signal;
DOQPJ: chuck releasing output; NQPJ: releasing in-position signal.
DOQPJ and DOQPS output high resistance at power on, when CNC detects that the chuck input
signal DIQP is active for the 1st time, DOQPS is connected to 0V and chuck is clamped.
After M12 is executed, DOQPS (CN62.14) outputs 0V, DOQPJ(CN62.13) outputs high
resistance, chuck is clamped and CNC waits for WQPJ signal to be in-position.
After M13 is executed, DOQPJ (CN62.13) outputs 0V, DOQPS(CN62.14) outputs high
resistance, chuck is released and CNC waits for NQPJ signal to be in-position.

359
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

Fig. 2-54 Chuck clamping, releasing signals are level output

nd
As the 2 chuck input is active, DOQPS outputs 0V, chuck is released. The chuck
clamping/releasing signal is output alternatively, i.e. the output is changed each chuck input signal is
active.
③The interlock between the chuck and the spindle
When SLQP=1, SLSP=0, M3 or M4 is active, the alarm is issued if M13 is executed and the
output is unchanged.
When SLQP=1, SLSP=0, CCHU=1, if M12 is executed in MDI or Auto mode, CNC does not
execute next code till it detects the chuck clamping in-position signal is active. When the chuck
input signal DIQP is active in Manual mode, the panel spindle CW, CCW key are inactive till it
Ⅲ

detects the chuck clamping in-position signal is active. In spindle running or auto cycle processing,
DIQP input signal is inactive. And DOQPS, DOQPJ is held on at CNC reset and emergency stop.
Connection

2.9.16 Tailstock Control

 Relevant signal (defined by standard PLC program)
DOTWJ: Tailstock forward output signal
DOTWS: Tailstock backward output signal
DITW: Tailstock input signal, DITW and BDT share a common interface.

Note: For GSK980TDi, can replace DITW input signal, and the diagnosis address is X0026.5.

 Signal diagnosis
Signal DITW DOTWJ DOTWS
Diagnosis address X0.4 Y2.5 Y2.6
Interface pin CN61.5 CN61.34 CN61.35

360
 Chapter 2 Definition and Connection of Interface Signal

 Control parameter
State parameter
K 1 3 RTSC SPTW SLTW
SLTW =1: Tailstock function active.
=0: Tailstock function inactive.
SPTW =1: No interlock between spindle rotation and tailstock advancing and retracting, tailstock
may be moved regardless of the spindle, or spindle may run regardless of tailstock;
=0: Interlock between spindle rotation and tailstock advancing and retracting, tailstock
retraction disabled as spindle is running, spindle disabled if tailstock does not
advance.
RTSC =1: External tailstock control is active when a program runs.
=0: External tailstock control is inactive when a program runs

 Signal connection
The tailstock circuit is shown in Fig. 2-55:

Fig. 2-55

Ⅲ
 Sequence (defined by standard PLC program)

Connection
The sequence of tailstock is shown in Fig. 2-56:

Input signal DITW

Output signal DOTWJ

Output signal DOTWS

Fig. 2-56 Tailstock sequence

Tailstock advancing (DOTWJ) and retracting(DOTWS) are both inactive when power on; when
the tailstock input (DITW) is active for the 1st time, tailstock advancing is active; when it is active for
the 2nd time, tailstock retracting is active, so the DOTWJ/ DOTWS signal interlock is output
alternatively, i.e. The output changes each time the DITW signal is active. If M10 is executed, DOTWJ
(CN62.34) outputs 0V and tailstock advances; if M11 is executed, DOTWS (CN62.35) outputs 0V and
tailstock retracts.
DITW signal is inactive as spindle is running. If M11 is executed, alarm will be issued, and its

361
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

output are held on. And DOTWS, DOTWJ outputs are held on at CNC reset or emergency stop.

2.9.17 Low Pressure Detection

 Relevant signal (defined by standard PLC program)
PRES: Low pressure alarm detection signal, sharing a common interface with TCP.

 Signal diagnosis
Signal PRES
Diagnosis address X0.6
Interface pin CN61.7

 Control parameters
State parameter
K 1 4 SPB3 PB3
PB3 =0: Low pressure detection inactive.
=1: Low pressure detection active.
SPB3 =0: Low pressure alarm issued when PRES is connected with +24V.
=1: Low pressure alarm issued when PRES is connected with 0V.
PLC data parameter
D T 0 2 PEALMTIM
PEALMTIM: Waiting time before low pressure alarm(0~60000ms)

 Function description
①When PB3=1 and SPB3=0, PRES is connected to +24V, which is confirmed to be low pressure
alarm by CNC;
Ⅲ

②When PB3=1 and SPB3=1, PRES is connected to 0V, which is confirmed to be low pressure
Connection

alarm by CNC;
③When low pressure alarm detection function is selected, once CNC detects the low pressure
alarm signal PRES to be active, and the signal holding time is over the setting by the data parameter
No.069 alarm is issued by CNC. And the axis feed is held, spindle is stopped, cycle start is disabled,

the alarm may be cancelled by pressing key or cutting off power;

2.9.18 Hydraulic Control

 Related signal（defined by the standard PLC program）
HPST: hydraulic control output signal

 Signal diagnosis
Signal HPST
Diagnosis address Y3.1
Interface pin CN62.38

362
 Chapter 2 Definition and Connection of Interface Signal

 Control parameter
PLC state parameter
K 1 4 HPST
PB3 =0: the hydraulic control function is disabled.
=1: the hydraulic control function is enabled.

 Function description

① When the hydraulic control function is enabled, pressing can control HPST output to
start the hydraulic motor.

② In non-run, the spindle stop with the speed 0, pressing can disable HPST output.
③ When the hydraulic control function enables and the hydraulic motor is started, the system
alarm, at the time, the spindle cannot rotate.

2.9.19 Safety Door Detection

 Relevant signal
SAGT: For safety door detection, sharing a common interface with SP signal
SLK: Defense door lock control output. Only GSK980TDi-H is enabled.
Note: SLK defense door controllable function. Only GSK980TDi-H is enabled.

 Signal diagnosis
Signal SAGT SLK
Diagnosis address X0.0 Y2.7
Interface pin CN61.1 CN62.36
 Control parameter

Ⅲ
Connection
 PLC status parameters
K 1 4 SLK SGSP SPB4 PB4
PB4 =0: Protection door detection function is invalid;
=1: Protection door detection function is valid;
SPB4 =0: When SAGT is at low level (disconnect with +24V), the protection door is closed;
=1: When SAGT is at high level (connected with +24V), the protection door is closed;
SGSP =0: Spindle is disabled when the protection door is open;
=1: Spindle is not disabled when the protection door is open;
SLK =0: (980TDi-H) defense door disabled.
=1: (980TDi-H) defense door enabled.
PLC data parameter
D T 2 8
Delay the controllable time (ms) of the defense door close

 Function description (defined by standard PLC program)

① When PB4＝1, SPB4＝0, CNC confirms that the safety door is closed as SAGT is connected
to 0V;
② When PB4＝1, SPB4＝1, CNC confirms that the safety door is closed as SAGT is connected
to +24V;

363
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

③ In Auto mode, if CNC detects the safety door is open, alarm is issued as cycle starts;
④ In Auto running, if CNC detects the safety door is open, the axis feed is held, and alarm is
issued by CNC;
⑤ The safety door detection function is only active in Auto mode;
⑥ When the defense door lock function is enabled, in the Auto/MDI mode, the program should
be at the dwell state by opening the door lock pressing the “safety door” button on the panel.
Firstly close the spindle and cooling pressing the defense door lock button on the panel; the
defense door lock output when detecting that the spindle rotation speed is zero; in this case,
the defense door can be opened. The feed dwells when opening the lock by M18, the others
are consistent with the buttons on the button.
⑦ The spindle or cooling will not be closed in Manual/MPG mode.
⑧ Defense door lock controllable output, close the door lock controllable output after delaying
the DT28 setting time. When the defense door becomes close state from the open state, the
door lock controllable outputs are entirely closed regardless of the DT28 timing is performed
or not.

2.9.20 CNC Macro Variables

 Relevant signal
Macro output signal: standard PLC defines 5 macro output interfaces #1100～#1105；
Macro input signal: standard PLC defines 16 macro output interfaces #1000～#1015
Ⅲ

 Signal diagnosis
Connection

Macro variable #1105 #1104 #1103 #1102 #1101 #1100

number
Diagnosis address Y3.7 Y3.6 Y3.5 Y3.4 Y3.3 Y3.2

Macro variable #1007 #1006 #1005 #1004 #1003 #1002 #1001

number
Diagnosis address X0.7 X0.6 X0.5 X0.4 X0.3 X0.2 X0.1

Macro variable #1015 #1014 #1013 #1012 #1011 #1010 #1009

number
Diagnosis address X1.7 X1.6 X1.5 X1.4 X1.3 X1.2 X1.1

 Function description (defined by standard PLC program)

U00～U05 signal output may be changed if macro variable ＃1100～＃1105 are assigned. If
they are assigned for “1”, it outputs 0V, if they are assigned for “0”, it turns off their output signals.
Detect the macro variable ＃1000～＃1015 values (input signal state), they may be used for
various processing if combined with other transfer judgment macro code.

364
 Chapter 2 Definition and Connection of Interface Signal

2.9.21 External Override

 Related signals
Type Sign Interface Address Function Remark
CN67.1 FOV0 X29.0 Feed override wave-band switch 0
CN67.6 FOV1 X29.1 Feed override wave-band switch 1
CN67.2 FOV2 X29.2 Feed override wave-band switch 2
CN67.5 FOV3 X29.3 Feed override wave-band switch 3
Input
signal
CN66.1 SOV0 X29.4 Spindle override wave-band switch 0
CN66.6 SOV1 X29.5 Spindle override wave-band switch 1
CN66.2 SOV2 X29.6 Spindle override wave-band switch 2
CN66.5 SOV3 X29.7 Spindle override wave-band switch 3

 Related parameters
PLC state parameter
K 1 6 ROVI SOVI
ROVI =0: External feedrate override does not inverse.
=1: External feedrate override inverses.
SOVI =0: External feedrate override switch is disabled.
=1: External feedrate override switch is enabled.
 Function description
1. When the external feedrate override switch is selected, the button on the panel is disabled.
2. When the external feedrate override inverses, the system changes the direction of the
override regulation.

Ⅲ
2.9.22 External MPG

Connection
 Related signals
PLC Address
CN31(MPG) Function Remark
address character
5 X6.0 EHDX X MPG
6 X6.1 EHDY Y MPG
8 X6.2 EHDZ Z MPG
Applied
19 X7.0 EHD4 4th MPG
toPSG-100-05E/L,
7 X7.1 EHD5 5th MPG
ZSSY2080 MPG
9 X6.3 EMP0 Increment ×1
22 X6.4 EMP1 Increment ×10
23 X6.5 EMP2 Increment ×100
11, 12, 13 GND
14,15 +5V
17,18 +24V
 Related parameters
State parameter

365
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

0 0 1 MPG
Bit3 =0: Step working mode.
=1: MPG working mode.
PLC status parameters
K 1 6 SINC
SINC =0: When the system increment is 0.1μ, gear ×1000 in MPG and STEP mode is valid;
=1: When the system increment is 0.1μ, gear ×1000 in MPG and STEP mode is invalid;
K 2 0 DBMPG1 DBMPG0
DBMPG 0 Dual-MPG function selection bit 0; 00: Disabled 01: Enabled, as well the MPG
1 fixes the X axis and the MPG 2 fixes the Z axis, the shared step-length can be selected;
DBMPG 1 Dual-MPG function selection bit 1; 10: It is enabled and its panel button is only
enabled by MPG 1; external MPG input is only enabled by MPG 2.
 Function description
① MPG/STEP mode ×1000-gear selection is disabled. When x1000-gearis selected before
modifying the parameter, the system automatically changes into ×100-gear;
② When the external MPG, its axis selection does not lock, that is, the axis selection of MPG is
disabled, the system changes to the non-axis selection state.
③ When the external MPG axis selection and gear selection input are enabled, the axis selection
on the panel and the gear selection keys are disabled; when the external MPG axis selection and
gear selection input are disabled, the axis selection on the panel and the gear selection keys are
enabled and self-locked.
④ When the dual-MPG is enabled, which can be selected the dual-MPG controllable mode by
Ⅲ

parameters K20.1 and K20.0.

⑤ When K20.1=0 K20.0=1, MPG 1 fixes the controllable X axis, MPG 2 fixes the controllable Z
Connection

axis; the step-length values of two MPGs are identical, which can be adjusted by step-length on
the panel or external step-length input signal.
⑥ When K20.1=1 K20.0=0, the panel MPG axis selection or step-length button only can be
controlled the MPG 1, and the external MPG input signal can be controlled the MPG 2.

2.9.23 Tri-color Lamp

 Relevant signals and function definition (standard PLC program)
Signal Signal
Sign Address Function
type interface
Yellow— normal state (non-running,
CLPY CN62.31 Y2.2
Output non-alarm state)
signal CLPG CN62.32 Y2.3 Green—running state
CLPR CN62.33 Y2.4 Red—alarm state

366
 Chapter 2 Definition and Connection of Interface Signal

2.9.24 Extended M Function

 Relevant signals（standard PLC program）
Signal interface Address Address characters Function
CN62.40 Y3.3 EMOT1 Extended M function signal 1
CN62.41 Y3.4 EMOT2 Extended M function signal 2

 Relevant commands
M34 Extended M function signal 1（EMOT1）outputs
M35 Extended M function signal 1（EMOT1）closes output
M36 Extended M function signal 2（EMOT2）outputs
M37 Extended M function signal 2（EMOT2）closes output
 Control parameters
PLC parameters
K 1 8 EXTM RSTM
EXTM =0:extended M function is invalid.
=1:extended M function is valid.
RSTM =0:extended M function closes output when emergency stop, reset.
=1:extended M function remains output when emergency stop, reset.
 Function explanation
1. When M34 is executed, extended M function 1 (EMOT1) outputs; when M35 is done, its output is
closed.
2. When M36 is executed, extended M function 2 (EMOT2) outputs; when M37 is done, its output is
closed.
3. Whether extended M function output is closed is set by K18.6 when emergency stop, reset.

Ⅲ
2.9.25 HOLD Control

Connection
 Relevant signals（standard PLC program）
Signal Address Address Function
interface characters
CN62.03 Y0.2 HOLD HOLD release output

 Control parameter
PLC state parameter
K 1 8 HOLD
HOLD =0:HOLD release control is invalid.
=1:HOLD release control is valid.
 Function
1. After power-on, there is no emergency stop alarm or servo spindle alarm and the system delays 4S,
HOLD signal is output to release HOLD.
2. HOLD signal is closed when an emergency stop alarm or servo spindle alarm occurs.

367
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

2.9.26 Handle Interrupt

 Control parameters
PLC Status parameters
K 1 9 HDFD
HDFD =0: MPG interruption function is disabled in the process of the operation.
=1: MPG interruption function is enabled in the process of the operation.

MPG
0 1 2
interruption
Bit1 1:Handle interrupt is valid；
0:Handle interrupt is invalid。
 Function description
1. When the MPG interruption function is enabled, in the Edit/Auto/MDI mode, enter the MPG

interruption state by the MPG axis number on the selection panel after pressing the once,
the MPG interruption operation is then can be performed. The MPG interruption can be retracted
by pressing this button again.
2. In the Non-Edit/Auto/MDI mode, the MPG interruption state will be retreated.
3. Whether the MPG interruption is enabled that can be set by K19.5 during the operation of the
program.
4. The panel rapid traverse override can not be adjusted at the state of MPG interruption; the indicator
displays the MPG override state when the MPG override adjustment is enabled.

2.9.27 Chip-Removal Control

Ⅲ

 Relative signals
Signal Signal
Connection

Symbol Address Function description Remark

type interface
Signal CHRO+ CN62.43 Y3.6 Chip-removal CW (positive)
output CHRO- CN62.44 Y3.7 Chip-removal CCW (negative)
Command M38 Chip-removal CW (positive)
format M39 Chip-removal stop

 Relevant parameters
PLCStatus parameters
K 1 3 CHIPR
CHIPR =1: Chip-removal control enabled.
=0: Chip-removal control disabled.
 Function description
1. The reverse rotation of the chip-removal only can be performed the JOG by hand. If the
chip-removal is being rotated, firstly stop the positive rotation when the JOG reverse is performed.
2. When the chip-removal is positively rotated, press the chip-removal positive rotation by hand again,
and then it is closed.
3. Close the chip-removal rotation in the ESP resetting.

368
 Chapter 2 Definition and Connection of Interface Signal

2.9.28 Working Indicator

 Relative signals
Signal Signal
Symbol Address Function description Remark
type interface
Output Working indicator
WKLP CN62.39 Y3.2
signal output
 Relevant parameters
PLCStatus parameters
K 1 3 WKLP
WKLP =1: Working indicator control enabled.
=0: Working indicator control disabled.
 Function description

The working indicator outputs pressing once; it closes by pressing it again.

2.9.29 Gear/tool Number Display

 Signal diagnosis
Y0025 BIT7 BIT6 BIT5 BIT4 BIT3 BIT2 BIT1 BIT0
Corresponding LED1 LED1 LED1 LED1 LED0 LED0 LED0 LED0
3 2 1 1
BCD code 2 2 2 20
2
3
2
2 2 20
LED 0 displays the current tool number, BIT0~BIT3 of PLC diagnosis number Y25 are BCD code
of the current tool number; LED 1 displays the gear of the current spindle, BIT4~BIT7 of PLC
diagnosis number Y25 are BCD code of the current spindle gear and is shown below:

Ⅲ
Connection
 Function description
① When the tool count is less than 10, the gear and the tool number separately use one LED to
display.
② When the tool count is more than 10, LED 1 displays 10-digit numbers and the LED 0
displays the single digits.
③ When the gear and the tool number are displayed in time-division, that is, the gear instead of
the tool number is firstly display, the tool number instead of the gear is displayed after 1.5S, and the
system executes them like the above cycle.

2.10 Commonly Use Sign of Electricity Drawing

GSK980TDi DC24V power supply and the electromagnetic valve with power working current
separately use DC24V, and the electronic component explanations are as follows:

369
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

Name Sign Graph Name Sign Graph

Air breaker QF Contactor coil KM
contact and auxiliary
contact
transformer TC Heat relay and FR
contact
Rectifier VC Capacity C

Motor M Resistant R

Diode VD Hall switch

Electromagnetic YV Travel switch SQ

coil
Relay coil and KA Veneer socket
contact Pedal switch SA

Fuse FU
Ⅲ
Connection

370
 Chapter 3 Parameters

CHAPTER 3 PARAMETERS
The CNC bit and data parameters are described in this chapter, various functions can be set by
these parameters. The major parameter data type are listed as follows:
Data type Range
(1) Bit

(2) Bit axis 8 bit, 0 or 1

(3) Bit spindle

(4) Word

See relevant
(5) Word axis
parameters for
details
(6) Word spindle

Note: if the data type is not specified, the type is bit or word.

3.1 Parameter Description (by Sequence)

3.1.1 Bit Parameter
The state parameter is expressed as follows:

Ⅲ
Parameter No. BIT7 BIT6 BIT5 BIT4 BIT3 BIT2 BIT1 BIT0

Connection
0 0 1 *** *** *** ACS MPG PROG ISC INI
Bit4 1: Spindle analog voltage control
0: Spindle switching volume control
Bit3 1: MPG mode
0: Step mode
Bit2 1: Programming by radius
0: Programming by diameter
Bit1 1: IS-C incremental system
0: IS-B incremental system
Least input increment,
Increment system Abbreviation
least command increment
0 0.001mm,0.0001inch IS-B
1 0.0001mm, 0.00001inch IS-C
Bit0 1: Inch input
0: Metric input

0 0 2 CLK *** *** LIFJ MDITL LIFC TNRC TLIF

371
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

Bit7 1: Show clock

0: Conceal clock
Bit4 1: Tool life management group skip active
0: Tool life management group skip inactive
Bit3 1: Tool life management active in MDI mode
0: Tool life management inactive in MDI mode
Bit2 1: Tool life counting type 2, by times
0: Tool life counting type 1, by times
Bit1 1: Tool nose radius offset active
0: Tool nose radius offset inactive
Bit0 1: Tool life management active
0: Tool life management inactive

0 0 3 HTCHG *** PCOMP TCOMP CDCOMP *** *** OIM

Bit7 1: High efficiency tool-change function enabled
0: High efficiency tool-change function disabled
Bit5 1: Pitch error offset active
0: Pitch error offset inactive
Bit4 1: Tool offset by coordinate offset
0: Tool offset by move
Bit3 1: Tool compensated by the shift of coordinate system do not memorize the unexecuted tool
compensation
0: Tool compensated by the shift of coordinate system memorize the unexecuted tool
compensation
Bit0 1: Offset automatically change in metric and inch conversion
0: Offset not change in metric and inch conversion
Ⅲ

0 0 4 ABOT RDRN DECI ORC *** *** PROD SCW

Connection

Bit7 1: do not memorize absolute coordinate in power-down

0: memorize the absolute coordinate in power-down
Bit6 1: G00 is rapid traverse speed in dry run mode
0: G00 is manual feedrate in dry run mode
Bit5 1: DEC signal is high level for machine zero return
0: DEC signal is low level for machine zero return
Bit4 1: Tool offset by radius
0: Tool offset by diameter
Bit1 1: Relative position for programming in POSITION page
0: Relative position involving offset in POSITION page
Bit0 1: Inch system for min. code unit, active after repowering
0: Metric system for min. code unit, active after repowering

0 0 5 *** *** SMAL M30 *** POSRE PPD PCMD

Bit 5 1: Manual spindle gear change during the execution of S code;
0: Automatic spindle gear change during the execution of S code;
Bit 4 1: Cursor returns to the head of the program after the execution of M30;
0: Cursor does not return to the head of the program after the execution of M30;

372
 Chapter 3 Parameters

Bit 2: 1: Position recording signal PRC is used during tool setting;

0: Position recording signal PRC is not used during tool setting;
Bit 1: 1: G50 sets relative coordinate value;
0: G50 does not set relative coordinate value;
Bit 0: 1: Axial output wave is pulse;
0: Axial output wave is square;

0 0 6 *** *** *** ZM5 ZM4 ZMY ZMZ ZMX

Bit4~Bit0 1: 5th、4th、Y、Z、X zero return type C
0: 5th、4th、Y、Z、X zero return type B

0 0 7 DISP SMZ *** ZC5 ZC4 ZCY ZCZ ZCX

Bit7 1: Enter ABSOLUTE POS page after power on
0: Enter RELATIVE POS page after power on
Bit6 1: Execute the next block after all motion block exactly are executed to the in-position
0: Smooth transition between two blocks
Bit4~Bit0 1: In machine zero return, 5th、4th、Y、Z、X deceleration signal (DEC5~DEC1) and
one-revolution signal (PC5~PC1) are parallel(use one proximity switch as the deceleration
signal and zero signal)
0: In machine zero return, 5th、4th、Y、Z、X deceleration (DEC5~DEC1) and one-revolution
signal (PC5~PC1) is separately connected (need the separate deceleration signal and zero
signal)
Note: In the zero-return B method; when it is set to 0 and connected independently, it is necessary to detect the
PC signal after releasing the block during the zero-return; when it is set to 1 and connected in parallel, the PC signal
detects with block after the pressing block decelerates to zero during the zero-return method.

0 0 8 *** *** *** DIR5 DIR4 DIRY DIRZ DIRX

Ⅲ
th th
Bit4~Bit0 1: The motor’s rotation diretion of the 5 , 4 , Y, Z and X axes are positive;

Connection
0: The motor’s rotation diretion of the 5th, 4th, Y, Z and X axes are negative;
Note: The movement direction of the machine tool is inconsistent with the actual direction,
which can be modified by adjusting this parameter.
0 0 9 *** *** *** 5ALM 4ALM YALM ZALM XALM
th th
Bit4~Bit0 1: Servo not ready alarm without detection of the 5 , 4 , Y, Z or X axis.
0: Servo not ready alarm detection of the 5th, 4th, Y, Z or X axis.

0 1 0 *** *** *** CPF5 CPF4 CPF3 CPF2 CPF1

Bit0~ Bit4: Pulse frequency setting values of backlash offset (by BCD code)
The set frequency =(setting value+1) Kpps
Set frequency
CPF5 CPF4 CPF3 CPF2 CPF1
(Kpps)
0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0 0 0 1 2
0 0 0 1 0 3
0 0 0 1 1 4
0 0 1 0 0 5

373
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

0 0 1 0 1 6
0 0 1 1 0 7
0 0 1 1 1 8
0 1 0 0 0 9
0 1 0 0 1 10
0 1 0 1 0 11
0 1 0 1 1 12
0 1 1 0 0 13
0 1 1 0 1 14
0 1 1 1 0 15
0 1 1 1 1 16
1 0 0 0 0 17
1 0 0 0 1 18
1 0 0 1 0 19
1 0 0 1 1 20
1 0 1 0 0 21
1 0 1 0 1 22
1 0 1 1 0 23
1 0 1 1 1 24
1 1 0 0 0 25
1 1 0 0 1 26
1 1 0 1 0 27
1 1 0 1 1 28
1 1 1 0 0 29
1 1 1 0 1 30
1 1 1 1 0 31
Ⅲ

1 1 1 1 1 32
Connection

0 1 1 BDEC BD8 *** *** NORF ZNIK REFC2 ***

Bit7 1: Backlash offset type B, the offset data are output by ascending or descending type and the
set frequency is inactive;
0: Backlash offset type A, the offset data are output by the set frequency (by bit parameter
No.010) or 1/8 of it.
Bit6 1: Backlash offset is done by the 1/8 of the set frequency
0: Backlash offset is done by the set frequency
Bit3 1: Manual machine zero return inactive
0: Manual machine zero return active
Bit2 1: Direction key locked during zero return, homing continues to end by pressing direction key
once;
0: Direction key unlocked, which is held on during zero return
Bit1 1:Ref.C mode, the feeding slowdown when pressing down switch, reverse after decelerating to
zero.
0:Ref.C mode, the feeding slowdown when releasing the switch, reverse after decelerating to
zero.

374
 Chapter 3 Parameters

0 1 2 APRS WSFT DOFSI *** EAL *** HDINT ISOT

Bit7 1: Automatic ABSOLUTE set after reference return,;
0: ABSOLUTE not automatically set after reference return
Bit6 1: Workpiece coordinate offset active, defined by offset No.000
0: Workpiece coordinate offset inactive
Bit5 1: Trial tool setting active
0: Trial tool setting inactive
Bit3 1: Program editing allowed during CNC alarming
0: Program editing unallowed during CNC alarming
Bit1 1:Handle interrupt is valid (power on)
0:Handle interrupt is invalid (power on)
Bit0 1: Prior to machine zero return after power on, manual rapid traverse active
0: Prior to machine zero return after power on, manual rapid traverse inactive

0 1 3 RTH RPH *** HW5 HW4 HWY HWZ HWX

Bit7 1: When system reset, the handle interrupt move amount is cancelled
0: When system reset, the handle interrupt move amount is not cancelled
Bit6 1: When MPG feedrate exceeds the rapid movement speed,the exceeding part is not ignored
and saved in CNC
0: When MPG feedrate exceeds the rapid movement speed,the exceeding part is ignored
and saved in CNC
Bit4~Bit0 1: Coordinates increase in 5th, 4th, Y, Z or X MPG (CCW) rotation
0: Coordinates increase in 5th, 4th, Y, Z or X MPG (CW) rotation

0 1 4 *** *** *** ZRS5 ZRS4 ZRSY ZRSZ ZRSX

Bit 4, Bit3, Bit2, Bit1, Bit0

Ⅲ
1: 5th, 4th, Y, Z, X have the machine zeroes. The system needs to check the deceleration signal
and zero signal in executing the machine zero return

Connection
0: 5th, 4th, Y, Z, X have no machine zeroes. The system does not check the deceleration signal
and zero signal till it returns to the zero of machine coordinate in executing the machine zero return

0 1 7 SCRD *** RSCD *** TSD QNI TSL TS1

Bit7 1:Coordinate system is stored before power-off;
0: Coordinate system is not stored before power-off; the default system is set by G54 after
power-on;
Bit5 1: Coordinate system is set by G54 after reset;
0: Coordinate system is not changed after reset;
Bit3 1: Movement direction discrimination is valid during offset measurement 4 point input;
0: Movement direction discrimination is invalid during offset measurement 4 point input;
Bit2 1: Tool offset number is set through G signal;
0: Tool offset number is set through the current cursor;
Bit1 1 Tool offset measurement detection signal is valid at low level;
0: Tool offset measurement detection signal is valid at high level;
Bit0 1:Tool offset automatic measurement detection signal 1 point input;
0: Tool offset automatic measurement detection signal 4-point input;

375
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

1 7 2 *** MST MSP MOT ESP *** LZR MOTDEC

Bit6 1: External cycle start signal (ST) inactive)
0: External cycle start signal (ST) active
Bit5 1: External SP signal inactive
0: External SP signal active with external dwell switch needed, otherwise CNC shows “Pause”.
Bit4 1: Not detect software stroke limit
0: Detect software stroke limit
Bit3 1: Emergency stop inactive
0: Emergency stop active
Bit1 1: Software limit is inactive after power-on and before machine zero return;
0: Software limit is active after power-on and before machine zero return;
Bit0 1: When Arriving stored travel position, CNC is stopped slowly
0: When Arriving stored travel position, CNC is stopped immediately

1 7 4 PARTSET *** TRPMO TRP KEY1 THDTLM THDA CKSPD

D OD
Bit7 1:Continue to run part program while current machining workpiece counts reach to max.
counts.and machining workpiece counts accumulate
0:Continue to run part program while current machining workpiece counts reach to max.
counts.and machining workpiece counts restart
Bit5 1:Screw repair mode use follow the spindle with encoder
0:Screw repair mode use interpolation with servo spindle
Bit4 1:Thread repair function is valid
0:Thread repair function is invalid
Bit3 1: Program switch ON at power on
0: Program switch OFF at power on
Bit2 1:Thread tailing mode tailling according angle;
Ⅲ

0:Thread tailing mode rapid tailing.

Connection

Bit1 1:Thread cut is exp. acc&dec

0:Thread cut is lin. acc&dec
Bit0 1:Whether detect the spindle speed is too slow in thread cutting don't detect\
0:Whether detect the spindle speed is too slow in thread cutting do detect

1 7 5 SPFD SAR THDA VAL5 VAL4 VALY VALZ VALX

Bit7 1: In cutting feed, do not permit the spindle stopping rotation; the spindle stops, the feed also
stops when the system appears No.404 alarm cutting
0: In cutting feed, permit the spindle stops rotation; the spindle stops rotation, but the feed
does not stop
Bit6 1: Detect spindle SAR signal prior to cutting
0: Not detect spindle SAR signal prior to cutting
Bit5 1: Thread machining is the exponential acceleration/deceleration
0: Thread machining is the linear acceleration/deceleration

Bit4 1: 5th movement key is positive, is negative

0: 5th movement key is positive, is negative

376
 Chapter 3 Parameters

Bit3 1: 4th movement key is positive, is negative

0: 4th movement key is positive， is negative

Bit2 1: Y movement key is positive， is negative

0: Y movement key is positive， is negative

Bit1 1: Z movement key is positive， is negative

0: Z movement key is positive， is negative

Bit0 1: X movement key is positive， is negative

0: X movement key is positive， is negative

1 8 0 NAT *** *** *** DISPC CUSTOM MLKEY SPOS

Bit7 1: Function ATAN, ASIN range is 90.0～270.0;
0: Function ATAN, ASIN range is -90.0～90.0
Bit3 1:Boot dispaly if custom page setted to display custom page
0:Boot dispaly if custom page setted to display fault page
Bit2 1:Display custom page display
0:Display custom page hide
Bit1 1:Multi-letter key input mode shift mode only\
0:Multi-letter key input mode repeat keystroke or shift mode
Bit0 1: DIS TO GO displayed in POS&PRG page
0: RELATIVE POS displayed in POS&PRG page

Ⅲ
1 8 1 RLC MRC ZCL CLMDI MCL M30&MDI DDP LCNMD

Connection
Bit7 1: G52 local coordinate system is cancelled after reset;
0: G52 local coordinate system is not cancelled after reset;
Bit6 1: G52 local coordinate system is cancelled after the execution of M30, M02;
0: G52 local coordinate system is not cancelled after the execution of M30, M02;
Bit5 1: G52 local coordinate system is cancelled after reference point return;
0: G52 local coordinate system is not cancelled after reference point return;
Bit4 1:When system reset,the program block of MDI are deleted
0:When system reset,the program block of MDI are not deleted
Bit3 1: Blocks edited in MDI mode are deleted after reset;
0: Block edited in MDI mode are not deleted after reset;
Bit2 1:After the execution of M02, M30,the program block of MDI are not deleted
0:After the execution of M02, M30,the program block of MDI are deleted
Bit1 1:The angle in CHF/CNR measurement-programe-inputing function was specified by
Supplementary one
0:The angle in CHF/CNR measurement-programe-inputing function was specified by Nornal
format
Bit0 1: In linear chamfering, L means the length between chamfering point and cross point;
0: In linear chamfering, L means the length of chamfering;

377
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

1 8 3 *** *** *** MZR5 MZR4 MZRY MZRZ MARX

Bit4 1: for 5th, press key to execute the machine zero return

0:for 5th, press key to execute the machine zero return

Bit3 1: for 4th, press to execute the machine zero return

0: for 4th, press to execute the machine zero return

Bit2 1: for Y, press to execute the machine zero return

0: for Y, press to execute the machine zero return

Bit1 1:for Z, press to execute the machine zero return

0: for Z, press to execute the machine zero return

Bit0 1: for X, press to execute the machine zero return

0: for X, press to execute the machine zero return

1 8 4 *** *** *** *** *** L2 L1 L0

Bit0, Bit1, Bit2: Language selection:
Language Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
Chinese 0 0 0
English 0 0 1
Portuguese 0 1 0
Spanish 0 1 1
Ⅲ

Russian 1 1 0
Connection

1 8 5 SK0 SKF AEO *** *** *** PRPD PLA

Bit7 1: Skip input active as G31 signal is 0
0: Skip input active as G31 signal is 1
Bit6 1: Feedrate override per minute or dry run active for G31
0: Feedrate override per minute or dry run inactive for G31
Bit5 1: Input active if G36, G37 (XAE, ZAE) signal is 0
0: Input active if G36, G37 (XAE, ZAE) signal is 1
Bit1 1: Axis rapid traverse rate of PLC by input value
0: Axis rapid traverse rate of PLC by parameter value (X axis: No.022；Z axis:No.023；Y
axis:No.134)
Bit0 1: PLC axis control active, active after repowering
0: PLC axis control inactive, active after repowering
1 8 6 RTORI SRS *** *** *** RTCRG *** ***
Bit7 1: In executing M29, the spindle executes the machine zero return
0: In executing M29, the spindle does not execute the machine zero return
Bit6 1: The spindle selection signal is RGTSPn in the multiple spindle rigid tapping
0: The spindle selection signal is SWSn in the multiple spindle rigid tapping

378
 Chapter 3 Parameters

Bit2 1: In rigid tapping cancel, do not wait for G61.0 to be 0 in executing the next block
0: In rigid tapping cancel, wait for G61.0 to be 0 in executing the next block

1 8 7 IS1 IS0 *** *** *** ROS ROT

[Data type]:Bit axis
BIT7, BIT6:set increment system of each axis.00:accordance with increment system of the system.
01:IS-A，10:IS-B；11:IS-C。
Bit1, Bit0 : 00: set the additional axis to the linear axis; 01: set the additional axis to the rotary axis
（A type）;11: set the additional axis to the rotary axis (B type); 10: set the additional
axis to be invalid.
Note: The parameter is invalid to setting of X, Z axis.

1 8 8 RFCK RRT *** *** *** RRL RAB ROA

[Data type]:bit axis
Bit7 1:G28 running every time to check the PC signal
0:G28 running only first to check the PC signal
Bit6 1:Zero return D mode is used when the additional axis is a rotary axis;
0:Zero return A, B, C mode is used when the additional axis is a rotary axis (power-on
again).
Bit2 1:The relative coordinate cycle function is valid when the additional axis is rotary;
0:The relative coordinate cycle function is invalid when the additional axis is rotary(power-on
again).
Bit1 1:The rotation direction is based on that of sign when the additional axis is rotary;
0:The rotation direction is based on the nearby principle when the additional axis is rotary.
Bit0 1:The absolute coordinate cycle function is valid when the additional axis is rotary;
0:The absolute coordinate cycle function is invalid when the additional axis is rotary
(power-on again).

Ⅲ
Note: The parameter is invalid to setting of X, Z axis.

Connection
1 8 9 CTS *** APC APZ *** *** *** ***
[Data type]:Bit axis
Bit7 1:Each servo axis didn’t connect servo drive , it is necessary to restart;
0:Each servo axis connected servo drive , it is necessary to restart.
Bit5 1:The used encoder type of each axis is absolute encoder；
0:The used encoder type of each axis is incremental encoder。
Bit4 1:When each axis matches with an absolute encoder, the mechanical position and absolute
one are shown consistent;
0:When each axis matches with an absolute encoder, the mechanical position and absolute
one are shown inconsistent.

1 9 0 *** *** *** *** LT3 LT2 *** ***

[Data type]:Bit axis
Bit3 1:Whether each axis detects the stroke 3 in memory type detect;
0:Whether each axis detects the stroke 3 in memory type is not detect.
Bit2 1:Whether each axis detects the stroke 2 in memory type detect;
0:Whether each axis detects the stroke 2 in memory type detect.

379
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

1 9 5 SSPD PLCS *** *** RPOS SRV CSREF RCS

Bit7 1:series spindle controllable function enabled (series spindle The slave ID number of the
spindle 1~3 is 11~13) , it is necessary to restart；
0: Series spindle controllable function disabled (analogy spindle), it is necessary to restart.
Bit6 1:PLC spindle rotation speed function of each axis enabled；
0:PLC spindle rotation speed function of each axis disabled。
Bit3 1:Spindle position function is valid (When it is enabled, the spindle will perform mechanical
releasing/clamping interlocking operation before/after positioning);
0:Spindle position function is invalid.
Bit2 1:Servo motor spindle function is valid ,power on；
0:Servo motor spindle function is invalid ,power on。
Bit1 1: Change to position mode,the axis do return REF.
0: Change to position mode, the axis doesn’t return REF.
Bit0 1: Cs function of spindle valid ,power on
0: Cs function of spindle is: invalid, power on

1 9 6 *** *** *** MSEN *** *** *** ***

Bit4 1: The multiple spindle control is enabled
0: The multiple spindle control is disabled
2 0 1 SNTP *** *** ECN HBR ERV *** ***
Bit7 1:Synchronization mode follow
0:Synchronization mode interpolation
Bi4 1:Whether the G81 synchronization command can be specified in the synchronization
process allow
0:Whether the G81 synchronization command can be specified in the synchronization
process prohibition
Ⅲ

Bit3 1:The system resets in the synchronization process reserve the synchronized control
Connection

0:The system resets in the synchronization process cancel the synchronization control
Bit2 1:In the synchronization procedure,in the G99 feed per revolution use the theoretical
revolving speed of workpiece\
0:In the synchronization procedure,in the G99 feed per revolution use the encoder feedback
revolving speed

CTHDN EXTRA
2 0 2 AAC *** *** AOT *** ***
OENC IO
Bit7 1:Circular screw interpolation adopts C axis interpolation mode.
0:Circular screw interpolation adopts follow spindle mode..
Bit6 1:Slope axis control enabled
0:Slope axis control disabled
Bit3 1:The soft-limit parameter of the slope axis sets to 0/1 when its axis control is enabled the
coordinate value under the rectangular coordinate system\
0:The soft-limit parameter of the slope axis sets to 0/1 when its axis control is enabled the
coordinate value under the slope coordinate system.
Bit0 1:Extended I/O unit linked is valid
0:Extended I/O unit linked is invalid\

380
 Chapter 3 Parameters

2 5 0 *** *** *** *** *** *** VERI GSKLINK

Bit1 1:System GSKLINK bus communication CRC verification enabled
0:System GSKLINK bus communication CRC verification disabled
Bit0 1: Whether the system GSKLINK bus connection is enabled
0: Whether the system GSKLINK bus connection is disabled

3.1.2 Data Parameter

0 1 5 CMRn
［Data type］ Word axis
［Data meaning］Pulse frequency multiplication coefficient
［Data range］ 1～99999999
0 1 6 CMDn
［Data type］ Word axis
［Data meaning］Pulse frequency division coefficient;
［Data range］ 1～99999999
CMR 4 * C *  Z M
Explanation: Formula of electric gear ratio:  *
CMD L ZD
δ: Least command increment;
ZM: Teeth number of pulley on leading screw side;
C: Motor encoder line number;
ZD Teeth number of pulley on motor side;
L: Screw lead

0 1 9 THDCH

Ⅲ
［Data meaning］ Run-out length in threading

Connection
［Data range］ 0～225
Thread run-out width= THDCH×0.1×screw lead

0 2 1 PSANGNT
［Data type］ Word spindle
［Data meaning］Voltage offset value when spindle max. speed analog voltage output is 10V
［Data unit］ mV
［Data range］ -2000～2000(Unit: mV)

0 2 2 RPDFn
［Data type］ Word axis
［Data meaning］Maximum rapid traverse rate of all axes
［Data unit］
Setting unit Data unit
Metric machine mm/min
Inch machine 0.1inch/min
［Data range］ 10～99999999

381
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

0 2 3 LINTn
［Data type］ Word axis
［Data meaning］ Acceleration/deceleration time constant of each axis during rapid traverse
［Data unit］ ms
［Data range］ 0~4000

0 2 6 THRDT
［Data meaning］ACC&DEC time constant of short axis in thread run-out
［Data unit］ ms
［Data range］ 0～4000

0 2 7 FEDMX
Data meaning］ Upper limits of axis cutting feed
［Data unit］
Setting unit Data unit
Metric machine mm/min
Inch machine 0.1inch/min
［Data range］
IS-B IS-C
Metric machine 10～30000 10～30000
Inch machine 5～11600 10～11600

0 2 8 THDFL
［Data meaning］ X, Z initial speed in threading (mm/min)
Ⅲ

［Data unit］
Setting unit Data unit
Connection

Metric machine mm/min

Inch machine 0.1inch/min
［Data range］
IS-B IS-C
Metric
6～8000 6～8000
machine
Inch machine 3～3000 3～3000

0 2 9 FEEDT
［Data meaning］ Exponential ACC&DEC time constant of cutting and manual feed
［Data unit］ ms
［Data range］ 0～4000

0 3 0 FEDFL
［Data meaning］ Exponential acceleration start speed and deceleration end speed in cutting
feed
［Data unit］

382
 Chapter 3 Parameters

Setting unit Data unit

Metric machine mm/min
Inch machine 0.1inch/min
［Data range］
IS-B IS-C
Metric machine 0～8000 0～8000
Inch machine 0～3000 0～3000

0 3 1 JOGSPEED
［Data meaning］ the set speed when the manual feedrate override is 100%
［Data unit］
Setting unit Data unit
Metric machine mm/min
Inch machine 0.1inch/min
［Data range］ 10～30000

0 3 2 RPDFLn
［Data type］ Word axis
［Data meaning］ Rapid traverse rate as axis rapid override is F0
［Data unit］
Setting unit Data unit
Metric machine mm/min
Inch machine 0.1inch/min
［Data range］
IS-B IS-C

Ⅲ
Metric machine 0～4000 0～4000

Connection
Inch machine 0～1500 0～1500

0 3 3 ZRNFLn
［Data type］ Word axis
［Data meaning］ Low rate as axes return to machine zero
［Data unit］
Setting unit Data unit
Metric machine mm/min
Inch machine 0.1inch/min
［Data range］

IS-B IS-C
Metric machine 6～4000 6～4000
Inch machine 3～1500 3～1500

0 3 4 BKLn
［Data type］ Word axis

383
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

［Data meaning］ backlash compensation of each axis

［Data unit］
Setting unit IS-B IS-C
Metric machine 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm
Inch machine 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch
［Data range］
Setting unit IS-B IS-C
Metric machine 0～2000 0～20000
Inch machine 0～2000 0～20000

Note : X is the diameter value.

0 3 6 SPDLC
［Data type］ Word spindle
［Data meaning］Voltage offset for 0V analog voltage output of spindle min. speed code
［Data unit］ mV
［Data range］ -1000～1000
0 3 7 GRMAX1
0 3 8 GRMAX2
0 3 9 GRMAX3
0 4 0 GRMAX4
［Data meaning］ GRMAX1, GRMAX2, GRMAX3, GRMAX4: Max. speeds of gear 1, 2, 3, 4
respectively when spindle analog voltage output is 10V (the function defined
by GSK980TDi PLC is: if the spindle automatic gearing is active, it uses the
speeds of M41, M42, M43, M44; if the automatic gearing is inactive or CNC is
Ⅲ

powered on, the gear is memorized by parameter or the gear 1 is defaulted.)

Connection

［Data unit］ r/min

［Data range］ 10～9999

0 4 1 JOGFL
［Data meaning］ Exponential ac-deceleration start speed and deceleration final speed in
manual feed
［Data unit］
Setting unit Data unit
Metric machine mm/min
Inch machine 0.1inch/min
［Data range］ 0～8000
0 4 2 SEQINC
［Data meaning］ Block No. increment for auto block No. insertion
［Data range］ 1～100

0 4 3 LOWSP
［Data meaning］ (G96) Spindle min. speed under the constant surface speed control

384
 Chapter 3 Parameters

［Data unit］ r/min

［Data range］ 0～9999

0 4 4 BRATE0
［Data meaning］ Serial communication baud rate,
［Data unit］ bit/s
［Data range］ 1200,2400,4800,9600,19200,38400 57600 115200

0 4 5 LT1X1
0 4 6 LT1Z1
［Data type］ Word axis
［Data meaning］ LT1X1（X）,LT1Z1（Z）positive max. travel，LT1X2（X）,LT1Z2（Z）negative max.
travel
［Data unit］
Setting unit IS-B IS-C
Metric machine 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm
Inch machine 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch
［Data range］ -99999999～99999999
Note: If the BIT2 of the parameter No.001 is set for diameter, the X axis value is specified by diameter; if for
radius, the X axis value is specified by radius.

0 4 7 PRSn
［Data type］ Word axis
［Data meaning］ Setting value of absolute coordinate after machine zero return
［Data unit］

Ⅲ
Setting unit IS-B IS-C
Metric input 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm

Connection
Inch input 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch
［Data range］ -99999999～99999999

0 5 1 MRCCD
［Data meaning］ Each feeding for G71, G72 rough turning cycle, which may also be changed by
program code in auto running.
［Data unit］
Setting unit IS-B IS-C
Metric input 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm
Inch input 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch
［Data range］
IS-B IS-C
Metric input 1～99999 1～999999
Inch input 1～99999 1～999999

0 5 2 MRCDT

385
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

［Data meaning］ Each retraction for G71, G72 rough turning cycle, which may also be changed
by program code in auto running.
［Data unit］
Setting unit IS-B IS-C
Metric input 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm
Inch input 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch
［Data range］ 0～99999

0 5 3 PECSCX
［Data meaning］ X retraction amount in G73, which may be also changed by program code in
auto running.
［Data unit］
Setting unit IS-B IS-C
Metric input 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm
Inch input 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch
［Data range］ -9999999～9999999

0 5 4 PECSCZ
［Data meaning］ Z axis rough turning retraction in G73, which may also be changed by program
code in auto running
［Data unit］
Setting unit IS-B IS-C
Metric input 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm
Inch input 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch
［Data range］ -9999999～9999999
Ⅲ
Connection

0 5 5 PATIM
［Data meaning］ Cycle times of G73, which may also be changed by program code in auto
running
［Data unit］ times
［Data range］ 1～9999

0 5 6 GROVE
［Data meaning］ Retraction value of Z axis in G74; retraction value of X axis in G75; a specified
value in program during automatic running can also change the setting of this
parameter;
［Data unit］
Setting unit IS-B IS-C
Metric input 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm
Inch input 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch
［Data range］ 0～99999
0 5 7 THRPT
［Data meaning］ Repetitions of G76 finish machining, which may also be changed by program

386
 Chapter 3 Parameters

code in auto running

［Data unit］ times
［Data range］ 1～99

0 5 8 THANG
［Data meaning］ Tool nose angle of G76 cycle, which may also be changed by program code in
auto running
［Data unit］ deg
［Data range］ 0～99

0 5 9 THCLM
［Data meaning］ Min. cut depth of G76 cycle, which may also be changed by program code in
auto running
［Data unit］
Setting unit IS-B IS-C
Metric input 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm
Inch input 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch
［Data range］
IS-B IS-C
Metric input 0～99999 0～999999
Inch input 0～99999 0～999999

0 6 0 THDFN
［Data meaning］ Finish allowance of G76, which may also be changed by program code in auto
running

Ⅲ
［Data unit］

Connection
Setting unit IS-B IS-C
Metric input 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm
Inch input 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch
［Data range］
IS-B IS-C
Metric input 0～99999 0～999999
Inch input 0～99999 0～999999

0 6 1 THDCUT
［Data type］ Word
［Data meaning］The default cut-in selection in G78 cycle, when the program does not specify, the
parameter value is used for the cut-in selection.
0: Equidistant in-feed; 1: Degressive in-feed.
［Data range］ 0~1

0 6 2 THDMOD
［Data type］ Word

387
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

0: Cutting edge is cut in along with the neutral cable of the thread teeth;
1: Cutting edge is cut in along the left of the thread teeth;
2: Cutting edge is cut in along the right of the thread teeth;
3: Cutting edge is cut in alternatively with left and right of the thread teeth.
［Data range］ 0~3

0 6 7 SFTREV
［Data type］ Word spindle
［Data meaning］ Output voltage of spindle gearing
［Data unit］ mV
［Data range］ 0～10000

0 6 8 SJOGREV
［Data type］ Word spindle
［Data meaning］ spindle speed in manual (MPG) mode
［Data unit］ r/min
［Data range］ 0～3000

0 6 9 ENCODER_CSE
［Data type］ Word spindle
［Data meaning］The corresponding spindle encoder number of each spindle.
0: without installing the encoder;
1: Spindle revolving signal comes from the encoder interface 1;
2: Spindle revolving signal comes from the encoder interface 2;
Ⅲ

3: Spindle revolving signal comes from the GSKLINK bus

Connection

［Data range］ 0～3

0 7 0 ENCODER_CNT
［Data type］ Word spindle
［Data meaning］ Spindle encoder pulses
［Data unit］ line/revolution
［Data range］ 100～10000

0 7 1 RESET_TIME
［Data meaning］ Output time of reset signal
［Data unit］ ms
［Data range］ 16～4080

0 7 2 SAR_DELEY
［Data meaning］ Delay detecting time of SAR signal
［Data unit］ ms

388
 Chapter 3 Parameters

［Data range］ 0～4080

0 7 3 SPMOTORMAX
［Data type］ Word spindle
［Data meaning］ Max. spindle motor clamping speed, setting value=(max. spindle motor
clamping speed/max. spindle motor speed) ×4095
［Data unit］ r/min
［Data range］ 0～4095
Setting value =（max. clamp speed of spindle/max. speed of spindle motor）×4095.

0 7 4 SPMOTORMIN
［Data meaning］ Min. spindle motor clamping speed, setting value=(min. spindle motor
clamping speed/max. spindle motor speed) ×4095
［Data unit］ r/min
［Data range］ 0～4095
Setting value =（min. clamping speed of spindle motor/max. speed of spindle motor）×4095

0 7 5 SPSPEEDLIMIT
［Data type］ Word spindle
［Data meaning］ Maximum spindle rev speed(0~6000r/min)[0:unlimited]
［Data unit］ r/min
［Data range］ 0～6000

Ⅲ
Connection

0 7 6 SPDLIMITEXT
［Data type］ Word spindle
［Data meaning］The spindle speed limit when speed limit signal is active [Without restriction when it
is set to 0]
［Data unit］ r/min
［Data range］ 0～9999

0 7 7 FEEDLIMITEXT
［Data meaning］The feedrate limit when speed limit signal is active [Without restriction when it is set
to 0].

389
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

［Data unit］
Setting unit Data unit
Machine in metric system mm/min
Machine in inch system 0.1inch/min
［Data range］ 0～15000
IS-B IS-C
Machine in metric system 0～15000 0～15000
Machine in inch system 0～5800 0～5800

0 8 4 TMAX
［Data meaning］ Total tools number selection
［Data unit］ piece
［Data range］ 1～32

0 8 6 MACALL_GVAL1
0 8 7 MACALL_GVAL2
0 8 8 MACALL_GVAL3
0 8 9 MACALL_GVAL4
0 9 0 MACALL_GVAL5
0 9 1 MACALL_GVAL6
0 9 2 MACALL_GVAL7
0 9 3 MACALL_GVAL8
0 9 4 MACALL_GVAL9
0 9 5 MACALL_GVAL10
Ⅲ

［Data meaning］User macro program G code of calling program No. 9010～9019

［Data range］ 0～9999
Connection

0 9 6 PECMINn
［Data type］ Word axis
［Data meaning］ Minimum pitch error compensation position number
［Data range］ 0～1199

0 9 7 PECMAXn
［Data type］ Word axis
［Data meaning］ Maximum pitch error compensation position number
［Data range］ 0～1199

0 9 8 PECORGn
［Data type］ Word axis
［Data meaning］ Pitch error compensation position numbers corresponding to machine zero
points
［Data range］ 0～1199

390
 Chapter 3 Parameters

0 9 9 PECINTn
［Data type］ Word axis
［Data meaning］Pitch error compensation intervals
［Data unit］
Setting unit IS-B IS-C
Metric machine 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm
Inch machine 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch
［Data range］
IS-B IS-C
Metric machine 1000～999999 10000～9999999
Inch machine 400～999999 4000～9999999

1 0 0 LTMAX_2
1 0 1 LTMIN_2
［Data type］ Word axis
［Data meaning］Stored stroke limit 2 of each axis, LTMAX_2 positive maximum stroke position,
LTMIN_2 negative maximum stroke position.
［Data unit］
Setting unit IS-B IS-C
Metric machine 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm
Inch machine 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch
［Data range］ -99999999～99999999

1 0 2 LTMAX_3
1 0 3 LTMIN_3

Ⅲ
［Data type］ Word axis

Connection
［Data meaning］Stored stroke limit 3 of each axis, LTMAX_3 positive maximum stroke position,
LTMIN_3 negative maximum stroke position.
［Data unit］
Setting unit IS-B IS-C
Metric machine 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm
Inch machine 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch
［Data range］ -99999999～99999999

1 0 6 THD_SPD_VAR
［Data meaning］ Spindle fluctuation alarm limit in threading (not detect spindle fluctuation alarm
if set to 0)
［Data unit］ %
［Data range］ 0～100
Formula=|current speed － previous period speed|×200/(current speed＋previous period speed)

1 0 7 THD_TAIL_SPD
［Data meaning］ Short axis speed in threading run-out (run-out by threading feedrate if set to 0)

391
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

［Data unit］
Setting unit Data unit
Metric machine mm/min
Inch machine 0.1inch/min
［Data range］ 0～8000

1 0 9 SPL_REV_SPD
［Data meaning］ Spindle jog speed (r/min)
［Data unit］ r/min
［Data range］ 1～8000

1 1 0 MGR
［Data type］ Word spindle
［Data meaning］ Gear ratio of encoder to spindle: spindle gear teeth number
［Data range］ 1～255

1 1 1 SGR
［Data type］ Word axis
［Data meaning］ Gear ratio of encoder to spindle: encoder gear teeth number
［Data range］ 1～255

1 1 3 REF_SPDn
［Data type］ Word axis
［Data meaning］ Axes rapid traverse rates in machine zero return
Ⅲ

［Data unit］
Setting unit Data unit
Connection

Metric machine mm/min

Inch machine 0.1inch/min
［Data range］ 10～99999999

1 1 4 REF_OFFSETn
［Data type］ Word axis
［Data meaning］ Offset of each axis machine zero
［Data unit］
Setting unit IS-B IS-C
Metric input 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm
Inch input 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch
［Data range］
IS-B IS-C
Metric input -99999～99999 -999999～
999999
Inch input -99999～99999 -999999～
999999

392
 Chapter 3 Parameters

1 1 9 KEY_P_NUM
［Data meaning］ Number of active keys at a time
［Data unit］ piece
［Data range］ 2～5

1 2 0 REF1_COORDn
1 2 1 REF1_COORDn
1 2 2 REF2_COORDn
1 2 3 REF2_COORDn
［Data type］ Word axis
［Data meaning］ REF1_COORDn 1st reference point machine coordinates；
REF2_COORDn 2nd reference point machine coordinates；
REF3_COORDn 3rd reference point machine coordinates；
REF4_COORDn 4th reference point machine coordinates
［Data unit］
Setting unit IS-B IS-C
Metric input 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm
Inch input 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch
［Data range］ -99999999～99999999

1 3 6 FPGA_JMP_XPL
［Data type］ Word
［Data meaning］Tool offset testing input in method B, X plus direction test signal add
(0:invalid;20~27,30~37:add X2.0~X3.7)

Ⅲ
［Data range］ 0, 20~27, 30~37

Connection
1 3 7 FPGA_JMP_XML
［Data type］ Word
［Data meaning］Tool offset testing input in method B, X minus direction test signal add
(0:invalid;20~27,30~37:add X2.0~X3.7)
［Data range］ 0, 20~27, 30~37

1 3 8 FPGA_JMP_ZPL
［Data type］ Word
［Data meaning］Tool offset testing input in method B, Z plus direction test signal add
(0:invalid;20~27,30~37:add X2.0~X3.7)
［Data range］ 0, 20~27, 30~37

1 3 9 FPGA_JMP_ZML
［Data type］ Word
［Data meaning］Tool offset testing input in method B, Z minus direction test signal add
(0:invalid;20~27,30~37:add X2.0~X3.7)

393
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

［Data range］ 0, 20~27, 30~37

1 4 0 TWEAR_MAX
［Data meaning］ + or – limit of each input wear in TOOL OFFSET&WEAR interface
［Data unit］
Setting unit IS-B IS-C
Metric input 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm
Inch input 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch
［Data range］
IS-B IS-C
Metric input 1～99999 1～999999
Inch input 1～99999 1～999999

1 4 1 AUTO_OFFSET_FEED
［Data meaning］ Feedrate in automatic tool offset measure
［Data unit］
Setting unit Data unit
Metric machine mm/min
Inch machine 0.1inch/min
［Data range］
IS-B IS-C
Metric machine 15～1000 15～1000
Inch machine 7～375 7～375

1 4 2 AUTO_OFFSET_Y_X
Ⅲ

1 4 3 AUTO_OFFSET_Y_Z
Connection

［Data meaning］ X(AUTO_OFFSET_Y_X) ,Z(AUTO_OFFSET_Y_Z)γ values in automatic tool

offset
［Data unit］
Setting unit IS-B IS-C
Metric machine 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm
Inch machine 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch
［Data range］ 1～9999999
Note: X setting value is the radius in diameter or radius programming

1 4 4 AUTO_OFFSET_E_X
1 4 5 AUTO_OFFSET_E_Z
［Data meaning］ AUTO_OFFSET_E_X（X）,AUTO_OFFSET_E_Z（Z）ε values in automatic tool
offset
［Data unit］
Setting unit IS-B IS-C
Metric machine 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm
Inch machine 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch

394
 Chapter 3 Parameters

［Data range］ 1～9999999

Note: X setting value is the radius in diameter or radius programming

1 4 8 MULTISTAGE_SKIP1
1 4 9 MULTISTAGE_SKIP2
1 5 0 MULTISTAGE_SKIP3
1 5 1 MULTISTAGE_SKIP4
［Data type］ Word
［Data meaning］Multilevel skip G31 P1～P4 or G04 Q1～Q4 signal detect address setting(0:no
effect; 20~27,30~37: address X2.0~X3.7)
［Data range］ 0, 20~27, 30~37

1 5 4 RADIUS_ERR_RANGE
［Data meaning］ Max. arc radius error
［Data unit］
Setting unit IS-B IS-C
Metric machine 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm
Inch machine 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch
［Data range］
IS-B IS-C
Metric machine 0～1000 0～10000
Inch machine 0～50 0～500

1 6 2 CSACCFL
［Data type］ Word spindle

Ⅲ
［Data meaning］ initial speed of CS acceleration/deceleration

Connection
［Data unit］ deg/min
［Data range］ 0～4000

1 6 3 CSACCTIME
［Data type］ Word spindle
［Data meaning］ acceleration/deceleration time constant of CS
［Data unit］ ms
［Data range］ 0～4000

1 6 4 CSMCODE
［Data type］ Word spindle
［Data meaning］Spindle CS shifts the M code [Setting value +1 is the M code of the function
releasing].
Note 1: When the spindle positioning function is enabled, the M code is regarded as the
spindle positioning method shifint.
Note 2: The setting value should be set by the M code shifted based upon the CS compiled
in the ladder diagram.

395
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

Note 3: The setting value is disabled when it is less than 6, the coordinate system will not be
cleared when the CS axis is shifted in the disabled state.
［Data range］ 0～96
1 6 6 CAACCFL
［Data type］ Word spindle
［Data meaning］initial speed of linear acceleration/deceleration in rigid tapping
［Data unit］
Setting unit Data unit
Metric machine mm/min
Inch machine 0.1inch/min
［Data range］ 0～4000

1 6 7 CAACCTIME
［Data meaning］linear acceleration/deceleration time constant in rigid tapping tool in-feed
［Data unit］ ms
［Data range］ 0～4000

1 6 9 RTAPBACKRATE
［Data meaning］override value in rigid tapping tool retraction (override is 100% when it is set to 0)
［Data unit］ ％
［Data range］ 0～200

1 7 0 CMCODE
［Data meaning］ M code used for spindle clamping during rigid tapping
Ⅲ

［Data unit］
［Data range］ 3～97
Connection

1 7 3 CALCODE
［Data meaning］ Take count of machining piece M code (0:defined M99 & M30)
［Data unit］
［Data range］ 0～97

1 9 1 POSERR_SERVO
［Data type］ Word axis
［Data meaning］Servo axes position error value when running speed 1m/min
［Data unit］
［Data range］ 0～99999999
1 9 7 EGB_MASTERAX
［Data meaning］In the synchronized control, the corresponding system axis number of the master
axis
［Data unit］
［Data range］ 0～5

396
 Chapter 3 Parameters

Setting value meaning

0 disabled
1~5 the 1st feed axis ~ the 5th axis

1 9 8 EGB_SLAVEAX
［Data meaning］In the sychronized control, the corresponding axis number of the slave axis
［Data unit］
［Data range］ 0～5
Setting value meaning
0 disabled
1~5 the 1st feed axis ~ the 5th
axis

2 1 9 PLCDIDOn
［Data type］ Word axis
［Data meaning］ Select DI/DO according to PLC controlled axes (0 means PLC axis control is
not applied)
［Data unit］
［Data range］ 0～4

2 2 0 SP_SERVOn
［Data type］ Word spindle
［Data meaning］The corresponding interface number of each spindle output
［Data unit］
［Data range］ 0～14

Ⅲ
Setting value meaning

Connection
2 analog spindle interface 2
1 analog spindle interface 1
0 Disabled analog spindle output
11～14 extension IO unit analog output
interface; 1~4

2 2 1 SP_SP_CSAXIS
［Data type］ Word spindle
［Data meaning］The functions such as the feed axis number and CS axis, etc. related with each
spindle should be set.
［Data unit］
［Data range］ 0～5
Setting value meaning Setting value meaning Setting value meaning
0 Nothing 2 Z axis 4 4th axis
1 X axis 3 3rd axis 5 5th axis

2 2 5 NAME_n

397
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

［Data type］ Word axis

［Data meaning］Axis name definition of each axis
［Data range］ 65, 66, 67, 88, 89, 90
Axis name Setting value Axis name Setting value Axis name Setting value
X 88 Y 89 B 66
Z 90 A 65 C 67
Note: The axis name of X or Z axis is fixed, which can not be modified.

2 3 0 ATTRIB_n
［Data meaning］ ATTRIB_n is the additional attribution setting
［Data range］ 0~7
Setting value Meaning
0 It is neither the three basic axes and an axis parallel to them
1 X axis of the three basic axes
2 Y axis of the three basic axes
3 Z axis of the three basic axes
5 An axis parallel to X
6 An axis parallel to Y
7 An axis parallel to Z

2 3 5 POLARLINEAXIS
［Data meaning］ Linear axis setting of the polar coordinate interpolation
［Data range］ 0~4
Setting value Meaning
0 X axis
Ⅲ

1 Z axis
2 Y axis
Connection

3 4th axis
4 5th axis

2 3 6 POLARTOSAXIS
［Data meaning］ Rotary axis setting of the polar coordinate interpolation
［Data range］ 2~4
Setting value Meaning
2 Y axis
3 4th axis
4 5th axis

2 3 7 ACCEPTANGLEERR
［Data meaning］ Maximum fluctuating value when the angle is 0°or 180°for C tool offset C
［Data range］
IS-B IS-C
0～1000 0～10000

398
 Chapter 3 Parameters

2 4 0 HWRPDFRATE
［Data meaning］ Rapid traverse override of MPG trial cut function
［Data range］ 0～100

2 4 1 HWPULSEINC
［Data meaning］ Movement amount per pulse during trial cut function
［Data range］ 0～100

2 4 3 CNC_MPG_NUM
［Data meaning］ Quantity of MPG
［Data range］ 1～2

2 4 4 MPG1_INTERFACE
2 4 5 MPG2_INTERFACE
［Data meaning］ MPG interface of MPG 1,2
［Data range］ 0～1
Setting value Meaning
0 Rear cover MPG interface 1 (CN31)
1 Rear cover MPG interface 2(CN32)

2 4 9 ABSPOSERR
［Data type］ Word axis
［Data meaning］When an absolute encoder is equipped with each axis, the Max. position error value
allows when the coordinate system is set up with power-on.

Ⅲ
［Data unit］
Setting unit IS-B IS-C

Connection
Metric input 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm
Inch input 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch
［Data range］ 0～999999

3.1.3 PLC Parameters（Standard PLC Definition）

3.1.3.1 K Parameters
K 1 0 LMIT LMIS EXESP JSPD OVRI *** RSJG RRW
Bit7 1: overtravel of each axis is enabled;
0: overtravel of each axis is disabled.
Bit6 1: alarm for overtravel signal LOW of each axis;
0: alarm for overtravel signal LOW of each axis
Bit5 1: External ESP signal is enabled;
0: External ESP signal is disabled.
Bit4 1: spindle JOG is enabled in any modes;
0: spindle JOG is enabled in Manual, MPG, Zero Return mode.
Bit3 1: feedrate override is fixed to 100%;

399
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

0: feedrate override can be adjusted.

Bit1 1: spindle lubricating, cooling output remain in reset;
0: spindle lubricating, cooling output are disabled in reset.
Bit0 1: the cursor returning to the beginning of the program is enabled in any working mode in
reset;
0: the cursor returning to the beginning of the program is enabled in Edit working mode.

K 1 1 CHOT CHET TCPS CTCP TSGN CHTB CHTA

Bit7 1: checks the tool post worktable overheating;
0: does not check the tool post worktable overheating.
Bit5 1: checks the tool signal when the tool change is completed;
0: does not check the tool signal when the tool change is completed.
Bit4 1: tool post locking signal HIGH (be connected with +24V) is enabled;
0: tool post locking signal LOW (not be connected with +24V) is enabled
Bit3 1: checks the tool post locking signal;
0: does not check the tool post locking signal.
Bit2 1: tool signal LOW(not be connected with +24V) is enabled;
0: tool signal HIGH(be connected with +24V)is enabled.
Bit1 Bit0 : tool change mode selects Bit1 tool change mode selects Bit 0

CHTB CHTA Tool post type

0 0 Standard tool change mode B
0 1 Standard tool change mode A
1 0 Yantai AK31 series(6, 8, 10, 12 tools)
1 1 LIO_SHING hydraulic tool post（8, 10, 12 tools）

K 1 2 RCKC CCHU NYQP SLSP SLQP

Ⅲ

Bit4 1: External chuck control is enabled during program running;

Connection

0: External chuck control is disabled during program running

Bit3 1: the system checks the chuck in-position signal;
0: the system does not check the chuck in-position signal.
Bit2 1: in outer mode, NQPJ is the outer chuck released signal, and WQPJ is the outer chuck
clamped signal;
0: in inner mode, NQPJ is the inner chuck clamped signal, and WQPJ is the inner chuck
released signal.
Bit1 1: the system does not check whether the chuck is clamped when the chuck function is
enabled;
0: the system checks whether the chuck is clamped when the chuck function is enabled;
when the chuck is not clamped, the system cannot start the spindle and alarms.
Bit0 1: the chuck control function is enabled;
0: the chuck control function is disabled.
K 1 3 CHIPR *** WKLP *** *** RTSC SPTW SLTW
Bit7 1: The chip-removal controller is enabled;
0: The chip-removal controller is disabled
Bit5 1: Indicator control is enabled;
0: Indicator control is disabled.
Bit2 1: External tailstock control is enabled during program running;

400
 Chapter 3 Parameters

0: External tailstock control is disabled during program running;

Bit1 1: the spindle rotation and the tailstock forward/backward does not interlock, the tailstock
executes the forward no matter what the spindle is in any states; the spindle rotates no
matter what the tailstock is in any states;
0: the spindle rotation and the tailstock forward/backward interlock, the tailstock cannot
execute the forward when the spindle rotates; the spindle cannot be started when the
tailstock does not execute the forward.
Bit0 1: the tailstock control function is enabled;
0: the tailstock control function is disabled.

K 1 4 HPST SGSP SPB4 PB4 SPB3 PB3

Bit7 1: the hydraulic control function is enabled;
0: the hydraulic control function is disabled.
Bit4 1: Spindle is enabled when the protection door is open
0: Spindle is disabled when the protection door is open;
Bit3 1: when SAGT is connected with +24V, the safety door is disabled;
0: when SAGT is not connected with +24V, the safety door is disabled.
Bit2 1: the safety door check function is enabled;
0: the safety door check function is disabled.
Bit1 1: when PRES is not connected with +24V，the system alarms for pressure LOW;
0: when PRES is connected with +24V，the system alarms for pressure LOW.
Bit0 1: the pressure LOW check function is enabled;
0: the pressure LOW check function is disabled.

K 1 5 RCS RSCS SPOR SHT AGIM AGIN AGER

Bit7 1: Cs function is enabled;
0: Cs function is disabled.

Ⅲ
Bit6 1: the spindle contour control is disabled in emergency stop, reset;

Connection
0: the spindle contour control is enabled in emergency stop, reset.
Bit5 1: the spindle eight-point orientation function is enabled;
0: the spindle eight-point orientation function is disabled.
Bit3 1: the spindle gear power-down memory;
0: the spindle gear power-down does not execute the memory.
Bit2 1: the gear in-position signal M41I, M42I which are not connected with +24V is enabled;
0: the gear in-position signal M41I, M42I which are connected with +24V is enabled.
Bit1 1: when the spindle automatic gear change is to Gear 1, 2, the system checks the gear
change in-position signal M41I, M42I;
0: when the spindle automatic gear change is to Gear 1, 2, the system does not check the
gear change in-position signal M41I, M42I.
Bit0 1: the spindle automatic gear change function is enabled;
0: the spindle automatic gear change function is disabled

K 1 6 SINC *** SCWM LUBS LUBCK M32A ROVI SOVI

Bit7 1: Gear “×1000” in STEP (MPG) mode is disabled;
0: Gear “×1000” in STEP (MPG) mode is enabled;
Bit5 1: When spindle stop command is in the same block with movement command, these
commands are executed at the same time;

401
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

0: When spindle stop command is in the same block with movement command, movement
command comes first to spindle stop command;
Bit4 1: When cooling OFF command and movement command are in the same block, they are
executed at the same time;
0: When cooling OFF command and movement command are in the same block, movement
command comes first to the cooling OFF command;
Bit2 1: the lubricating outputs in power-on when the automatic lubricating is enabled;
0: the lubricating does not output in power-on when the automatic lubricating is enabled.
Bit1 1: the external feedrate override inverses;
0: the external feedrate override does not inverse.
Bit0 1: the external feedrate override switch is enabled
0: the external feedrate override switch is disabled.

K 1 7 MSEN SCLP SALM2 SALM SSTP *** *** SPDIR

Bit7 1: the multiple spindle control function is enabled;
0: the multiple spindle control function is disabled.
Bit6 1: the spindle clamped command clamps the 2nd spindle when the multiple spindle is
enabled;
0: the spindle clamped command clamps the 1st spindle when the multiple spindle is enabled
Bit5 1: the system alarms when the 2nd spindle is LOW;
0: the system alarms when the 2nd spindle is HIGH.
Bit4 1: the system alarms when the spindle is LOW;
0: the system alarms when the spindle is HIGH.
Bit3 1: the analog voltage is disabled when the spindle stops;
0: the analog voltage is enabled when the spindle stops.
Bit0 1: The spindle button rotation direction on the panel is reversed;
0: The spindle button rotation direction on the panel is positive.
Ⅲ
Connection

K 1 8 EXTM RSTM HOLD *** MDOK MD4 MD2 MD1

Bit7 1: extended M function is valid;
0: extended M function is invalid
Bit6 1: extended M function remains output when emergency stop, reset;
0: extended M function output closes when emergency stop, reset.
Bit5 1: HOLD release control is valid;
0: HOLD release control is invalid.
Bit3 1: the operation mode is specified by MD4, MD2, MD1 state when the system is turned on;
0: the operation mode is the state which is that of power-off when the system is turned on.

MD4 MD2 MD1 Operation mode in power-on

0 0 0 MDI mode
0 0 1 Auto mode
0 1 0 Program zero return
0 1 1 Edit mode
1 0 0 MPG mode
1 0 1 Manual mode
1 1 0 Machine zero return

402
 Chapter 3 Parameters

K 1 9 *** MACH HDFD *** *** *** *** ***

Bit6 1: The machine tool panel is the vertical one;
0: The machine tool panel is the horizontal one
Bit5 1: MPG interruption is enabled in operation;
0: MPG interruption is disabled in operation.

DBMPG DBMPG
K 2 0 *** *** *** *** *** ***
1 0
Bit 1 Dual-MPG function selection bit 1: 10: It is enabled and only the MPG 1 on the panel button
is enabled, as well only the MPG 2 is enabled of the external MPG input.
Bit 0 Dual-MPG function selection bit 0: 00 Disabled 01: It is enabled and the MPG 1 fixes the X
axis, and the MPG2 fixes the Z axis, and the step-length can be selectecd;

3.1.3.2 DT Parameter
Address Meaning
Time for original gear disabling during spindle automatic
DT000
gear changing (ms)
DT001 Delay time after the changed spindle gear is in position (ms)
DT002 Detection time for low pressure alarm (ms)
DT004 Permit time for tool changing (ms)
DT005 M command execution time (ms)
DT006 S command execution time (ms)
DT007 Delay time for tool post from CW to CCW output (ms)
DT008 Tool post lock signal detection time (ms)
DT009 Tool post CCW rotation lock time (ms)

Ⅲ
DT010 Spindle braking delay output time (ms)
DT011 Spindle braking output time (ms)

Connection
DT012 Spindle JOG time (ms)
DT013 Time for manual lubricating ON (0: time is not limited) (ms)
DT014 Chuck clamping command execution time (ms)
DT015 Chuck unclamping command execution time (ms)
Interval of automatic lubricating (ms) (can be modified
DT016
directly)
Time for automatic lubrication output (ms) (can be modified
DT017
directly)
DT018 Chuck pulse output width (ms) (can be modified directly)
DT020 Spindle clamping/unclamping time (ms)
DT021 Spindle stop, chuck enable delay time (ms)
Delay time before spindle motor torque decreases to 0 after
DT023
spindle starts clamping
DT024 Spindle CS shifting or positioning shifting allowable time (ms)

403
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

3.1.3.3 DC Parameters
Address Meaning
DC000 Spindle zero speed output range (r/min)
DC001 Spindle revolving-speed arrival output range (r/min)

3.2 Parameter Description (by Function Sequence)

3.2.1 X, Z, Y, 4th,5th Axis Control Logic
0 0 1 *** *** *** ISC
Bit1 1: IS-C incremental system；
0: IS-B incremental system.
ISC Least input increment, least command increment Abbreviation
0 0.001mm,0.0001inch IS-B
1 0.0001mm,0.00001inch IS-C

0 0 8 DIR5 DIR4 DIRY DIRZ DIRX

th th
Bit4~Bit0 1: Direction signal (DIR) is HIGH when 5 , 4 , Ym Z or X positively moves ；
0: Direction signal (DIR) is HIGH when 5th, 4th, Ym Z or X negatively moves.
If machine moving direction is inconsistent with the actually required direction, it may be
adjusted by this parameter.

0 0 9 5ALM 4ALM YALM ZALM XALM

Bit4~Bit0 1: Alarm without detection when servo does not ready of the 5 , 4th, Y, Z or X axis;
th

0: Alarm detection when servo does not ready of the 5th, 4th, Y, Z or X axis.
Ⅲ

1 7 5 SPFD
Connection

SPFD =1: Feeding stops if spindle stops in cutting

=0: Feeding not stop if spindle stops in cutting

1 8 7 IS1 IS0 Axis Axis

type 1 type 0
[Data type]: Bit axis
BIT7, BIT6:set increment system of each axis. 00:accordance with increment system of the system;
01:IS-A，10:IS-B；11:IS-C.
Bit1, Bit0:00: set the additional axis to the linear axis; 01: set the additional axis to the rotary axis（A
type）;11: set the additional axis to the rotary axis (B type); 10: set the additional
axis to be invalid.
Note: The parameter is invalid to setting of X, Z axis.

3.2.2 Acceleration & Deceleration Control

0 2 2 RPDFn
［Data type］ Word axis
［Data meaning］ max. speed of X rapid traverse (radius value)

404
 Chapter 3 Parameters

［Data unit］
Setting unit Data unit
Metric machine mm/min
Inch machine 0.1inch/min
［Data range］ 10～99999999

0 2 3 LINTn
［Data type］ Word axis
［Data meaning］Acceleration/deceleration time constant value
［Data unit］ ms
［Data range］ 10～4000

0 2 7 FEDM
［Data meaning］ Upper limit of cutting feedrate
［Data unit］
Setting unit Data unit
Metric machine mm/min
Inch machine 0.1inch/min
［Data range］
IS-B IS-C
Metric machine 10～30000 10～30000
Inch machine 5～11600 10～11600

0 2 9 FEEDT
［Data meaning］ Acceleration/deceleration time constant during cutting feed and manual feed

Ⅲ
［Data unit］ ms

Connection
［Data range］ 0～4000

0 3 0 FEDFL
［Data meaning］ The starting speed of cutting feed
［Data unit］
Setting unit Data unit
Metric machine mm/min
Inch machine 0.1inch/min
［Data range］
IS-B IS-C
Metric machine 0～8000 0～8000
Inch machine 0～3000 0～3000
0 3 1 JOGSPEED
［Data meaning］ Set speed when manual feedrate override is 100%
［Data unit］
Setting unit Data unit

405
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

Metric machine mm/min

Inch machine 0.1inch/min
［Data range］ 10～30000

0 3 2 RPDFLn
［Data type］ Word axis
［Data meaning］ The rapid traverse rate when the override is F0
［Data unit］
Setting unit Data unit
Metric machine mm/min
Inch machine 0.1inch/min
［Data range］
IS-B IS-C
Metric machine 0～4000 0～4000
Inch machine 0～1500 0～1500

0 4 1 JOGFL
［Data meaning］Exponential ac-deceleration start speed and deceleration final speed in manual feed
［Data unit］
Setting unit Data unit
Metric machine mm/min
Inch machine 0.1inch/min
［Data range］ 0～8000

0 7 7 FEEDLIMITEXT
Ⅲ

［Data meaning］The feedrate limit when speed limit signal is active [It is not restricted when setting
Connection

to 0.]
［Data unit］
Setting unit Data unit
Metric machine mm/min
Inch machine 0.1inch/min
［Data range］ 0～15000
IS-B IS-C
Metric machine 0～15000 0～15000
Inch machine 0～5800 0～5800

3.2.3 Precision Compensation

0 0 3 PEC
Bit5 1: Pitch error offset active
0: Pitch error offset inactive

0 1 0 *** *** *** CPF5 CPF4 CPF3 CPF2 CPF1

406
 Chapter 3 Parameters

CPF6~CPF1: Setting values of backlash offset pulse frequency (by BCD code)
The set frequency =(setting value+1) Kpps
CPF5 CPF4 CPF3 CPF2 CPF1 Set frequency(Kpps)
0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0 0 0 1 2
0 0 0 1 0 3
0 0 0 1 1 4
0 0 1 0 0 5
0 0 1 0 1 6
0 0 1 1 0 7
0 0 1 1 1 8
0 1 0 0 0 9
0 1 0 0 1 10
0 1 0 1 0 11
0 1 0 1 1 12
0 1 1 0 0 13
0 1 1 0 1 14
0 1 1 1 0 15
0 1 1 1 1 16
1 0 0 0 0 17
1 0 0 0 1 18
1 0 0 1 0 19
1 0 0 1 1 20
1 0 1 0 0 21
1 0 1 0 1 22

Ⅲ
1 0 1 1 0 23
1 0 1 1 1 24

Connection
1 1 0 0 0 25
1 1 0 0 1 26
1 1 0 1 0 27
1 1 0 1 1 28
1 1 1 0 0 29
1 1 1 0 1 30
1 1 1 1 0 31
1 1 1 1 1 32

0 1 1 BDEC BD8
BDEC 1: Backlash offset type B, the offset data are output by ascending or
descending type and the set frequency is inactive;
0: Backlash offset type A, the offset data are output by the set frequency (by bit parameter
No.010) or 1/8 of it;
BD8 1: Backlash offset is done by the 1/8 of the set frequency；
0: Backlash offset is done by the set frequency；

407
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

0 3 4 BKLn
［Data type］ Word axis
［Data meaning］ BKLX（X axis）,BKLZ（Z axis）backlash compensation.
［Data unit］
Set unit IS-B IS-C
Metric machine 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm
Inch machine 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch
Data range 2000 20000

［Data range］ 0～2000

Note: X is diameter value.

0 9 6 PECMINn
［Data type］ Word axis
［Data meaning］ Minimum pitch error compensation number
［Data range］ 0～1023

0 9 7 PECMAXn
［Data type］ Word axis
［Data meaning］ Maximum pitch error compensation number
［Data range］ 0～1023

0 9 8 PECORGn
［Data type］ Word axis
［Data meaning］ Pitch error compensation number corresponding to machine zero
Ⅲ

［Data range］ 0～1023

Connection

0 9 9 PECINTn
［Data type］ Word axis
［Data meaning］ Pitch error compensation intervals
［Data unit］
Setting unit IS-B IS-C
Metric machine 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm
Inch machine 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch
［Data range］
IS-B IS-C
Metric machine 1000～999999 10000～9999999
Inch machine 400～999999 4000～9999999

3.2.4 Machine Protection

1 7 2 *** MST MSP MOT ESP *** LZR MOTDE
C

408
 Chapter 3 Parameters

Bit6 1: External cycle start signal (ST) inactive)

0: External cycle start signal (ST) active
Bit5 1: External SP signal inactive
0: External SP signal active with external dwell switch needed, otherwise CNC shows “Pause”.
Bit4 1: Not detect software stroke limit
0: Detect software stroke limit
Bit3 1: Emergency stop inactive
0: Emergency stop active
Bit1 1: Software limit is inactive after power-on and before machine zero return;
0: Software limit is active after power-on and before machine zero return;
Bit0 1: When Arriving stored travel position, CNC is stopped slowly
0: When Arriving stored travel position, CNC is stopped immediately

0 4 5 LT1n1
0 4 6 LT1n2
［Data type］ Word axis
［Data meaning］ LT1n1: Maximum stroke on positive direction; LT1n2: Maximum stroke on
negative direction
［Data Unit］
Setting unit IS-B IS-C
Metric machine 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm
Inch machine 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch
［Data range］ -99999999～99999999
Note: When bit 2 of parameter No. 001 set diameter programming, X axis is set by diameter system; when bit 2 set
radius programming, X axis is set by radius system.

Ⅲ
1 0 0 LTMAX_2

Connection
1 0 1 LTMIN_2
［Data type］ Word axis
［Data meaning］Stored stroke limit 2 of each axis, LTMAX_2 top stroke position along with the
positive direction, LTMIN_2 top stroke position along with the negative direction.
［Data unit］
Setting unit IS-B IS-C
Metric machine 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm
Inch machine 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch
［Data range］ -99999999～99999999

1 0 2 LTMAX_3
1 0 3 LTMIN_3
［Data type］ Word axis
［Data meaning］Stored stroke limit 3 of each axis, LTMAX_3 top stroke position along with the
positive direction, LTMIN_3 top stroke position along with the negative direction.
［Data unit］

409
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

Setting unit IS-B IS-C

Metric machine 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm
Inch machine 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch
［Data range］ -99999999～99999999

PLC parameter
D T 0 2 PEALMTIM
［Data meaning］ Under-pressure alarm detection time
［Data unit］ ms
［Data range］ 0～2147483647

D T 2 1 PSANGNT
［Data meaning］ Chuck operation delay time after spindle stop;
［Data unit］ ms
［Data range］ 0～2147483647

3.2.5 Machine Zero Return

0 0 4 *** DECI ***
Bit5 1: Deceleration begins as DEC signal is connected to +24V in machine zero return
0: Deceleration begins as DEC signal is disconnected to +24V in machine zero return

0 0 5 PPD
Bit1 1: Relative and absolute coordinate set together for absolute setting and reference return by
G50
Ⅲ

0: Only absolute coordinate set for absolute setting and reference point by G50
Connection

0 0 6 ZM5 ZM4 ZMY ZMZ ZMX

ZMX, ZMZ, ZMY, ZM4, ZM5: Return and initial backlash direction of X, Y, Z axes machine zeroes
at power on
0: Zero return type C, machine zero return and backlash direction is positive;
1: Zero return type B, machine zero return and backlash direction is negative.

0 0 7 ZC5 ZC4 ZCY ZCZ ZCX

ZCX, ZCZ, ZCY, ZC4, ZC5 =0: Separate DEC and zero signals needed during machine zero
return
=1: DEC and zero signals together by a proximity switch during
machine zero return
Note: This parameter should be set to 1 if a proximity switch is taken as both deceleration and zero signal.

0 1 1 *** *** NORF ZNIK REFC2 ***

Bit3 1: Manual machine zero return inactivity
0: Manual machine zero return active
Bit2 1: Stop at zero by pressing direction key once in zero return with direction key locked;

410
 Chapter 3 Parameters

0: Direction key should be held on in zero return with direction key unlocked.
Bit1 1:Ref.C mode,the feeding slowdown when press down switch, it moves negatively after
decelerating.
0:Ref.C mode,the feeding slowdown when release switch, it moves negatively after
decelerating.

0 1 2 APRS *** *** ISOT

Bit7 1: ABSOLUTE automatically set after reference return, the coordinate set by parameter
No.049 and No.050;
0: ABSOLUTE not automatically set after reference return
Bit 0 1: Prior to machine zero return after power-on or E-stop, manual rapid traverse active
0: Prior to machine zero return after power-on or E-stop, manual rapid traverse inactive

0 1 4 *** *** *** ZRS5 ZRS4 ZRSY ZRSZ ZRSX

th th
Bit4~0 1: 5 , 4 , Y, Z, X has machine zero, the system detects DEC signal and zero signal in
executing machine zero return.
0: 5th, 4th, Y, Z, X has no machine zero, the system does not detect DEC signal and zero
signal and directly executes machine zero return

1 8 3 *** *** *** MZR5 MZR4 MZRY MZRZ MZRX

Bit4 1: For the 5th axis, press to execute machine zero return；

0: For the 5th axis, press to execute machine zero return（has not defined the press key
in the standard PLC）

Bit3 1: For the 4th axis, press to execute the machine zero return；

Ⅲ
0: For the 4th axis, press to execute the machine zero return.

Connection
Bit2 1: For Y axis, press to execute the machine zero return；

0: For Y axis, press to execute the machine zero return.

Bit1 1: For Z axis, press to execute the machine zero return；

0: For Z axis, press to execute the machine zero return.

Bit0 1: For X axis, press to execute the machine zero return；

0: For X axis, press to execute the machine zero return.

1 8 8 *** RRTn *** *** ***

［Data type］ Bit axis
RRTn 1: when Y, 4 , 5th are rotary axis, the zero return use D mode;
th

0: when Y, 4th, 5th are rotary axis, the zero return use A, B,C mode( need to power-on again).

411
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

0 3 3 ZRNFLn
［Data type］ Word axis
［Data meaning］ Lowest speed rate of X,Z machine zero return.
［Data unit］
Set unit Data unit
Metric machine mm/min
Inch machine 0.1inch/min
［Data range］
IS-B IS-C
Metric machine 6～4000 6～4000
Inch machine 3～1500 3～1500

0 4 7 PRSn
［Data type］ Word axis
［Data meaning］ Setting value of absolute coordinate after machine zero return is performed
［Data unit］
Setting unit IS-B IS-C
Metric input 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm
Inch input 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch
［Data range］ -99999999～99999999

1 1 3 REF_SPDn
［Data meaning］ high-speed of each axis machine zero return.
［Data unit］
Ⅲ

Set unit Data unit

Metric machine mm/min
Connection

Inch machine 0.1inch/min

［Data range］ 10～99999999

1 1 4 REF_OFFSETn
［Data type］ Word axis
［Data meaning］ Offset value of each axis machine zero point
［Data unit］
Set unit IS-B IS-C
Metric input 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm
Inch input 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch
［Data range］
IS-B IS-C
Metric input -99999～99999 -999999～999999
Inch input -99999～99999 -999999～999999

1 2 0 REF1_COORDn
1 2 1 REF2_COORDn

412
 Chapter 3 Parameters

1 2 2 REF3_COORDn
1 2 3 REF4_COORDn
［Data type］ Word axis
［Data meaning］REF1_COORDn machine coordinates of 1st reference point of each axis;
REF2_COORDn machine coordinates of 2nd reference point of each axis;
REF3_COORDn machine coordinates of 3rd reference point of each axis;
REF4_COORDn machine coordinates of 4th reference point of each axis.
［Data unit］
Set unit IS-B IS-C
Metric input 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm
Inch input 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch
［Data range］ -99999999～99999999

3.2.6 Thread Function

1 7 4 THDTLMOD THDA CKSPD
Bit2 1:Thread tailing mode tailling according angle;
0:Thread tailing mode rapid tailing.
Bit1 1:Thread cut is exp. acc&dec
0:Thread cut is lin. acc&dec
Bit0 1:Whether detect the spindle speed is too slow in thread cutting don't detect\
0:Whether detect the spindle speed is too slow in thread cutting do detect

0 1 9 THDCH
［Data meaning］ thread run-out length in thread cutting.

Ⅲ
［Data range］ 0～225
Thread run-out width=THDCH×0.1×thread lead

Connection
0 2 6 THRDT
［Data meaning］ short acceleration/deceleration time constant in thread run-out.
［Data unit］ ms
［Data range］ 0～4000

0 2 8 THDFL
［Data meaning］ X, Z initial speed in thread cutting.
［Data unit］
Set unit Data unit
Metric machine mm/min
Inch machine 0.1inch/min
［Data range］ 6～8000

1 0 6 THD_SPD_VAR
［Data meaning］Spindle fluctuation alarm limit in threading (not detect spindle fluctuation alarm if set
to 0)

413
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

［Data unit］ %
［Data range］ 0～100
Formula=|current speed － previous period speed|×200/(current speed＋previous period speed)

1 0 7 THD_TAIL_SPD
［Data meaning］Short axis speed in threading run-out (run-out by threading feedrate if set to 0)
［Data unit］
Set unit Data unit
Metric machine mm/min
Inch machine 0.1inch/min
［Data range］ 0～8000

3.2.7 Spindle Control

0 0 1 SPIN
Bit4 1: Analog voltage control of spindle speed
0: Switching volume control of spindle speed

K 1 0 RSJG
RSJG 1: when the reset is pressed, CNC does not close M03,M04,M08,M32 output signal；
0: when the reset is pressed, CNC closes M03, M04, M08, M32 output signal

0 2 1 PSANGNT
［Data meaning］ voltage offset offset value when the analog voltage outputs 10V.
［Data unit］ mV
Ⅲ

［Data range］ -2000～2000

Connection

0 3 6 SPDLC
［Data meaning］ voltage offset offset value when the analog voltage outputs 10V.
［Data unit］ mV
［Data range］ -1000～1000

0 3 7 GRMAX1
0 3 8 GRMAX2
0 3 9 GRMAX3
0 4 0 GRMAX4
［Data meaning］ GRMAX1, GRMAX2, GRMAX3, GRMAX4: Max. speeds of spindle gear 1, 2,
3, 4 respectively when analog voltage output is 10V (function defined by
GSK980TDi PLC: if the spindle automatic gearing is active, they are the
speeds of M41, M42, M43, M44; if the automatic gearing is inactive or CNC is
powered on, the gears are memorized by parameter setting or the gear 1 is
defaulted.)
［Data unit］ r/min

414
 Chapter 3 Parameters

［Data range］ 10～9999

0 6 7 SFTREV
［Data meaning］ output voltage in spindle gear shifting.
［Data unit］ mV
［Data range］ 0～10000

0 6 8 SJOGREV
［Data meaning］ spindle rotary axis speed in Manual (MPG) mode.
［Data unit］ r/min
［Data range］ 0～3000

0 6 9 ENCODER_CSE
［Data type］ Word spindle
［Data meaning］The corresponding spindle encoder number of each spindle。
0: without installing the encoder;
1: Spindle revolving signal comes from the encoder interface 1;
2: Spindle revolving signal comes from the encoder interface 2;
3: Spindle revolving signal comes from the GSKLINK bus
［Data range］ 0～3

0 7 0 ENCODER_CNT
［Data meaning］ spindle encoder lines.
［Data unit］ line/r
［Data range］ 100～10000

Ⅲ
0 7 2 SAR_DELEY

Connection
［Data meaning］ spindle speed arrival signal delay check time.
［Data unit］ ms
［Data range］ 0～4080

0 7 3 SPMOTORMAX
［Data meaning］ max. clamp speed of spindle motor speed.
［Data unit］ r/min
［Data range］ 0～4095
Setting value=（max. clamp speed of spindle motor/its max. speed）×4095.

0 7 4 SPMOTORMIN
［Data meaning］ min. clamp speed of spindle motor speed.
［Data unit］ r/min
［Data range］ 0～4095
Setting value=（min. clamp speed of spindle motor/its min. speed）×4095.

415
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

0 7 5 SPSPEEDLIMIT
［Data meaning］ max. spindle speed ［0: not limit speed］.
［Data unit］ r/min
［Data range］ 0～6000

0 7 6 SPDLIMITEXT
［Data type］ Word spindle
［Data meaning］The spindle speed limit when speed limit signal is active [It is not restricted when
setting to 0]
［Data unit］ r/min
［Data range］ 0～9999

1 0 9 SPL_REV_SPD
［Data meaning］ rotary speed in spindle jog.
Ⅲ

［Data unit］ r/min

Connection

［Data range］ 1～8000

1 1 0 MGR
［Data type］ Word spindle
［Data meaning］ Gear ratio of encoder to spindle: spindle gear teeth number
［Data range］ 1～255

1 1 1 SGR
［Data type］ Word axis
［Data meaning］ Gear ratio of encoder to spindle: encoder gear teeth number
［Data range］ 1～255

1 9 5 SSPD PLCS *** *** RPOS SRV CSREF RCS

Bit7 1:series spindle controllable function enabled (series spindle The slave ID number of the
spindle 1~3 is 11~13) , it is necessary to restart；
0:series spindle controllable function disabled (analogy spindle), it is necessary to restart.
Bit6 1:PLC spindle rotation speed function of each axis enabled；

416
 Chapter 3 Parameters

0:PLC spindle rotation speed function of each axis disabled。

Bit3 1:Spindle position function is valid (The spindle will perform the mechanical
releasing/clamping interlocking operation before/after positioning when it is enabled);
0:Spindle position function is invalid.
Bit2 1:Servo motor spindle function is valid ,power on；
0:Servo motor spindle function is invalid ,power on。
Bit1 1:Change to position mode,the axis do return REF.
0:Change to position mode,the axis don't return REF.
Bit0 1:Cs function of spindle valid ,power on
0:Cs function of spindle is:invalid,power on

1 9 6 *** *** *** MSEN *** *** *** ***

Bit4 1: The multiple spindle control is enabled
0: The multiple spindle control is disabled

2 0 1 SNTP *** *** ECN HBR ERV *** ***

Bit7 1:Synchronization mode follow
0:Synchronization mode interpolation
Bi4 1:Whether the G81 synchronization command can be specified in the synchronization
process allow
0:Whether the G81 synchronization command can be specified in the synchronization
process prohibition
Bit3 1:The system resets in the synchronization process reserve the synchronized control
0:The system resets in the synchronization process cancel the synchronization control
Bit2 1:In the synchronization procedure,in the G99 feed per revolution use the theoretical
revolving speed of workpiece\

Ⅲ
0:In the synchronization procedure,in the G99 feed per revolution use the encoder feedback
revolving speed

Connection
2 2 0 SP_SERVOn
［Data type］ Word spindle
［Data meaning］The corresponding interface number of each spindle output
［Data unit］
［Data range］ 0～14
Setting value meaning
2 analog spindle interface 2
1 analog spindle interface 1
0 Disabled analog spindle output
11～14 extension IO unit analog output
interface; 1~4

2 2 1 SP_SP_CSAXIS
［Data type］ Word spindle
［Data meaning］The functions, such as the feed axis number, CS axis related to each axis must be
set.

417
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

［Data unit］
［Data range］ 0～5
Setting value meaning Setting value meaning Setting value meaning
0 Nothing 2 Z axis 4 4th axis
1 X axis 3 3rd axis 5 5th axis

3.2.8 Tool Compensation

0 0 2 NRC
Bit1 1: Tool nose radius offset active
0: Tool nose radius offset inactive

0 0 3 TCOMP CDCOMP OIM

Bit4 1: Tool offset by coordinate offset
0: Tool offset by move
Bit3 1: Tool compensated by the shift of coordinate system do not memorize the unexecuted tool
compensation
0: Tool compensated by the shift of coordinate system memorize the unexecuted tool
compensation
Bit0 1: Offset automatically change in metric and inch conversion
0: Offset not change in metric and inch conversion

0 0 4 ORC PROD
ORC 1: Tool offset by radius
0: Tool offset by diameter
PROD 1: Programming position for RELATIVE display
Ⅲ

0: Position involving offset for RELATIVE display

Connection

0 1 2 DOFSI
DOFSI 1: Trial tool setting active
0: Trial tool setting inactive

3.2.9 Tool Life Management Function

0 0 2 *** *** LIFJ MDITL LIFC TLIF
Bit4 1: Tool life management group skip active
0: Tool life management group skip inactive
Bit3 1: Tool life management active in MDI mode
0: Tool life management inactive in MDI mode
Bit2 1: Tool life counting type 2, by times
0: Tool life counting type 1, by times
Bit0 1: Tool life management active
0: Tool life management inactive

418
 Chapter 3 Parameters

3.2.10 Tool Wear Parameter

1 4 0 TWEAR_MAX
［Data meaning］ positive/negative limit of tool wear value in tool offset & wear window.
［Data unit］
Set unit IS-B IS-C
Metric input 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm
Inch input 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch
［Data range］
IS-B IS-C
Metric input 1～99999 1～999999
Inch input 1～99999 1～999999

3.2.11 Edit & Display

0 0 5 M30
M30 1: Cursor to beginning after M30
0: Cursor to beginning by pressing CYCLE START key after M30

0 1 2 ALM&
PRG
Bit3 1: Program editing allowed during CNC alarming
0: Program editing unallowed during CNC alarming

1 8 0 DISPC CUSTOM SPOS

Bit3 1:Boot dispaly if custom page setted to display custom page

Ⅲ
0:Boot dispaly if custom page setted to display fault page

Connection
Bit2 1:Display custom page display
0:Display custom page hide
Bit0 1: DIS TO GO displayed in POS&PRG page
0: RELATIVE POS displayed in POS&PRG page

1 8 1 CLMDI MCL M30&MDI

Bit4 1:When system reset,the program block of MDI are deleted
0:When system reset,the program block of MDI are not deleted
Bit3 1: Blocks edited in MDI mode are deleted after reset;
0: Block edited in MDI mode are not deleted after reset;
Bit2 1:After the execution of M02, M30,the program block of MDI are not deleted
0:After the execution of M02, M30,the program block of MDI are deleted

1 8 4 *** PTEST *** *** *** L2 L1 L0

Bit0, Bit1, Bit2: Interface language selection
Language Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
Chinese 0 0 0
English 0 0 1

419
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

Portugal 0 1 0
Spanish 0 1 1
Russian 1 1 0

3.2.12 Communication Setting

0 4 4 BRATE0
［Data meaning］ baud rate of serial communication.
［Data unit］ bit/s
［Data range］ 1200,2400,4800,9600,19200,38400,57600 ,115200

3.2.13 MPG Parameters

0 0 1 *** *** MPG
Bit3 1: MPG mode
0: Step mode

0 1 3 RTH RPH *** HW5 HW4 HWY HWZ HWX

Bit7 1: When system reset,the handle interrupt move amount is cancelled
0: When system reset,the handle interrupt move amount is not cancelled
Bit6 1:When MPG feedrate exceeds the rapid movement speed,the exceeding part is not ignored
and saved in CNC
0:When MPG feedrate exceeds the rapid movement speed,the exceeding part is ignored
and saved in CNC
Bit4~Bit0 1: coordinates increase when 5th, 4th, Y, Z or X MPG rotates CCW;
0: coordinates increase when 5th, 4th, Y, Z or X MPG rotates CW.
Ⅲ
Connection

K 1 6 SINC *** *** *** *** *** ***

Bit7 1: In STEP(MPG) mode, ×1000 gear is invalid
0: In STEP(MPG), ×1000 gear is valid

2 4 3 CNC_MPG_NUM
［Data meaning］ Quantity of MPG
［Data range］ 1～2

2 4 4 MPG1_INTERFACE
2 4 5 MPG2_INTERFACE
［Data meaning］ MPG interface of MPG 1,2
［Data range］ 0～1
Setting value Meaning
0 Rear cover MPG interface 1 (CN31)
1 Rear cover MPG interface 2(CN32)

420
 Chapter 3 Parameters

3.2.14 PLC Axis Control Function

1 8 5 *** *** *** PRPD PLA
PRPD 1: Rapid traverse rate of PLC axis by input value
0: Rapid traverse rate of PLC axis by parameter value (X axis: No.022; Z axis:No.023; Y
axis:No.155;)
PLA 1: PLC axis control active, and active after repowering
0: PLC axis control inactive, and active after repowering
Note: The PLC axis control function is only provided by machine builder.

2 1 9 PLCDIDOn
［Data type］ Word axis
［Data meaning］ Select DI/DO in PLC axis control PLC
［Data unit］
［Data range］ 0～4

3.2.15 Skip Function

1 8 5 SK0 SKF *** *** ***
SK0 1: Skip input active as G31 signal is 0
0: Skip input active as G31 signal is 1
SKF 1: Feedrate override per minute or dry run active for G31
0: Feedrate override per minute or dry run inactive for G31
Note: The skip function is only provided by machine builder.
1 4 8 MULTISTAGE_SKIP1
1 4 9 MULTISTAGE_SKIP2

Ⅲ
1 5 0 MULTISTAGE_SKIP3
1 5 1 MULTISTAGE_SKIP4

Connection
［Data type］ Word
［Data meaning］Multilevel skip G31 P1～P4 or G04 Q1～Q4 signal detect address setting(0:no
effect; 20~27,30~37: address X2.0~X3.7)
［Data range］ 0、20~27, 30~37

3.2.16 Automatic Tool Setting Function

1 8 5 AEO *** *** ***
AWO 1: when G36, G37 signal（XAE，ZAE）is 0, the input is valid;
0: G36, G37 signal（XAE，ZAE）is 1, the input is valid.

1 4 1 AUTO_OFFSET_FEED
［Data meaning］ feedrate in automatic tool compensation measure.
［Data unit］
Set unit Data unit
Metric machine mm/min

421
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

Inch machine 0.1inch/min

［Data range］
IS-B IS-C
Metric machine 15～1000 15～1000
Inch machine 7～375 7～375
1 4 2 AUTO_OFFSET_Y_X
1 4 3 AUTO_OFFSET_Y_Z
［Data meaning］ X（AUTO_OFFSET_Y_X）, Z（AUTO_OFFSET_Y_Z）γ value in automatic tool
offset.
［Data unit］
Set unit IS-B IS-C
Metric machine 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm
Inch machine 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch
［Data range］ 1～9999999
Note: X setting value is the radius in diameter programming and radius programming.

1 4 4 AUTO_OFFSET_E_X
1 4 5 AUTO_OFFSET_E_Z
［Data meaning］ AUTO_OFFSET_E_X（X）,AUTO_OFFSET_E_Z（Z）ε value in automatic tool
offset.
Note: The function needs the automatic tool setting device.

3.2.17 Input & Output Function in Metric/Inch System

0 0 1 *** *** INI
Ⅲ

INI 1: Inch input

0: Metric input
Connection

0 0 3 *** *** *** *** *** OIM

OIM 1: Offset automatically change in metric and inch conversion
0: Offset not change in metric and inch conversion
0 0 4 *** SCW
SCW 1: Inch system for min. code unit, active after repowering
0: Metric system for min. code unit, active after repowering

3.2.18 Parameters Related to Arc Turning

1 5 4 RADIUS_ERR_RANGE
［Data meaning］ max. value of arc radius error.
［Data unit］

Setting unit IS-B IS-C

Metric machine 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm
Inch machine 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch
［Data range］

422
 Chapter 3 Parameters

IS-B IS-C
Metric machine 0～1000 0～10000
Inch machine 0～50 0～500

3.2.19 Parameters Related to Addition

1 8 7 IS1 IS0 RCS *** *** *** ROS ROT
[Data type]: Bit axis
BIT7,BIT6: set incremental system of each axis，00: consistent with the incremental system of the
system，01: IS-A，10: IS-B；11: IS-C.
Bit5 1: Cs function of additional axis is valid/invalid (power-on again);
0: Cs function of additional axis is valid/invalid (power-on again).
Bit1,Bit0: 00 sets the additional axis to be the linear, 01 sets the additional axis to be the rotary(A
type)，11 sets the additional axis to be the rotary (B type)，10 sets the additional axis to
be invalid.
Note: This parameter is invalid to axes X and Z.

1 8 8 *** RRT *** *** *** RRL RAB ROA

[Data type]: Bit axis
Bit6 1: When the additional axis is rotary, the zero return uses D mode;
0: When the additional axis is rotary, the zero return uses A, B, C (power-on again).
Bit2 1: When the additional axis is rotary, cycle function of the relative coordinate is valid;
0: When the additional axis is rotary, cycle function of the relative coordinate is invalid
(power-on again).
Bit1 1: When the additional axis is rotary, its rotation direction is based on the sign direction;
0: When the additional axis is rotary, its rotation direction is contiguous.

Ⅲ
Bit0 1: When the additional axis is rotary, cycle function of the absolute coordinate is valid;

Connection
0: When the additional axis is rotary, cycle function of the absolute coordinate is invalid
(power-on again).
Note: This parameter is invalid to axes X and Z.
2 2 5 NAME_n
［Data type］ Word axis
［Data meaning］axis name definitions
［Data range］ 65, 66, 67, 88, 89, 90
Axis name Setting value Axis name Setting value Axis name Setting value
X 88 A 65 C 67
Z 90 B 66 Y 89

2 3 0 ATTRIB_n
［Data type］ Word axis
［Data meaning］ The properties of each axis in coordinate system
［Data range］ 0～7
Setting value Meaning
0 Neither the basic three axes nor the parallel axis

423
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

1 X axis of the basic three axes

2 Y axis of the basic three axes
3 Z axis of the basic three axes
5 Parallel axis of X axis
6 Parallel axis of Y axis
7 Parallel axis of Z axis

3.2.20 GSKLink Bus Related to Absolute Encoder

1 8 9 CTS *** APC APZ *** *** *** ***
[Data type]:Bit axis
Bit7 1:Each servo axis didn’t connect servo drive , it is necessary to restart;
0:Each servo axis connected servo drive , it is necessary to restart.
Bit5 1:The used encoder type of each axis is absolute encoder；
0:The used encoder type of each axis is incremental encoder。
Bit4 1:When each axis matches with an absolute encoder, the mechanical position and absolute
one are shown consistent;
0:When each axis matches with an absolute encoder, the mechanical position and absolute
one are shown inconsistent.

1 9 5 SSPD
Bit7 1:series spindle controllable function enabled (series spindle The slave ID number of the
spindle 1~3 is 11~13) , it is necessary to restart；
0:series spindle controllable function disabled (analogy spindle), it is necessary to restart.
2 4 9 ABSPOSERR
［Data type］ Word axis
Ⅲ

［Data meaning］When an absolute encoder is equipped with each axis, the Max. position error value
Connection

allows when the coordinate system is set up with power-on.

［Data unit］
Setting unit IS-B IS-C
Metric input 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm
Inch input 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch
［Data range］ 0～999999

2 5 0 *** *** *** *** *** *** VERI GSKLINK

Bit1 1:System GSKLINK bus communication CRC verification enabled
0:System GSKLINK bus communication CRC verification disabled
Bit0 1: Whether the system GSKLINK bus connection is enabled
0: Whether the system GSKLINK bus connection is disabled

424
 Chapter 4 Machine Debugging methods and Modes

CHAPTER 4 MACHINE DEBUGGING METHODS AND MODES

The trial run methods and steps at initial power on for this GSK980TDi/GSK980TDi-V are
described in this chapter. The corresponding operation can be performed after the debugging by the
following steps.

4.1 ESP & Limit

This GSK980TDi/GSK980TDi-V system has software limit function, it is suggested that hardware
limit is employed by fixing the stroke limit switches in the positive or negative axes.

4.1.1 ESP & Limit Series-Connection

The connection is as follows (2 axes):

Fig. 4-1
So the BIT3 (ESP) of bit parameter No.172 should be set to 0.

Ⅲ
The diagnostic message DGN000.7 monitors the emergency stop input signal.
In Manual or MPG mode, slowly move the axes to testify the validity of stroke limit switch,

Connection
correctness of alarm display, validity of overtravel release button. When the overtravel occurs or
Emergency Stop button is pressed, “ESP” alarm will be issued by CNC system. The alarm can be
cancelled by pressing down the OVERTRAVEL key for reverse moving.

4.1.2 Separately Connect of ESP & Limit

The connection is shown below; refer to the Fig. 4-2 (3-axis is regarded as an example):

+24V

LIMX
CNC

LIMZ
LIMY
ESP

Fig. 4-2
The Bit 3 of status parameters №172 equals to 0: ESP function is enabled;

425
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

The Bit 7 of PLC parameter K10 equals to 1: The overtravel function along each axis is enabled;
The Bit6 of PLC parameter K10: High/Low LEVEL selection of overtravel signal
In the Manual or MPG mode, slowly move the effectiveness of the overtravel limit swith of each
axis verification or the correction of alarm display; the CNC ESP alarm may occur when pressing the
ESP button is controlled; when the overtravel alarm occurs, it will moves towards to the negative
direction; after moving out the limit position, the resetting clear alarm then can be pressed.

4.2 Drive Unit Configuration

The corresponding axis of each servo drive unit should be set based upon the valid configuration
of the system, which can be directly set on the page of “Setting->GSKLink setting” based upon the
2-level authorities.

Under the 2-level or more authorities, enter to the setting page by , and then to the

GSKLink setting page by , the display is shown below:

Ⅲ
Connection

Select the servo drive by or button, set the selected corresponding axis of the servo

drive by : When the connection sequence of the servo drive is: X axis, Z axis, Y axis, the 4th axis,
the 5th axis, spindle 1, spindle 2 or spindle 3 (regardless of the unavailable axis), the overall servo

drives can be set by .

If the connection sequence of the servo axis does not correct, we would not definitely know the
corresponding servo drive of each axis on the page of the “Setting->GSKLink setting”, it can be
directly set at the side of the servo side. The corresponding setting parameter of the servo is PA156;
the comparison table of the parameter setting is shown below:
System Servo System Servo System Servo
axis parameter axis parameter axis parameter
X 1 Y 3 5TH 5
Z 2 4TH 4
Spindle 1 11 Spindle 2 12 Spindle 3 13
The Bit 4, Bit 3, Bit 2, Bit 1 and Bit 0 (DIR4, DIR5, DIRY, DIRZ or DIRX separately corresponds to
the 5th, the 4th, Y, Z or X axis) of the state parameter No.008 can be modified if the machine tool

426
 Chapter 4 Machine Debugging methods and Modes

movement direction is inconsistent with the one of command required.

The manual movement direction can be changed by the Bit 4, Bit 3, Bit 2, Bit 1 and Bit 0 (5VAL,
4VAL, YVAL, ZVAL or XVAL separately corresponds to the 5th, 4th, Y, Z or X axis movement button) of
parameter No.175.

4.3 Gear Ratio Adjustment

№015 ～ №016 can be modified for electronic gear ratio adjustment to meet the various
mechanical transmission ratios when the machine travel distance is not consistent with the
displacement distance displayed by the CNC.
Formula:
CMR 4 * C *  Z M
 *
CMD L ZD
CMR: Code multiplier coefficient (data parameter No.015)
CMD: Code frequency division coefficient (data parameter No.016)
C: Motor’ s encoder lines
 : Pulse volume, motor rotation angle for a pulse
L: Screw lead
δ: Current min. input code unit of CNC
ZM : gear teeth number of lead screw
ZD: gear teeth number of motor
For example, the screw lead and motor are directly connected by linkage axis, the motor’s
encoder is 17-bit absolute one, screw lead is 4mm, the current increment of CNC is 0.1μ;
X electronic gear ratio:
CMR C* δ Z M 131072 * 0.00005 1 1024
 *  * 
CMD L ZD 4 1 625

Ⅲ
Z electronic gear ratio:

Connection
CMR C* δ Z M 131072 * 0.0001 1 2048
 *  * 
CMD L ZD 4 1 625
Then, the parameter data №015X（CMRX）=1024， №016X（CMDX）=625；№015Z（CMRZ）
=2048， №016Z（CMDZ）=625。
If the electronic gear ratio numerator is more than the denominator, the allowed CNC max. speed
will decrease. For example: the data parameter No.015Z (CMRZ) =2, No.016Z (CMDZ) =1, so the
allowed Z axis max. speed is 30000mm/min.
If the electronic gear ratio numerator is not equal to the denominator, the allowed CNC
positioning precision may decrease. For example: the data parameter No.015Z(CMRZ) =1,
No.016Z(CMDZ) =5, so the pulse is not output as the input increment is 0.0004, but a pulse is output
when the input increment is 0.0005.
In order to ensure the CNC positioning precision and speed index, it is suggested that the CNC
electronic gear ratio is set to 1:1 and the electronic gear ratio calculated is set to the digital servo
when matching with digital servo.
When matching with the step drive, choose the drive unit with step division function as possible
as it can, and properly select mechanical transmission ratio. The 1:1 electronic gear ratio should be
ensured to avoid the excessive difference between the numerator and the denominator of this CNC
electronic gear ratio.

427
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

4.4 ACC&DEC Characteristic Adjustment

Adjust the relative CNC parameters according to the factors such as the drive unit, motor
characteristics and machine load:
Data parameter No.022: rapid traverse rate of each axis;
Data parameter No.023: linear ACC&DEC time constant of each axis rapid traverse rate;
Data parameter No.026: X axis exponential ACC&DEC time constant in threading;
Data parameter No.028: exponential ACC&DEC start/termination speed in threading;
Data parameter No.029: exponential ACC&DEC time constant in cutting and manual feeding;
Data parameter No.030: exponential ACC&DEC start/end speed in cutting feeding;
Data parameter No.041: ACC&DEC start/termination speed in manual feeding;
BIT5 (SMZ) of bit parameter No.007: for smooth transition between cutting feedrates of adjacent
blocks
The larger the ACC&DEC time constant is, the slower the ACC&DEC is, the smaller the machine
movement impact and the lower the machining efficiency is, and vice versa.
If ACC&DEC time constants are equal, the higher the ACC&DEC start/end speed is, the faster
the ACC&DEC is, the bigger the machine movement impact and the higher the machining efficiency
is, and vice versa.
The principle for ACC&DEC characteristic adjustment is to properly reduce the ACC&DEC time
constant and increase the ACC&DEC start/end speed to improve the machining efficiency on the
condition that there is no alarm, motor out-of-step and obvious machine impact. If the ACC&DEC time
constant is set too small, and the start/end speed is set too large, it is easily to cause faults such as
drive unit alarm, motor out-of-step or machine vibration.
When the bit parameter No.007 BIT5(SMZ) =1, the feedrate drops to the start speed of the
ACC&DEC at the cutting path intersection, then it accelerates to the specified speed of the next block
to obtain an accurate positioning at the path intersection, but this will reduce the machining efficiency.
When BIT5=0, the adjacent cutting path transits smoothly by the ACC&DEC. The feedrate does not
Ⅲ

always drop to the start speed when the previous path is finished and a circular transition
(non-accurate positioning) will be formed at the path intersection. The machining surface by this path
Connection

transition has a good finish and a higher machining efficiency. When the stepper motor drive unit is
applied, the BIT5 of the bit parameter No.007 should be set to 1 to avoid the out-of-step.
If AC servo drive unit is applied to this system, the machining efficiency can be improved by a
larger start speed and a smaller ACC&DEC time constant setting. If optimum acc/dec characteristics
are required, the ACC&DEC time constant may be set to 0 which can be gotten by adjusting the AC
servo acc/dec parameters. The suggested settings for these parameters are as follows(electronic
gear ratio is 1:1):
Data parameter No.022 X＝5000 Data parameter No.022 Z＝10000
Data parameter No.023 X≤60 Data parameter No.023 Z≤60
Data parameter No.029≤50 Data parameter No.028≤500
Data parameter No.026≤50 Data parameter No.030≤400
The parameter settings above are recommended for use, please refer to the actual conditions of
the drive unit, motor characteristic and motor load for their proper setting.

4.5 Mechanical (Machine) Zero Adjustment

The debugging methods of the machine zero point are different based upon the encoder type of
the adapted motor.

428
 Chapter 4 Machine Debugging methods and Modes

1. When the adapated absolute encoder and the servo axis is linear one.
When the bus connection is normal, as well the debugging of the electric gear ratio of servo axis
or the movement direction is normal, the position from movement axis to preset value on machine tool
is regarded as the machine zero, directly set the current position on the machine as the machine
reference point by the [n axis reference point setting] soft button on the page of the “Position－>
Integrated coordinate”. The machine will directly position to the reference point when it returns to zero
after the reference point is set.
2. When the adapted incremental encoder or servo axis is rotation axis.
Adjust the relevant parameters based on the active level of the connection signal, zero return
type and direction applied:
BIT5 (DECI) of the bit parameter No.004: active level of deceleration signal in machine zero
return.
BIT0, BIT1, BIT2，BIT3，BIT4 (ZMX, ZMZ, ZMY，ZM4, ZM5) of the bit parameter No.006: X, Z,
Y, 4th, 5th axis machine zero return mode B or C selection.
BIT0, BIT1, BIT2, BIT3, BIT4 (ZCX, ZCZ, ZCY, ZC4, ZC5) of the bit parameter No.007: whether a
proximity switch is taken as both deceleration and zero signals.
BIT2(ZNLK) of the bit parameter No.011: whether the direction key in zero return is self-locked.
BIT0, BIT1, BIT2, BIT3, BIT4 (ZRSCX, ZRSCZ, ZRSCY, ZRSC4, ZRSC5) of the bit parameter
No.014: have/not the machine zero(zero turn mode BC/A)setting bit.
Data parameter No.033: low deceleration speeds of each axis in machine zero return.
Data parameter No.113: high speed of each axis in machine zero return.
BIT0, BIT1, BIT2, BIT3, BIT4 (MZRX, MZRZ, MZRY, MZR4, MZR5) of the bit parameter No.183:
each axis zero return direction: negative or positive.
Only the stroke limit switch validity is confirmed, can the machine zero return be performed.
The machine zero is usually fixed at the max. travel point, and the effective stroke of the zero
return touch block should be more than 25mm to ensure a sufficient deceleration distance for
accurate zero return. The more rapid the machine zero return is, the longer the zero return touch

Ⅲ
block should be. Or the moving carriage will rush over the block and it may affect the zero return

Connection
precision because of the insufficient deceleration distance.
The connection to AC servo motor: using a travel switch and servo motor one-turn signal
separately

Fig. 4-2
By this connection, when the deceleration switch is released in machine zero return, the one-turn
signal of encoder should be avoided to be at a critical point after the travel switch is released. In order
to improve the zero return precision, and it should ensure the motor reaches the one-turn signal of
encoder after it rotates half circle.
The parameter setting is as follows:
Bit parameter No.004 BIT5(DECI) =0
Bit parameter No.006 BIT0(ZMX) , BIT1(ZMZ) , BIT2(ZMY), BIT3(ZM4), BIT4(ZM5) =0
Bit parameter No.007 BIT0(ZCX) , BIT1(ZCZ) , BIT2(ZCY) , BIT3(ZC4), BIT4(ZC5)=0
429
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

Bit parameter No.011 BIT2(ZNLK) =1

Bit parameter No.014 BIT0(ZRSCX) , BIT1(ZRSCZ) , BIT2(ZRSCY), BIT3(ZRSC4),
BIT4(ZRSC5) =1
Data parameter No.033=200
Data parameter No.183 BIT0(MZRX) , BIT1(MZRZ) , BIT2(MZRY), BIT3(MZR4) , BIT4(MZR5)
=0

4.6 Spindle Adjustment

4.6.1 Spindle Encoder
Encoder with the pulses 100~10000p/r is needed to be installed on the machine for threading.
The pulses are set by data parameter No.70. The transmission ratio(spindle gear teeth/encoder gear
teeth) between encoder and spindle is 1/255～255. The spindle gear teeth are set by CNC data
parameter No.110, and the encoder gear teeth are set by data parameter No.111. The encoder
number used by spindle is set in the data parameter No.069.
Synchronous belt transmission should be applied for it (no sliding transmission).
The DGN.011 diagnosis message is used to check the validity of thread signal of the spindle
encoder.

4.6.2 Spindle Brake

After M05 code is executed, proper spindle brake time should be set to stop the spindle promptly
in order to enhance the machining efficiency. If the brake is employed with energy consumption type,
too long braking time may burn out the motor.
Data parameter No.087: delay from spindle stop(M05) to spindle brake output
Ⅲ

Data parameter No.089: spindle braking time

Connection

4.6.3 Switch Volume Control of Spindle Speed

When the machine is controlled by a multi-speed motor, the motor speed codes are S01～S04.
The relevant parameters are as follows:
State parameter No.001 Bit4=0: select spindle speed switch control;

4.6.4 Analog Voltage Control of Spindle Speed

This function can be obtained by the parameter setting of CNC. By interface outputting 0V～10V
analog voltage to control frequency inverter, the stepless shift can be obtained. And the related
parameters needed to be adjusted are:
Bit parameter No.001 Bit4=1: for spindle speed analog voltage control;
The Bit 7 of the status parameters №195 equals to 0: Select the spindle revolving speed is
analog voltage control;
Data parameter No.021: offset value as spindle speed code voltage is 10V;
Data parameter No.036: offset value as spindle speed code voltage is 0V;
Data parameter No.037～ No.040: for max. speed clamping of spindle gear 1～4; it defaults the
spindle gear 1 when CNC power on.

430
 Chapter 4 Machine Debugging methods and Modes

Basic parameters are needed to adjust the inverter:

CW or CCW code mode selection: it is determined by terminal VF;
Frequency setting mode selection: it is determined by terminal FR;
If the speed by programming is not consistent with that detected by the encoder, it can be
adjusted to be consistent with the actual one by adjusting the data parameter No.037～No.040.
Speed adjustment method: select the corresponding spindle gear, determine the data parameter
is 9999 as for this system gear, set the spindle override for 100%. Input spindle run command in MDI
mode to run the spindle: M03/M04 S9999, view the spindle speed shown on the right bottom of the
screen, then input the speed value displayed into the corresponding system parameter.
When entering S9999 code, the voltage should be 10V, S0 for 0V. If there is a voltage error,
adjust bit parameter No.021 and No.036 to correct the voltage offset value (corrected by
manufacturer, usually not needed).
For the current max. speed gear, if the analog voltage output by CNC is not 10V, set it for 10V by
adjusting the data parameter No.021; when the input speed is 0, if the spindle still slowly rotates, it
means the analog voltage output by CNC is higher than 0V, so set a smaller value for data parameter
No.036.
If the machine is not fixed with an encoder, the spindle speed can be detected by a speed
sensing instrument, input S9999 in MDI mode to set the speed value displayed by the instrument into
the data parameter No.037～ No.040.

4.6.5 Spindle Speed Series Control

The spindle speed series control can be carried out by CNC parameter, directly control the
spindle servo drive unit to achieve the stepless speed by delivering the seires data from bus; the
relevant parameters to be adjusted are shown below:
The Bit 4 of the status parameter №001 equals to =1: Select the spindle speed analog voltage or
series control;

Ⅲ
The Bit 7 of the status parameter №195 equals to 1: Select the spindle speed as the series

Connection
control;
Data parameters №037～№040: The top speed of each step;
When the revolving speed specified by programming is inconsistent with the one of the encoder
detection, the specified speed becomes consistent with the actual one by adjusting the data
parameters №037～№040.
Revolving speed adjustment method: Firstly, shift the spindle to the corresponding gears and
ensure that the corresponding gear data parameter for the system is 9999, adjust the spindle override
as 100%; Input the spindle operation command on the MDI interface and operate the M03/M04
S9999; secondly, observe the spindle speed on the right corner of the screen; lastly, input the
displayed revolving speed value to the corresponding data parameter of the gear.
When the machine tool does not install the encoder, it can be detected the spindle speed by
revolving speed sensor; MDI code inputs the S9999; Set the displayed revolving speed on its sensor
to the corresponding gear data parameters №037～№040.

4.7 Backlash Offset

The X axis backlash offset value is input by diameter, Z axis backlash offset value is input by the
actual backlash which can be measured by a dial-indicator, a micrometer or a laser detector. Because
431
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

the backlash offset can improve the machining precision only by accurate compensation, it is not
recommended to measure it in MPG or Step mode, but the following method is suggested:
 Program editing (taking example of Z):
O0001；
N10 G01 W10 F800 ；
N20 W15；
N30 W1；
N40 W-1；
N50 M30.
 Set the backlash error offset to 0 before measuring:
 Run the program by single blocks, search the measuring benchmark after 2 positioning
operations, record the current data, move 1mm in the same direction, then move 1mm to
point B reversely, read the current data.

Reverse
position
Data reading
position
B

Fig. 4-4 Schematic map of backlash measuring method

 Backlash error offset value= | data of point A –data of point B |; then input its outcome to the
Ⅲ

data parameter No.034（BKLn） (for X axis, multiply 2 and then input the outcome to data
Connection

parameter No.034).
Data A: dial-indicator data at point A
Data B: dial-indicator data at point B
Note 1: The backlash offset mode can be set by Bit7 of CNC parameter No.011; the backlash frequency can
be set by Bit6 of parameter No.011 and Bit4, Bit3, Bit2, Bit1, Bit0 of bit parameter No.010.
Note 2: Check the machine backlash every 3 months.

4.8 Tool Post Debugging

GSK980TDi supports various kinds of tool post, and the parameter settings are based on the
machine manual. The parameter settings for the tool post running are as follows:
BIT2(TSGN) of K parameter No.011: high/low level selection of tool post in-position signal, when
the signal is low level active, a parallel pull-up resistor is needed.
Bit3 (CTCP) of K parameter No.011: check/do not check tool post lock signal in tool change;
Bit4 (TCPS)of K parameter No.011: tool post lock signal HIGH/LOW selection;
Bit5 (CHET) of K parameter No.11: check/do not check tool signal;

432
 Chapter 4 Machine Debugging methods and Modes

Combinations and functions of tool change mode selection Bit1(CHTB), Bit0(CHTA) of K

parameter No.11 are referred to Tool Change Control.
Data parameter No.076: Duration for moving a tool in tool changing
Data parameter No.078: Upper limit time for changing one tool
Data parameter No.082: Delay time from tool post CCW stop to CW clamping start
Data parameter No.084: Total tools number
Data parameter No.085: Delay of tool post CW clamping
If the tool post doesn’t rotate at first power on for tool change, the phase connection of the
3-phase power of the tool post motor may be incorrect, it needs to press the RESET key immediately
and cutoff the power, then check the wiring; if the fault is caused by this, exchange two phases of the
3-phase power.
The CW clamping duration setting should be proper, it should be neither longer nor shorter,
longer delay may damage the motor, shorter delay may cause the tool post not to be completely
clamped. The method to check the tool post clamping is: approach the dial-indicator to the tool post,
turn the tool post manually, and the pointer floating of the dial-indicator should not be over 0.01mm.
The BIT7(TL-) and BIT6(TL+) of diagnosis message DGN.005 are used to check the validity of
tool post CCW/CW output signal.
The BIT0～BIT3 (T01～T04) of diagnosis message DGN.000 are used to check the validity of
tool number T01～T04 signal.
During debugging, every tool, max. tools change should be performed to check the correctness
of the tool change, time parameter setting.

Ⅲ
4.9 Step/MPG Adjustment

Connection
The key on the panel can be used to select the Step mode or MPG mode, which is set by
the BIT3 of bit parameter No.001.
Bit3 =1: MPG mode active, Step mode inactive;
=0: Step mode active, MPG mode inactive;

433
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual
Ⅲ
Connection

434
 Chapter 5 Diagnosis Message

CHAPTER 5 DIAGNOSIS MESSAGE

Diagnosis messages for GSK980TDi system are described in this chapter.

5.1 CNC Diagnosis

The part is used to check the CNC interface signals and internal running and it can’t be modified.

5.1.1 I/O Status & Data Diagnosis Message

0 0 0 ESP *** *** DEC5 DEC4 DECZ DECY DECX
Pin CN61.6 CN61.34 CN61.33 CN61.12 CN61.32 CN61.4

PLC fixed X0.5 X2.5 X2.4 X1.3 X2.3 X0.3

address

DECX, DECY, DECZ, DEC4, DEC5: machine zero return signal of X, Y, Z, 4th, 5th
ESP: emergency stop signal
0 0 1 *** *** *** *** *** *** *** SKIP
Pin CN61.42

PLC fixed X3.5

address
SKIP: skip signal

Ⅲ
5.1.2 CNC Motion State & Data Diagnosis Message

Connection
0 0 4 *** *** *** EN5 EN4 ENZ ENY ENX
th th
EN5～ENX: X, Z, Y, 4 , 5 enabling signal

0 0 6 *** *** *** DRO5 DRO4 DROZ DROY DROX

th
DRO5～DROX: X, Y, Z, 4th, 5 motion direction output

0 0 9 *** *** *** ALM5 ALM4 ALMZ ALMY ALMX

th
ALM5～ALMX: X, Y, Z, 4th, 5 alarm signal

0 1 0 MPG rotation data

0 1 1 Spindle speed 1 feedback data
0 1 2 Spindle speed 2 feedback data
0 1 3 Spindle 1 analog output value
0 1 4 Spindle 2 analog output value
0 1 5 Spindle 3 analog output value
0 4 8 X axis output pulse number
0 4 9 X axis motor feedback position

435
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

0 5 0 Y axis output pulse number

0 5 1 Y axis motor feedback position
0 5 2 Z axis output pulse number
0 5 3 Z axis motor feedback position
0 5 4 4th axis output pulse number
0 5 5 4th axis motor feedback position
0 5 6 5th axis output pulse number
0 5 7 5th axis motor feedback position
0 6 1 MPG 1 counting（Rear cover MPG interface CN31）
0 6 2 MPG 2 counting（Rear cover MPG interface CN32）
0 6 5 Spindle 1 encoder counting（Rear cover CN21）
0 6 6 Spindle 2 encoder counting（Rear cover CN22）
The pulse number from the time that X axis starts detecting PC signal to
0 6 9
PC signal is detected
The pulse number from the time that Y axis starts detecting PC signal to
0 7 0
PC signal is detected
The pulse number from the time that Z axis starts detecting PC signal to
0 7 1
PC signal is detected
The pulse number from the time that 4th axis starts detecting PC signal
0 7 2
to PC signal is detected
The pulse number from the time that 5th axis starts detecting PC signal
0 7 3
to PC signal is detected
0 7 5 The total times of system history underpressure
0 7 6 The counts that power is low(Power is on)
Ⅲ

0 7 7 When power is low,times of not finishing save data (unit:ms)

Connection

0 9 0 Nvram data accumulation error times

Spindle encoder 1 detection linear number (Rear cover encoder
1 0 0
interface CN21)
Spindle encoder 2 detection linear number (Rear cover encoder
1 0 1
interface CN22)
1 0 4 The accumulation times of GDT data verification error along X axis
1 0 5 The accumulation times of GDT data verification error along Z axis
1 0 6 The accumulation times of GDT data verification error along Y axis
1 0 7 The accumulation times of GDT data verification error along 4TH axis
1 0 8 The accumulation times of GDT data verification error along 5TH axis
1 1 0 The accumulation times of GDT data verification error of spindle 1
1 1 1 The accumulation times of GDT data verification error of spindle 3
1 1 2 The accumulation times of GDT data verification error of spindle 4
1 1 3 The accumulation times of GDT data verification error of IO unit
1 1 4 The accumulation times of GDT data verification error of gateway

436
 Chapter 5 Diagnosis Message

5.1.3 Diagnosis Keys

DGN.016～DGN.024 are the diagnosis messages of edit keypad keys; DGN.024～DGN.029 are
the diagnosis messages of machine operation panel keys. When pressing a key in the operation
panel, the corresponding bit displays “1”, and “0” after releasing this key. If it displays reversely, it
means there is a fault in the keypad circuit.
0 1 6 VF1 RST O N G 7 8 9
key

0 1 7 VF2 X Z U W 4 5 6

key

0 1 8 VF3 H/Y F/E R/V D/L 1 2 3

key

0 1 9 VF4 I/A J/B K/C P/Q - 0 .

key

0 2 0 VF5 M S T /、# BLK EOB IN

key

0 2 1 VF6 PGU PGD CHG INS/ALT DEL CAN OUT

Ⅲ
key

Connection
0 2 2 VF7 CRU RIGHT POS RPG OFT ALM SET

key

0 2 3 VF8 CRD LEFT PAR DGN GRA PLC HELP

key

0 2 4 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8
key

5.2 PLC State

This part of diagnosis is used to detect the signal state of machine→PLC(X), PLC→machine(Y),
CNC→PLC (F), PLC→CNC (G) and alarm address A states.

437
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

5.2.1 X Address (Machine→PLC , Defined by Standard PLC Ladders)

X0000 T05 PRES ESP DITW DECX DIQP SP SAGT
T05: tool signal T05
PRES: pressure check input signal
ESP: emergency stop signal
DITW: tailstock control input
DECX: X deceleration signal
DIQP: chuck control input
SP: external pause
SAGT: safety door check signal
X0001 T01 M42I M41I ST DECZ T08/CHOT T07/INDX T06/SELE
T01: tool signal T01
M42I: spindle automatic gear shifting 2-gear in-position signal
M41I: spindle automatic gear shifting 1-gear in-position signal
ST: external cycle start
DECZ: Z deceleration signal
T08/CHOT: tool signal T08/tool post worktable overheat
T07/INDX: tool signal T07/Yantai tool post pregraduation input
T06/SELE: tool signal T06/Yantai tool post strobe signal

X0002 TCP DEC5 DEC4 DECY T04 T03 T02

TCP: tool post clamp signal
DEC5: 5th deceleration signal
DEC4: 4th deceleration signal
DECY: Y deceleration signal
T04: tool signal T04
Ⅲ

T03: tool signal T03

Connection

T02: tool signal T02

X0003 AEZ AEX SKIP NQPJ WQPJ LMIZ LMIY LMIX

AEZ: G37 skip signal
AEX: G36 skip signal
SKIP: G31 skip signal
NQPJ: inner chuck clamp/outer chuck clamp in-position signal
WQPJ: inner chuck release/outer chuck clamp in-position signal
LMIZ: Z overtravel input
LMIY: Y overtravel input
LMIX: X overtravel input

X0005 *** *** *** *** *** *** *** SALM

SALM: spindle 1 abnormality alarm input

X0006 *** *** ×100 ×10 ×1 ZHAN YHAN XHAN

×100: increment ×100（external）
×10: increment×10（external）
×1: increment×1（external）

438
 Chapter 5 Diagnosis Message

ZHAN: Z selection（external）
YHAN: Y selection（external）
XHAN: X selection（external）

X0008 *** *** *** *** *** *** *** SALM2

SALM2: the alarm input signal of second spindle

X0009 *** *** *** *** EXESP *** SP ST

EXESP: External emergency stop input signal
SP: External pause
ST: External cycle start

5.2.2 Y Address (PLC→Machine, Defined by Standard PLC Ladders)

Y0000 SPZD SCLP M05 M04 M03 *** M32 COOL
SPZD: spindle brake
SCLP: spindle clamped
M05: spindle stop
M04: spindle rotation CCW
M03: spindle rotation CW
M32: lubricating output
COOL: cooling output
Y0001 TL- TL+ DOQPS DOQPJ S4/M44 S3/M43 S42/M42 S41/M41
TL-: TL-tool post rotation (CW)
TL+: TL+tool post rotation(CCW)
DOQPS: chuck release

Ⅲ
DOQPJ: chuck clamp

Connection
S4/M44: spindle mechanical 4-gear
S3/M43: spindle mechanical 3-gear
S2/M42: spindle mechanical 2-gear
S1/M41: spindle mechanical 1-gear

Y0002 *** VP2 DOTWS DOTWJ CLPR CLPG CLPY INDXS/TCLP TZD/TLS
DOTWS: tailstock going backward
DOTWJ: tailstock going forward
CLPR: three-color lamp-red
CLPG: three-color lamp-green
CLPY: three-color lamp-yellow
INDXS/TCLP: Yantai Tool post worktable pregraduation coil /LIO_SHING Tool Post locked
TZD/TLS: Yantai Tool post worktable brake /LIO_SHING Tool Post releasing

UO5 UO4 UO3 UO2 UO1 UO0 HPS ***

Y0003
T
UO5: user macro output 5
UO4: user macro output 4
UO3: user macro output 3

439
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

U2: user macro output 2

U1: user macro output 1
U0: user macro output 0
HPST: hydraulic control output

Y0005 *** *** *** *** *** *** SRV SFR

SRV: spindle rotation(CW)
SFR: spindle rotation(CCW)

Y0008 *** *** *** *** *** *** SRV2 SFR2

SRV2: second spindle CCW
SFR2: second spindle CW
Ⅲ
Connection

440
 Y22.7 Y22.6 Y22.5 Y22.4 Y22.3 Y22.2 Y22.1 Y22.0

X24.0
5.2.3 Machine Panel
Chapter 5

GSK980TDi machine panel

Diagnosis Message

X18.0 X18.1 X18.2 X18.3 X18.4 X18.5 X26.3 X20.2 X20.3 X21.0 X20.1 X26.6 X21.4 X24.6 X21.7 X22.1 X22.3 X23.0
Y23.7 Y23.6 Y23.5 Y23.4 Y23.3 Y23.2 Y26.3 Y19.3 Y19.4 Y21.4 Y21.6 Y26.6 Y23.0 Y24.6 Y19.1 Y20.6 Y20.4 Y20.0

X18.6 X18.7 X19.0 X19.1 X19.2 X20.0 X19.3 X20.5 X20.6 X20.7 X25.7 X26.5 X21.6 X24.7 X21.5 X25.5 X26.7
Y18.7 Y18.6 Y18.5 Y18.4 Y18.3 Y21.7 Y18.2 Y19.2 Y18.1 Y28.2 Y21.3 Y26.5 Y20.7 Y24.7 Y18.0 Y21.1 Y26.7

X24.1 X24.2 X26.0 X19.4 X19.5 X19.6 X19.7 X20.4 X21.1 X21.2 X25.6 X26.4 X22.0 X21.3 X22.4 X22.6 X22.7
Y24.1 Y24.2 Y26.0 Y19.7 Y19.6 Y19.5 Y21.5 Y28.3 Y28.0 Y28.1 Y28.4 Y26.4 Y19.0 Y25 Y23.1 Y20.3 Y20.1 Y21.0

441
Connection Ⅲ
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

X24.0

Y22.7 Y22.6 Y22.5 Y22.4 Y22.3 Y22.2 Y22.1 Y22.0

Y25 X18.0 X18.1 X18.2 X18.3 X18.4 X18.5 X19.3 X26.3 X24.2
Y23.7 Y23.6 Y23.5 Y23.4 Y23.3 Y23.2 Y18.2 Y26.3 Y24.2

X18.6 X18.7 X19.0 X19.1 X19.2 X20.0 X24.1 X19.4 X19.5 X19.6 X19.7
Y18.7 Y18.6 Y18.5 Y18.4 Y18.3 Y21.7 Y24.1 Y19.7 Y19.6 Y19.5 Y21.5

X20.2 X20.3 X21.0 X20.1 X26.6 X21.4 X26.0 X21.7 X22.1 X22.3 X23.0
Y19.3 Y19.4 Y21.4 Y21.6 Y26.6 Y23.0 Y26.0 Y19.1 Y20.6 Y20.4 Y20.0
Ⅲ
Connection

X20.5 X20.6 X20.7 X25.7 X26.5 X21.6 X24.6 X21.5 X25.5 X26.7
Y19.2 Y18.1 Y28.2 Y21.3 Y26.5 Y20.7 Y24.6 Y18.0 Y21.1 Y26.7

X20.4 X21.1 X21.2 X25.6 X26.4 X22.0 X24.7 X21.3 X22.4 X22.6 X22.7
Y28.3 Y28.0 Y28.1 Y28.4 Y26.4 Y19.0 Y24.7 Y23.1 Y20.3 Y20.1 Y21.0

GSK980TDi-V machine panel

5.2.4 F Address(CNC→PLC)
F0000 OP SA STL SPL *** *** *** RWD
OP: Auto run signal
SA: Servo ready signal
STL: Cycle start indicator signal
SPL: Feed hold indicator signal

F0001 MA TCEN TAP ENB DEN *** RST AL

MA: CNC ready signal
TCEN: Tool-change allowable signal

442
 Chapter 5 Diagnosis Message

TAP: Tapping signal

ENB: Spindle enable signal
DEN: Designation end signal
RST: Reset signal
AL: Alarm signal

F0002 MDRN CUT *** SRNMV THRD CSS RPDO INCH

MDRN: Dry run detection signal
CUT: Cutting feed signal
SRNMV: Program start signal
THRD: Threading signal
CSS: Constant surface speed signal
RPDO: Rapid feed signal
INCH: Inch input signal

F0003 *** MEDT MMEM MMDI MJ MH MINC

MEDT: Memory edit selection detection signal
MMEM: Auto run selection detection signal
MMDI: MDI selection detection signal
MJ: JOG selection detection signal
MH: MPG selection detection signal
MINC: Increment feed detection signal

F0004 *** MPST MREF MAFL MSBK MABSM MMLK MBDT1

MPST: Program beginning return detection signal
MREF: Manual reference return detection signal

Ⅲ
MAFL: MST lock detection signal
MSBK: Single block detection signal

Connection
MABSM: JOG absolute detection signal
MMLK: All machine axes lock detection signal
MBDT1: Optional block skip detection signal

F0007 *** *** *** *** TF SF *** MF

TF: Tool function strobe signal
SF: Spindle speed strobe signal
MF: MST function strobe signal

F0009 DM00 DM01 DM02 DM30 *** *** *** ***

DM00: M decoding signal
DM01: M decoding signal
DM02: M decoding signal
DM30: M decoding signal

F0010 MB07 MB06 MB05 MB04 MB03 MB02 MB01 MB00

F0011 MB15 MB14 MB13 MB12 MB11 MB10 MB09 MB08
F0012 MB23 MB22 MB21 MB20 MB19 MB18 MB17 MB16

443
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

F0013 MB31 MB30 MB29 MB28 MB27 MB26 MB25 MB24

Miscellaneous function codes MB00~MB31

F0022 SB07 SB06 SB05 SB04 SB03 SB02 SB01 SB00

F0023 SB15 SB14 SB13 SB12 SB11 SB10 SB09 SB08
F0024 SB23 SB22 SB21 SB20 SB19 SB18 SB17 SB16
F0025 SB31 SB30 SB29 SB28 SB27 SB26 SB25 SB24
Spindle speed code signal SB00~SB31

F0026 TB07 TB06 TB05 TB04 TB03 TB02 TB01 TB00

F0027 TB15 TB14 TB13 TB12 TB11 TB10 TB09 TB08
F0028 TB23 TB22 TB21 TB20 TB19 TB18 TB17 TB16
F0029 TB31 TB30 TB29 TB28 TB27 TB26 TB25 TB24
Tool function code signal TB00~TB31

F0036 R08O R07O R06O R05O R04O R03O R02O R01O

F0037 *** *** *** *** R12O R11O R10O R09O
S12 bit code signal R01O~R12O

F0040 AR7 AR6 AR5 AR4 AR3 AR2 AR1 AR0

F0041 AR15 AR14 AR13 AR12 AR11 AR10 AR9 AR8
Spindle actual speed AR0~AR15

F0044 *** *** *** *** *** *** FSCSL ***

FSCSL: The 1st spindle outline control shifting end signal
Ⅲ

F0045 *** RTAPA PSRA SARA TLMA ORARA SSTA ALMA

RTAPA: series spindle 1 rigid tapping signal
Connection

PSRA: Series spindle1 position arrival signal

SARA: Series spindle1 speed arrival signal
TLMA: Series spindle1torque arrival signal
ORARA: Series spindle1orientation completion signal
SSTA: Series spindle1zero-speed signal
ALMA: Series spindle1alarm signal

F0049 *** RTAPB PSRB SARB TLMB ORARB SSTB ALMB

RTAPB: series spindle 2 rigid tapping signal
PSRB: Series spindle2position arrival signal
SARB: Series spindle2 speed arrival signal
TLMB: Series spindle2orque arrival signal
ORARB: Series spindle2orientation completion signal
SSTB: Series spindle2zero-speed signal
ALMB: Series spindle2alarm signal

F0053 *** RTAPC PSRC SARC TLMC ORARC SSTC ALMC

RTAPC: series spindle 3 rigid tapping signal

444
 Chapter 5 Diagnosis Message

PSRC: Series spindle3 position arrival signal

SARC: Series spindle3 speed arrival signal
TLMC: Series spindle3torque arrival signal
ORARC: Series spindle3orientation completion signal
SSTC: Series spindle3zero-speed signal
ALMC: Series spindle3alarm signal

F0054 UO07 UO06 UO05 UO04 UO03 UO02 UO01 UO00

F0055 UO15 UO14 UO13 UO12 UO11 UO10 UO09 UO08
Macro output signal UO00~UO15

F0056 U107 U106 U105 U104 U103 U102 U101 U100

F0057 U115 U114 U113 U112 U111 U110 U109 U108
F0058 U123 U122 U121 U120 U119 U118 U117 U116
F0059 U131 U130 U129 U128 U127 U126 U125 U124
Macro output signal U100~131

F0064 *** *** *** *** *** *** TLNW TLCH

TLNW: New tool selection signal (for tool life management)
TLCH: Tool change signal(for tool life management)

F0065 *** *** *** *** *** *** RGSPM RGSPP

RGSPM: Spindle CCW rotation (in rigid tapping)
RGSPP: Spindle CW rotation (in rigid tapping)

F0076 *** *** *** *** RTAP *** *** ***

Ⅲ
RTAP: rigid tapping method signal

Connection
F0091 *** *** *** *** MMMOD *** *** ***
MMMOD: Mode signal; it informs system of the manual trial cut mode;

F0094 *** *** *** ZP5 ZP4 ZP3 ZP2 ZP1

ZP5~ZP1: Reference point return end signal ZP5~ZP1

F0096 *** *** *** ZP25 ZP24 ZP23 ZP22 ZP21

nd
ZP25~ZP21: The 2 Reference point return end signal ZP25~ZP21

F0098 *** *** *** ZP35 ZP34 ZP33 ZP32 ZP31

rd
ZP35~ZP31: The 3 Reference point return end signal ZP35~ZP31

F0100 *** *** *** ZP45 ZP44 ZP43 ZP42 ZP41

th
ZP45~ZP41: The 4 Reference point return end signal ZP45~ZP41

F0102 *** *** *** MV5 MV4 MV3 MV2 MV1

MV5~MV1: Axis move signal MV5~MV1

445
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

F0106 *** *** *** MVD5 MVD4 MVD3 MVD2 MVD1

MVD5~MVD1 Axis move direction signal MVD5~MVD1

F0120 *** *** *** ZRF5 ZRF4 ZRF3 ZRF2 ZRF1

ZRF5~ZRF1: Reference point creation signal ZRF5~ZRF1

F0127 *** *** *** ABLE5 ABLE4 ABLE3 ABLE2 ABLE1

ABLE5~ ABLE1: axis active signal ABLE5~ ABLE1

F0129 *** *** *** *** *** *** *** KEAXSL

KEAXSL: PLC axis control status selection signal

F0130 EBSYA *** *** EGENA EDENA *** *** ***

EBSYA: PLC axis control group A command read completed signal
EGENA: PLC axis control group A axis movement signal
EDENA: PLC axis control group A auxiliary function implement signal

F0131 *** *** *** *** *** *** EABUFA EMFA

EABUFA: PLC axis control group A buffer full signal
EMFA: PLC axis control group A auxiliary function strobe signal

F0132 EM28A EM24A EM22A EM21A EM18A EM14A EM12A EM11A

PLC axis control group A auxiliary function code signals EM11A~EM28A

F0133 EBSYB *** *** EGENB EDENB *** *** ***

EBSYB: PLC axis control group B command read completed signal
Ⅲ

EGENB: PLC axis control group B axis movement signal

EDENB: PLC axis control group B auxiliary function implement signal
Connection

F0134 *** *** *** *** *** *** EABUFB EMFB

EABUFB: PLC axis control group B buffer full signal
EMFB: PLC axis control group B auxiliary function strobe signal

F0135 EM28B EM24B EM22B EM21B EM18B EM14B EM12B EM11B

PLC axis control group A auxiliary function code signals EM11B~EM28B

F0136 EBSYC *** *** EGENC EDENC *** *** ***

EBSYC: PLC axis control group C command read completed signal
EGENC: PLC axis control group C axis movement signal
EDENC: PLC axis control group C auxiliary function implement signal

F0137 *** *** *** *** *** *** EABUFC EMFC

EABUFC: PLC axis control group C buffer full signal
EMFC: PLC axis control group C auxiliary function strobe signal

F0138 EM28C EM24C EM22C EM21C EM18C EM14C EM12C EM11C

446
 Chapter 5 Diagnosis Message

PLC axis control group A auxiliary function code signals EM11C~EM28C

F0139 EBSYD *** *** EGEND EDEND *** *** ***

EBSYD: PLC axis control group D command read completed signal
EGEND: PLC axis control group D axis movement signal
EDEND: PLC axis control group D auxiliary implement signal

F0140 *** *** *** *** *** *** EABUFD EMFD

EABUFD: PLC axis control group D buffer full signal
EMFD: PLC axis control group D auxiliary function strobe signal

F0141 EM28D EM24D EM22D EM21D EM18D EM14D EM12D EM11D

PLC axis control group A auxiliary function code signals EM11D~EM28D

F0142 EM48A EM44A EM42A EM41A EM38A EM34A EM32A EM31A

PLC axis control group A auxiliary function code signals EM31A~EM48A

Fn144 *** *** *** *** *** *** FSCSL2 ***

nd
FSCSL2: The 2 spindle outline control shifting end signal

F0145 EM48B EM44B EM42B EM41B EM38B EM34B EM32B EM31B

PLC axis control group B auxiliary function code signals EM3BA~EM48B

F0148 EM48C EM44C EM42C EM41C EM38C EM34C EM32C EM31C

PLC axis control group C auxiliary function code signals EM31C~EM48C

Ⅲ
F0151 EM48D EM44D EM42D EM41D EM38D EM34D EM32D EM31D
PLC axis control group D auxiliary function code EM31D~EM48D

Connection
F0182 *** *** *** EACNT5 EACNT4 EACNT3 EACNT2 EACNT1
EACNT5: PLC axis control 5th axis control signal
EACNT4: PLC axis control 4th axis control signal
EACNT3: PLC axis control Y axis control signal
EACNT2: PLC axis control Z axis control signal
EACNT1: PLC axis control X axis control signal

F0198 *** *** *** PRO5 PRO4 PRO3 PRO2 PRO1

PRO4: Program zero return end signal PRO5
PRO4: Program zero return end signal PRO4
PRO3: Program zero return end signal PRO3
PRO2: Program zero return end signal PRO2
PRO1: Program zero return end signal PRO1

F0199 *** *** *** *** *** *** *** MSPHD

MSPHD: Spindle JOG detection signal
F0200 *** *** *** SIMSPL *** *** *** ***

447
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

SIMSPL: Analog spindle active

F0201 *** *** DECI *** *** DCS *** ***

DECI: DEC signal level selection in reference return
DCS: If OUT key may start program in MDI mode

F0205 *** *** *** *** *** ZNIK *** ***

ZNIK: Axis move key hold active in zero return

F0207 TN7 TN6 TN5 TN4 TN3 TN2 TN1 TN0

total tools number

F0210 *** MST MSP *** MESP *** SINC SOVI

MST: Shield external cycle start signal
MSP: Shield external feed hold signal
MESP: Shield external emergency stop signal

F0212 *** *** *** COVL CINP CDWL *** ***

COVL: Bit check being executed
CINP: G04 code being executed
CDWL: RS232 interface being receiving

F0213 *** *** *** *** *** *** CTRD CTPU

CTRD: RS232 interface being transmitting
CTPU: Spindle jog/lubricating selection
Ⅲ

F0214 *** *** *** VAL5 VAL4 VALY ZVAL XVAL

th
VAL5: 5 axis direction selection
Connection

VAL4: 4th axis direction selection

VALY: Y direction selection
VALZ: Z direction selection
VALX: X direction selection

F0215 SGR07 SGR06 SGR05 SGR04 SGR03 SGR02 SGR01 SGR00

F0216 *** *** *** *** SGR11 SGR10 SGR09 SGR08
Speed command signal for gear shift SGR00~ SGR11

F0240 INP07 INP06 INP05 INP04 INP03 INP02 INP01 INP00

F0241 INP15 INP14 INP13 INP12 INP11 INP10 INP09 INP08
Input speed command of spindle INP00~ INP15
F0250 SYS7 SYS6 SYS5 SYS4 SYS3 SYS2 SYS1 SYS0
system type 0:980TDi 1:980TDi-V

448
 Chapter 5 Diagnosis Message

5.2.5 G Address (PLC→CNC)

G0004 *** *** *** *** FIN *** *** ***
FIN: MST function end signal

G0005 *** AFL *** *** *** *** *** ***

AFL: MST lock signal
SFIN: Spindle S function end signal

G0006 *** SKIPP *** OVC *** ABSM *** SRN

OVC: Feedrate override cancel signal
SRN: Program restart signal

G0007 RLSOT EXLM *** *** *** ST STLK ***

ST: Cycle start signal

G0008 ERS RRW SP ESP *** *** *** IT

ERS: External reset signal
RRW: Reset and cursor return signal
SP: Feed hold signal
ESP: Emergency stop signal

G0010 JV07 JV06 JV05 JV04 JV03 JV02 JV01 JV00

G0011 JV15 JV14 JV13 JV12 JV11 JV10 JV09 JV08
JOG override signal JV00~JV15

Ⅲ
G0012 FV07 FV06 FV05 FV04 FV03 FV02 FV01 FV00
Feedrate override signal FV00~FV07

Connection
G0014 *** *** *** *** *** *** RV2 RV1
RV2: Rapid feedrate override signal RV2
RV1: Rapid feedrate override signal RV1

G0018 H2D H2C H2B H2A H1D H1C H1B H1A

H2D: MPG 2 feed selection signal (01015th)
H2C MPG 2 feed selection signal (01004th)
H2B: MPG 2 feed selection signal (0011Y)
H2A: MPG 2 feed selection signal (0001X. 0010Z)
H1D: MPG 1 feed selection signal (01015th)
H1C MPG 1 feed selection signal (01014th)
H1B: MPG 1 feed selection signal (0011Y)
H1A: MPG 1 feed selection signal (0001X. 0010Z)

G0019 RT *** MP2 MP1 *** *** *** ***

RT: Manual rapid feed selection signal
MP2: MPG override signal MP2
MP1: MPG override signal MP1

449
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

G0027 CON *** SSTP3 SSTP2 SSTP1 *** SWS2 SWS1

CON: Cs contouring control switch signal
SSTP3: 3rd spindle stop signal (for multi-spindle function)
SSTP2: 2nd spindle stop signal (for multi-spindle function)
SSTP1: 1st spindle stop signal (for multi-spindle function)
SWS2: Multi-spindle selection signal 2
SWS1: Multi-spindle selection signal 1

G0028 *** *** *** *** *** GR2 GR1 ***

GR2: Gear selection signal
GR1: Gear selection signal

G0029 *** KSSTP *** SAR GR32 GR31 GR22 GR21

KSSTP: spindle stop signal
SAR: spindle speed arrival
GR32: 3rd spindle gear selection signal 2 (for multi-spindle function)
GR31: 3rd spindle gear selection signal 1 (for multi-spindle function)
GR22: 2nd spindle gear selection signal 2 (for multi-spindle function)
GR21: 2nd spindle gear selection signal 1 (for multi-spindle function)

G0030 SOV7 SOV6 SOV5 SOV4 SOV3 SOV2 SOV1 SOV0

SOV7: 2nd Spindle override signal SOV7
SOV6: 2nd Spindle override signal SOV6
SOV5: 2nd Spindle override signal SOV5
SOV4: 2nd Spindle override signal SOV4
Ⅲ

SOV3: 1st Spindle override signal SOV3

SOV2: 1st Spindle override signal SOV2
Connection

SOV1: 1st Spindle override signal SOV1

SOV0: 1st Spindle override signal SOV0

G0032 R08I R07I R06I R05I R04I R03I R02I R01I

R08I: Spindle motor speed code signal R08I
R07I: Spindle motor speed code signal R07I
R06I: Spindle motor speed code signal R06I
R05I: Spindle motor speed code signal R05I
R04I: Spindle motor speed code signal R04I
R03I: Spindle motor speed code signal R03I
R02I: Spindle motor speed code signal R02I
R01I: Spindle motor speed code signal R01I

G0033 SIND *** *** *** R12I R11I R10I R09I

SIND: Spindle motor speed code selection signal
R12I: Spindle motor speed code signal R12I
R11I: Spindle motor speed code signal R11I
R10I: Spindle motor speed code signal R10I
R09I: Spindle motor speed code signal R09I

450
 Chapter 5 Diagnosis Message

G0039 GOQSM WOQSM *** *** *** *** *** ***

GOQSM: Tool offset writing mode select signal
WOQSM: Workpiece coordinate system offset writing mode select signal

G0040 WOSET PRC *** *** *** *** *** ***

WOSET: Workpiece coordinate system offset writing signal
PRC: Absolute coordinate postion record signal

G0043 ZRN *** DNC1 *** *** MD4 MD2 MD1

ZRN: Current mode selection 4
DNC1: DNC selection signal
MD4: Current mode selection 3
MD2: Current mode selection 2
MD1: Current mode selection 1

G0044 HDT *** *** *** *** *** MLK BDT

HDT: Manual tool change signal
MLK: Machine lock signal(PLC→CNC)
BDT: Block skip signal (PLC→CNC)

G0046 DRN *** *** *** KEY1 *** SBK ***

DRN: Dry run signal
KEY1: Memory protection signal
SBK: Single block signal (PLC→CNC)

G0047 TL128 TL64 TL32 TL16 TL08 TL04 TL02 TL01

Ⅲ
Tool group number select signal TL01~TL128

Connection
G0048 TLRST *** TLSKP *** *** *** *** ***
TLRST: tool change reset signal
TLSKP: tool skip signal

G0054 UI07 UI06 UI05 UI04 UI03 UI02 UI01 UI00

G0055 UI15 UI14 UI13 UI12 UI11 UI10 UI09 UI08
UI00~UI15: Macro input signal UI00~UI15

G0061 *** *** RGTSP2 RGTSP1 *** *** *** RGTAP

RGTAP: Rigid tapping signal
RGTSP1: Spindle selection in rigid tapping RGTSP1
RGTSP2: Spindle selection in rigid tapping RGTSP2

G0070 HLVA BREFA SFRA SRVA TAPA ORCMA ZSLA ARSTA

HLVA: series spindle 1 high/low speed shifting signal
BREFA: series spindle 1 mechanical locking signal
SFRA: series spindle 1 rotation signal CW(positive)
SRVA: series spindle 1 rotation signal CCW(negative)

451
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

TAPA: series spindle 1 rigid tapping signal

ORCMA: series spindle 1 orientation start signal
ZSLA: series spindle 1 zero clamping signal
ARSTA: series spindle 1 alarm cleaning signal

G0074 HLVB BREFB SFRB SRVB TAPB ORCMB ZSLB ARSTB

HLVB: series spindle 1 high/low speed shifting signal
BREFB: series spindle 1 mechanical locking signal
SFRB: series spindle 1 rotation signal CW(positive)
SRVBA: series spindle 1 rotation signal CCW(negative)
TAPB: series spindle 1 rigid tapping signal
ORCMB: series spindle 1 orientation start signal
ZSLB: series spindle 1 zero clamping signal
ARSTB: series spindle 1 alarm cleaning signal

G0078 HLVC BREFC SFRC SRVC TAPC ORCMC ZSLC ARSTC

HLVC: series spindle 1 high/low speed shifting signal
BREFC: series spindle 1 mechanical locking signal
SFRC: series spindle 1 rotation signal CW (positive)
SRVC: series spindle 1 rotation signal CCW (negative)
TAPC: series spindle 1 rigid tapping signal
ORCMC: series spindle 1 orientation start signal
ZSLC: series spindle 1 zero clamping signal
ARSTC: series spindle 1 alarm cleaning signal

G0100 *** *** *** +J5 +J4 +J3 +J2 +J1

Ⅲ

+J1: Feed axis and direction selection signal +J1

+J2: Feed axis and direction selection signal +J2
Connection

+J3: Feed axis and direction selection signal +J3

+J4: Feed axis and direction selection signal +J4
+J5: Feed axis and direction selection signal +J5

G0102 *** *** *** -J5 -J4 -J3 -J2 -J1

-J1: Feed axis and direction selection signal -J1
-J2: Feed axis and direction selection signal -J2
-J3: Feed axis and direction selection signal -J3
-J4: Feed axis and direction selection signal -J4
-J5: Feed axis and direction selection signal –J5

G0114 *** *** *** +L5 +L4 +L3 +L2 +L1

+L1: Axis overtravel signal +L1
+L2: Axis overtravel signal +L2
+L3: Axis overtravel signal +L3
+L4: Axis overtravel signal +L4
+L5: Axis overtravel signal +L5
G0116 *** *** *** -L5 -L4 -L3 -L2 -L1
-L1: Axis overtravel signal -L1

452
 Chapter 5 Diagnosis Message

-L2: Axis overtravel signal -L2

-L3: Axis overtravel signal -L3
-L4: Axis overtravel signal -L4
-L5: Axis overtravel signal –L5

G0136 *** *** *** EAX5 EAX4 EAX3 EAX2 EAX1

EAX5: Axis 5th select signal of PLC control
EAX4: Axis 4th select signal of PLC control
EAX3: Axis Y select signal of PLC control
EAX2: Axis Z select signal of PLC control
EAX1: Axis X select signal of PLC control

G0141 *** *** *** *** EABSD EABSC EABSB EABSA

EABSD: PLC control group D is absolute (1)/relative (0) coordinate
EABSC: PLC control group C is absolute (1)/relative (0) coordinate
EABSB: PLC control group B is absolute (1)/relative (0) coordinate
EABSA: PLC control group A is absolute (1)/relative (0) coordinate

G0142 EBUFA ECLRA ESTPA ESOFA ESBKA EMBUFA *** EFINA

EBUFA: Instruction reading signal of PLC control group A
ECLRA: Reset signal of PLC control group A
ESTPA: Axis pause signal of PLC control group A
ESOFA: Servo off signal of PLC control group A
ESBKA: Single block stop signal of PLC control group A
EMBUFA: Buffer prohibition signal of PLC control group A
EFINA: Auxiliary function finish signal of PLC control group A

Ⅲ
G0143 EC7A EC6A EC5A EC4A EC3A EC2A EC1A EC0A

Connection
Control instruction signal of PLC control group A

G0144 EIF7A EIF6A EIF5A EIF4A EIF3A EIF2A EIF1A EIF0A

G0145 EIF15A EIF14A EIF13A EIF12A EIF11A EIF10A EIF9A EIF8A
Feed speed signal of PLC control group A

G0146 EID7A EID6A EID5A EID4A EID3A EID2A EID1A EID0A

G0147 EID15A EID14A EID13A EID12A EID11A EID10A EID9A EID8A
G0148 EID23A EID22A EID21A EID20A EID19A EID18A EID17A EID16A
G0149 EID31A EID30A EID29A EID28A EID27A EID26A EID25A EID24A
Data signal of PLC control group A

G0150 *** *** *** *** *** *** ROV2E ROV1E

ROV2E: Rapid ratio signal of PLC control
ROV1E: Rapid ratio signal of PLC control
G0151 FV7E FV6E FV5E FV4E FV3E FV2E FV1E FV0E
Feed ratio signal of PLC control

453
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

G0154 EBUFB ECLRB ESTPB ESOFB ESBKB EMBUFB *** EFINB

EBUFB: Instruction reading signal of PLC control group B
ECLRB: Reset signal of PLC control group B
ESTPB: Axis pause signal of PLC control group B
ESOFB: Servo off signal of PLC control group B
ESBKB: Single block stop signal of PLC control group B
EMBUFB: Buffer prohibition signal of PLC control group B
EFINB: Auxiliary function finish signal of PLC control group B

G0155 EC7B EC6B EC5B EC4B EC3B EC2B EC1B EC0B

Control instruction signal of PLC control group B

G0156 EIF7B EIF6B EIF5B EIF4B EIF3B EIF2B EIF1B EIF0B

G0157 EIF15B EIF14B EIF13B EIF12B EIF11B EIF10B EIF9B EIF8B
Feed speed signal of PLC control group B

G0158 EID7B EID6B EID5B EID4B EID3B EID2B EID1B EID0B

G0159 EID15B EID14B EID13B EID12B EID11B EID10B EID9B EID8B
G0160 EID23B EID22B EID21B EID20B EID19B EID18B EID17B EID16B
G0161 EID31B EID30B EID29B EID28B EID27B EID26B EID25B EID24B
Data signal of PLC control group B

G0166 EBUFC ECLRC ESTPC ESOFC ESBKC EMBUFC *** EFINC

EBUFC: Instruction reading signal of PLC control group C
ECLRC: Reset signal of PLC control group C
ESTPC: Axis pause signal of PLC control group C
Ⅲ

ESOFC: Servo off signal of PLC control group C

ESBKC: Single block stop signal of PLC control group C
Connection

EMBUFC: Buffer prohibition signal of PLC control group C

EFINC: Auxiliary function finish signal of PLC control group C

G0167 EC7C EC6C EC5C EC4C EC3C EC2C EC1C EC0C

Control instruction signal of PLC control group C

G0168 EIF7C EIF6C EIF5C EIF4C EIF3C EIF2C EIF1C EIF0C

G0169 EIF15C EIF14C EIF13C EIF12C EIF11C EIF10C EIF9C EIF8C
Feed speed signal of PLC control group C

G0170 EID7C EID6C EID5C EID4C EID3C EID2C EID1C EID0C

G0171 EID15C EID14C EID13C EID12C EID11C EID10C EID9C EID8C
G0172 EID23C EID22C EID21C EID20C EID19C EID18C EID17C EID16C
G0173 EID31C EID30C EID29C EID28C EID27C EID26C EID25C EID24C
Data signal of PLC control group C
G0178 EBUFD ECLRD ESTPD ESOFD ESBKD EMBUFD *** EFIND
EBUFD: Instruction reading signal of PLC control group D
ECLRD: Reset signal of PLC control group D

454
 Chapter 5 Diagnosis Message

ESTPD: Axis pause signal of PLC control group D

ESOFD: Servo off signal of PLC control group D
ESBKD: Single block stop signal of PLC control group D
EMBUFD: Buffer prohibition signal of PLC control group D
EFIND: Auxiliary function finish signal of PLC control group D

G0179 EC7D EC6D EC5D EC4D EC3D EC2D EC1D EC0D

Control instruction signal of PLC control group D

G0180 EIF7D EIF6D EIF5D EIF4D EIF3D EIF2D EIF1D EIF0D

G0181 EIF15D EIF14D EIF13D EIF12D EIF11D EIF10D EIF9D EIF8D
Feed speed signal of PLC control group D

G0182 EID7D EID6D EID5D EID4D EID3D EID2D EID1D EID0D

G0183 EID15D EID14D EID13D EID12D EID11D EID10D EID9D EID8D
G0184 EID23D EID22D EID21D EID20D EID19D EID18D EID17D EID16D
G0185 EID31D EID30D EID29D EID28D EID27D EID26D EID25D EID24D
Data signal of PLC control group D

G0200 *** *** *** *** *** *** *** SPD

SPD Spindle jog signal

G0201 NT07 NT06 NT05 NT04 NT03 NT02 NT01 NT00

NT00: Current tool No. NT00
NT01: Current tool No. NT01
NT02: Current tool No. NT02

Ⅲ
NT03: Current tool No. NT03
NT04: Current tool No. NT04

Connection
NT05: Current tool No. NT05
NT06: Current tool No. NT06
NT07: Current tool No. NT07

G0202 NT15 NT14 NT13 NT12 NT11 NT10 NT09 NT08

NT08: Current tool No. NT08
NT09: Current tool No. NT09
NT10: Current tool No. NT10
NT11: Current tool No. NT11
NT12: Current tool No. NT12
NT13: Current tool No. NT13
NT14: Current tool No. NT14
NT15: Current tool No. NT15
G0203 NT23 NT22 NT21 NT20 NT19 NT18 NT17 NT16
NT16: Current tool No. NT16
NT17: Current tool No. NT17
NT18: Current tool No. NT18
NT19: Current tool No. NT19

455
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

NT20: Current tool No. NT20

NT21: Current tool No. NT21
NT22: Current tool No. NT22
NT23: Current tool No. NT23

G0204 NT31 NT30 NT29 NT28 NT27 NT26 NT25 NT24

NT24: Current tool No. NT24
NT25: Current tool No. NT25
NT26: Current tool No. NT26
NT27: Current tool No. NT27
NT28: Current tool No. NT28
NT29: Current tool No. NT29
NT30: Current tool No. NT30
NT31: Current tool No. NT31

5.2.6 Address A (Message Display Requiery Signal, Defined by Standard

PLC Ladders)
Address Alarm No. Content
A0000.0 1000 Tool change too long
A0000.1 1001 Tool post not in-position alarm as tool change ends
A0000.2 1002 Tool change unfinished alarm
A0000.3 1003 Tool post clamping signal not received
Recheck clamping signal, and clamping signal inactive as tool
A0000.4 1004
change ends
A0000.5 1005 Tool change execution is mistaken before power off
Ⅲ

A0000.6 1006 Pre-indexing proximity switch not arrived

A0000.7 1007 Tool post overheat alarm
Connection

A0001.0 1008 M10 and M11 codes disabled for tailstock function inactive
A0001.1 1009 Run-out disabled in spindle running
A0001.3 1011 Spindle start unallowed as tailstock advancing not detected
A0001.4 1012 Cycle unallowed for cycle start disabled
A0001.5 1013 Spindle start unallowed for spindle enable off
A0001.6 1014 Confirm the tools of tool post (8, 10, 12 tools)
A0002.0 1014 Please reset BIT1, BIT0 of parameter 168 for tool post model
A0002.1 1016 Alarm of safe door not closed
A0002.3 1017 Alarm of chuck low pressure
A0002.4 1019 Chuck released unallowed in spindle running
A0002.5 1020 Clamping in-position signal inactive alarm in spindle running
Spindle start unallowed if chuck clamping in-position signal
A0002.6 1021
inactive
A0003.0 1022 Spindle start unallowed for chuck releasing
A0003.0 1024 M12/M13 code disabled as chuck inactive
A0003.1 1025 Has not checked the chuck clamped/released start signal
A0003.3 1027 The tool pot is not released
A0003.4 1028 Has not found the target tool

456
 Chapter 5 Diagnosis Message

Address Alarm No. Content

A0003.5 1029 Has not received tool pot stop and locking start signal
Total tools is more than 4, and the external override cannot be
A0003.7 1031
connected
A0004.1 1032 Illegal M code
A0004.2 1033 Spindle jog disabled in non-analog spindle mode
A0004.3 1035 M63, M64 designation error
A0004.4 1036 Spindle gear change time is too long
A0004.5 1037 Spindle speed/position control switch time is too long
A0004.6 1038 The 2nd spindle speed/position control switch time is too long
A0004.7 1039 Spindle position control does not permit the orientation
A0005.0 1040 Spindle orientation time is too long
A0005.1 Alarm for the abnormal spindle servo or frequency converter for
1041
abnormality
A0005.2 1042 Alarm for the abnormal 2nd spindle servo or frequency converter
A0005.3 1043 Forbid clamping the spindle when the spindle rotating or feeding
A0005.4 1044 Spindle is clamped not to rotate or feed
A0007.0 2000 Hydraulic motor is not started
A0007.1 2001 Safety door has been opened
A0007.3 2003 Alarm for the tool pot unclocked
A0007.5 2005 Feedrate override is fixed to 100％,can't be adjusted
The panel override is disabled when the external override is
A0007.6 2006
enabled.
The program can not be operated due to the external dwell
A0007.7 2007
switch is cut off.
A0008.0 2008 The axis can not be moved due to the manual override is 0.

Ⅲ
A0008.3 2011 Machining numbers are reached to the setting one.

Connection

457
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual
Ⅲ
Connection

458
 Chapter 6 Memorizing Pitch Error Compensation

CHAPTER 6 MEMORIZING PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION

6.1 Function Description

There are more or less precision errors in the pitch of machine axes lead screw, and it will
definitely affect the parts machining precision. This GSK980TDi CNC system has the memorizing
pitch error offset function that it can accurately compensate the pitch error of the lead screw.

6.2 Specification
1) The set offset amount is concerned with the offset origin, offset intervals etc.;
2) Pitch error offset value is get by searching the table about machine coordinates and pitch
error compensation origin;
3) Points to be compensated: 1200 points for 5 axes, each axis confirms point range by
parameter setting;
4) Axis compensated: X, Y, Z ,4th,5th axis
5) Compensation range: -2550～2550×least input increment;
6) Compensation interval: 10000～9999999××least input increment;
7) Compensation amount of compensation point N(N=0,1,2,3,…1023) is determined by the
mechanical error between point N and point N-1;
8) The setting is the same as the CNC parameters input, see Ⅱ Operation.

6.3 Parameter Setting

Ⅲ
6.3.1 Pitch Compensation

Connection
Bit parameter
0 0 3 PCOMP
Bit5=1: Pitch error offset active;
Bit5=0: Pitch error offset inactive;

6.3.2 Pitch Error Compensation Number

Set the maximum pitch error compensation number and the minimum pitch error compensation
number of each axis through parameters No.096 and No.097 so that the compensation range can be
determined. In an offset value list, the number that corresponds to machine zero point is called pitch
error compensation origin (reference point). The pitch error compensation origin is set by parameter
No. 098. It can be any value within the compensation range according to mechanical requirement.

Data parameter
0 9 6 PECMINn
The maximum pitch error compensation number

0 9 7 PECMAXn

459
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

The minimum pitch error compensation number

0 9 8 PECORGn
The pitch error compensation number that corresponds to machine zero point

6.3.3 Pitch error compensation interval

0 9 9 PECINTn
［Meaning］ Interval between pitch error compensation point
［Unit］
Setting Unit IS-B IS-C
Metric machine 0.001 mm 0.0001 mm
Inch machine 0.0001 inch 0.00001 inch
［Range］
IS-B IS-C
Metric machine 1000～999999 10000～9999999
Inch machine 400～999999 4000～9999999

6.3.4 Offset Value

Pitch error offset amount of each axis is set according to the following table, and offset amount is
input in diameter value without relating to diameter programming or radius programming, and the
input value unit is the least input increment.

Offset No. Offset value Z Offset value

000 0 0200 0
001 5 0201 -2
Ⅲ

002 -3 0202 4
Connection

… … … …
… … … …

6.4 Notes of Offset Setting

①The setting and alteration of pitch offset can only be done at the authority of password level 2.
②After the parameter of pitch offset is set, only the machine zero is returned could the offset be
done.

6.5 Setting Examples of Offset Parameters

Assume that the pitch error compensation range is 0~255.
①Data parameter No.098 (pitch error origin) =0, Data parameter No.099 (offset interval)=10.000
When the pitch error origin is set to 0:
The offset value for the 1st segment is set by the position No.001 in the offset table, the offset
value for the 2nd segment is set by the position No.002 in the offset table, and the offset value for the
Nth segment is set by the position No.000+N in the offset table.

460
 Chapter 6 Memorizing Pitch Error Compensation

The machine zero is regarded as the reference point of pitch error origin, it begins to compensate
the position No.001 in the offset table from the machine zero. So the pitch error offset can only be
done in the positive moving direction of the machine coordinate system.

The position No.000 in the offset table corresponds to the reference point (i.e. pitch error origin
0), the offset point 1 corresponds to a point of positive 10.000 moving from this reference point, and
So there is a offset point every 10.000 mm. l. At offset point N, set an offset value which is the
compensation amount by moving from (N-1) × (offset interval) to N×(offset interval).
The following table content is resulted from the above:
Machine coordinate Offset Offset Drive unit current code Drive unit current command
system parameter No. value pulses before compensating pulses after compensating
Reference point 0 000 000 00000 00000
10.000 001 7 10000 10007
20.000 002 -6 20000 20001
30.000 003 4 30000 30005
…… 004 …

Actually the machine moves from the reference point to the point of +30.000, the pitch error offset
is: (+7) + (-6) + (+4) =+5

Ⅲ
②Data parameter No.098 (pitch error origin) =60, No.099 (offset interval) =10.000

Connection
When the pitch error origin is set to 60:
For the positive moving, the 1st segment error offset is set by position No.061 in the offset table,
the 2nd segment by position No.062. The Nth segment error offset is set by position No.060+N in the
offset table.
For the negative moving, the 1st segment error offset is set by position No.060 in the offset table,
the 2nd segment by position No.059. The Nth segment error offset is set by position No.060-N in the
offset table.
The machine zero is taken as the reference point of the pitch error origin, when moving from the
positive of machine coordinate system, it begins to compensate by the corresponding position
No.061 in the offset table; when moving from the negative of the machine coordinate system, it
begins to compensate by the position No.060. Therefore the pitch offset can be done when moving in
the positive or the negative axis of machine coordinate system.

461
 GSK980TDi Turning CNC System User Manual

The position No.060 in the offset table corresponds to the reference point, No.061value in the
compensation table is a compensation amount by executing a positive movement 10.000mm from
origin. So there is an offset point every 10.000. No.061value in the compensation table is a
compensation amount by executing a negative movement 10.000mm from origin. So there is an
offset point every -10.000. No.59 is a compensation amount at -10.000~-20.000mm. Therefore the
point N is set by an offset of move from (N-61) × (offset interval) to (N-60) × (offset interval).
The following table content is resulted from the above:

Drive unit current Drive unit current

Machine coordinate Offset parameter Offset
code pulses before code pulses after
system No. value
compensating compensating
-30.000 058 -7 -30000 -29992
-20.000 059 -7 -20000 -19999
-10.000 060 +6 -10000 -10006
Reference point 0
0 0

10.000 061 +4 10000 10004

…… 062 …

Actually as the machine moves from point -30.000 to the point +10.000, the pitch error offset is:
(-7)+(-7)+(+6)+(+4)=(-4)
③Data parameter No.098 (pitch error origin) =127, No.099 (offset interval) =10.000
When the pitch error origin is set to 255:
The offset value for the 1st segment is set by the position No.255 in the offset table, the offset
value for the 2nd segment is set by the position No.254 in the offset table, and the offset value for the
Nth segment is set by the position No.256-N in the offset table.
Ⅲ

The machine zero is regarded as the reference point of pitch error origin, the system
compensates the compensate amount set by No.255 in the offset table from the machine zero to the
Connection

negative direction. So the pitch error compensation can be executed when the machine coordinates
are less than 0.

The position No.255 is an offset value from reference point to -10.000mm, No.254 value in the
table is the one from -10.000mm to -20.000mm, so there is an offset point every -10.000. Therefore
the point N is set by an offset of move from (N-256)×(offset interval) to (N-255)×(offset interval).
Above is the example of the following offset interval error.

462
 Chapter 6 Memorizing Pitch Error Compensation

Machine Offset Offset value Drive unit current Drive unit current
coordinate parameter code pulses before code pulses after
system number compensating compensating
Reference point 0 0 0
-10.000 127 2 10000 10002
-20.000 126 0 20000 20002
-30.000 125 -7 30000 29995
-40.000 124 3 40000 39998

Actually the machine moves from the point -40.000 to the reference point, the pitch error offset is:
(+3) + (-7) + (0) + (+2) = (-2).

6.5.1 Rotation Axis Pitch Error Compensation

Addition axis is the linear or rotation axis (Type B), the pitch error compensation method is
identical with the common linear axis. The pitch error compensation function in which the addition
axis is regarded as the rotation axis (Type A); refer to the following explanations:
 Movement value per revoltion: 360°
 Pitch error position interval: 45°
 The compensation position number of reference point: 60
After the above-mentioned parameters are set, the farthest position number along the negative
direction of the roation axis equals to the compensation position number of the reference point;
The farthest compensation number along with the positive direction is as follows:
Compensation position number of reference point + (Movement value per
revolution/Compensation position interval) = 60 + 360/45 = 68;

Ⅲ
The corresponding relationships between the machine coordinate and compensation position
number are shown below:

Connection

463